UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Development Experience And Development Planning Of India
.cs29D35F49{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font-size:14pt;font- weight:bold;font-style:normal;} .cs3B54119A{text-align:justify;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 10pt 0pt;line-height:1.5} .csA7555675{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font-size:12pt;font- weight:normal;font-style:normal;} .cs2020DE62{text-align:center;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 10pt 0pt;line-height:1.5} .csC57700C4{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font- size:12pt;font-weight:bold;font-style:normal;} .cs7B3A08D0{text-align:justify;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 3pt;line-height:1.5;list-style- type:square;color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Wingdings;font- size:12pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal}
Development Experience and Development Planning of India
Poverty, low per capita income, under-development, unemployment, prompted the newly established Indian polity to adopt economic planning for the development of the country. The idea of economic planning can be traced to 1934, when M. Visvesverayya in his book 'Planned Economy of India', advocated for planning to increase the national income. It was taken up by the Indian National Congress in 1938 when it formed the National Planning Committee under the chairmanship of Jawaharlal Nehru. The Bombay Plan, the People's Plan and Gandhian Plan, provided further impetus in the direction of economic planning. After independence, a Planning Commission was set up in March 1950 by a Cabinet Resolution with the Prime Minister as its ex-officio Chairman to formulate five year plans for the economic development of the country.
Role of Planning In India
Accelerating Economic Growth:
There were two main features of India‘s economic policy that emphasized the role of planning and intervention by the State in the development process of the Indian economy in the first three decades of planning. First, to accelerate economic growth economists and planners recognized that raising the rate of saving and investment was essential to accelerate the rate of economic growth.
Emphasis on Industrialisation, Second, the strategy of development, adopted since the adoption of Second Five Year Plan which was based on Mahalanobis growth model, laid stress on the
Pscnotes.com Page 1
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 industrialisation with an emphasis on the development of basic heavy industries and capital goods industries.
To Compensate for Market Failures
The dominant view in development economics in the fifties and sixties also laid stress on the planning by the State to compensate for ‗market failures‘. It was argued that while market mechanism was efficient in distributing a given stock of available goods, it was quite inefficient in allocating resources over time for investment.
Regulatory Role of the State
There is another important aspect of the role of State and planning in the development of the Indian economy which dominated economic thinking in the pre-reform period. Though the private sector was given an important role to play in the framework of mixed economy, to achieve optimal allocation of resources among different industries according to plan priorities, economic activities in the private sector were required to be regulated by the State. Further, to achieve other objectives of planning such as restraining the concentration of economic power in a few big business houses, the private sector was subjected to industrial licensing controls.
Tackling the Problems of Poverty and Unemployment
The other problem which makes role of planning and state intervention important is the need to tackle the problems of poverty and unemployment. Since the beginning of the seventies the Indian planners realised, especially in the Fifth, Sixth and Seventh Five Year Plans, that even if growth rate of GDP was raised to 5 to 6 per cent per annum, it was not possible to make a significant dent on the problems of mass poverty and unemployment prevailing in the Indian economy.
India‘s rate of economic development has not been very impressive by most standards. But compared to what it was prior to independence, there is cause for celebration. At independence in 1947, India was an extremely poor country with an annual per capita income of only $50 for its 350 million people. Life expectancy was 32 years and literacy rate was 17 percent. National savings rate was around 10 percent. Agriculture accounted for 60 percent of GDP and 80 percent of employment. Per capita food production and per capita income had been declining continuously for nearly the prior fifty years.
After independence, even under the growth-retarding effects of Nehruvian socialism and central planning, India‘s performance improved. In a study of cross-country growth experience of 85 countries from 1960 to 1992, India‘s performance is almost precisely average. This is poor in relation to the potential that India has given the degree of human, institutional, and natural capital at its command. Economists such as Jagdish Bhagwati have attributed that failure to the ―nearly three decades of illiberal and autarkic policies‖ before the reforms of the early 1990s.
Some observers have called the change from an inward-looking autarkic economy to an open, market-driven one since 1990 as the Indian Growth Miracle. The neo-liberal economic reforms
Pscnotes.com Page 2
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 propelled India to become one of the fastest-growing economies in the world. Yet India should have been one of the fastest growing economies in the decades before 1990, and not just in the post 1990 period. It did not because its planners chose to insulate the economy from the global economy. That conferred some benefits in terms of shielding India from external shocks, but it paid a very high price in terms of foregone growth.
From planning commission to NITI ayog
Reflecting the spirit and the changed dynamics of the new India, the institutions of governance and policy have to adapt to new challenges and must be built on the founding principles of the Constitution of India, the wealth of knowledge from our civilizational history and the present- day socio-cultural-economic contexts. The aspirations of India and its citizens require institutional reforms in governance and dynamic policy shifts that can seed and nurture unprecedented change.
In keeping with these changing times, the Government of India has decided to set up NITI Aayog (National Institution for Transforming India), in place of the erstwhile Planning Commission, as a means to better serve the needs and aspirations of the people of India.
In essence, effective governance in India will rest on following ‗pillars‘:
Pro-people agenda that fulfils the aspirations of the society as well as individual, Pro-active in anticipating and responding to their needs, Participative, by involvement of citizenry, Inclusion of all groups, Equality of opportunity to our country‘s youth, Sustainable development, by protecting environment, Transparency that uses technology to make government visible and responsive.
Issues related to Poverty
The World Bank defines poverty in absolute terms. The bank defines extreme poverty as living on less than US$1.90 per day> (PPP), and moderate poverty as less than $3.10 a day. Types of Poverty Absolute poverty measures poverty in relation to the amount of money necessary to meet basic needs such as food, clothing, and shelter. The concept of absolute poverty is not concerned with broader quality of life issues or with the overall level of inequality in society.
The concept of absolute poverty is based on absolute norms for living (measured in terms of consumption expenditure) laid down according: to specified minimum standard and all such individuals or groups whose consumption expenditure is found to be below this standard are classified as poor. Under the relative concept of poverty, a family (or an individual) is deemed to be poor if its level of income or consumption expenditure falls below a predetermined level.
Pscnotes.com Page 3
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Poverty in India is measured as the head-count ratio of the population living below the official ‗poverty line‘, which is calculated using the methodology prescribed by the Expert Group on Methodology for Estimation of Poverty appointed by the Planning Commission in order to arrive at a threshold consumption level of both food and non-food items. The methodology uses the Consumer Expenditure Surveys (CES) conducted by the National Sample Survey Office (NSSO) of India once every five years to attain the poverty line; and, hence, poverty figures in India are obtained once every five years. The Planning Commission‘s latest poverty line, using methodology suggested by the Tendulkar Committee in 2010, is apparently defined as the spending of Rs. 27.20 per capita per day in rural areas and Rs.33.40 per capita per day in urban areas.
Unemployment is a phenomenon that occurs when a person who is actively searching for employment is unable to find work. Unemployment is often used as a measure of the health of the economy.Different types of Unemployment are as follows:-
Structural unemployment focuses on the structural problems within an economy and inefficiencies in labor markets. Structural unemployment occurs when a labor market is not able to provide jobs for everyone who is seeking employment. Frictional unemployment is when workers leave their old jobs but haven't yet found new ones. Most of the time workers leave voluntarily, either because they need to move, or they've saved up enough money to allow them to look for a better job.Frictional unemployment is short-term and a natural part of the job search process. Cyclical unemployment is a type of unemployment that occurs when there is not enough aggregate demand in the economy to provide jobs for everyone who wants to work. In an economy, demand for most goods falls, less production is needed, and less workers are needed. Disguised unemployment exists where part of the labor force is either left without work or is working in a redundant manner where worker productivity is essentially zero. It is unemployment that does not affect aggregate output.
Human Poverty Index (HPI)
The Human Poverty Index (HPI) was first introduced into the Human Development Report by the United Nations Development Programme (UNDP) in 1997 in an attempt to bring together in a composite index the different features of deprivation in the quality of life to arrive at an aggregate judgement on the extent of poverty in a community.
Pscnotes.com Page 4
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
There are two indices; the HPI – 1, which measures poverty in developing countries, and the HPI-2, which measures poverty in OCED developed economies.
Calculation of HPI-1 for Developing countries:-The following three dimensions are taken into account:
deprivation of longevity, measured as a percentage of the individuals with a life expectancy lower than 40 years (P1). deprivation of knowledge, expressed as a percentage of illiterate adults (P2). deprivation of decent living standards (P3). This last indicator is made up by the simple average of three basic variables: o the percentage of the population without access to drinking water (P31), o the percentage of population without access to health services (P32) and lastly, o the percentage of underweight children aged less than five (P33).
The indicator P3, referred to the living standard, is then obtained as an average of the three indicators, in this way:
[(P31 + P32 + P33) / 3
The global index HPI-1 is obtained by combining these three dimensions into one single measure giving a greater weight to the most disadvantaged situation.
The formula is:
HPI-1 = [(P13 + P23 + P33 ) / 3]1/3
While HPI-2 is calculated as follows:-
Pscnotes.com Page 5
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Multi Dimensional Indian poverty index
Poverty is a multi-dimensional issue and various experts/committees and institutions estimate poverty based on different perceptions/definitions. However, Planning Commission is the nodal agency in the Government of India to estimate poverty in the country. TheMultidimensional Poverty Index (MPI) was developed in 2010 by the Oxford Poverty & Human Development Initiative (OPHI) and the United Nations Development Programme. and uses different factors to determine poverty beyond income-based lists. It replaced the previous Human Poverty Index.
Various dimentions of MPI are:-
Dimension Indicators
Child Mortality Health Nutrition
Years of schooling Education School attendance
Cooking fuel Toilet Water Living Standards Electricity Floor Assets
Life expectancy at birth: Number of years a newborn infant could expect to live if prevailing patterns of age-specific mortality rates at the time of birth stay the same throughout the infant‘s life. Expected years of schooling: Number of years of schooling that a child of school entrance age can expect to receive if prevailing patterns of age-specific enrolment rates persist throughout the child‘s life. Mean years of schooling: Average number of years of education received by people ages 25 and older, converted from education attainment levels using official durations of each level.
Pscnotes.com Page 6
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Gross national income (GNI) per capita: Aggregate income of an economy generated by its production and its ownership of factors of production, less the incomes paid for the use of factors of production owned by the rest of the world, converted to international dollars using PPP rates, divided by midyear population.
Issues related to Unemployment
Nature, types and Problems of Unemployment in India:-Unemployment may be defined as ―a situation in which the person is capable of working both physically and mentally at the existing wage rate, but does not get a job to work‖.
India is one of those ill-fated underdeveloped countries which is suffering from a huge unemployment problem. But the unemployment problem in India is not the result of deficiency of effective demand in Keynesian term but a product of shortage of capital equipment‘s and other complementary resources accompanied by high rate of growth of population.
Present unemployment problem in India is mostly structural in nature.
Unemployment problem of the country can now be broadly classified into: (a) Rural unemployment and (b) Urban unemployment. (a) Rural Unemployment: In India the incidence of unemployment is more pronounced in the rural areas. Rural unemployment is again of two types: (i) Seasonal unemployment and (ii) Disguised or perennial unemployment. (i) Seasonal Unemployment: Agriculture, though a principal occupation in the rural areas of the country, is seasonal in nature. It cannot provide work to the rural population of the country throughout the year. In the absence of multiple cropping system and subsidiary occupation in the rural areas, a large number of rural population has to sit idle 5 to 7-months in a year. Seasonal Unemployment is also prevalent in some agro- based industries viz., Tea Industry, Jute Mills, Sugar Mills, Oil Pressing Mills, Paddy Husking Mills etc. (ii) Disguised or Perennial Unemployment: Indian agriculture is also suffering from disguised or perennial unemployment due to excessive pressure of population. In disguised unemployment apparently it seems that everyone is employed but in reality sufficient full time work is not available for all. In India, about 72 per cent of the working population is engaged in agriculture and allied activities. In 1951 more than 100 million persons were engaged in the agricultural and allied activities whereas in 1991 about 160 million persons are found engaged in the same sector resulting in as many as 60 million surplus population who are left with virtually no work in agriculture and allied activities. (b) Urban Unemployment: Urban unemployment has two aspects: (i) Industrial unemployment and
Pscnotes.com Page 7
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
(ii) Educated or middle class unemployment. (i) Industrial Unemployment: In the urban areas of the country, industrial unemployment is gradually becoming acute. With the increase in the size of urban population and with the exodus of population in large number from rural to the urban industrial areas to seek employment, industrialization because of slow growth could not provide sufficient employment opportunities to the growing number of urban population. Thus the rate of growth of employment in the industrial sector could not keep pace with the growth of urban industrial workers leading to a huge industrial unemployment in the country. (ii) Educated or middle-class Unemployment: Another distinct type of unemployment which is mostly common in almost all the urban areas of the country is known as educated unemployment. This problem is very much acute among the middle class people. With rapid expansion of general education in the country the number of out- turn of educated people is increasing day by day. But due to slow growth of technical and vocational educational facilities, a huge number of manpower is unnecessarily diverted towards general education leading to a peculiar educated unemployment problem in the country. The total number of educated unemployment increased from 5.9 lakh in 1962 to 230.50 lakh in 1994. • Types of Unemployment The most accepted classification of Unemployment recognizes two broad types: Voluntary and
Involuntary Unemployment. Voluntary unemployment arises when an individual is not under any employment out of his own desire not to work. Could be from their total apprehension towards the concept itself, or it may be that an individual is unable to find work paying his desired wages and he doesn‘t want to settle. Involuntary unemployment encompasses all those factors that prevent a physically fit individual willing to work from getting an appointment. According to John Maynard Keynes, ―involuntary unemployment arises due to insufficiency of effective demand which can be solved by stepping up aggregate demand through government intervention‖. Involuntary Unemployment is further categorized into subheads; 1. Structural: Such employment stems from any structural change in the economy that leads to decline of specific industries. Long term changes in the market conditions, reorganization of the same, and sudden changes in the technological sector, creates a Skill Gap in the existing workers. 2. Regional: Globalization and relocation of jobs also leads to unemployment as workers are often unable to move to the new location where the employers currently hold positions. 3. Seasonal: In some industries production activities are season best and employment occurs only
Pscnotes.com Page 8
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 in peak seasons. Agro-based industries and tourism industries are examples of this form of unemployment. 4. Technological: This type of unemployment is either generated following the introduction of technologically advanced mechanization that renders manual labour redundant, or through inclusion of technology that the current labour force is ill-adapted to. 5. Frictional: This type of unemployment happens when the labour is either transitioning between jobs or is trying to find a job more suited to their skill set. Friction is generally referred to the time, energy and cost that a person invests while searching for a new job. 6. Educated: This form of unemployment happens when people with advanced degrees are unable to procure an engagement that is suited to their level of training. 7. Casual: Some occupations can only offer temporary employment to individuals and their engagements are subject to termination as soon as the demand subsides. Daily labourers who work on a day-to-day basis are example of such types of unemployment. 8. Cyclical: This type of unemployment refers to the periodic cycle of unemployment associated with cyclical trends of growth in business. Unemployment is low when business cycles are at their peak and high when the gross economic output is low. Several external factors like wars, strikes and political disturbances, natural calamities that affect business cycle are also contributors to cyclical unemployment. 9. Disguised: This is a scenario when more people are employed in a job than is actually required for it. This is hallmark of developing economies where availability of labour is abundant. It is primarily a feature of the agricultural and unorganized sectors. Problems caused due to unemployment
Unemployment and poverty goes side by side. The problem of unemployment gives rise to the problem of poverty.. Young people after a long time of unemployment find the wrong way to earn money.. To get rid from the unemployment stress, they accept alcohol or drugs.. Unemployed youths accepts suicide as the last option of their life. Lower economic growth. Increase rate in Crimes. As the employed youth don‘t have anything to do they start doing robbery, murder etc.. Health issues i.e it affects mentally as well as physically.
Social Justice and Inclusive Growth
Inclusive Growth is economic growth that creates opportunity for all segments of the population and distributes the dividends of increased prosperity, both in monetary and non-monetary terms, fairly across society.Indian Plans after the independence were based on the downward infiltration theory, which failed to bring equitable growth to all the sections of the Indian society.
Approach paper of 11th five year plan talked about "Inclusive and more faster growth" through bridging divides by including those in growth process who were excluded. Divide between above
Pscnotes.com Page 9
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 and Below Poverty Line, between those with productive jobs and those who are unemployed or
grossly unemployed is at alarming stage.
Liberalization and Privatization after 1990's have brought the nation out of the hindu growth rate syndrome but the share of growth has not been equitably distributed amongst different sections of Indian Society.
Various dimensions of Inclusive growth are:-
1. economic 2. social 3. financial 4. environmental
Important issues that are needed to be addressed to achieve the inclusive growth are:-
1. Poverty 2. Unemployment 3. Rural Infrastructure 4. Financial Inclusion 5. Balanced regional development 6. Gender equality 7. Human Resource Development (Health, Education, Skill Development) 8. Basic Human Resources like sanitation, drinking water, housing etc.
Government has launched several programs and policies for Inclusive growth such as:-
1. MNREGA 2. Jan Dhan Yojna 3. Atal Pension Yojna 4. Skill India Mission 5. Deen Dayal Upadhyaya Gram Jyoti Yojana 6. Pradhan Mantri Suraksha Bima Yojana 7. Pradhan Mantri Jeevan Jyoti Bima Yojana 8. Sukanya Samridhi Yojana 9. Pradhan Mantri Garib Kalyan Yojana 10. Jan Aushadhi Yojana (JAY) 11. Nai Manzil Scheme for minority students
Pscnotes.com Page 10
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
12. The Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojana (PMAY) or Housing for all by 2022
In the contemporary context, social justice is typically taken to mean distributive justice. The terms are generally understood to be synonymous and interchangeable in both common parlance and the language of international relations. To support the concept of social justice is to argue for a reconciliation of these priorities within the context of a broader social perspective in which individuals endowed with rights and freedoms operate within the framework of the duties and responsibilities attached to living in society. Notwithstanding the implied associations between social justice, redistributive justice, and justice as a more general concept, the fact is that the explicit commitment to social justice has seriously deteriorated.
The main inequalities are
Inequalities in the distribution of income. Inequalities in the distribution of assets, including not only capital but also physical assets such as land and buildings. Inequalities in the distribution of opportunities for work and remunerated employment. Inequalities in the distribution of access to knowledge. Inequalities in the distribution of health services, social security and the provision of a safe environment. Inequalities in the distribution of opportunities for civic and political participation
Governments have enabled various social legislation's for bridging the gap of inequality and establishing social justice through social legislation's.
Concept of Social Legislation
Legislation is an instrument to control, guide and restrain the behaviour of individuals and groups living in society. Individuals and groups left in absolute freedom may clash with each other in the pursuit of their self interest at the cost of others.They cause grave harm to society leading to chaos. Legislation is one of the many institutions which controls and directs individual action into desirable channels. Others being social customs, traditions, religious prescription etc. Law is a vast subject having many branches. In a broad sense, all laws are social in character, in a narrow sense only those laws that are enacted for the purpose of social welfare are categorized as social legislation. There are several types of legislations such as taxation, corporate, civil, criminal, commercial etc. Social legislation is that branch of law which is an aggregate of the laws relating to the various socio- economic condition of the people. It is a social institution that embodies the social norms created on the initiative of a competent legislative agency. These laws are enacted keeping in view the needs of the time, the circumstances of the nation and its socio-political ideals.
OBJECTIVES OF SOCIAL LEGISLATION :
Pscnotes.com Page 11
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Social legislation derives its inspiration from our constitution and has the following specific objectives: i)Removal of discrimination on the grounds of sex, religion, caste, class etc. and promotion of equality to all. ii)Safeguard the rights of the weaker section such as women, children, elderly, widows, destitute and the backward classes. iii)Eradication of traditional malpractices and social evils such as untouchability, dowry, child marriage, female infanticide etc. iv)Provision of social security.
AIM OF SOCIAL LEGISLATION :
To change and reorganize society by improving its social and economic condition. Each individual of the society has to be given equal rights and equal opportunities. § Social legislation aims to address social problems through legislative means, and initiates process of social reform and social change based on sound social rules. § Since the process of social change in fast social legislation also provides desired direction to changes.
NEEDS FOR SOCIAL LEGISLATION :
to ensure social justice, to bring about social reform, § to promote social welfare, § to bring about desired social change, § to protect and promote of rights of socioeconomically disadvantaged groups of the society.
NATURE OF LEGISLATION IN WELFARE STATE:
Women welfare Child welfare § Schedule caste development § Welfare of OBC § Welfare of disable person § Labour welfare § Housing welfare
Child welfare:
After the formation of legislation, child labour act-1986 was come into force. According to which no child below the age of 14 years should work in any hazardous place. In July 2006, the Indian Govt. brought an amendment according to which, ―no child below the age of 14 should work in any hazardous place or in dhaba, hotels as servant or work as a domestic servant. The Juvenile Justice Act, 2001 said that if a child below the age of 14 saw any deviant behavior shouldn‘t be punished & treat friendly behavior in adjudication.
Women welfare:
Pscnotes.com Page 12
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
The total workforce in our country is about 314 million, out of which women constitute 90 million & man 224 million. To maintain the dignity of women, equality of sexes & establishment of special justice, women welfare programmes such as Janani Suraksha Yojana, MCH, Maternity Benefit Leave, ICDS, formation of SHG, micro finance are some of the keys which has provided welfare majors to the women.
Schedule Caste development:
The Ministry of social justice & empowerment is the nodal ministry that overseas the interest of the schedule caste. Besides this the national commission has been set-up to look-after the interest of SCs & STs under article 338. To achieve their social development to protect them from exploitation, the protection of Civil Rights Act, 1995, the SC & ST Act 1989 were enacted. Article 330 for reservation of SC & ST, Article 15 for abolition of untouchablity is ensured by the legislation.
Welfare of disable person:
The Comprehensive Law namely the equal opportunity, protection of rights & full participation act-1995 has been enacted & enforced in February 1996. The Mental Health Act 1987 & Lapers Act 1898 are working for the prevention & promotional aspects of the disable persons.
Labour welfare:
The International Labour Organization (ILO) was set-up in 1919, as a part of the League of Nations for the promotion of Universal Peace through social justice. The study group of ‗National Commission‘ on Labour on 2002 has brought out the new changes and welfare majors for women, children & self employed workers who work as labourer.
THE CONTRACT LABOUR (REGULATIONAND ABOLITION)ACT, 1970:
Pscnotes.com Page 13
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
The Objective of the Contract Labour Regulation and Abolition) Act, 1970 is to prevent exploitation of contract labour and also to introduce better conditions of work. A workman is deemed to be employed as Contract Labour when he is hired in connection with the work of an establishment by or through a Contractor.
EMPLOYEES' STATE INSURANCE ACT, 1948 :
The promulgation of Employees' State Insurance Act, 1948 envisaged an integrated need based social insurance scheme that would protect the interest of workers in contingencies such as sickness, maternity, temporary or permanent physical disablement, and death due to employment injury resulting in loss of wages or earning capacity. The Act also guarantees reasonably good medical care to workers and their immediate dependants.
EQUAL REMUNERATIONACT, 1976 :
The Equal Remuneration Act, 1976 aims to provide for the payment of equal remuneration to men and women workers and for the prevention of discrimination, on the ground of sex, against women in the matter of employment and for matters connected therewith or incidental thereto.
MATERNITYBENEFIT (AMENDMENT)ACT, 2017 :
The Ministry of Labour and Employment, Government of India ("Ministry of Labour") vide Official Gazette notification dated 31 March 2017 has appointed 1 April 2017 as the date on which the Maternity Benefit (Amendment) Act 2017 ("MB Amendment Act") has come into force. However, the relevant provision on the "work from home" option will come into effect from 1 July 2017.
Budgeting
Budgeting is the process of estimating the availability of resources and then allocating them to various activities of an organization according to a pre-determined priority. In most cases,
Pscnotes.com Page 14
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 approval of a budget also means the approval to various spending units to utilize the allocated resources. Budgeting plays a criucial role in the socio-economic development of the nation.
Budget is the annual statement of the outlays and tax revenues of the government of India together with the laws and regulations that approve and support those outlays and tax revenues . The budget has two purposes in general : 1. To finance the activities of the union government 2. To achieve macroeconomic objectives.
The Budget contains the financial statements of the government embodying the estimated receipts and expenditure for one financial year, ie. it is a proposal of how much money is to be spent on what and how much of it will be contributed by whom or raised from where during the coming year.
Different types of Budgeting
Economists throughout the globe have classified the budgets into different types based on the process and purpose of the budgets, which are as follows:-
1- The Line Item Budget line-item budgeting was introduced in some countries in the late 19th centuary. Indeed line item budgeting which is the most common form of budgeting in a large number of countries and suffers from several drawbacks was a major reform initiative then. The line item budget is defined as ―the budget in which the individual financial statement items are grouped by cost centers or departments .It shows the comparison between the financial data for the past accounting or budgeting periods and estimated figures for the current or a future period‖In a line-item system, expenditures for the budgeted period are listed according to objects of expenditure, or ―line-items.‖ These line items include detailed ceilings on the amount a unit would spend on salaries, travelling allowances, office expenses, etc. The focus is on ensuring that the agencies or units do not exceed the ceilings prescribed. A central authority or the Ministry of Finance keeps a watch on the spending of various units to ensure that the ceilings are not violated. The line item budget approach is easy to understand and implement. It also facilitates centralized control and fixing of authority and responsibility of the spending units. Its major disadvantage is that it does not provide enough information to the top levels about the activities and achievements of individual units.
2 – Performance Budgeting a performance budget reflects the goal/objectives of the organization and spells out performance targets. These targets are sought to be achieved through a strategy. Unit costs are associated with the strategy and allocations are accordingly made for achievement of the objectives. A Performance Budget gives an indication of how the funds spent are expected to give outputs and ultimately the outcomes. However, performance budgeting has a limitation – it is not easy to
Pscnotes.com Page 15
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 arrive at standard unit costs especially in social programmes which require a multi-pronged approach.
3- Zero-based Budgeting
The concept of zero-based budgeting was introduced in the 1970s. As the name suggests, every budgeting cycle starts from scratch. Unlike the earlier systems where only incremental changes were made in the allocation, under zero-based budgeting every activity is evaluated each time a budget is made and only if it is established that the activity is necessary, are funds allocated to it. The basic purpose of Zero-based Budgeting is phasing out of programmes/ activities which do not have relevance anymore. However, because of the efforts involved in preparing a zero-based budget and institutional resistance related to personnel issues, no government ever implemented a full zero-based budget, but in modified forms the basic principles of ZBB are often used.
4- Programme Budgeting and Performance Budgeting
Programme budgeting in the shape of planning, programming and budgeting system (PPBS) was introduced in the US Federal Government in the mid-1960s. Its core themes had much in common with earlier strands of performance budgeting. Programme budgeting aimed at a system in which expenditure would be planned and controlled by the objective. The basic building block of the system was classification of expenditure into programmes, which meant objective-oriented classification so that programmes with common objectives are considered together. It aimed at an integrated expenditure management system, in which systematic policy and expenditure planning would be developed and closely integrated with the budget. Thus, it was too ambitious in scope. Neither was adequate preparation time given nor was a stage-by- stage approach adopted. Therefore, this attempt to introduce PPBS in the federal government in USA did not succeed, although the concept of performance budgeting and programme budgeting endured.
Budgetary Control
Budgetary control refers to how well managers utilize budgets to monitor and control costs and operations in a given accounting period. In other words, budgetary control is a process for managers to set financial and performance goals with budgets, compare the actual results, and adjust performance, as it is needed.
Budgetary control involves the following steps :
(a) The objects are set by preparing budgets.
Pscnotes.com Page 16
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
(b) The business is divided into various responsibility centres for preparing various budgets.
(c) The actual figures are recorded.
(d) The budgeted and actual figures are compared for studying the performance of different cost centres.
(e) If actual performance is less than the budgeted norms, a remedial action is taken immediately.
The main objectives of budgetary control are the follows:
1. To ensure planning for future by setting up various budgets, the requirements and expected performance of the enterprise are anticipated. 2. To operate various cost centres and departments with efficiency and economy. 3. Elimination of wastes and increase in profitability. 4. To anticipate capital expenditure for future. 5. To centralise the control system. 6. Correction of deviations from the established standards. 7. Fixation of responsibility of various individuals in the organization.
Responsibility Accounting
Responsibility accounting is an underlying concept of accounting performance measurement systems. The basic idea is that large diversified organizations are difficult, if not impossible to manage as a single segment, thus they must be decentralized or separated into manageable parts.
These decentralized parts are divided as : 1) revenue centers, 2) cost centers, 3) profit centers and 4) investment centers.
1. revenue center (a segment that mainly generates revenue with relatively little costs), 2. costs for a cost center (a segment that generates costs, but no revenue), 3. a measure of profitability for a profit center (a segment that generates both revenue and costs) and 4. return on investment (ROI) for an investment center (a segment such as a division of a company where the manager controls the acquisition and utilization of assets, as well as revenue and costs).
Advantages:-
1. It provides a way to manage an organization that would otherwise be unmanageable. 2. Assigning responsibility to lower level managers allows higher level managers to pursue other activities such as long term planning and policy making.
Pscnotes.com Page 17
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
3. It also provides a way to motivate lower level managers and workers. 4. Managers and workers in an individualistic system tend to be motivated by measurements that emphasize their individual performances.
In India the budget is prepared from top to bottom approach and responsible accounting would not only improve the efficiency of Indian budgetary system but also will help in performance analysis.
Social Accounting
Social accounting is concerned with the statistical classification of the activities of human beings and human institutions in ways which help us to understand the operation of the economy as a whole.
Social accounting is the process of communicating the social and environmental effects of organizations‘ economic actions to particular interest groups within society and to society at large
The components of social accounting are production, consumption, capital accumulation, government transactions and transactions with the rest of the world.
The uses of social accounting are as follows:
(1) In Classifying Transactions
(2) In Understanding Economic Structure
(3) In Understanding Different Sectors and Flows
(4) In Clarifying Relations between Concepts
(7) In Explaining Movements in GNP
(8) Provide a Picture of the Working of Economy
(9) In Explaining Interdependence of Different Sectors of the Economy
(10) In Estimating Effects of Government Policies
(11) Helpful in Big Business Organisations
(12) Useful for International Purposes
(13) Basis of Economic Models
Pscnotes.com Page 18
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Budgetary Deficit
Budgetary Deficit is the difference between all receipts and expenditure of the government, both revenue and capital. This difference is met by the net addition of the treasury bills issued by the RBI and drawing down of cash balances kept with the RBI. The budgetary deficit was called deficit financing by the government of India. This deficit adds to money supply in the economy and, therefore, it can be a major cause of inflationary rise in prices.
Budgetary Deficit of central government of India was Rs. 2,576 crores in 1980-81, it went up to Rs. 11,347 crores in 1990-91 to Rs. 13,184 crores in 1996-97.
The concept of budgetary deficit has lost its significance after the presentation of the 1997-98 Budget. In this budget, the practice of ad hoc treasury bills as source of finance for government was discontinued. Ad hoc treasury bills are issued by the government and held only by the RBI. They carry a low rate of interest and fund monetized deficit. These bills were replaced by ways and means advance. Budgetary deficit has not figured in union budgets since 1997-98. Since 1997-98, instead of budgetary deficit, Gross Fiscal Deficit (GFD) became the key indicator.
Fiscal Deficit
The difference between total revenue and total expenditure of the government is termed as fiscal deficit. It is an indication of the total borrowings needed by the government and thus amounts to all the borrowings of the government . While calculating the total revenue, borrowings are not included. The gross fiscal deficit (GFD) is the excess of total expenditure including loans net of recovery over revenue receipts (including external grants) and non-debt capital receipts. The net fiscal deficit is the gross fiscal deficit less net lending of the Central government. Generally fiscal deficit takes place either due to revenue deficit or a major hike in capital expenditure. Capital expenditure is incurred to create long-term assets such as factories, buildings and other development. A deficit is usually financed through borrowing from either the central bank of the country or raising money from capital markets by issuing different instruments like treasury bills and bonds.
Revenue Deficit
Revenue deficit is concerned with the revenue expenditures and revenue receipts of the government. It refers to excess of revenue expenditure over revenue receipts during the given fiscal year. Revenue Deficit = Revenue Expenditure – Revenue Receipts
Pscnotes.com Page 19
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Revenue deficit signifies that government‘s own revenue is insufficient to meet the expenditures on normal functioning of government departments and provisions for various services. In India social expenditure like MNREGA is a revenue expenditure though a part of Plan expenditure. Its targeted to be 2.9% of GPD in the year 2014-15, though the fiscal revenue and budget management act specifies it to be zero by 2008-09
Sources of Income of Central Government
As we all know that India is a democratic country and the main aim of the government here is to increase the welfare of the people not the profit of the government. To increase the welfare of the people the Government of India has to start welfare oriented schemes. Welfare oriented schemes are not guaranteed by the good return to the Government.
Government of India retains a big role in economy. In aftermath of LPG reforms, it has pulled back substantially from private sector, yet its presence is unquestionable and desirable in social sector, defense and security, provision of public goods and services etc. It has huge bureaucracy which consumes enormous national resources. Further, in line with modern concept of Market Socialism government intervenes in case of market failures for which it needs to provide services or goods significantly below cost. In effect, government‘s expenditure generally surpasses its revenue which results into Revenue or Fiscal deficit. In the first place, major source of government revenue is from taxation, but there are non-tax sources too. At last, government resorts to deficit financing to fulfill its commitments. All this happens under aegis of Finance Ministry.
Finance Ministry
This ministry is biggest subdivision of Government of India and has under it, largest number of departments (5). It also has one Minister of State. Departments under it are –
1. Economic Affairs 2. Expenditure 3. Revenue 4. Financial Services 5. Disinvestment
This ministry eclipses whole economic and financial system. All regulatory bodies and attached offices relating to economics and finance come under it.
The following points highlight the two main sources of government revenue in India.
1. Tax Revenue:
Union Excise Duties:
Pscnotes.com Page 20
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
They are, presently, by far the leading source of revenue for the Central Government and are levied on commodities produced within the country, but excluding those commodities on which State excise is levied (viz., liquors and narcotic drugs).
The most important commodities from the revenue point of view are sugar, cotton, mill cloth, tobacco, motor spirit, matches and cement.
Customs duties include both import and export duties. These are the second-most important source of revenue for the Central Government.
Income Tax:
Income tax is at present another important source of revenue for the Central Government. It is levied on the incomes of individuals, Hindu undivided families and unregistered firms.
Corporation Tax:
The income-tax on the net profits of joint stock companies is called corporation tax.
Wealth Tax:
It is an annual tax on the net wealth of individuals and Hindu undivided families. It is a progressive tax.
Gift Tax:
It is a tax on gifts of property by an individual in his lifetime to future successors.
Capital Gains Tax:
It is applicable to capital gains resulting from the sale, exchange or transfer of capital assets.
Hotel Expenditure Tax:
Recently, a new tax has been levied on those who patronise high class hotels.
Tax on Foreign Travel:
Another new tax levied on foreign travel for conserving foreign exchange as well as to raise revenue.
1. Non-Tax Revenue:
Interest Receipts:
Pscnotes.com Page 21
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
This largest non-tax source of Central Government‘s revenue receipts is the interest it earns mainly on the loans it has advanced to State Governments, to financial and industrial enterprises in the public sector.
Surplus Profits of the Reserve Bank of India (RBI):
The surplus profits of the RBI is also a part of the revenues of the Central Government. In recent years, these have been quite substantial because of the large borrowing by the Government from the RBI against Treasury Bills for financing the Five-Year Plans.
Currency, Coinage and Mint:
The Government also derives income from running the Currency Note Printing Presses. Moreover, profits are made from the circulation of coins — this profit being the difference between the face value of the coins and their manufacturing cost.
Railways:
The railways in India are owned and run by the Government of India. Accordingly, they pay a fixed dividend to general revenues, i.e., to the Central Government, on the capital invested in the railways. Besides, a part of the net profits made by the railways is also payable to the Central Government.
Profits of Public Enterprises:
Public enterprises owned by the Central Government, e.g., the Steel Authority of India (SAIL), Hindustan Machine Tools (HMT), Bharat Heavy Electricals Ltd. (BHEL), State Trading Corporation (STC). The profits of such Public Sector Units (PSUs) are another source of revenue for the Government of India.
Other Non-Tax Sources of Revenue:
The main source among them is the Departmental Receipts of the various ministries of the Cen- tral Government by way of fees, penalties, etc.
Major Crops
In India around 70% of the population earns its livelihood from agriculture. It fulfills the basic need of human beings and animals. It is an important source of raw material for many agro based industries. India‘s geographical condition is unique for agriculture because it provides many favorable conditions.
Pscnotes.com Page 22
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
There are plain areas, fertile soil, long growing seasons and wide variation in climatic condition etc. Apart from unique geographical conditions, India has been consistently making innovative efforts by using science and technology to increase production.
SALIENT FEATURES OF INDIAN AGRICULTURE
1. Mostly Subsistence Agriculture. 2. Pressure of population on Agriculture for employment and sustenance. 3. Limited Mechanization of farming. 4. Dependence upon monsoon mostly and irrigation in lesser percentage. 5. Variety of crops found due to diversity of topography, climate and soil. 6. Predominance of food crops cultivation. 7. Three distinct agricultural/cropping seasons- kharif, rabi and zaid
MAJOR CROPS OF INDIA
India grows almost each and every crop. If we consider the varieties of crop grown from Kashmir to Kanyakumari and western coast of Gujarat to extreme north eastern states of Arunachal Pradesh, then there would be hundreds of crops.
Pscnotes.com Page 23
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
CROPS COMMERCIAL/PLANTATION FOOD GRAINS HORTICULTURE CROPS CEREALS PULSES OILSEEDS OTHERS VEGETABLES FRUITS Coarse Groundnut, Cereals/ Caster seed, Sugarcane, Banana, Millets Niger seed, Cotton, Jute, Potato, Sweet Mango, Tur, Gram, Sesamum, Mesta, Coconut, potato, Onion, Apple, Rice, Moong, Rapeseed, Tapioca, Chillies, Apricot, Wheat Urad, Mustard, Tobacco, Tomato, Grapes, Lentil Linseed, Rubber, Coffee, Cauliflower, Pineapple, Safflower, Tea, Arecanut, Brinjal Walnut Sunflower, Spices Soybean
FOODGRAINS
The importance of foodgrains in Indian agricultural economy may be gauged from the fact these crops occupy about two-third of total cropped area in the country. Foograins are dominant crops in all parts of the country whether they have subsistence or commercial agricultural economy. On the basis of the structure of grainthe food grainsare classified as cereals and pulses.
CEREALS
Cereals occupy about 54 percent of total cropped area in India. India produces a variety of cereals, which are classified as fine grains (rice, wheat) andcoarse grains (jowar, bajra, maize, ragi).
RICE:
It is the most important food crop of India. It is predominantly a Kharif crop. It covers about one third of total cultivated area of the country and is staple foodof more than half of the Indian population. Maximum population of India is of rice consumers. Hence many farmers in India cultivate rice round the year that is, it is also cultivated in rabi season with the use of irrigation. Some of the geographical conditions are as follows:
Pscnotes.com Page 24
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
1. Temperature: Rice requires hot and humid conditions.
The temperature should be fairly high i.e. 240C mean monthly temperature with average temperature of 220C to 320C.
2. Rainfall: Rainfall ranging between 150 and 300 cmis suitable for its growth. In areas of Punjab, Haryana and Western Uttar Pradesh where rainfall is less than 100cm; rice is cultivated with the help of irrigation. 3. Soil: Rice is grown in varied soil conditions but deep clayey and loamy soilprovides the ideal conditions.
Rice is primarily grown in plain areas like Gangetic plain, it is also grown below sea level at Kuttanad (Kerala), hill terraces of north eastern part of India and valleys of Kashmir.
4. Labor: Rice cultivation requires easily available labourbecause, most of the activities associated with it are labor oriented and are not very well suited for mechanization. 5. Distribution:
Rice is grown in almost all the states of India. o The three largest rice producing states are West Bengal, Uttar Pradesh and Andhra Pradesh. o The other major rice producing states are Tamil Nadu, Bihar, Jharkhand, Uttarakhand, Chhattisgarh, Punjab, Orissa, Karnataka, Assam and Maharashtra. o It is also grown in Haryana, Madhya Pradesh, Kerala, Gujarat and Kashmir Valley.
WHEAT:
Wheat is the second most important food crop of India next to rice. It is a Rabi or winter crop. It is sown in the beginning of winter and harvested in the beginning of summer. Normally (in north India) the sowingof wheat begins in the month of October- November and harvesting is done in the month ofMarch-April. This is the staple foodof millions of people particularly in the northern and north- western regions of India. Some of the geographical conditions are as follows:
1. Temperature: It is primarily a crop of mid-latitude grassland. It requires cool climate. The ideal temperature is between 100C to 150Cat the time of sowingand 210C to 260C at the time of ripening and harvesting. 2. Rainfall: Wheat thrives well in areas receiving annual rainfall of about 75cm. Annual rainfall of about 100 cmis the upper limit for wheat cultivation. Like rice, wheat can also be grown by irrigation method in areas where rainfall is less than 75cm. Light drizzles at the time of ripening help in increasing the yield. But on the other hand, frost at the time of flowering and hailstorm at the time of ripening can cause heavy damage to the wheat crop.
Pscnotes.com Page 25
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
3. Soil:Although wheat can be grown in a variety of soils but well drained fertile loamy and clayey loamy soil is best suited for wheat cultivation. Plain areasare very well suited for wheat production. 4. Labour: Wheat is extensive and highly mechanizedand requires less labour. 5. Distribution: The largest wheat producing states are P,Punjab and Madhya Pradesh. Other than that the main regions of wheat production in India areHaryana, Rajasthan, Gujarat, and Maharashtra.
MILLETS:
Millets are short duration warm weather crops. These are coarse graincrops and are used for both food and fodder. These are Kharifcropsthough sometimes grown in rabi seasons too. These are sown in May-August and harvested in October-November. Today millets are mostly consumed by poor people as their staple food. In India, lots of millet is grown and these are known by various local names. Some of these are Jowar, Bajra, Ragi, Korra, Kodon, Kutki, Hraka, Bauti and Rajgira. In India, Jowar, Bajra and Ragiare grown on large areas but unfortunately area under these crops has drastically reduced over the years. Some of the geographical conditions for growing these crops are as follows:
1. Temperature: These crops are grown where the temperature is highwhich ranges between 270C to 320 2. Rainfall: As mentioned earlier that millets are ‘dry land crop’, therefore, rainfall ranging from 50 to 100 cmis ideal for their cultivation. These crops are rain-fed. 3. Soil: Millets are less sensitive to soil deficiencies. They can be grown in inferior alluvial or loamy soil. 4. Distribution: Jowar and Bajra are grown both in north and south Indiawhereas ragi is generally concentrated in the southern India. Jowar and Bajra are grown in Madhya Pradesh, Gujarat, Rajasthan, Maharashtra, Karanataka, Tamil Nadu, Andhra Pradesh, Haryana and Punjab. Ragi is mostly concentrated in the southern India i.e. Tamil Nadu, Karnataka and Andhra Pradesh. In total, coarse cereals can be found in Rajasthan, Karnataka and Andhra Pradesh.
Jowar(sorghum), Bajra (Pearl millet/Bull Rush millet)Ragi (Finger millet/Buck wheat) are the important millets grown in India. Though, these are known as coarse grains, they have very high nutritional value. For example, ragi is very rich in iron, calcium, other micro nutrients and roughage. Maizeis a crop which is used both as food and fodder. It is a kharif crop which requires temperature between 21°C to 27°C and grows well in old alluvial soil. In some states like Bihar maize is grown in rabi season also. Use of modern inputs such as HYV seeds, fertilisers and irrigation have contributed to the increasing production of maize. Major maize-producing states are Andhra Pradesh, Karnataka, Maharashtra, Uttar Pradesh, Bihar, Telangana and Madhya Pradesh.
PULSES
Pscnotes.com Page 26
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
India is the largest producer as well as the consumer of pulses in the world. These are the major source of protein in a vegetarian diet. Pulses need less moisture and survive even in dry conditions. Being leguminous crops, all these crops except arhar(pigeon pea)helps in restoring soil fertility by fixing nitrogen from the air. Therefore, these are mostlygrown in rotation with other crops. Most of these are green manure crops Major pulse producing statesin India are Madhya Pradesh, Rajasthan, Maharashtra, Uttar Pradesh and Karnataka. Though gram and tur (arhar or pigeon pea/red gram) are the more important pulses, several other pulses such as urd (black gram), mung (green gram), masur (lentil), kulthi (horse gram), matar(peas), khersi, cow pea(black-eyed gram) and moth are also grown. Pulses are generally fodder crops
Gram
It is the most important of all the pulses. It accounts for about 37% of the production and about 30% of the total area of pulses in India. It is a Rabi cropwhich is sown between September and November and is harvested between February and April. It is either cultivated as a single crop or mixed with wheat, barley, linseed or mustard. Some of the geographical conditions are as follows:
1. Temperature: It is grown in a wide range of climatic condition. Mild cool and comparatively dry climatewith 200C -250C 2. Rainfall:40-45 cm rainfall is favorable for gram cultivation. 3. Soil: It grows well on loamy soils. 4. Distribution:Although gram is cultivated in several parts of the country, however, 90% of the total production comes from 5 states. These states are Madhya Pradesh, Rajasthan, Maharashtra, Uttar Pradesh, and Haryana
Green Manure Crops:
Crops grown for the purpose of restoring or increasing the organic mattercontent in the soil are called Green manure crops. Use of Green manure crops in cropping system is called 'Green Manuring'where the crop is grown in situ or brought from outside and incorporated when it is purposely grown. Green manuring are low cost andeffective technology in minimising cost of fertilizers and safeguarding productivity. Green Leaf Manuring consists of gathering green biomass from nearby location and adding to the soil. Objectives of green manuringare to add Nitrogen to the companion or succeeding crop and add or sustain organic matter in the soil. Examples of leguminous Green Manures are as follows: Local name- Cowpea, Cluster bean (Guar), Green gram (Mung bean), Sesbania, Dhaincha, Sunhemp, Wild Indigo, Pillipesara, Berseem, Madras Indigo etc.
Pscnotes.com Page 27
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
COMMERCIAL/CASH CROPS
Cash crops are those crops which are grown for sale either in raw form or semi processed form. Major of them are as follows:
SUGARCANE:
Sugarcane is a Kharif crop. It is the main source of sugar, gur and khandsari. It also provides raw material for the manufacturing of alcohol. Bagasse, the crushed cane residue,has also multiple uses. It is used for manufacturing of paper. It is also an efficient substitute for petroleum products and a host of other chemical products. A part of it is also used as fodder. Some of the geographical conditions for the growth of sugarcane are as follows:
1. Temperature: It requires hot and humid climatewith an average temperature of 210C to 270C. 2. Rainfall: 75-150 cmrainfall is favorable for sugarcane cultivation. Irrigation is required in those areas where rainfall is less than the prescribed limit. 3. Soil: It can grow in a variety of soils. In fact sugarcane can tolerate any kind of soil that can retain moisture. But deep rich loamy soilis ideal for its growth. The soil should be rich in nitrogen, calcium and phosphorous but neither it should be too acidic nor alkaline. Flat, plain and level pleatue is an advantage for sugarcane cultivation because it facilitates irrigation and transportation of cane to the sugar mills. Sugarcane cultivation requires heavy manures and fertilizers because it exhausts the fertility of soils quickly and extensively. 4. Labour: It is a labour oriented cultivationand required cheap labour. Ample human hands are required at every stage, i.e. sowing, hoeing, weeding, irrigation, cutting and carrying sugarcanes to the factories. 5. Distribution: India has the largest area under sugarcane cultivation in the world and the second largest producernext to Brazil. As far as distribution of sugarcane cultivation in India is concerned, there are three distinct geographical regions in the country. These regions are: 1. The Sutlej-Ganga plainfrom Punjab to Bihar containing 51% of the total area and 60% of the country‘s total production. Uttar Pradesh is the largest producer of sugar in India. 2. The black soil belt from Maharashtra to Tamil Nadualong the eastern slopes of the Western Ghats. 3. Coastal Andhra Pradesh and Krishna river valley.
COTTON:
Pscnotes.com Page 28
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Cotton is the most important fibre cropnot only of India but also of the entire world. It not only provides raw material for cotton textile industry but also its seed is used in Vanaspati oil industry. The cotton seed is also used as part of fodder for milch cattle for better milk production. Cotton is basically a kharif crop.Some of the geographical conditions are as follows:
1. Distribution: India has the largest area under cultivationand is the largest producer of cotton next only to China and the USA. Within the country two third of total area and production is shared by four states. The main states for cotton production are Andhra Pradesh, Telegana, Maharashtra, Gujarat, Punjab and Haryana. 2. Labour: As picking of cotton has not been made mechanized till now, therefore a lot of cheap and efficient labouris required at the time of picking. 3. Soil: Cotton cultivation is very closely related to Black soils of Deccan and Malwa plateau. However, it also grows well in alluvial soils of the Sutlej plain and red and laterite soils of the peninsular region. 4. Rainfall: It grows mostly in the areas having at least 210 frost free daysin a year. It requires modest amount of rainfall of 50 to 100 cm. However, cotton is successfully grown with the help of irrigation in the areas where rainfall is less than 50 cm. High amount of rainfall in the beginning and sunny and dry weather at the time of ripening are very useful for a good crop. 5. Temperature: Cotton is the crop of tropical and sub-tropical areasand requires uniformly high temperature varying between 210C and 300C.
JUTE
It is an important natural fibre crop in India next to cotton. It is a kharif crop. It requires hot and humid climate with 120-150cm rainfallfor its growth. Light sandy or clayey soils is best for its cultivation. It is labour intensive. In trade and industry, jute and mesta croptogether known as raw jute as their uses are almost same. Raw jute plays an important role in the country‘s economy. Raw jute was originallyconsidered as a source of raw material for packaging industries But it has now emerged as a versatile raw material for diverse applications, such as, textile industries, paper industries, building and automotive industries, use as soil saver, use as decorative and furnishing materials, etc. Raw jute being bio-degradable and annually renewable source, it is considered as an environment-friendly cropand it helps in the maintenance of the environment and ecological balance. Further attraction of Jute lies in its easy availability, inexhaustible quantity at a comparatively cheaper rate. Moreover, it can easily be blended with other natural and manmade fibres. With its insignificant coverage of total cultivated area, it plays a predominant role in the country‘s economyby generating employment, earning foreign exchange, solving many of the socio-economic problems, etc.
Pscnotes.com Page 29
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
In earlier years, Jute was considered as a Golden Fibrebut there after it had to pass through different critical situation. The main problemcame in the way with the introduction of synthetic fibre by the end of sixties/early seventies. After the development of diversified product of jute fibre and due to growing concern about the environment pollution, the importance of jute has again revived. The crop can be grown in low, medium and high land situation, both moisture stress and water stagnating condition. WhiteJute (Corchorus capsularis) can be grown comparatively in low land situationwhile that of Tossa Jute prefers medium and high land situation. Mesta is grown in almost all over the country. It being a hardy crop and can tolerate moisture stress; its cultivation is spread in different agro-climatic situations unlike jute which is concentrated only in eastern and north eastern States. Major jute and mesta producing states are West Bengal, Bihar and Assam.In a major part of Jute area, particularly in North Bengal, Bihar and North-Eastern States, the soil is acidic in nature. However, the Jute crop is growing in these areas in existing situation adjusting the crop sequence. It is a water intensive crop-not only for growth but for processing as well.
OILSEEDS
It is one of the important groups of commercial cropsin India. Oil extracted from oilseeds not only forms an important item of our diet but also serves as raw material for the manufacturing of hydrogenated oils, paints, varnishes, soaps, lubricants Oil-cake(the residue after the oil is extracted from the oilseeds) form an important cattle feed and manure. Drylands of Malwa plateau (Madhya Pradesh), Marathwada (Maharashtra), Gujarat, Rajasthan, Telangana and Rayalseema region of Andhra Pradesh and Karnataka plateau areoilseeds growing regions of India. These crops together occupy about 14 percentof total cropped area in the country. Groundnut, rapeseed and mustard, sesamum, linseed, castor seed, soyabean and sunflower are the main oilseed crops grown in India.
Groundnut
It is the most important oilseed of India. Groundnut is grown both as kharif and Rabi crop but 90-95% of the total area is devoted to kharif crop. It is a rainfed crop. Some of the geographical conditions are as follows:
1. Temperature: It thrives best in the tropical climateand requires 200C to 300C 2. Rainfall: 50-75 cm rainfallis favorable for groundnut cultivation. It is highly susceptible to frost, prolonged drought, continuous rain and stagnant water. Therefore, dry winter is needed at the time of ripening. 3. Soil: Well drained light sandy loams, red, yellow and black soilsare well suited for its cultivation.
Pscnotes.com Page 30
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
4. Distribution: It is the most important oilseed of India and accounts for about half of the major oilseeds producedin the country. India is the largest producer of groundnut in the world. Andhra Pradesh, Tamil Nadu, Rajasthan and Gujarat are the main producer of groundnut in India and account for about 60% of the total production. Another 30% of the total production comes from Maharashtra, Karnataka and Orissa.
Soybean
Soybean is known as the―Golden Bean‖ of the 20th Century. Though, Soybean is a legume crop, yet it is widely used as oilseed. Due to very poor cookability on account of inherent presence of trypsin inhibitor, it cannot be utilized as a pulse. It is now the second largest oilseed in Indiaafter groundnut. It grows in varied agro-climatic conditionsbut it is best crop in Kharif It has emerged as one of the important commercial cropin many countries. Due to its worldwide popularity, the international trade of Soybeanis spread globally. Several countries such as Japan, China, Indonesia, Philippines, and European countries are importing Soybean to supplement their domestic requirement for human consumption and cattle feed. Soybean has great potentialas an exceptionally nutritive and very rich protein food. It can supply the much needed protein to human diets, because it contains above 40 per cent protein of superior qualityand all the essential amino acids particularly glycine, tryptophan and lysine, similar to cow‘s milk and animal proteins. Soybean also contains about 20 per cent oil with an important fatty acid, lecithin and Vitamin A and D. The 4 percent mineral salts of soybeans are fairly rich in phosphorous and calcium. Major soyabean producing states areMadhya Pradesh, Maharshtra and Rajasthan
Sunflower:
Sunflower as an oilseed is a newly introduced cropin the country. Due to source of high quality edible oil, sunflower oil is used as cooking oil in different recipes. Its importance increases as sunflower oil is considered as a heart friendly oil. Besides oil, almost every part of sunflower has commercial value. This crop has gained importance due to its short duration of maturity, containing of excellent quality of oil, photo-insensitivity, wide adaptability into different kinds of cropping pattern, high-energy hull anddrought tolerance. It is a short duration crop and completes its life cycle in about three months. Hence can be incorporated in different type of cropping pattern. Since it is a photo- insensitive crop, it can be grown throughout the year. Sunflower is cultivated as both kharif and rabiseasons but, two-thirds of production comes from rabi season In addition, sunflower is also cultivated as summer crop in Punjab and West Bengal. Oil cakeis rich in high quality protein (40 – 44 percent) and used as cattle and poultry feed. This crop is considered valuable from economic as well as ornamental point of view. Karnataka, Andhra Pradesh and Odisha are the major sunflower producing states.
Pscnotes.com Page 31
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Sesamum (Til):
Sesamum is a rainfed cropand requires 45-50 cm rainfall. It thrives well in areas having 21o-23oC temperature. Frost, prolonged drought and heavy rains for a longer duration are harmful to this crop. Well-drained light loamysoils are best suited to sesamum. It is cultivated in plains as well as on elevations upto 1,300 metres. It is grown as a kharif crop in the north and as a rabi crop in the south.
Rapeseed and Mustard:
Like wheat and gram, they thrive only in cool climateof the Satluj-Ganga plain and very small quantity is grown in the peninsular India. They are mainly grown as rabi cropin pure or mixed form with wheat, gram and barley.
Linseed:
Although this crop can be grown under varied geographical conditions, it prefers cool, moist climatewith about 20oC temperature and 75 cm rainfall. Clay loams, deep black soils and alluvial soils are best suited for its cultivation. It can be cultivated upto a height of 800 metres above sea level. It is a rabi-cropwhich is sown in October-November and harvested in March-April.
Castor Seed:
Castor seed plant grows into a small tree and is generally raised as a mixed crop in tropical and sub-tropical climates. It thrives well in areas of 200C-250C temperature and 50-75 cm rainfall. It is grown on red sandy loams in the peninsular India and on light alluvial soils of the Satluj-Ganga plain. Almost the whole area of castor seed production is rainfed. It is a Kharif crop in the north and a rabi crop in the south.
PLANTATION CROP
TEA:
India is famous for its tea gardens. Tea plantation in India was started by the Britishers in 1923 when wild tea plantswere discovered by them in the hilly and forest areas of Assam. Tea is made from tender sprouts of tea plantsby drying them. India is one of the leading tea producing country in the world. China and Sri Lanka are other leading producers of tea. Some of the geographical conditions for the growth of tea are as follows:
Pscnotes.com Page 32
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
1. Temperature: It requires hot and wet climate. The ideal temperature for the growth of tea bushes and leaf varies between 200C to 300C. If temperature eitherrises above 350C or goes below 100C, it would be harmful for the growth of tea bushesand leaves. 2. Rainfall:As mentioned above tea requires a good amount of rainfall ranging between 150-300 cm and the annual rainfall should be well distributed throughout the year. Long dry spell is harmful for tea. 3. Soil: Tea bush grows well in well drained, deep, friable loamy soil. However, virgin forest soil rich in humus and iron contentare considered to be the best soils for the tea plantation. Tea is a shade loving plant and grows better when planted along with shady trees. 4. Labour: Cheap and efficient labouris required for tea production. 5. Distribution: Assam is the leading producerthat accounts for more than 50% of tea production of India. Tea producing areas of Assam are the hill slopes bordering the Brahmaputra and Surma valleys. West Bengal is the second largest producer of tea where tea is mostly grown in the districts of Darjeeling, Siliguri, Jalpaiguri and cooch Bihar districts. Tamil Nadu is the third largest producer where tea growing areas are mostly restricted to Nilgiri hills.
COFFEE:
It is the indigenous crop of Ethiopia(Abysinia Plateau). From Ethiopia, it was taken to Arabia in 11th From Arabia, the seeds were brought by Baba Budan in 17thCentury and were raised in Baba Budan hills of Karnataka. But it was British planters who took keen interest and large coffee estates were established in the hills of Western Ghats. Some of the geographical conditions for the growth of coffee are as follows:
1. Temperature: It requires hot and humid climate with temperature varying between 150C and 280C. it is generally grown under shady trees. Therefore,strong sun shine, high temperature above 300C,frost and snowfall are harmful for coffee cultivation. Dry weather is necessary at the time of ripening of berried. 2. Rainfall: Rainfall between 150 and 250 cmis favorable for coffee cultivation. 3. Soil: Well drained, rich friable loamy soilcontaining good deal of humus and minerals like iron and calcium are ideal for coffee to increase productivity. 4. Labour: Like tea, coffee cultivation also requires plenty ofcheap and skilled labour for various purposes like sowing, transplanting, pruning, plucking, drying, grading and packaging of coffee. 5. Distribution: Karnataka, Kerala and Tamil Naduare the main states of coffee production in India.
HORTICULTURE CROPS
In simple terms, horticulturecan be defined as the science of growing fruits, vegetables, and flowers. Indiais a producer of tropical as well as temperate fruits.
Pscnotes.com Page 33
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Mangoesof Maharashtra, Andhra Pradesh, Telangana, Uttar Pradesh and West Bengal, oranges of Nagpur and Cherrapunjee (Meghalaya), bananas of Kerala, Mizoram, Maharashtra and Tamil Nadu, lichi and guava of Uttar Pradesh and Bihar, pineapples of Meghalaya, grapes of Andhra Pradesh, Telangana and Maharashtra, apples, pears, apricots and walnuts of Jammu and Kashmir and Himachal Pradesh are in great demand the world over. Major flower growing states are Karnataka, Tamil Nadu and Andhra Pradesh in South, West Bengal in East, Maharashtra in West and Rajasthan, Delhi and Haryana in North. Major exporting flower like orchidcovers the entire region of North-Eastern region especially in the state of Arunanchal Pradesh which is also known as Orchid State of India. India produces about 13 per cent of the world‘s vegetables. It is an important producer of pea, cauliflower, onion, cabbage, tomato, brinjal and potato.
Issues related to direct and indirect farm subsidies
Subsidy is one of the powerful fiscal instruments, besides taxes and others, by which the objective of growth and social justice may be achieved.
Subsidies alter relative prices and budget constraints and thereby affect decisions concerning production, consumption and allocation of resources. Like many other countries, subsidies in Indian economy are pervasive. These are explicit or hidden and include the areas such as education, health, environment and variety of economic activities including agriculture and transport. Nearly 66 per cent of the people in India are still dependent on agriculture. The subsidies to agricultural sector provided by the government have recorded phenomenal rise during the past two decades.
The agricultural subsidies act as an incentive to promote agricultural development. In order to attain the goal of self-sufficiency in food, government adopts short term policies such as support prices of products and input subsidy to stimulate the products to increase the food production. It is expected that subsidies contribute to better cropping pattern, employment and income of the beneficiaries. But in most development programmes, subsidies are one among the many developmental inputs being provided. Thus the observable changes in cropping pattern, employment level and overall incomes are because of the joint effect of all the efforts going on. Therefore, these changes cannot be attributed solely to subsidies.
Pscnotes.com Page 34
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
The subsidies may be direct or indirect, cash or kind, general or particular, budgetary or non budgetary, etc. But their impact is practically visible on both the production and distribution. The economic rationale of subsidies lies in incentivising the producers to invest in productive activities and increase production leading to high growth in national income and obtaining desirable structure of production.
Subsidies in Indian agriculture are of four types :
Explicit Input Subsidies
Explicit input subsidies are payments made to the farmers to meet a part of the cost of an input. These are in the nature of explicit payments made to the farmer. For example, subsidy on improved or high yielding variety seeds, plant protection chemicals and equipments, improved agricultural implements and supply of minikits containing seeds, fertilizers and plant protection chemicals for certain crops are the explicit subsidies.
Implicit Input Subsidies
While there is transparency in explicit input subsidies, implicit input subsidies are hidden in nature. The latter arise on account of the mechanics of pricing of inputs. If inputs whose prices are administratively determined are priced low as compared to their economic cost, it becomes a case of implicit subsidization. As far as the farmer is concerned, he does not receive any direct payment but somebody in the economy accounts for the difference.
Output Subsidies Subsidization of agricultural sector through output pricing means that by a restrictive trade policy, the product prices in the domestic market are maintained at levels higher than those that would have prevailed in the absence of restrictions on trade. On the other hand, if the trade policies have resulted in keeping the domestic prices lower than the corresponding border reference price, the policies have taxed the agricultural sector. The border reference price
Pscnotes.com Page 35
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 is the free on board prices in the case of exportables and cost, insurance and freight price in the
case of importables.
Food Subsidies This apart, there is an important subsidy linked to the agricultural sector and that is the food subsidy. The twin policy of providing market support to the foodgrains producers and supplying atleast a part of the requirement to consumers at reasonable prices, along with the policy of maintaining a buffer- stock of required quantity for national food security, involved cost in the form of meeting the differences between the economic cost and issue prices of foodgrains.
There are several types of Federal Farm Subsidies:
1. Direct payments. ‗‗Direct‘‘ payments are cash subsidies for producers of selected crops like wheat, corn, sorghum, barley, oats, cotton, rice, soybeans, minor oilseeds, and peanuts. Direct payments are based on a historical measure of a farm‘s acreage used for production, but some payments go to owners of land that is no longer even used for farming.
1. Marketing loans. The marketing loan program is a price support program that began in the New Deal era. The program encourages overproduction by setting a price floor for crops and by reducing the price variability that would otherwise face producers in the free market. The marketing loan program covers the same crops as the direct subsidy program.
Pscnotes.com Page 36
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
2. Insurance. When viewed internationally, the Risk Management Agency runs the USDA‘s farm insurance programs, which are available to farmers to protect against adverse weather, pests, and low market prices.
1. Disaster aid. In federal system, the government operates various crop insurance and disaster assistance programs for farmers. In addition, Congress frequently declare ‗‗disasters‘‘ whenever the slightest adverse event occurs, and often distributes special payments to farmers regardless of whether they sustained substantial damage.
1. Export subsidies. The USDA operates a range of programs to aid farmers and food companies with their foreign sales.
1. Agricultural research and statistics. Most American industries fund their own research and development programs.
The agricultural sector in India enjoys both input and output subsidies. This chapter provides an overview of agricultural input subsidies in the state, based on secondary data. It is presented in four sections. The first section gives the kinds of subsidies admissible in the year 2000-2001 under different agricultural programmes of State Agricultural Department. The second section gives an account of direct subsidies made available by the Departments of Agriculture, Horticulture, Animal Husbandry and Fisheries. The third section gives details of estimation of the indirect subsidies viz. fertilisers, power and irrigation and in the fourth section the total agricultural subsidies both direct and indirect are analysed.
Subsidies do not reach the marginalized farmers
The marginalized farmers, the main target audience for the government to come up with subsidies in the first place are found wanting of the same. Effectively, the more well off farmers end up taking more than their fair share.
The fiscal burden on the government
Pscnotes.com Page 37
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
The government fails to recover its costs because of taxation issues and is thus led to borrow from other sources. Ineffective taxation policies end up taking their toll on the government‘s developmental plans.
The APMC Act
The APMC Act was set up by the government, as a means to improve the efficacy of the process of the farmers getting their rightful price due to them, through the establishment of middlemen acting as links to the chain. Sadly though, their main prerogative was rendered ineffective, due to their own middlemen.
The APMC act established mandis, where farmers auction their produce. The presence of middlemen, effectively multiplied prices at each level which thus led to higher prices and lower profits for the farmers.
Dealing with Harmful Subsidies
Excess subsidisation is not just an unwarranted fiscal cost. It can do significant damage. For example, oversubsidisation of fertilisers, leads to excessive use of fertilisers, pesticides and other agricultural inputs that have environmentally detrimental effects leading to erosion, compaction, and denitrification of top soil. Similarly, excess subsidisation of water causes drying up of rivers, declining water tables and soil erosion. Excess subsidisation of diesel compounds environmental pollution.
Solution Strategy
A proposed solution strategy to be effective would need to work on three basic levels.
Pscnotes.com Page 38
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
1. Customer Base Identification and Selective Targeting
2. Effective channelization of subsidies
3. Logistics Support.
1. Customer Base Identification
Segmenting farmers into three broad categories based on their economic status, to ensure that the subsidies reach the ones most in need. A proposed model that takes in certain parameters, assigning them different weights through Principal Component Analysis (PCA) and comparing it through a seismic inspired model.
Logistics From a logistical standpoint the system needs to develop into a more transparent setup. This can be ensured by integrating the UID (Aadhar) system into the fold. This integration would ensure that leaks are prevented and a more transparent and effective system of monetary transfer is established. Cashless and quick transfer of funds could thus become possible, helping weed out the need for middlemen in the system as a whole.
This proposed model may not be fully effective and has its fallacies, this may not be the best way of coming out with this issue. But, the issue of ineffective agricultural subsidization is one of national importance. This is but a endeavor to think about the same and to come up with something that could help enliven the lives of our farmers.
Current strategy of Government for social sector subsidies
Pscnotes.com Page 39
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
In its three-year action plan for the economy the government think-tank mooted a reduction in food subsidies as a proportion of GDP by 2019-20 through better targeting and rationalisation measures.
Within revenue expenditures, subsidies have tended to crowd out the socially more productive expenditures such as those on education and health.
While in absolute terms, the allocation towards food subsidy, as per the Aayog, will increase marginally to ₹1.57 lakh crore from ₹1.24 lakh crore, as a proportion to GDP, the expenditure will come down to 0.73% from 0.90% in 2015-16.
The government's allocations are based on reduction in food subsidy as a proportion to GDP from 0.90% in 2015-16 to 0.73% in 2019-20.
The efficiency of social expenditure must be improved to deliver better outcomes. This may be done for example through better targeting and the use of direct benefit transfers. Open ended schemes that can absorb rising expenditures and lack clearly identified beneficiaries must be avoided.
Minimum Support Price (MSP)
Historical context
The emergence of agricultural Price Policy in India was in the backdrop of food scarcity and price fluctuations provoked by drought, floods and international prices for exports and imports. This policy in general was directed towards ensuring reasonable food prices for consumers by providing food grains through Public Distribution System (PDS) and inducing adoption of the new technology for increasing yield by providing a price support mechanism through Minimum Support Price (MSP) system. In recognition of the importance of assuring reasonable produce prices to the farmers, motivating them to adopt improved technology and to promote investment by them in farm enterprises, the Agricultural Prices Commission (renamed as the Commission for
Pscnotes.com Page 40
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Agricultural Costs and Prices in 1985) was established in 1965 for advising the Government on agricultural prices policy on a continuing basis. The thrust of the policy in 1965 was to evolve a balanced and integrated structure to meet the overall needs of the economy and with due regard to the interests of the producers and the consumers. The first Commission was headed by Prof M L Dantwala and in its final report the Commission suggested the Minimum Support Prices for Paddy.
Minimum Support Price (MSP):- is a form of market intervention by the Government of Indiato insure agricultural producers against any sharp fall in farm prices.
The minimum support prices are announced by the Government of Indiaat the beginning of the sowing season for certain crops on the basis of the recommendations of the Commission for Agricultural Costs and Prices (CACP). MSP is price fixed by Government of India to protect theproducer - farmers - against excessive fall in price during bumperproduction years. The minimum support prices are a guarantee price for their produce from the Government that this will be the minimum price at which their product will fetch. If the market price is above,MSP,the farmer can obviously sell it at the marketIn case the market price for the commodity falls below the announced minimum price due to bumper production and glut in the market,government agencies purchase the entire quantity offered by the farmers at the announced minimum price.
The major objectives are to support the farmers from distress sales and to procure food grains for public distribution.
As of 2015-16, Minimum support prices are currently announced for 24 commodities,which includes food grains like Wheat,paddy etc and non-food crops like raw cotton,raw jute etc.
A pilot project under the Direct Payment Deficiency System (DPDS) for paying MSP guarantee for the cotton farmers has been initiated at Hinganghat taluka of Maharashtra in 2015. Under this system, the farmers will directly get the amount which is the difference between the Minimum Support Price (MSP) and the market price, should the market price fall below the MSP. For availing of the benefit, farmers would have to present proof of cotton sold at Agriculture Produce Market Committee yards, plus other papers such as ownership document, yield estimation and other details. If the pilot is successful, the DPDS would be rolled out in all cotton growing regions, as per the present decision. DPDS is essentially a mode of direct benefit transfer to cotton farmers.
Then there is this concept ofPROCUREMENT PRICE, which is the price at which government procures food grains for buffer stocking and PDS purposes through FCI.
Consider the situation where,in the wake of an imminent food shortage that may occur, the traders are willing to procure food grains in advance,driving up the market price.
Pscnotes.com Page 41
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
When the market prices are much higher than the MSP,the farmer will obviously be willing to sell it in the market. But the government,still, needs to procure food grains on its own to meet its distribution commitments inPDS at subsidised rates(issue price) and to create the buffer stock,necessary to intervene from supply side in case there is food deficiency and high food inflation. Therefore the government so as to fulfil these commitments,declares a Procurement price which is > or = to the MSP.
The major difference between MSP and PP is that while PP is forfood grains only, MSP is for 24 crops which includes both food grains and non-food grains.
Method of Calculation
In formulating the recommendations in respect of the level of minimum support prices and other non-price measures, the CACP takes into account a comprehensive view of the entire structure of the economy of a particular commodity or group of commodities. Other Factors include cost of production, changes in input prices, input-output price parity, trends in market prices, demand and supply, inter-crop price parity, effect on industrial cost structure, effect on cost of living, effect on general price level, international price situation, parity between prices paid and prices received by the farmers and effect on issue prices and implications for subsidy. The Commission makes use of both micro-level data and aggregates at the level of district, state and the country.
Supply related information - area, yield and production, imports, exports and domestic availability and stocks with the Government/public agencies or industry, cost of processing of agricultural products, cost of marketing - storage, transportation, processing, marketing services, taxes/fees and margins retained by market functionaries; etc. are also factored in.
Report of National Commission for Farmers (NCF) had recommended that MSP should be at least 50% more than the weighted average cost of production. However, this had not been accepted by the Government. Procurement at MSP
Farmers are made aware of the procurement operations by way of advertisements like displaying banners, pamphlets, announcement for procurement and specification in print and electronic media. Some States have taken steps to pre-register farmers for ensuring procurement from them through a software system.
Pscnotes.com Page 42
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Keeping in view the procurement potential areas, procurement centres for MSP operations are opened by Government agencies, both Food Corporation of India (FCI) and State Government, after mutual consultations.
Procurement centres are opened by respective State Govt. Agencies/ FCI taking into account the production, marketable surplus, convenience of farmers and availability of other logistics / infrastructure such as storage and transportation etc. Large number of temporary purchase centres in addition to the existing mandis and depots/godowns are also established at key points for the convenience of the farmers. The Govt. agencies also engage Co-operative Societies and Self Help Group which work as aggregators of produce from farmers and bring the produce to purchase centres being operated in particular locations/areas and increase outreach of MSP operations to small and marginal farmers. These Co-operative Societies are in addition to the direct purchases from farmers. Co-operative societies/Self Help Groups are engaged in many States like Bihar, Chhattisgarh, Odisha, Maharashtra, Karnataka, Jharkhand and Rajasthan. Whereas, in some states like Punjab and Haryana, the Government of India has permitted the State Governments to engage locals for procurement of food grains from the farmers on payment of commission. These steps have been taken by Government of India so that Govt. agencies can procure maximum food grains directly from farmers by expanding out- reach of MSP benefit to farmers.
Food Corporation of India (FCI) is the designated central nodal agency for price support operations for cereals, pulses and oilseeds.
Public Distribution System and Food Security
WHO Defines Food security to exists when all people, at all times, have physical, social and economic access to sufficient, safe and nutritious food which meets their dietary needs and food preferences for an active and healthy life. Food security has three interlinked contents such as :-
1. Availability of food, 2. Access to food and 3. absorption of food.
Food security is a multidimensional concept covering even the micro level household food security,energy intakes and indicators of malnutrition.
Pscnotes.com Page 43
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Major components of food security are:-
1. Production and Procurement 2. Storage 3. Distribution
Indian Agriculture is rightly called as a gamble with Monsoon, variability in food production and rising population creates food insecurity in the nation and worst effected are the downtrodden section of the society.
While India has seen impressive economic growth in recent years, the country still struggles with widespread poverty and hunger. India‘s poor population amounts to more than 300 million people, with almost 30 percent of India‘s rural population living in poverty. The good news is, poverty has been on the decline in recent years. According to official government of India estimates, poverty declined from 37.2% in 2004-05 to 29.8% in 2009-10.
Need for Self-Sufficiency:
India suffered two very severe droughts in 1965 and 1966. Food Aid to India was restricted to a monthly basis by USA under the P.L. 480 programme. The Green Revolution made a significant change in the scene. India achieved self-sufficiency in food grains by the year 1976 through the implementation of the seed- water-fertilizer policy adopted by the Government of India.
Food grain production increased four-fold during 1950-51 and 2001-2002 from 51 million tons to 212 million tones. The country is no longer exposed to real famines. But the regional variation in the success of Green Revolution which was chiefly limited to northern- Western states has lead to the divide in the nation. Evergreen revoloution and Bringing green revolution to eastern India is the need of the hour.
Green revolution was focused on wheat and rice and thus the production of pulses was stagnant.
National Food Security Mission comprising rice, wheat and pulses to increase the production of rice by 10 million tons, wheat by 8 million tons and pulses by 2 million tons by the end of the Eleventh Plan (2011-12). The Mission is being continued during 12th Five Year Plan with new targets of additional production of food grains of 25 million tons of food grains comprising of 10 million tons rice, 8 million tons of wheat, 4 million tons of pulses and 3 million tons of coarse cereals by the end of 12th Five Year Plan. The National Food Security Mission (NFSM) during the 12th Five Year Plan will have five components
(i) NFSM- Rice;
(ii) NFSM-Wheat;
(iii) NFSM-Pulses,
Pscnotes.com Page 44
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
(iv) NFSM-Coarse cereals and
(v) NFSM-Commercial Crops.
Government through Public Distribution System has tried to counter the problem of food insecurity by providing the food grains through fair price shops.
The central Government through Food Corporation of India has assumed the responsibilities of procurement,storage,transfer and bulk allocation of food grains to state governments.
The public distribution system (PDS) has played an important role in attaining higher levels of the household food security and completely eliminating the threats of famines from the face of the country, it will be in the fitness of things that its evolution, working and efficacy are examined in some details.
PDS was initiated as a deliberate social policy of the government with the objectives of: i) Providing foodgrains and other essential items to vulnerable sections of the society at resonable (subsidised) prices; ii) to have a moderating influence on the open market prices of cereals, the distribution of which constitutes a fairly big share of the total marketable surplus; and iii) to attempt socialisation in the matter of distribution of essential commodities.
The focus of the Targeted Public Distribution System (TPDS) is on ―poor in all areas‖ and TPDS involves issue of 35 Kg of food grains per family per month for the population Below Poverty Line (BPL) at specially subsidized prices. The TPDS requires the states to Formulate and implement :-
1. foolproof arrangements for identification of poor, 2. Effective delivery of food grains to Fair Price Shops (FPSs) 3. Its distribution in a transparent and accountable manner at the FPS level.
Pscnotes.com Page 45
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
India is the third largest producer of cereals, with only China and the USA ahead of it. India occupies the first position in milk production and is the third largest producer of fish and second largest producer of inland fisheries in the world. According to ministry of Agriculture ,India is likely to produce a record 273.38 million tonnes of food grains 2016/17, slightly higher than the previous estimate of 271.98 million tonnes.
Economic growth is typically accompanied by improvements in a country‘s food supply, both quantitative and qualitative, and a gradual reduction in nutritional deficiencies. It also brings about changes in the production, processing, distribution and marketing of food. Diets evolve over time and are influenced by factors such as income, prices, individual preferences and beliefs, cultural traditions, as well as geographical, environmental, social and economic factors.
India faces a greater food challenge – having only 2.3 per cent share in world‘s total land area it has to ensure food security to about 17.5 per cent of the world‘s population. Total foodgrain production is estimated at an all-time high of 272 million tonnes in 2016-17, 8% higher than the 251.6 million tonnes last year, and surpassing the previous record of 265 million tonnes in 2013- 14.
Wheat production is estimated to rise by 4.7% to 96.6 million tonnes in 2016-17 (compared to 92.3 million tonnes in 2015-16),
Production of pulses is likely to rise 35% from 16.4 million tonnes last year to 22.1 million tonnes in 2016-17.
Production of rice, the most popular staple, is estimated to increase by over 2 million tonnes, from 104.4 million tonnes last year to 106.7 million tonnes in 2016-17.
As per 2nd Advance Estimates, the estimated production of major crops during 2016-17 is as under:
Foodgrains – 271.98 million tonnes (record)
Rice – 108.86 million tonnes (record) Wheat – 96.64 million tonnes (record) Coarse Cereals – 44.34 million tonnes (record) Maize – 26.15 million tonnes (record) Pulses – 22.14 million tonnes (record) Gram – 9.12 million tonnes Tur – 4.23 million tonnes (record) Urad – 2.89 million tonnes (record)
Oilseeds – 33.60 million tonnes (record)
Pscnotes.com Page 46
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Soyabean – 14.13 million tonnes Groundnut – 8.47 million tonnes Castorseed – 1.74 million tonnes
Cotton – 32.51 million bales (of 170 kg each)
Sugarcane – 309.98 million tonnes
Benefiting from the green revolution technologies introduced in 1965-66, the per capita net availability of foodgrains per annum in India increased from 144.1 kg per capita per year in 1951 to a peak of 186.2 kg per capita per year in 1991. Post-1990s though, there is a clear decline in the per capita foodgrain availability which has declined to 160.1 kg per capita per year in 2010.
Since agricultural growth is limited, imports can help improve the country‘s supply situation for a short term. But for the long term, the country will need to focus on productivity enhancement, through public investment in irrigation, research and efficient use of water, plant nutrition and other inputs.
Food Security Scheme
After the rural job guarantee programme, the government is now focusing on an ambitious National Food Security Act aimed at drawing more people into the food security net. It has made a strong pitch for providing 35 kg of cereal at Rs 3 per kg every month to the poor of this country.
The government is earnest to fulfill the party‘s poll promise of enacting such a law, and has even provided the broad outlines of the proposed legislation. The rural job scheme and the information Act were conceived and piloted by the National Advisory Council (NAC).The Draft Right to Food (Guarantee of Safety and Security) Act enshrines freedom from hunger and malnutrition as a fundamental right.
It ―provides for and asserts the physical, economic and social right of all citizens to have access to safe and nutritious food, consistent with an adequate diet necessary to lead an active and healthy life with dignity‖.
The Union Cabinet has approved the Draft National Food Security Bill. It seeks to provide subsidized food grains to over half of India‘s 1.2 billion population. The bill was presented to parliament and has been referred to standing committee.
Highlights of the Bill: a. The food security bill promises 75 percent of rural population and 50 percent of urban households, the right to 7 kg food grains per person, at Rs.3 per kg for rice, Rs.2 per kg for wheat and Rs.1 per kg for coarse grains to the priority beneficiaries.
Pscnotes.com Page 47
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 b. The general category will be provided at least three kilograms of food grains per person per month at half the minimum selling price. c. The bill will also provide rations or cooked meals to children under 14 years of age, destitute including women and persons on the margins of society. d. The bill provides for cost-sharing to pacify the states, which will implement the law. The states have also objected over the authority to decide on the criteria to identify the beneficiaries. e. A three-tier grievance redressal mechanism at district, state and national level is also part of the legislation. f. The Bill provides for women above 18 years to be considered the head of the beneficiary household for purpose of issue of ration cards. There shall be social audit of the functioning of ration shops. g. The entitlements would cost the government about Rs. 94,973 crore per annum, as against the existing food subsidy bill estimated at Rs. 67,310 crore. The food grains required to be procured to meet the obligations under the Bill is estimated at about 65 million tonnes, up from the average 50 to 55 million tonnes at present.
The Government had expressed concern that food subsidy, currently at Rs.63, 000 crore ($12 billion), may go up to Rs.1.2 lakh crore ($ 23 billion) if the bill is implemented. Rising fertilizer prices and the Minimum Support Price (MSP) of the grains was another concern.
Managing the finances would not be a problem but procurement would have to be improved. It is estimated that against the current procurement levels of 54 millions tons, the requirement may go up to 62 million tons.
Benefit for Women and Children:
About 2.25 crore pregnant women and lactating mothers are expected to benefit from the legislation that proposes to give Rs. 1,000 per month for six months as maternity benefit. Maternity benefits that are available only in 52 districts will be extended across the country. All this is commendable but there is need for caution since the economy is showing signs of sluggishness.
The budget deficit will need to be watched. Finding the money to fund the ambitious scheme would also be no mean task. With procurement of food grains required to rise from the current 54 million tons to 62 million tons, the Union government would be up against a major challenge especially in years of drought.
Aiming to empower women, the Bill also proposes that the ration card will be issued to the eldest female member of the family. The proposed Bill also holds great promises for children. Children in the lower and upper primary classes would be entitled to mid-day meals as per the prescribed nutritional norms.
Pscnotes.com Page 48
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
The union budget for 2011-12 had provided for Rs 55,586 crore for food subsidy. But while revised estimates are that the food subsidy bill this year will be around Rs. 63,000 crore, the new law would require more food grains and a lot more money to implement.
Fears have been expressed that the new Bill, as and when enacted, will fuel both shortages and inflation. The fears are not misplaced because in August this year, the food grain stock with the government was 61.27 million tons, short of what will be required to implement the scheme.
The annual procurement of food grains by the government stands at 54 million tonnes and will have to be raised to at least 62 million tons, if the scheme is to be implemented.
Implementation:
The draft law explains ways to implement the scheme and prescribes penalties for flawed delivery. While the state has to ensure uninterrupted supply of food-grain through the Public Distribution System (PDS), vigil on distribution will be through quarterly meetings between shop owners and representatives of local bodies who will be involved in the selection of the shop owner.
States will have to fully computerise their PDS within two years of the law and they ―shall provide a toll-free number and a website where consumers can register their complaints. All complaints shall be addressed within 39 days of receipt and records of the same shall be made available in the public domain, including the Internet,‖ says the draft.
A commissioner will be appointed in each state to monitor the scheme, suggest changes in it, investigate scarcities, and award penalties to public servants for failures. The penalties could be a fine of gross salary of one month up to five years for negligence, or imprisonment of six months to five years in case of ―deaths or serious morbidity‖.
The Manmohan Singh government is to earmark over Rs 50,000 crore for the right to food programme. Though details of the programme‘s rollout are yet to be firmed up, the government does not foresee any major hurdles in implementing the scheme. Government sources say the Bill could come up during the winter session of Parliament.
Keeping in mind substantial layoffs in select sectors, in the wake of the global economic crisis, the government is expected to expand the scope of the programme to include sectors such as textiles as well as large sections of agricultural labour impacted by volatilities in the food sector.
Under the public distribution system, the BPL category excludes large sections of the poor, including 52% of agricultural labour households. At present, food stocks with the government are upward of 50 million tonnes, more than twice the storage capacity of the Food Corporation of India, on the back of high rice procurement (30.65 million tonnes) and a record wheat buy (over 24.7 million tonnes).
The need for subsidised food-grain for a wider section of people is also reflected in increased off-take. While the off-take in the Antyodaya system is around 90%, showing people‘s desperate
Pscnotes.com Page 49
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 need for cheap food-grain, the off-take for BPL families increased from 7.367 million tonnes to 22.845 million tonnes in 2005-06, out of an allocation of 27.32 million tonnes.
As far as above the poverty line (APL) families is concerned, the off-take is much lower, not because people do not need the grain but because for several years there was not much difference in the APL price and the market price.
For the first time, the onus of identification and, more crucially, delivery of grain to consumers could be pinned on panchayats in rural areas and local governments in urban areas, entailing never-before accountability on records of allocation and off-take of grain.
A seamless marriage of current realities and provisions in the proposed legislation would also mean smoothing out existing wrinkles in food-grain availability and accessibility.
Key Issues:
There are three essential components of this proposal that need to be fleshed out. And these revolve around the issues of what and how much to give, at what prices and to whom. a. There is less ambiguity on the first issue of what and how much. The present entitlement for the Antyodaya Anna Yojana (AAY) is 35kg of food-grains per poor household. The Congress party manifesto, however, promises only 25kg per month, way below the minimum nutritional norms. Secondly, the present BPL (below poverty line) or AAY entitlements are only for food- grains (rice and wheat) and do not provide for any other nutritional requirements such as pulses, an essential source of protein. For a nutritionally secure strategy, it is imperative that a minimum 5kg of pulses be added to the basket. b. The second key issue is at what price. While the manifesto of the Congress party promises rice or wheat at Rs3 per kg, this is no better than the existing entitlement of the AAY. It is, in fact, higher than existing price of food-grains available to the BPL population in as many as eight major states of the country-Andhra Pradesh, Chhattisgarh, Gujarat, Karnataka, Kerala, Orissa, Tamil Nadu and West Bengal. These states account for 35% of the rural population. With Madhya Pradesh promising to follow suit, at least 40% of the rural population already enjoys food at Rs 3 per kg or less. c. However, the third issue is the most crucial, which it is the number of beneficiaries that will be covered by the proposed food security Act. The promise made by the Congress party in its manifesto limits the entitlement to only BPL families. It is here that there is a lack of consensus between the states and the Union government. Going by the present methodology, the government estimates that 65 million households are BPL households and makes the food-grain allocations to states based on this. This number may go down to less than 60 million if the 2004- 05 estimates from the Planning Commission are taken as the basis instead of the 1993-94 poverty figures that form the basis of the current estimates.
Pscnotes.com Page 50
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Against this, the total number of households that have been issued either a BPL or AAY card by state governments is 106.7 million. The state governments are currently doing this by providing additional subsidies from their own budgets.
In Andhra Pradesh, Tamil Nadu and Karnataka, for instance, it is almost universal, with around 80% of the population covered under the subsidized food scheme. Any attempt to restrict the number of beneficiaries to the present official poverty estimates (which are known to be flawed) will, therefore, lead to a reduction in the number of beneficiaries to almost half the existing number. Further, an Act should at least guarantee as much as is already being given.
While the estimate of poverty is one issue of contention, how to identify the beneficiaries for effective targeting is also unresolved. The problems with both these are well known and have been officially acknowledged with two expert committees working on resolving these.
The first committee headed by Suresh Tendulkar has been set up to examine the issue of estimation of poverty used by the Planning Commission and the second led by N.C. Saxena has been set up by the ministry of rural development to identify a suitable procedure for identification of BPL households. Both these committees are due to submit their report.
Providing subsidized grains is only one aspect of a food security Act. Such an Act should also address other issues such as malnutrition, especially among children and women, and social vulnerabilities due to barriers of age, caste, gender and disability.
Existing schemes such as the Mid-Day Meal Scheme or the Anganwadi programme for children under six, adolescent girls, pregnant and lactating mothers should also be brought into the ambit of the Act with strengthened universal entitlements. Such an Act has the potential to ensure that no person in the country sleeps hungry, and this must be realized.
Other View:
The proposed law aims to benefit 65 per cent of the population, which makes little sense unless the United Progressive Alliance (UPA) Government, by implication, is admitting that the vast majority, or two-thirds of the people of India, cannot survive without heavily subsidized food.
Since that is not the case, it remains inexplicable as to why such a large number of beneficiaries are being targeted. While it makes sense to protect the poorest of the poor from hunger and malnutrition, it is absurd to extend the same benefit to those who can do without heavily subsidized food.
Moreover, there are three related aspects, apart from enhanced and ill-affordable subsidy, which merit comment. First, the demand for food grains will result in a shift in agricultural patterns across the country with farmers focusing entirely on rice and wheat. This is bound to cause a shortfall in pulses and cash crops.
Pscnotes.com Page 51
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
To meet that shortage, Government will have to resort to imports which, in turn, will fuel prices. Second, a scheme of this nature can be implemented only if there is a flawless storage and distribution system since neither exists, implementation is bound to suffer.
Third, the main problem with the NAC- conceived cockamamie schemes is that they are premised on the one-size-fits-all logic. There may be States which would rather spend the money on projects that can fetch long-term benefits and sustainable economic security for the poor.
Growth in Hunger:
At the same time, it is most important to answer the questions being raised by those opposing NFSB. Today, development is only understood in the narrow terrain of economic growth and Indian policy makers seem to be infatuated by GDP numbers and their growth.
They have not stepped beyond their narrow, familiar paradigm and taken an interest in improving general living standards. How can Indian polity accept such a growth trend wherein 70 per cent of the total GDP is directly under the control of 8 per cent of India‘s elite?
Growth is important, because it helps create a conducive environment for the welfare of people. We cannot, however, accept a growth trajectory that curtails opportunities for the common people and allows grabbing of common resources for short-term gains.
While India‘s economy has been growing at a pace of 6 to 9 per cent in the past 12 years, under- nutrition among children has decreased by a trifling 1 per cent between 1998-99 and 2006. Should we accept a ‗mere token 0.1 per cent decline in childhood hunger per year?
We also need to be honest in accepting the fact that the under-fed cannot contribute to the country, even if provided with opportunities because of lack of capabilities. We will have to build an environment of empowerment with nutritional security. Otherwise, how can one expect that the hungry would go to the industries, set up with huge public resources and subsidies, and start working as labour or engineer?
The growth story has a flip side as well. The present level of malnutrition results in 2 to 3 per cent decline in GDP. It delays education, triggers learning disabilities and affects the overall physical and cognitive development of children right from the conception stage.
Every year, we lose 1.3 million children who do not celebrate their fifth birthday and die of under-nutrition and lack of healthcare. Now as the developed world, which has enjoyed the highest level of affluence, is being devastated by a debilitating economic crisis and citizens their protest the prevalent economic policies, it is time for India to decide whether peoples‘ well-being should be its priority, or just creating a tiny island of opulence for a handful of people.
It is believed that the Bill, in its present form, is not adequately endowed with a vision to address the very structural causes of food and nutritional insecurity in the country. Three basic issues are at hand.
Pscnotes.com Page 52
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
First, NFSB dwells on targeting beneficiaries, as against providing universal access, and re- invoking the contentious below poverty line (BPL)-above poverty line (APL) battle-lines by seeking to classify the population into ―priority‖ and ―non-priority‖ households.
The intended benefits will be given to people based on these categories. It is a well-known fact that successive governments have failed to identify the poor, and as a result, the majority of our population continues to live with hunger.
Two, the Bill provides for a supply of 7 kg per month subsidised food grains per person in ―priority‖ households, whereas the monthly requirement of a person is 14 kg. Third, the proposed entitlements do not deal with the problem of nutritional insecurity.
In India, people have suffered undernourishment mostly due to protein and fat deficiency. Hence, to cope with the problem, the government should have added pulses to compensate for protein and edible oil to replenish fat; the preamble of the Bill also mentions: ―… the Supreme Court of India has recognized the right to food and nutrition as integral to the right to life‖.
The National Nutrition Monitoring Bureau figures show that 76.8 per cent of the population does not receive the prescribed nutrition. We need a strong political commitment; otherwise ―growth in hunger‖ will be our leitmotif.
Increase in Food Subsidy:
Already, we are spending Rs. 67,310 crore on food subsidy, and there will be a tiny increase of another Rs. 30,000 crore if NFSB is enacted, which is a trifle 4 per cent of the taxes being usurped by the corporate- economists-government nexus. But consider the positive impact of this humane expenditure.
It will preserve human values and feed the 770 million people going hungry at present. The Indian government will only be giving a subsidy of Rs. 1,188 per person per year or Rs. 3.25 a day. The welfare politics has become very imperative in the past one decade or so.
The government has been running the Integrated Child Development Services, having a plan to spend Rs. 80,000 crore in the next five years; the Mid Day Meal scheme is already in place. We have 170 million children under the age of six, 45 per cent of them are undernourished but we barely spend Rs. 1.62 per child per day on their growth and nutrition.
There is an argument that it is better for the government to focus on productivity enhancement rather than focusing on doling out subsidies at the expense of tax-payers. But these two things are not mutually exclusive; they are complementary.
Let us understand one thing: India is not a food deficit country; we produce surplus food grains, but due to various reasons it does not reach a large number of our hungry people. If this continues, the argument of productivity will not hold any weight. Yes, it is true that we still have one of the lowest per hectare productivity, but this is also the time to think on the adverse impact of technologies on agriculture.
Pscnotes.com Page 53
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Strengthen PDS:
A part of this discussion is linked to public procurement and minimum support price (MSP) for farm produce. If the government stops subsidising agriculture, profit makers will benefit and consumers will have to pay high prices. Just take the example of pulses.
We pay Rs 36 per kg as MSP to the farmer for tuar dal, but its market price was Rs. 110 some time ago. There is an urgent requirement to ensure maximum public procurement, which can only be done and applied through the Public Distribution System (PDS).
The other aspect deals with policy perspective. For the past 20 years, the per capita food production in India is stagnant at around 460 grams per person per day; pulses are the key source of protein, but the availability has dipped from 70 g per day in the 1960s to 42 g in recent times.
We adopted new technologies: hybrid seeds, chemical fertilizers and pesticides in order to increase agriculture production. Punjab sacrificed its community techniques and blindly used large quantities of chemicals, which has resulted in low soil fertility. Overall, the present draft of the Bill is just a modest beginning. We have to think and decide what our priority is.
Central assistance to States/Union Territories (UTs) under National Food Security Act for meeting expenditure on intra-State movement & handling of foodgrains and Fair Price Shop (FPS) dealers‘ margin
The Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs, chaired by the Prime Minister Shri Narendra Modi, has approved the norms of the expenditure and pattern of central sharing on Central assistance to States/Union Territories (UTs) under the National Food Security Act, 2013 (NFSA). This assistance is used for meeting expenditure on intra-state movement and handling of foodgrains and FPS dealers‘ margin.
The norms of expenditure and pattern of Central sharing will be as follows:
Pscnotes.com Page 54
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Category of Norms of Expenditure Central Share(in States/UTs percentage) (Rate in Rs. Per quintal) Intra-State FPS dealers margin transportation and Basic Addl. Margin for handling sale through Point of Sale (PoS) device General 65 70 17 50 Special 100 143 17 75
The special category States/UTs are the seven States of North East, Sikkim, the Hill States of Himachal Pradesh, Jammu & Kashmir and Uttarakhand and Island UTs of Andaman & Nicobar Islands and Lakshadweep.
This decision will help in the smooth implementation of the NFSA and will benefit the people.
The assistance will be available to States/UT where implementation of NFSA has started. The estimated financial assistance likely to flow to States/UTs annually, when the Act is fully implemented in all States/UTs, is Rs. 4,341 crore.
Accepting the recommendations of the 14th Finance Commission the Government had hiked the share of States in Central taxes, from 32 percent to 42 percent, increasing availability of funds at their end. Inspite of the reduced share of Govt. of India, the GOI has agreed to this additional burden in the cost of transportation of foodgrains and margins to fair price shops to ensure that the beneficiaries will continue to get foodgrain at subsidised prices.
Implementation of NFSA has so far started only in 11 States/UTs. The period for identification of beneficiaries and implementation of the Act had to be extended twice, upto 04.04.2015 as its implementation is yet to start in the remaining 25 States/UTs. It has again been extended upto 30.09.2015 and it is expected that this decision on Central assistance will incentivise the States/UTs for early roll out of the Act.
Price stabilisation fund
The Fund was established with a corpus of 500 crore which aims to establish price stability through
1. Promotion of direct purchase from farmers /farmers’ associations at farm gate/Mandi. 2. Maintaining a strategic buffer stock that would discourage hoarding and unscrupulousspeculation.
Pscnotes.com Page 55
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
3. Protecting consumers by supplying such commodities at reasonable prices throughcalibrated release of stock.
It is a Central Sector Scheme, to support market interventions for price control of perishable agri-horticultural commodities.
The Fund will be managed by Prize Stabilization Fund Management Committee which willapprove all proposals from state government and central agencies and will be maintained asa corpus fund by Small Farmers Agribusiness Consortium (SFAC). Funding – o The States will have to set up a revolving fund to which Centre and State will contributeequally (50:50). o The Ratio will be 75:25 in North East states.
Food processing and related industries in India -scope and significance, location, upstream and downstream requirements, supply chain management.
Agro Food Processing
Food Processing Industry is of enormous significance for India‘s development because of the vital linkages and synergies that it promotes between the two pillars of the economy, namely Industry and Agriculture. India is world‘s second largest producer of food and has the potential to become number one in due course of time with sustained efforts. The growth potential of this sector is enormous and it is expected that the food production will double in the next 10 years and the consumption of value added food products will grow at a fast pace. This growth of the Food Processing Industry will bring immense benefits to the economy, raising agricultural yields, meeting productivity, creating employment and raising the standard of very large number of people throughout the country, specially, in the rural areas. Economic liberalization and rising consumer prosperity is opening up new opportunities for diversification in Food Processing Sector. Liberalization of world trade will open up new vistas for growth. The Food Processing Industry has been identified as a thrust area for development. This industry is included in the priority lending sector. Most of the Food processing Industries have been exempted from the provisions of industrial licensing under Industries (Development and Regulation) Act, 1951 with the exception of beer and alcoholic drinks and items reserved for Small Scale Sector, like vinegar, bread, bakery.
Pscnotes.com Page 56
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
As far as foreign investment is concerned automatic approval for even 100% equity is available for majority of the processed food items.
FOOD PROCESSING POTENTIAL IN INDIA
2nd largest arable land in the world -India has the tenth-largest arable land resources in the world with 161 million tonnes. With 20 agri-climatic regions, all 15 major climates in the world exist in India. The country also possesses 46 of the 60 soil types in the world Largest producer of milk -India is the largest producer of milk and second – largest producer of fruits and vegetables Largest livestock population-India has the largest livestock population of around 512 million, globally. This comprises 119 million milch (in-milk and dry) animals, 80.06 million goats and 44.56 million sheep, as of FY15. The segment contributes about 25 per cent to the country‘s farm GDP Rising consumption expenditure-Consumer spending in 2015 was USD1 trillion; it is likely to reach USD3.6 trillion by 2020 Source: World Travel and Tourism Council, Directorate of Statistics, TechSci Research Note: GDP - Gross Domestic Product FOOD PROCESSING Favourable location for exports -Strategic geographic location and proximity to food importing nations favour India in terms of exporting processed foods
FOOD PROCESSING- ADVANTAGE IN INDIA
Strong demand growth
Demand for processed food rising with growing disposable income, urbanisation, young population and nuclear families Household consumption set to double by 2020 Changing lifestyle and increasing expenditure on health and nutritional foods
Food processing hub
India benefits from a large agriculture sector, abundant livestock, and cost competitiveness
Pscnotes.com Page 57
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Investment opportunities to arise in agriculture, food infrastructure, and contract farming Diverse agro-climatic conditions encourage cultivation of different crops
Increasing investments
Government expects USD21.9 billion of investments in food processing infrastructure by 2015 Investments, including FDI, would rise with strengthening demand and supply fundamentals Launch of infrastructure development schemes to increase investments in food processing infrastructure
Policy support
Sops to private sector participation; 100 per cent FDI under automatic route. Investment in April 2000- March 2016 stood at USD6.82 billion Promoting rationalisation of tariff and duties relating to food processing sector Setting up of National Mission on Food Processing Foreign Trade Policy 2015-2020
THE FOOD PROCESSING SECTOR COMPRISES SIX MAJOR SEGMENTS
1. Fruits and vegetables –
India is the world‘s 2nd largest producer of fruits and vegetables. The government expects the processing in this sector to grow by 25 per cent of the total produce by 2025. In 2015-2016, the total production in horticulture sector (fruits and vegetables) is estimated at 282.5 million tonnes.
2. Milk
India is the largest producer of milk in the world, with the production estimated at 146.3 million tonnes in FY15 India is the largest producer of buffalo meat (1.4 MT in 2015) and the second largest producer of goat meat (0.91 MT in 2015).
3. Meat and poultry
India is also the second largest egg producer (78.4 billion) and third largest producer of broiler meat (4.2 million tonnes in 2016), globally
4. Marine products
Total fish production in India is estimated at 13.0 MT during 2015-16. Andhra Pradesh stood as the largest producer of fish with production of 741.3 Thousand Tonnes during 2015-2016 (upto June 2015)
Pscnotes.com Page 58
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
5. Grain processing
India produces more than 200 million tonnes of different food grains every year. Total food grains production reached 270.10 MT in FY16 (As per Ministry of Agriculture)
6. Consumer food
Among the fastest growing segments in India; it includes – Packaged food, Aerated soft drinks, Packaged drinking water, Alcoholic beverages
What need to be done to develop Food Processing Industries?
Major thing that Strongly Required to Develop Food Processing Sector
To create an appropriate environment for entrepreneurs to set up Food Processing Industries through: Fiscal initiatives/interventions like rationalization of tax structure on fresh foods as well as processed foods and machinery used for the production of processed foods. Harmonization & Simplification of food laws by an appropriate enactment to cover all provisions relating to food products so that the existing system of multiple laws is replaced and also covering issues concerning standards Nutrition, Merit goods, futures marketing, equalisation fund etc. A concerted promotion campaign to create market for processed foods by providing financial assistance to Industry Associations, NGOs/Cooperatives, Private Sector Units, State Government Organization for undertaking generic market promotion. Efforts to expand the availability of the right kind and quality of raw material round the year by increasing production, improving productivity Strengthening of database and market intelligence system through studies and surveys to be conducted in various States to enable planned investment in the appropriate sector matching with the availability of raw material and marketability of processed products Strengthening extension services and to the farmers and cooperatives in the areas of post harvest management of agroproduce to encourage creation of pre-processing facilities near the farms like washing, fumigation, packaging etc. Efforts to encourage setting up of agro-processing facilities as close to the area of production as possible to avoid wastage and reduce transportation cost. Promotion of investments, both foreign and domestic. Simplification of documentation and procedures under taxation laws to avoid unnecessary harassment arising out of mere technicalities.
INFRASTRUCTURAL DEVELOPMENT TO DEVELOP FOOD PROCESSING DEVELOPMENT
Pscnotes.com Page 59
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Establishment of cold chain, low cost pre-cooling facilities near farms, cold stores and grading, sorting, packing facilities to reduce wastage, improve quality and shelf life of products. Application of biotechnology, remote sensing technology, energy saving technologies and technologies for environmental protection. Building up a strong infrastructural base for production of value added products with special emphasis on food safety and quality matching international standards. Development of Packaging Technologies for individual products, especially cut-fruits & vegetables, so as to increase their shelf life and improve consumer acceptance both in the domestic and international markets Development of new technologies in Food Processing & Packaging and also to provide for the mechanism to facilitate quick transfer of technologies to field through a net work of R&D Institutions having a Central Institute at the national level with satellite institutions located strategically in various regions to cover up the whole Country and to make available the required testing facilities. This could be done by establishing a new institution or strengthening an existing one. Development of area-specific Agro Food Parks dedicated to processing of the predominant produce of the area e.g., apple in J&K, pineapple in North East, Lichi in Bihar, Mango in Maharashtra & Andhra Pradesh etc. etc Development of Anchor Industrial Centre and/or linkage with Anchor Industrial Units having net work of small processing units. h. Development of Agro-industrial multi- products units capable of processing a cluster of trans-seasonal produces.
BACKWARD LINKAGE TO DEVELOP FOOD PROCESSING DEVELOPMENT
Establishment of a sustained and lasting linkage between the farmers and the processors based on mutual trust and benefits by utilizing the existing infrastructure of cooperative, village panchayats and such other institutions Development of Futures Market in the best interest of both the farmers and the processors ensuring a minimum price stability to the farmer and a sustained supply of raw material to the processor. Mechanism to reduce the gap between the farm gate price of agroproduce and the final price paid by the consumer Setting up of an Equalisation Fund to ensure sustained supply of raw material at a particular price level and at the same time to plough back the savings occurring in the eventuality of lower price to make the Fund self-regenerative
FORWARD LINKAGE TO DEVELOP FOOD PROCESSING DEVELOPMENT
Establishment of a strong linkage between the processor and the market to effect cost economies by elimination of avoidable intermediaries. Establishment of marketing network with an apex body to ensure proper marketing of processed products. Development of marketing capabilities both with regard to infrastructure and quality in order to promote competitive capabilities to face not only the WTO challenge but to undertake exports in a big way
Pscnotes.com Page 60
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Operational Guidelines for the Scheme for Creation of Infrastructure for Agro-processing Clusters
The Ministry has formulated the Scheme for Creation of Infrastructure for Agro Processing Clusters as a sub-scheme of Central Sector Scheme - “Kisan SAMPADA Yojana‖ coterminous with the 14th Finance Commission cycle. The scheme aims at development of modern infrastructure to encourage entrepreneurs to set up food processing units based on cluster approach. The scheme is to be implemented in area of horticulture / agriculture production identified through a mapping exercise. These clusters will help in reducing the wastage of the surplus produce and add value to the horticultural / agricultural produce which will result in increase of income of the farmers and create employment at the local level.
Objectives of the Scheme
The major objectives of the scheme are:
1. To create modern infrastructure for food processing closer to production areas. 2. To provide integrated and complete preservation infrastructure facilities from the farm gate to the consumer. 3. To create effective backward and forward linkages by linking groups of producers / farmers to the processors and markets through well-equipped supply chain.
Salient Features of the Scheme
At least 5 food processing units with an aggregate investment of minimum Rs. 25 crore will be set up in the Agro-processing cluster. These units may be setup by the promoters and associates of Project Execution Agency (PEA) and by other entrepreneurs. The investment in these units will not be eligible under this scheme. Food processing units will be set up simultaneous to the creation of core infrastructure in the cluster. The core infrastructure facilities being developed in the agro-cluster shall be as per the requirement of food processing units to be set up in the cluster or as per the available raw material for processing in the area. Agro-processing clusters may be developed by: the promoter(s) willing to set up own units in the cluster and also allow utilization of common infrastructure to other units in the area; the promoter(s) willing to develop common infrastructure for use by the units to be set up in the food processing cluster by other entrepreneurs; the promoter(s) willing to develop common infrastructure in the existing food processing clusters However, lead promoter shall setup at least one food processing units in the cluster with an investment of not less than Rs. 5 crore. The extent of land required for establishing the agro-processing cluster would depend upon the business plan of Project Execution Agency (PEA), which may vary from project to project. At least 10 acres of land for the project shall be arranged by the PEA either by
Pscnotes.com Page 61
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
purchase or on lease of at least 50 years. The GOI grant shall not be used for procurement / purchase of land. Preference will be given to setting up agro-clusters in agri-horti clusters identified by Central / State Governments, if any. It is expected that on an average, each project may have around 5-10 food processing units to be set up in each Agro-processing cluster with an employment generation potential, both direct and indirect of about 500 to 1500 persons. This employment generation will provide livelihood to about 6000 persons based on an average household size of 4 members. However, the actual configuration of the project may vary depending upon the business plan for each Agro –processing cluster. The food processing industries that make food products fit for human and animal consumption (except alcoholic products ) may be permitted to be set up in these clusters. Packaging facilities of food products as ancillary to the food processing industries (proposed to be setup in the cluster) may also be allotted land in the agro cluster.
Land reforms
In rural India, land is the single most important productive asset owned by the people
Why are land reforms needed?
Land reforms serve two purpose: raise productivity and end exploitation of the underprivileged Institutional factors such as existence of feudal relations, insecurity of tenure, high rents, sub-division and fragmentation of land are disincentives for the cultivator to raise production They reduce the capacity of the farmer to save and invest in agriculture. Surplus is siphoned off by the semi-feudal landlords The measures of land reforms such as land ceiling and floor aims to make the best use of a scarce resource like land and generate maximum output.
But productivity can be raised through technological factors as well. Why land reforms?
Land reforms and technological change are not mutually exclusive. They are complementary in the process of agricultural development.
Discuss the scope of land reforms.
Abolition of intermediaries Tenancy reforms i.e. rent reforms, security of tenure and ownership of land to the cultivator Setting land ownership ceiling and floors Preventing fragmentation of land and consolidation of holdings Organisation of co-operative farms
Pscnotes.com Page 62
UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019
Can land reforms be effective in alleviating poverty? If yes, how?
Surplus land can be procured through land reforms. This can be used in the following way for poor
By providing ownership of land By fixing rents and providing security of tenure Preventing the transfer of tribal land to non-tribal people By consolidation of holdings to raise productivity By making provisions for access of women to land By earmarking public land that can provide access to fuel and fodder to the rural poor By providing house sites to rural poor for residential purpose
Having mentioned the scope of land reforms in India, we can now go into detail in each of those reforms mentioned
Abolition of Intermediaries
Before Independence, three major types of land tenure systems existed in India: Zamindari, Mahalwari and Ryotwari.
Tenancy Reforms
Three types of tenants: occupancy or permanent tenants, tenants at will, sub-tenants Tenants at will and sub-tenants experience high degree of exploitation {through frequent enhancement of rent, eviction at minor pretexts and beggar} NSS in 1953-54 estimated that about 1/5th of the total area under cultivation was held under tenancy. Besides, there was also informal or oral tenancy accounting for anything between 30-40 percent of the total cultivated area. Measures of tenancy reforms include: conferment of ownership rights, security of tenure, regulating rents Regulation of rents o 1st and 2nd plans recommended that rents should not exceed one-fourth or one- fifth of the gross produce. o Several states enacted legislations Pscnotes.com Page 63 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Security of tenure o Insecurity of tenure leads to lack of initiative on the part of the cultivator to improve productivity of land o Three types of legislations were framed by the states for providing security of tenure o In the first type, tenants – full security, owners- no right of personal cultivation (UP, Bengal, Delhi) o Second, owners have right to resume a limited area for own cultivation but tenant should have a minimum area for cultivation (Kerala, MP, Guj-Maha etc) o Third, owners can resume certain area but tenant not entitled to retain a minimum area for cultivation (J&K, Manipur etc) o Many forced ‗volunatary surrenders‘ were made by the tenants due to the power of the landlords. Ownership right o The second plan had provided ownership to be optional. This wasn‘t effective. Hence in third plan, recommendation was made that the peasants be required to purchase the land o Legislations for the same enacted in UP, MP, Kerala, Karnataka, Orissa, Maha- Guj. Optional in Punjab Ceiling on Land Holdings Why do we need such ceilings? o Land is the principal source of income in the rural areas. Social justice is compromised if land is concentrated in hands of few o Application of capital intensive techniques in agriculture will lead to large scale unemployment. Hence it is necessary to have a large number of small peasant proprietors. But aren‘t small farms less productive? o No conclusive proof. o Contradicting studies exist Legislation on ceiling in India has been enacted in two phases o Upto 1972, landowner was treated as the unit of application o After 1972, family was treated as the basis of land holding. Problems relating to ceiling o Malafide transfers o Compensation and allotment of surplus land Till 1972, no land was declared surplus in Bihar, Karnataka, Orissa and Rajasthan Only about 23 lakh acres were declared surplus (till 1972) New ceilings were prescribed in 1972 Till 2004, a total of 73.36 acres of land was declared surplus out of which 54 lakh acres has been distributed to 54.84 lakh beneficiaries. Tardy progress of land ceilings may partly be explained by litigation Is land ceiling a failure? Pscnotes.com Page 64 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 A large number of loopholes existed in the legislation, making evasion possible Law provided a number of exemptions for sugarcane farms, orchards, grazing land etc. They exemptions were used for vested interests SC ruled that compensation should be paid at market rate The definition of family under the legislations made it possible to still amass huge land holdings Appraisal of LR Reasons for poor performance Lack of political will Absence of pressure from below because the poor peasants are passive and unorganised Apathetic attitude of the bureaucracy Legal hurdles Lack of proper land records Loopholes in the laws So how can it be improved? Judiciary should not be involved at any stage in the implementation of land reforms Organise rural peasantry into strong trade unions Provide representation to poor peasantry in the administrative machinery Pg 571 IMPACT OF NEW ECONOMIC POLICY India's post-independence development strategy showed all the signs of stagnation, but the economy started showing the sign of recovery in the early nineties when the government adopted the new economic model known as Liberalization, Privatization and Globalization (LPG) to meet a grave economic crisis; characterized by unprecedented adverse balance of payment problem, inflation, decline in the foreign exchange reserve and the Gross Domestic Product (GDP) growth rate. The objective of the economic reforms adopted by the Indian Government was to transform a backward and predominantly agrarian economy, lacking in basic infrastructure, into a modern developed economy. New Economic Policy 1991 India opened up the economy in the early nineties following a major crisis that led by a foreign exchange crunch that dragged the economy close to defaulting on loans. The credibility of country's economy reached the sinking level and no country was willing to advance or lend to India at any cost. The country ran out of foreign exchange reserves. To face the crisis situation, the government decided to bring about major economic reforms to revive Indian economy. These reforms were popularly known as 'structural adjustments' or 'liberalization' or 'globalization'. Pscnotes.com Page 65 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The government announced a New Economic Policy on July 24, 1991. The new policy deregulates industrial economy in a substantial manner. New Economic Policy of India-1991 The major objective of the new policy is to make Indian economy a part of the world economy. The policy aimed at: 1. Utilizing fully the indigenous capabilities of entrepreneurs. 2. Fostering research and development efforts for the development of indigenous technologies. 3. Raising investments. 4. Improvement in efficiency and productivity. 5. Controlling monopolistic power. 6. Assigning the right areas for the public sector undertakings. 7. Ensuring welfare as also skills and facilities to the workers to enable them to face new technologies. 8. Retaining the capacity to earn our own foreign exchange through exports. 9. To achieve self-reliance. Some of the steps taken to liberalize and globalize Indian economy were: 1. Devaluation: The first step towards globalization was taken with the announcement of the devaluation of Indian currency by 18-19 percent against major currencies in the international foreign exchange market. In fact, this measure was taken in order to resolve the BOP crisis 2. Disinvestment: In order to make the process of globalization smooth, privatization and liberalization policies are moving along as well. Under the privatization scheme, most of the public sector undertakings have been/ are being sold to private sector. 3. Dismantling of the Industrial Licensing Regime: Industrial licensing was abolished for almost all product categories. The only industries which are now reserved for public sector are defence equipment, atomic energy generation and railway transport on account of environmental safety and strategic considerations. 4. Allowing Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) across a wide spectrum of industries and encouraging non-debt flows. The Department has put in place a liberal and transparent foreign investment regime where most activities are opened to foreign investment on automatic route without any limit on the extent of foreign ownership. Some of the recent initiatives taken to further liberalize the FDI regime, inter alias, include opening up of sectors such as Insurance (upto 26%); development of integrated townships (upto 100%); defense industry (upto 26%); tea plantation (upto 100% subject to divestment of 26% within five years to FDI); enhancement of FDI limits in private sector banking, allowing FDI up to 100% under the automatic route for most manufacturing activities in SEZs; opening up B2B e-commerce; Internet Service Providers (ISPs) without Gateways; electronic mail and voice mail to 100% foreign investment subject to 26% divestment Pscnotes.com Page 66 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 condition; etc. The Department has also strengthened investment facilitation measures through Foreign Investment Implementation Authority (FIIA). 5. Non Resident Indian Scheme the general policy and facilities for foreign direct investment as available to foreign investors/ Companies are fully applicable to NRIs as well. In addition, Government has extended some concessions especially for NRIs and overseas corporate bodies having more than 60% stake by NRIs 6. Throwing Open Industries Reserved for the Public Sector to Private Participation. Now there are only three industries reserved for the public sector 7. Abolition of the (MRTP) Act, which necessitated prior approval for capacity expansion 8. The removal of quantitative restrictions on imports. 9. The Reduction of the Peak Customs Tariff from over 300 per cent prior to the 30 per cent rate that applies now. 10 Wide-ranging Financial Sector Reforms in the banking, capital markets, and insurance sectors, including the deregulation of interest rates, strong regulation and supervisory systems, and the introduction of foreign/private sector competition has been introduced. Let us now discuss all the three processes-globalization, liberalization and privatization separately and their impact. Due to various controls, the economy became defective. The entrepreneurs were unwilling to establish new industries (because laws like MRTP Act 1969 de- motivated entrepreneurs). Corruption, undue delays and inefficiency raised due to these controls. Rate of economic growth of the economy came down. So in such a scenario economic reforms were introduced to reduce the restrictions imposed on the economy. Globalization Broadly speaking, the term 'globalization' means integration of economies and societies through cross country flows of information, ideas, technologies, goods, services, capital, finance and people. Cross border integration can have several dimensions - cultural, social, political and economic. The Policies and developments in many countries including India are influenced by the globalization. Globalization is not only a movement of ideas, information, capitals, people, technologies, goods and services, and labour across the nation-states but has serious implications on socio-economic and political sphere of life. Limiting ourselves to economic integration only, one can see the three channels of globalization (a) trade in goods and services, (b) movement of capital and (c) flow of finance and (d) movement of people. The globalization through economic integration has been presented as the best, natural and universal path towards development of mankind. Process of Globalization (a) The integration of the national economy with that of the global economy. Pscnotes.com Page 67 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 (b) The conversation of a national market into an international one, which facilitates the international mobility of factors like production or commodities. (c) An economic as well as a political, social, and cultural integration with rest of the world, though it varies greatly from country to country, which in turn depends on the development of means and modes of communication in a particular country. In current economic literature, the term 'globalization' is used to mean liberal "outward oriented" policy, which includes eliminating anti export biases, lowering of a very high import tariffs, placing lesser reliance on quantitative restrictions on imports. This is the aim of the liberalization policy adopted by India. However, the "outward-looking" policy does not mean that government would completely abandon all forms of control and place the entire economy to remove certain imbalances and restrictions, which hamper free flow of trade. Globalization also aims at making greater number of goods and services available to the people, at relatively cheaper prices. Thus, it is believed, globalization would generally improve the economic performance of the nation. Main Features of Economic Globalization From about the end of 19th century, key technological developments in transportation and communication as well as of trade have contributed to the increasing economic integration of the world. Some fundamental aspects of globalization include: 1. Post Industrialism: According to David Harvey, there has been a transition (shift) from 'fixed' industrial system to regime of 'flexible accumulation' characterized by flexibility in labour processes, products and patterns of consumption; and increasing mobility of capital and labour. This 'post industrial' system is marked by increasing centralization of capital in the hands of big corporations at one end, and flourishing of small business at the other, with the former dominating the latter. Capitalism is becoming more tightly organized. Since there is more centralized control over trade enabled by growth of information technology and reorganization of global financial system. 2. World Trade: World trade links geographically dispersed produces and consumers. While USA became the largest trading nation in 20th century, GATT established in 1947, aimed at freer trade through agreed reduced tariffs, led to the growth of world trades and reduction in relative share of major industrial powers in world trade. Major push is towards globalization of markets. 3. Multinational Corporations: Integration of global economy has given raise to MNC's which are powerful not only economically but politically also. Overall, 51 of the largest economies in the world are corporations. According to the UN Development Programme, 500 corporations now control 70% of the world's trade and 80% of its foreign investment. 4. New International Division of Labour: Internalization of capital since the 1970's had led to economic restructuring reflected in deindustrialization of developed countries and a shift to tertiary (service) sector activities such as banking, finance, specialized administrative services, etc. while manufacturing and assembly operations are exported to less developed countries where labour is cheap and laws are lax. But it was noticed that with technological innovations such as automation, computerization, the question of cheap labour does not arise; labour productivity can be enhanced with lesser number of Pscnotes.com Page 68 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 workers. Hence major shift in industrial organization is to new systems of flexible specialization, just-in-time delivery TQM, etc. Rather than direct investment by first world MNC's in third world through local subsidiaries, there is now a wide variety of negotiated agreements: joint ventures, marketing agreements, secondary sourcing, subcontracting various kinds of limited alliances. MNCs look at less developed countries mainly not as a source of cheap labour and raw materials but as expanding local markets and potential industrial partners. 5. Financial Markets: IMF has started controlling the finance aspect. As a result of debt crisis, countries turn to IMF, which then imposes devaluation of currency, structural adjustment programme and other conditions. Global financial institutions exert enormous control over the domestic policies of member countries and in 1980's, they started advocating liberalization, privatization and globalization. MNC's have started demanding free capital movement and opening of capital and other markets. Positive Impact of Globalization 1. Multilateral agreements in trade, taking on such new agendas as environmental and social conditions. 2. New multilateral agreements for services, Intellectual properties, communications, and more binding on national governments than any previous agreements. 3. Market economic policies spreading around the world, with greater privatization and liberalization than in earlier decades. 4. Growing global markets in services. People can now execute trade services globally -- from medical advice to software writing to data processing that could never really be traded before. 5. Physical and geographical boundaries are crumbling and the world is becoming a global village. Nation states today no longer have to play market-making role, so wool, wine, perfumes can belong to any market anywhere in the world. 6. With nation states and nationalities disappearing, ethnicities and national loyalties are fading out. Customers are only concerned about the products quality, price, design, value and appeal. 7. Globalization has created an economically interdependent international Environment. Each country's prosperity is interlinked with the rest of the world and no nation can exist in isolation solely dependent on its domestic market. The Interlinked Economy (ILE) of the Triad (the US, Europe and Japan) joined by aggressive economies such as Taiwan, Hong Kong and Singapore have become a successful union and has become so powerful that it has swallowed most consumers and corporations, made traditional national boundaries disappear and pushed bureaucrats, politicians towards that status of declining industries. 8. In an interlinked global economy, the key success factor shifts from resources to the market place, in which one must participate in order to prosper. People are the only true means to create wealth and therefore governments everywhere have to only ensure access to the best and the cheapest goods and services from anywhere in the world. This implies less interference in the business decisions. There is lowering of trade tariffs and custom barriers and deregulation of certain sectors to increase abundant supply of goods and market place competitiveness. Pscnotes.com Page 69 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 9. There has been an increasing trend towards privatization of the manufacturing and service sectors. Government owned and managed businesses suffered from an attitude of complacency, lack of enterprise and so were performing poorly. To get rid of loss making units especially public sectors, business were handed over to private entrepreneurs who were given greater access and freedom and were able to show better results. Thus privatization becomes the result of economic compulsion. Globalization in Brief The government announced a New Economic Policy on July 24, 1991. The context of huge fiscal deficits, crisis in the balance of payment situation, falling foreign exchange reserves and conditions imposed by IMF led to the announcement of the New Economic Policy by the Government of India, in 1991. The new economic policy resulted in radical change in the structure and direction of Indian economy. The direction tends towards the market economy and globalization of the country. The major objective of the new policy is to make Indian economy progressive and also to make Indian economy a part of the world economy. Globalization, a new key word of the 21st century to an economic event, a unifying process that has drawn lives all around that world into its fold. Globalization is best understood in terms of developing markets, deregulating business activities, privatizing state enterprises, lowering national barriers and expanding world trade and investment, all creating world community. Advantages Disadvantages 1. Borderless world 1. Low growth of agriculture sector 2. Powerful corporations 2. Rise in rural-urban divide 3. Global citizens 3. Adverse impact on autonomy of state 4. Interlinked economies 4. Adverse impact on culture 5. Global legal regimes 5. Adverse impact on environment 6. Deregulation and lowering of trade 6. Bankruptcy of many employments and tariff barriers generating firms 7. Privatization and 7. Change in structure of trade 8. Efficient technological innovations 8. Unemployment 9. Human rights violation Negative Impact of Globalization 1. Low Growth of Agriculture Sector Agriculture has been and still remains the backbone of the Indian economy. It plays a vital role not only in providing food and nutrition to the people, but also in the supply of raw material to industries and to export trade. In 1951, agriculture provided employment to 72 per cent of the population and contributed 59 per cent of the gross domestic product. However, by 2001 the share of agriculture in the GDP went down drastically to 24 per cent and further to 22 per cent in 2006-07. This has Pscnotes.com Page 70 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 resulted in a lowering the per capita income of the farmers and increasing the rural indebtedness. The agricultural growth of 3.2 per cent observed from 1980 to 1997 decelerated to two per cent subsequently. The Eleventh Five Year Plan aims at four per cent growth rate in agriculture. The reasons for the deceleration of the growth of agriculture are given in the Economic Survey as: Low investment, imbalance in fertilizer use, low seeds replacement rate, a distorted incentive system and low postharvest value addition continued to be a drag on the sectors performance. With more than half the population directly depending on this sector, low agricultural growth has serious implications for the inclusiveness of growth. The number of rural landless families increased from 35 per cent in 1987 to 45 per cent in 1999, further to 55 per cent in 2005. 2. Rise in Rural-Urban Divide Impact is clearly visible on urban life but rural life in India has not changed much. People are still living in houses made of mud barring houses of few rich and progressive farmers. Government has initiated several developmental programs for uplift of living standards of people but full benefits have not reached to the targeted population due to corruption prevalent in administrative and political systems. Pradhan Mantri Gramin Sadak Yojna has resulted in road connectivity in rural India but roads are of poor quality and without drainage support. Toilet and lavatory systems are not of standard quality and not even constructed in all houses of the village. Life in rural India is miserable due to non-availability of electricity. Several states in India claim that 40, 50 or even 100 percent villages have been electrified. But supply of electricity to villages that have been electrified is not more than 3-4 hours per day. Globalization has widened the gap between the rich and poor, rises inequalities and mounts debt of developing countries. The World Commission report found unequal distribution of growth and disparities across the nations and increasing unemployment and poverty. According to the report, the per capita income of the 20 richest capitalist countries went up to 121 times during 1985- 2001. The inequality was increased in a large number of countries; while in 16 countries inequality has static and only in case of nine countries the inequality has declined. The Human Development and the ILO studies found increase in unemployment worldwide. Globalization leads to widening income gaps within the countries. Globalization benefits within a country only to those who have the skills and the technology. The higher growth rate achieved by an economy can be at the expense of declining incomes of people who may be rendered redundant. In this context, it has to be noted that while globalization may accelerate the process of technology substitution in developing economies, these countries even without globalization will face the problem associated with moving from lower to higher technology. Pscnotes.com Page 71 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 3. Adverse Impact on Autonomy of State Globalization is also known to constrain the authority and autonomy of the state. Free trade limits the ability of states to set policy and protect domestic companies. Capital mobility makes generous welfare states less competitive; global problems exceed the grasp of any individual state; and global norms and institutions become more powerful. 4. Adverse Impact on Culture Globalization leads to cultural homogeneity: and diminish difference; global norms, ideas or practices overtake local mores. Many cultural flows, such as the provision of news, reflect exclusively western interests and control; and the cultural imperialism of the United States leads to the global spread of American symbols and popular culture. 5. Adverse Impact on Environment Globalization has also contributed to the destruction of the environment through pollution and clearing of vegetation cover. With the construction of companies, the emissions from manufacturing plants are contributing to environmental pollution which further affects the health of many individuals. The construction also destroys the vegetation cover which is important in the very survival of both humans and other animals. Chemical Pesticides and herbicides have created health hazards, animals were pumped full of hormones and antibiotics, which has resulted in diseases among them. Such commercial, agriculture and animal raising have proved dangerous to human life. In India, Chlorine, petro-chemicals, caustic soda and such other chemical industries have sprang up in large number since 1991-92. This has encouraged import of chemicals polluting the environment. 6. Change in Structure of Trade India's share in trade of agriculture products with developed countries has declined. These countries are getting many subsidies by WTO. On the other hand, developing countries are rejected on the bans of sanitary and phytosanitary consideration. 7. Bankruptcy of many Employment Generating Firms Globalization has rendered many companies and their operations redundant. So either they are closed, wholly or partly, or are hived off or their ancillary units are declared sick. For example, the decision of Hindustan Organic Chemicals to cease its benzene operations has caused closure of many related units. This in turn adversely affected the lives of its employees. Pscnotes.com Page 72 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 8. Unemployment A blackish of globalization has been widespread unemployment either due to technological innovations or diversifications or relocations or closure of companies. Employees have also been retrenched because of the companies' cost cutting measures due to the recent global slow down. 9. Human Rights Violation As the supremacy of many states decline and that of corporations rise, capacity of the latter to violate the rights of people or to create conditions in which rights becomes harder to exercise or protect, has increased tremendously. Against this backdrop it is not surprising that shocking reports surface about MNCs making considerable profits at the expense often people. The Bhopal gas tragedy of December 1984 killing over 8000 people was the most corporate human rights violations and the MNC involved was none other than the chemical giant Union Carbide. Liberalization Liberalization is understood to be the situation of the political economy where the means of production will be in the hands of the market and the economic efficiency is measured in terms of market-defined objectives. Major economic activities are opened for private participation keeping only key issues of welfare and other regulatory mechanism with the state. This opening up of various sectors for private participation and allowing them to manage the businesses for maximizing the profits will clearly underline the freedom available for the market to have their own labour participation practices and deployment of human resources. Liberalisation thus aims minimizing the labour participation and downsizing the workforce in the industry in the name of removing the dead wood to maximize efficiency. In the Indian context, economic liberalization includes the following: 1. Dismantling of industrial licensing system 2. Reduction in physical restrictions on imports and import duties 3. Reduction in controls on foreign exchange, both current and capital account 4. Reform of financial system 5. Reduction in levels of personal and corporate taxation 6. Reduction in restrictions on foreign direct and portfolio investments 7. Opening up public sector domains like power, transport, banking etc 8. Partial privatization of public sector units 9. Change in approach towards industrial sickness 10. Softening of MRTP regulations Pscnotes.com Page 73 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Effects of Liberalization The economic reforms of the 1990s swept away the oppressive licensing controls on industry and foreign trade, allowed the market to determine the exchange rate, drastically reduced protective customs tariffs, opened up to foreign investment, modernised the stock markets, freed interest rates, strengthened the banking system and began privatisation of public enterprises. Airline, telecom, TV broadcast and insurance were opened for private players. The consequences have been far-reaching. First, the opening up of foreign trade and investment (and a competitive exchange rate) boosted exports, services and inward remittances enormously; today they account for 20 per cent of the GDP compared to 10 per cent in 1990. Flourishing external commerce and rising foreign investment dethroned the baleful deity of "foreign exchange scarcity", which had justified four decades of dreadful economic policy and draconian, corruption-spawning controls. Today's open economy is more productive and more resilient to shocks like high oil prices. With over $140 billion of forex reserves, strong exports and low external debt, the recent surge in global oil prices has not derailed the economy's forward momentum. Second, the mix of industrial decontrol, greater foreign competition and a modernised capital market fostered the rise of strong Indian firms, built by unshackled entrepreneurs able to compete globally. Today's household brands like Infosys, Jet, Airtel and Videocon hardly existed a decade ago. Established companies like Tata, Reliance and HLL reinvented themselves to meet competition. This led to larger advertising budgets, which sustained the media explosion (print and TV) of the past decade that has helped to mould a new mindset. Pscnotes.com Page 74 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Third, the post-crisis reforms of the early 1990s restored (then improved) the growth momentum of the 1980s and ensured a quarter century of nearly 6 per cent economic growth. With average living standards rising at almost 4 per cent a year, the poverty ratio dropped below a quarter of the population and the catch phrase of "a rising middle class" gained substance. Today, over a 100 million Indians live in households with incomes between Rs.2 lakh and Rs.10 lakh a year. Fourth, the strong improvement in the country's external finances and sustained growth over 25 years also raised India's economic and political profile in the world. In a real sense, the 1990s' economic liberalisation freed India's foreign and defence policies from economic weakness and dependence on foreign aid. A more assertive strategic policy became possible. 1. Liberalization was reinforced by the conclusion of the Uruguay round of multi-lateral trade negotiation in 1994 and the establishment of WTO. 2. The expansion of regional integration efforts also stimulates the trend towards liberalization. 3. Liberalization policies have significantly widened the effective economic space available to producers and investors. 4. Producers and investors behave as if the world economy consisted of a single market and production platforms with regional or national sub-sections rather than as a set of national economies linked by trade and investment flows. 5. However, liberalization is also endangered by the rise of national protectionism and the use of economic sanctions by the leading economic powers. Privatization Privatization is a process that reduces the involvement of the state or the public sector in the economic activities. Privatization implies many on the government sectors are sold or given to private individual hands to run them. Privatization is frequently associated with industrial or service-oriented enterprises, such as mining, manufacturing or power generation, but it can also apply to any asset, such as land, roads, or even rights to water. In recent years, government services such as health, sanitation, and education have been particularly targeted for privatization in many countries." Pscnotes.com Page 75 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 In recent years, privatization has been suggested as a measure to cure problems related to the public sector such as mounting losses, low profitability, and underutilization of capacity, etc. There has been rising interest in privatization process in the developing countries in the recent past. In fact, Bimal Jalan (former RBI Governor) has argued that it is the low return of investment in the public sector enterprises that is to a large extent, responsible for the fiscal crisis of the Central Government. Serious problems are observed in the form of: 1. Insufficient growth in productivity 2. Poor project management 3. Lack of continuous technological up-gradation 4. Inadequate attention to research and development and human resources development In addition, public enterprises have shown a very low rate of return on the capital investment. This had hindered their ability to regenerate themselves in terms of new investments as well as in technology development. The outcome is that many of the public enterprises have become a burden rather than being an asset to the government. Privatization is an essentially effective tool for restructuring and reforming the public sector enterprises running without significant aim and mission as private sector is perceived to be fundamentally more self motivated, prolific and reliable for superior quality of products and services. Privatization can be of three prominent types: 1. Delegation: Government keeps hold of responsibility and private enterprise handles fully or partly the delivery of product and services. 2. Disinvestment: Government surrenders the responsibility. 3. Displacement: The private enterprise expands and gradually displaces the government entity. Positive Impact of Privatization Pscnotes.com Page 76 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Privatization indeed is beneficial for the growth and sustainability of the state-owned enterprises. The advantages of privatization can be perceived from both microeconomic and macroeconomic impacts that privatization exerts. 1. Microeconomic Advantages 2. State owned enterprises usually are outdone by the private enterprises competitively. When compared the latter show better results in terms of revenues and efficiency and productivity. Hence, privatization can provide the necessary impetus to the underperforming PSUs. 3. Privatization brings about radical structural changes providing momentum in the competitive sectors. 4. Privatization leads to adoption of the global best practices along with management and motivation of the best human talent to foster sustainable competitive advantage and improvised management of resources. 2. Macroeconomic Advantages 3. Privatization has a positive impact on the financial health of the sector which was previously state dominated by way of reducing the deficits and debts. 4. The net transfer to the State owned Enterprises is lowered through privatization. 5. Helps in escalating the performance benchmarks of the industry in general. 6. it can initially have an undesirable impact on the employees but gradually in the long term, shall prove beneficial for the growth and prosperity of the employees. 7. Privatized enterprises provide better and prompt services to the customers and help in improving the overall infrastructure of the country. Negative Impact of Privatization Privatization in spite of the numerous benefits it provides to the state owned enterprises, there is the other side to it as well. Here are the prominent disadvantages of privatization: 1. Private sector focuses more on profit maximization and less on social objectives unlike public sector that initiates socially viable adjustments in case of emergencies and criticalities. 2. There is lack of transparency in private sector and stakeholders do not get the complete information about the functionality of the enterprise. 3. Privatization has provided the unnecessary support to the corruption and illegitimate ways of accomplishments of licenses and business deals amongst the government and Pscnotes.com Page 77 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 private bidders. Lobbying and bribery are the common issues tarnishing the practical applicability of privatization. 4. Privatization loses the mission with which the enterprise was established and profit maximization agenda encourages malpractices like production of lower quality products, elevating the hidden indirect costs, price escalation etc. 5. Privatization results in high employee turnover and a lot of investment is required to train the lesserqualified staff and even making the existing manpower of PSU abreast with the latest business practices. 6. There can be a conflict of interest amongst stakeholders and the management of the buyer private company and initial resistance to change can hamper the performance of the enterprise. 7. Privatization escalates price inflation in general as privatized enterprises do not enjoy government subsidies after the deal and the burden of this inflation affects the common man. Impact of Privatization on Indian Economy 1. It frees the resources for a more productive utilisation. 2. Private concerns tend to be profit oriented and transparent in their functioning as private owners are always oriented towards making profits and get rid of sacred cows and hitches in conventional bureaucratic management. 3. Since the system becomes more transparent all underlying corruption are minimized and owners have a free reign and incentive for profit maximisation so they tend to get rid of all free loaders and vices that are inherent in government functions. 4. Gets rid of employment inconsistencies like free loaders or over employed departments reducing the strain on resources. 5. Reduce the government's financial and administrative burden. 6. Effectively minimises corruption and optimises output and functions. 7. Private firms are less tolerant towards capitulation and appendages in government departments and hence tend to right size the human resource potential befitting the organizations needs and may cause resistance and disgruntled employees who are accustomed to the benefits as government functionaries. 8. Permit the private sector to contribute to economic development. 9. Development of the general budget resources and diversifying sources of income Impact of Economic Reforms Process on Indian Agricultural Sector Agricultural sector is the mainstay of the rural Indian economy around which socio-economic privileges and deprivations revolve, and any change in its structure is likely to have a corresponding impact on the existing pattern of social equality. No strategy of economic reform can succeed without sustained and broad based agricultural development, which is critical for raising living standards, alleviating poverty, Pscnotes.com Page 78 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 assuring food security, generating buoyant market for expansion of industry and services, and making substantial contribution to the national economic growth. Studies also show that the economic liberalization and reforms process have impacted on agricultural and rural sectors very much. According to [Bhalla97], of the three sectors of economy in India, the tertiary sector has diversified the fastest, the secondary sector the second fastest, while the primary sector, taken as whole, has scarcely diversified at all. Since agriculture continues to be a tradable sector, this economic liberalization and reform policy has far reaching effects on (I) agricultural exports and imports, (ii) investment in new technologies and on rural infrastructure (iii) patterns of agricultural growth, (iv) agriculture income and employment, (v) agricultural prices and (vi) food security. Reduction in Commercial Bank credit to agriculture, in lieu of this reforms process and recommendations of Khusrao Committee and Narasingham Committee, might lead to a fall in farm investment and impaired agricultural growth. Infrastructure development requires public expenditure which is getting affected due to the new policies of fiscal compression. Liberalization of agriculture and open market operations will enhance competition in ―resource use‖ and ―marketing of agricultural production‖, which will force the small and marginal farmers (who constitute 76.3% of total farmers) to resort to ―distress sale‖ and seek for off-farm employment for supplementing income. Unfortunately, the reforms story is only half done. Large swathes of the economy remain stifled by old systems and heavy handed, corruption-breeding controls. Reform is still absent in the electricity sector, in the provision of roads, water and sanitation, in the decaying government primary education and healthcare, in the tragically anti-employment legacy of labour laws, in the bureaucratic machinery for agricultural support services, in municipal taxation and finances, and, above all in the creaky, unresponsive edifice of public administration and governance. Until reforms make headway in these areas, India's "tryst with destiny" will remain elusively in the future. Pscnotes.com Page 79 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Industrial Policy .csC57700C4{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font- size:12pt;font-weight:bold;font-style:normal;} .cs4CCFA306{text-align:left;margin:0pt 0pt 4pt 0pt;background-color:#FFFFFF;list-style- type:disc;color:#000000;font-family:Arial;font-size:10pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal} .csA7555675{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font-size:12pt;font- weight:normal;font-style:normal;} .cs40314EBF{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 10pt 0pt;line-height:1.15} Objectives: To create high quality world class infrastructure facilities in the State and enhance connectivity to the National Capital Region (NCR) and other leading markets. To provide single window facilitation in the State to expedite project clearances and provide an investor friendly climate. To provide and facilitate expeditious land availability for setting Industrial ventures and Infrastructure projects. To promote and encourage private sector participation in the development/management of Industrial Estates/Areas, Growth 3 Centers, IIDCs, Special Economic and Commodity Zones and Parks, Theme Parks, Tourism infrastructure, development of new tourist destinations, Airports/Helipads/Airstrips, Roads, generation, transmission and distribution of power, and projects in the area of Horticulture, Floriculture, Bio- technology etc. To provide assured, good quality, uninterrupted and affordable power for industries. To simplify and rationalize labour laws and procedures in tune with the current day requirements To promote Small scale, Cottage and Khadi and Village Industries and Handicrafts Silk and Handloom sectors To address problems of sickness and incipient sickness in Industry, SSIs and facilitate required restructuring and rehabilitation, etc. To promote Industries based on local resources particularly in the Areas of Agriculture, Horticulture, Agro & Food Processing and Floriculture. To promote planned and scientific exploitation of the mineral resources of the State and maximize value addition within the State. To promote leading edge technologies and sunrise industries in the State in the areas of Information Technology and Bio-Technology. To promote public/private sector involvement in generation of power and strengthening of the transmission and distribution network. Pscnotes.com Page 80 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 To promote Tourism as a focus area and develop Uttaranchal as a premier global tourism destination. To provide special attention for setting up industries in remote areas. To develop and strengthen air, road, rail and other connectivity. To develop Uttarakhand as a premier education and research centre. Salient Features: Single Window Contact, Information and Facilitation by District Industries Centres and SIDCUL. Single Window Clearance Mechanism Time Bound Deemed Clearances. Establishment of Udyog Mitra. Development and Promotion of Industrial Estates by providing Land/Plots to Entrepreneurs. Encouraging Private Sector Participation. Professional Advice to the Projects for developing infrastructure by U-DEC Mega Projects Over 50 Crores will be considered for grant of further concessions. State Government and SIDCUL will provide financial credit to the entrepreneurs. Enhancement of Current Power Production of State. Simplification of Labour Laws. Development of Remote and Hilly Powers Emphasis on Khadi and Village industries Development of Handicrafts, Handlooms, Wool Based Industry, Agro and Food Processing Industry, Floriculture etc. Special attention to the Tea Industry and Forest Based Industry. Schemes for IT industry, Biotech Industry and Industry Based on Herbal & Medicinal Plants. Benefits: 100% Central Excise exemption for 10 years on items other than those mentioned in the negative list in the Concessional Industrial Package announced by the Central Government. 100% Income Tax exemption for first 5 years and 30% for next 5 years for the Companies and 25% for others. Capital Investment Subsidy @15% with a maximum of Rs. 30 Lakhs. (Rs. 3 million). Exemption from entry tax on Plant & Machinery for setting up Industry or undertaking substantial expansion and modernization. Land use conversion and development charges and regime will be rationalized. Stamp duty concessions will be provided in respect of land in specialized commodity parks, including I.T. parks. Pscnotes.com Page 81 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 For the purpose of Interest Incentive, Substantial Expansion shall mean additional investment of not less than 25% of the undepreciated book value of plant and machinery of an industrial unit. For revival/rehabilitation of sick SSI units, interest incentive @ 3% with a maximum of Rs. 2 lakhs per annum shall be provided on the loan taken under fully tied up revival and rehabilitation package from financial institutions, banks etc. In the case of sick non-SSI units, Government will sympathetically consider measures required under revival/rehabilitation package drawn by Operating Agency/Financial Institutions/Banks. 100% exemption on Entertainment tax will be allowed for Multiplex projects in the State for a period of three years, and for all new amusement parks and ropeways for five years. 75% of the Total Expenditure subject to a maximum of Rs.2 lakhs incurred in obtaining national/internationally approved quality marks such as ISO series certificate etc., shall be reimbursed to the entrepreneurs provided that the reimbursement / grant availed for this from all sources should not exceed the total expenditure on this head. 75% of the cost subject to a maximum of Rs. 2 lakhs shall be made available to the entrepreneurs in the shape of assistance for registering their patents, provided that the total reimbursement/grant availed for this from all sources should not exceed the total expenditure on this head. For educated unemployed youth, financial loan assistance for projects upto Rs. 2 lakhs in case of Manufacturing/Service Industry and projects upto Rs. 1 lakh in business sector Industries generating employment opportunities shall be encouraged. Purchase preference and price preference will be given to State SSIs in State purchases. Purchase preference shall be accorded to Non-SSI units within the State vis-avis units outside the State. Matching State subsidy on approved projects of National Horticulture Board (NHB), Agricultural & Processed Food Products Export Development Authority (APEDA), National Medicinal Plant Board (NMPB) subject to a maximum of Rs. 20 Lakhs and subject to a total subsidy not exceeding over 50% of the project cost. Infrastructure Development Dams, Roads, Rails (Including Airways And Ports) .cs29802EFF{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Calibri;font- size:12pt;font-weight:bold;font-style:italic;text-decoration: underline;} .cs71E23436{text-align:left;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 0pt;line-height:1.5;list-style- type:square;color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Wingdings;font- size:12pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal} Pscnotes.com Page 82 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 .cs8926E06{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Calibri;font- size:12pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal;} .csDD06F40C{color:#333333;background-color:#FFFFFF;font-family:Calibri;font- size:12pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal;} .cs86F678F4{color:#333333;background-color:#FFFFFF;font-family:Calibri;font-size:12pt;font- weight:bold;font-style:italic;text-decoration: underline;} .csE127C53{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 10pt 0pt;line-height:1.5} .cs1DF4367C{text-align:left;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 0pt;line-height:1.5;list-style- type:square;color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Wingdings;font- size:12pt;font-weight:bold;font-style:italic} .cs783EB594{text-align:left;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt -27pt;line-height:1.5;list-style- type:square;color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Wingdings;font- size:12pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal} .cs5BEC2C28{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Calibri;font- size:12pt;font-weight:bold;font-style:normal;} .cs5E18F5{text-align:left;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 0pt;line-height:1.5;list-style- type:square;color:#191919;background-color:transparent;font-family:Wingdings;font- size:12pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal} .cs84F69667{color:#191919;background-color:#FFFFFF;font-family:Calibri;font-size:12pt;font- weight:normal;font-style:normal;} Infrastructure Development- Dams, Roads, Rails (Including Airways and Ports) The availability of efficient infrastructure services is an important determinant of the pace of market development and output growth. Historically, the infrastructure sector has been one of the key drivers of growth of the Indian economy and has shown positive growth in the current reporting year as well. Development of the infrastructure sector has been a priority area for the government and has witnessed enhanced public investment. Many reforms have been initiated in the infrastructure sector, resulting in robust growth in most of the sectors. Major infrastructure sectors, namely power, road, railways, civil aviation, ports and telecommunication, have performed better during the year. The sector is highly responsible for propelling India‘s overall development and enjoys intense focus from Government for initiating policies that would ensure time-bound creation of world class infrastructure in the country. Infrastructure sector includes power, bridges, dams, roads and urban infrastructure development. In 2016, India jumped 19 places in World Bank's Logistics Performance Index (LPI) 2016, to rank 35th amongst 160 countries Road Sector Pscnotes.com Page 83 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Road transport is considered to be one of the most cost effective and preferred modes of transport, both for freight and passengers, keeping in view its level of penetration and last mile connectivity in populated areas. A good road network is vital to the economic development and social integration of the country. It provides connectivity to remote areas, accessibility to markets, schools, and hospitals; and opens up backward regions to trade and investment. Roads also play an important role in inter-modal transport development, establishing links with airports, railway stations, and ports. The capacity of National Highways in terms of handling traffic (passenger and goods) needs to be in pace with the industrial growth. India has one of the largest road networks of over 54.72 lakh km. It comprises National Highways, Expressways, State Highways, Major District Roads, Other District Roads and Village Roads with following length distribution: National Highways / Expressway 1,03,933 km State Highways 1,61,487 km Other Roads 52,07,044km Total 54,72,464 km National Highway Authority of India National Highways Authority of India (NHAI) has been set up by an Act of the Parliament viz. The National Highways Authority of India Act, 1988. It has been entrusted with the National Highways Development Project, along with other projects (Special Accelerated Road Development Plan –North East & Special Projects in Madhya Pradesh, Maharashtra, Tamil Nadu and West Bengal). This brings under its purview 48590 kms of National Highways as on 31.03.2016. Vision of NHAI Pscnotes.com Page 84 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 To meet the Nation‘s need for the provision and maintenance of National Highways network to global standards and to meet the user‘s expectations in the most time bound and cost effective manner, within the strategic policy framework set by the Government of India and thus promote economic well-being and quality of life of the people. Mission of NHAI o To develop, maintain and manage National Highways vested in it by the Central Government. o To regulate and control the plying of vehicles on National Highways for its proper management. o To develop and provide consultancy and construction services in India and abroad, and carry out research activities in relation to the development, maintenance and management of highways or any other facilities there at. o To advise the Central Government on matters relating to highways. o To assist on such terms and conditions as may be mutually agreed upon, any State Government in the formulation and implementation of schemes for highway development. Rail Sector Interesting facts about India Railways Indian Railways started its service 161 years ago on 16 April 1853 when the first passenger train was run over a stretch of 33 kilometres from Mumbai to Thane. The train with 14 railway carriages, carrying around 400 guests, left Bori Bunder at 3:30 p.m. that day. It was declared a public holiday then. Nationalised in 1951, Indian Railways is today the largest rail network in Asia and the world‘s second largest network operated under a single management. It has 115,000 km of track length. It runs 12,617 trains to carry over 23 million passengers daily – equivalent to moving the entire population of Australia – connecting more than 7,172 stations. Railways runs more than 7,421 freight trains carrying 3 million tonnes (MT) of freight every day. It has entered a select club of railways that includes China, Russia and USA in carrying more than one billion tons of freight annually. Indian Railways has over 239,281 freight wagons, 59,713 passenger coaches and 9,549 locomotives. A separate budget for the Railways has its genesis in the recommendations of the 10- member Acworth Committee in 1920-21, headed by British railway economist William Acworth. Following his report, the railway finances of India were separated from the general government finances in 1924. In the post-Independence era, railways accounted for 75% of public transport and 90% of freight. Hence, the need for a separate budget. Today, in contrast, the share has reduced to 15% and 30%. Pscnotes.com Page 85 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The first live telecast of railway budget took place on 24 March 1994. Lalu Prasad Yadav, who remained Railway Minister from 2004 to May 2009 presented the railway budget six times in a row. In 2000, Mamata Banerjee, who is the current Chief Minister of West Bengal, became the first woman Railway Minister. In 2002, she also became the first female railway minister to present the railway budget. Additionally, she holds the record of being the only woman who presented the railway budget for two different governments in the centre (NDA and UPA). India‘s fastest train has successfully completed a trial run at 160 km per hour. In a few months, with the rollout of the first semi-high speed train, passengers will be able to travel between Delhi and Agra in just 90 minutes, cutting the journey time by 30 minutes. The New Delhi-Bhopal Shatabdi is currently the fastest train on the Indian Railways network. It reaches a maximum speed of 150 kmph on the Faridabad-Agra section. The Metupalayam-Ooty Nilgiri Passenger train, which runs at an average speed of 10 kmph, is the slowest train. The New Delhi Railway Station has secured a place in the Guinness Book of Records for having the world‘s largest Route Relay Interlocking System. This system is put to use where multiple tracks are interlocked. It helps divert train movements during periods of high traffic volumes. With over 1.4 million employees on its rolls, Indian Railways is the world's seventh largest employer after the US Department of Defence, the Chinese Army, Wal-Mart, China National Petroleum, State Grid of China and British Health Service, according to The Economist. The renovated platform at Gorakhpur Railway Station in Uttar Pradesh has become the world's longest, measuring 1,366 meter. Until recently, Kharagpur in West Bengal was the longest platform at 1,072 meter, followed by State Street Center subway station in Chicago at 1,067meter. Indian Railways is building the world‘s highest railway bridge-five times the height of Qutub Minar and 35 meters taller than Eiffel Tower. It will come up over the Chenab river on the under construction rail link to the Kashmir Valley. The bridge will rise 359 meters over the Chenab on the Udhampur-Srinagar-Baramulla Rail Link Project. Currently, the world‘s tallest rail bridge runs over France‘s Tarn river. Indian Railways‘ longest tunnel is Pir Panjal that links Kashmir Valley with Banihal in Jammu. It runs for a distance of over 11.2 km. The train with the longest route is Vivek Express. Running between Dibrugarh and Kanyakumari, it covers 4,286 km in around 82 hours and 30 minutes. Toilets were introduced on Indian Railways in 1909, more than half a century after the start of operations. Indian Railways started computerized reservation in New Delhi in 1986. Station with the shortest name is Ib in Odisha. Venkatanarasimharajuvariipeta is the station with the longest name (29 letters). This is sometimes spelled with 'Sri' prefixed. Four sites of Indian Railways have been declared as ―World Heritage sites‖ by the UNESCO. These are Darjeeling, Himalayan Railway inscribed in 1999, Mumbai CST Building inscribed in 2004, Neelgiri Mountain Railways inscribed in 2005 and Kalka- Shimla Railways inscribed in 2008. Pscnotes.com Page 86 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The Fairy Queen, plying between New Delhi and Alwar in Rajasthan, is the oldest functioning steam engine in the world. It has been listed in the Guinness Book of World Records and has also received the Heritage Award from the International Tourist Bureau, Berlin. Airports There are a total of 454 airports in India, out of which around 90 are open for commercial services and 16 are designated as international airports. Delhi and Mumbai are by far the busiest airports in India, carrying almost 2.5 times traffic as the next busiest airport. Air traffic has increased rapidly in the last decade, although this has slowed down in the last few years. During the period 2007-08 to 2012-13, Passenger traffic and Freight traffic grew at a cumulative annual growth rate of 6.4% and 5.0% respectively. Indians are still flying in much greater numbers. However, a number of Indian airlines have faced challenging market conditions in the recent years, and the rate of growth is likely to be significantly less than initially projected, estimates suggest that passenger traffic is expected to grow to 320 million by 2022-23 (an annual cumulative growth rate of 8.44%). It is anticipated by the civil aviation ministry that domestic cargo will grow by 8 times during the period 2009-10 to 2031-32 from its level of 2009-10 whereas international cargo will grow by 7.6 times. The growth so achieved has put tremendous pressure on current airport infrastructure in the country. The Indian Government has projected that an investment of around US$ 12 billion in the next five year plan will be needed to help cope with additional demand, and private sector participation is expected to play a key role. 75% of the investment envisaged in the next five year plan is expected to be contributed by private sector. The private sector has already invested heavily to upgrade the airport infrastructure in several cases, with private participation in recent years at Delhi, Mumbai, Hyderabad, and Bangalore. Greenfield airport projects are planned in emerging Tier II cities such as Goa, Pune, Navi Mumbai, and Kannur. Pscnotes.com Page 87 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Further, 35 non-metro airports are proposed for development, which provide excellent avenues for private contracting and bringing in international technologies for construction. Ports India is blessed with a coastline of more than 7500 kms and countess opportunities for natural ports. Ports in India are classified as Major and Non-Major Ports. There are currently 13 Major ports in India, out of which are under the jurisdiction of Central Government of India. Additionally, there are more than 180 non-major ports governed by the state governments. However, only about 60 of these non-major ports are currently operational. The eastern coast of India generally deals with Bulk Cargo, while the western coast deals majorly in containerized cargo transport. Ports in India handle more than 90% of the country‘s trade by weight. Overall Indian ports handled close to 1 Billion MT of cargo in 2012-13. Port traffic expected to grow at a CAGR of 12% to reach 2500 million tonnes by 2019-20, with non-major ports expected to lead the growth and ease capacity constraints of Major Ports. 43 port modernization and expansion projects are currently under implementation with an estimated cost US$ 2 billion. These projects are expected to provide capacity addition of about 220 MT. Current capacity of major ports in India is 745 MMT against the traffic of 545.79 MMT 2012-13, giving them a capacity utilization of 73%. India‘s existing ports infrastructure is not sufficient to handle the increased loads, even where ports have already been modernised. There are capacity constraints with containerization level at only 25% as compared to global average of 60-70%. Further, ports face huge congestion and average time for clearing import-export cargo is about 19 days. This is due to bottlenecks at almost all levels of the chain, including cargo handling and offtake capacities of road/ Improving transport networks is just one of many challenges currently facing India‘s ports, which have seen massive swells in the amount of goods transported. Pscnotes.com Page 88 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 In addition to improving road and rail connections, projects related to port development (construction of jetties, berths, container terminals, deepening of channels to improve draft, etc.), will provide major opportunities for construction firms Dams History and extent of dams in India India‘s first dam is the Kallanai built on the Cauvery river by King Karikalan of the Chola dynasty around 2,000 years ago. The dam, which is still functional and irrigates millions of acres, spans 329 m in length and 20 m in width. However, it was only post-independence that India‘s love for big dams became more intense with the commissioning of a slew of projects including the Hirakud (1957), Gandhisagar (1960), Bhakra-Nangal (1963) and Nagarjuna Sagar (1967). Since then, the country has been continuously working on reining in its rivers for want of power, irrigation and domestic and industrial water supply needs. Almost half of the large dams in the country were built in the two decades of 1970-90. Maharashtra has the maximum number of large dams in the country (1845) followed by Madhya Pradesh (905) and Gujarat (666). A multi-purpose dam project includes one or more dams, infrastructure for generation of hydropower, infrastructure for housing of workers and for offices, a distribution network of canals and pipe systems, and access roads. All these have their individual and cumulative impacts on the river and the surrounding environment. Here also lies an opportunity to minimise the 'collateral damage' caused by dam projects by minimising the footprint of these adjuncts. Dams as power generators Pscnotes.com Page 89 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Hydropower is often billed as a renewable, economic and non-polluting source of energy and hence there is an increased emphasis on building dams especially in the hydrologically-rich but geologically-fragile Himalayan states. An assessment study put the hydroelectric power potential of the country at about 84,000 MW with maximum schemes envisaged on Brahmaputra basin (226) followed by Indus basin (190) and Ganga basin (142). Possibility of revenue generation through sale of power units to other states and private players remains the main draw for state governments to invite project developers. However, reports suggest that poor financial conditions of discoms make it a poor proposition. Average generation per MW of hydro capacity in India in 2014-15 was over 20 per cent less than that in 1993-94. Dams and canals for irrigation Canal system of irrigation had been prevalent in India for centuries but it was the Ganga Canal that laid the foundation for large scale diversion of water to farms. Though the work was undertaken under the leadership of British Colonel Proby Cautley, it was the traditional acumen of local villagers that made the vast network possible. The canal was commissioned in 1855 irrigating around 5,000 villages. Today, the system irrigates nearly 9,000 km² of agricultural land in 10 districts of Uttar Pradesh and Uttarakhand. The start of the Green Revolution in the mid 1960s put the spotlight on canal irrigation as the new hybrid crop varieties bred on heavy dose of chemical fertilizers and pesticides demanded assured irrigation. However, the increased investment and network expansion dealt little benefits. The World Commission on Dams in its year 2000 report found that the contribution of large dams to increased food grains production in India was less than 10 percent. Loss in seepage, huge demand-supply gap, diversions under political pressures and comparatively easier and local availability of groundwater through pervasive use of borewells are the reasons for decline in efficiency trend. Between 1996-97 and 2002-03, the area under canal irrigation declined by 2.4 million ha (13.8 per cent), the area under tank irrigation fell by 1.4 million ha (42.4 per cent), and the area irrigated by all other sources declined by 1 million ha (28 per cent). The only irrigation source that increased its share was groundwater wells, by 2.8 million ha (more than 9 per cent). A study of 210 major and medium irrigation projects by SANDRP used the data supplied by the Ministry of Agriculture to show that after investing Rs 130,000 crore, these delivered 2.4 million ha less irrigation during 1990-1 to 2006-7. This means, the governments have to invest twice as fast in canal irrigation projects every year just to keep their command areas from shrinking The study said that around Rs 1,00,000 crore was wasted in the name of improving irrigation. Feasibility studies were fudged in the case of most of the projects with huge investments, over-optimistic predictions were made and very little money was earmarked for basic maintenance such as desiltation. In some cases, political interests ensured that water was diverted to unviable areas at the cost of needier regions. Pscnotes.com Page 90 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Dams and flood control The efficiency of dams to withhold floods has always been put to question. Critics have also termed dams as harbinger of floods claiming that the essential scientific assessment for consistent release of water to avoid build up is rarely done. Absence of a standard operating procedure for releasing water from the dam gates was evident in 2014 when 24 students picnicking in a river were swept away due to sudden release of water from Larji dam in Himachal Pradesh. Similarly, area downstream of Hirakud dam in Odisha has witnessed 14 floods in recent past with nine caused by sudden release of water from the dam. A major reason is that the dam has not changed its flood control strategy for 23 years while the rainfall pattern has undergone major changes in local areas. Lack of a coordination mechanism between neighbouring states about water flow also leads to emergency situations like one in 2011 when sudden release of water flow from upstream dams in Chhattisgarh led to breaching of danger mark in Hirakud. In Gujarat, sudden release of large quantities of water from Ukai dam led to the biggest flood of 34 years in Tapi river submerging over 80 per cent of Surat, killing 150 persons and stranding over 20 lakh. Similar examples have been reported from other states. Science and Technology-developments and applications in everyday life and in National Security Professor Freeman J. Dyson, of Institute of Advanced Studies, Princeton, in his book ―Infinite in all Directions,‖ had this to say about Technology: “Technology is a gift of God. After the gift of Life, it is perhaps the greatest of God’s gifts. It is the mother of civilization, of Arts and of Sciences. Technology continues to grow to liberate mankind from the constraints of the past. The most revolutionary aspect of technology is its mobility. Anybody can learn it. It jumps easily over barriers of race and language. And its mobility is still increasing.” Developments in science and technology are fundamentally altering the way people live, connect, communicate and transact, with profound effects on economic development. To promote tech advance, developing countries should invest in quality education for youth, and continuous skills training for workers and managers. Science and technology are key drivers to development, because technological and scientific revolutions underpin economic advances, improvements in health systems, education and infrastructure. The technological revolutions of the 21st century are emerging from entirely new sectors, based on micro-processors, tele-communications, bio-technology and nano-technology. Products are transforming business practices across the economy, as well as the lives of all who have access to their effects. The most remarkable breakthroughs will come from the interaction of insights and applications arising when these technologies converge. Through breakthroughs in health services and education, these technologies have the power to better the lives of poor people in developing countries. Eradicating malaria, a scourge of the African continent for centuries, is now possible. Pscnotes.com Page 91 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Cures for other diseases which are endemic in developing countries are also now possible, allowing people with debilitating conditions to live healthy and productive lives. Access and application are critical. Service and technology are the differentiators between countries that are able to tackle poverty effectively by growing and developing their economies, and those that are not. The extent to which developing economies emerge as economic powerhouses depends on their ability to grasp and apply insights from science and technology and use them creatively. Innovation is the primary driver of technological growth and drives higher living standards. As an engine of growth, the potential of technology is endless, and still largely untapped in Africa and other developing world regions across the globe. Less developed countries not only lack skilled labour and capital, but also use these less efficiently. Inputs account for less than half of the differences in per capita income across nations. The rest is due to the inability to adopt and adapt technologies to raise productivity. Computing for example, through unlocking infrastructure backlogs and managing integrated supply chains, can transform economic performance by enabling affordable and accessible services in education and healthcare. The combination of computers and the Internet, and mobile devices and the “cloud”, has transformed human experience, empowering individuals through access to knowledge and markets, changing the relationship between citizens and those in authority, as well as allowing new communities to emerge in virtual worlds that span the globe Role of science and technology for future development The role of science and technology in a future Indian society may be broadly stated as one of meeting felt needs by technological innovation and scientific advancement and of realizing long- term national goals for the next century. These goals fall under the following headings: 1. To ensure national security and social stability- For a country like India, conserving energy and oil-substitutable energy is vital. Food technology is similarly important to maintain social stability. Science and technology are expected to play a vitally important role in ensuring national security and social stability. 2. To sustain the growth of the national economy and to improve its efficiency In the past, technological progress made only a minor contribution to the growth of national income, and this should be changed. Furthermore, the technological gap with developed countries should be reduced in certain strategically selected areas. 3. To prepare for a smooth transition to an information society Societal change to an information society will demand the development of information-related industries centred around micro-electronics, communications, computers, etc. Moreover, reducing the labour component of production systems through automation technology will require re-education of displaced labour. Pscnotes.com Page 92 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 4. To improve the quality of life Technology in areas of public health such as disease control, medicine and medical electronics needs to be developed. Another area is the protection of the environment for better dwelling conditions on the one hand, and for increased productivity of the land on the other. Development of information technology directly related to daily living, it should be noted, will increase social benefits, and this in turn will help reduce urbanization. The preference for urban living will disappear with the development of an information system on a nationwide scale. 5. To create a new culture suitable for the new society A conflict between traditional cultural values and progressive contemporary values has existed in Indian society during the recent process of industrialization. A national consensus should be created for the development of science and technology. Another far-reaching goal of science and technology is the creation of a new culture for the next century Long-term goal of S&T development The long-term goal of science and technology should be in accordance with that of national development. Because of the limitation in available resources, priority areas should be established through consideration of, among other things, national needs and comparative advantage. The role of S&T is to lead national development and to support socio-economic needs. The priority areas that have been identified are: Development of electronics, information, and communication technologies. Development of selected high technologies to lead the industrial structure adjustment. Development of key technologies to increase the international competitiveness of existing Korean industries. Development of technologies related to resources, energy, and food for social and economic stability. Development of technology in the area of health care, environmental protection, and social information systems to improve the quality of life and social benefits. Fostering of creative basic research to promote scientific advancement and to expand sources of technological innovation. These priority areas were identified using the following basic criteria: o Economic return and growth potential in view of limited development resources. o Probability of success in view of development capability and experience. o Indispensability in relation to national security and socio-economic stability. o Industrial and technological linkage. o Future contribution in relation to public welfare and new industrial possibilities. Science and Technology Role in Industrial Development Pscnotes.com Page 93 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 India is aggressively working towards establishing itself as a leader in industrialisation and technological development. Significant developments in the nuclear energy sector are likely as India looks to expand its nuclear capacity. Moreover, nanotechnology is expected to transform the Indian pharmaceutical industry. The agriculture sector is also likely to undergo a major revamp, with the government investing heavily for the technology-driven Green Revolution. Government of India, through the Science, Technology and Innovation (STI) Policy-2013, among other things, aspires to position India among the world’s top five scientific powers. Industrial development encourages the development of science and technology. The industrial enterprises conduct research and develop new products. Ethanol in the form of biofuel is an example of industrial development. Industry conducts research on its wastes and develops byproducts like biodiesel from Jatropha seeds. Due to industrialisation, we have made progress in atomic science, satellite communication and missiles etc Government Initiatives A five year technology fund with US$ 4 million yearly investment, called Israel India Innovation Initiative Fund (I4F), has been launched by India and Israel to boost bilateral ties. Mr Nitin Gadkari, Minister for Road Transport, Highways and Shipping, Government of India, is planning to introduce biofuel vehicles for road and water transportation on a large scale and has already directed Niti Aayog to conduct a research on methanol-powered vessels like cars and ships developed by China. The Department of Science and Technology (DST), Government of India has launched a scheme named 'Visiting Advanced Joint Research Faculty' (VAJRA), in a bid to bring together the Indian scientists abroad and India-based researchers for conducting joint researches in India. The Government of India aims to develop India into a global innovation hub by 2020 on the back of effective government measures taken to provide an enabling environment for growing research and development in India, says Mr Y. S. Chowdary, Minister of State for Science and Technology & Earth Sciences, Government of India. Developments/Investments: With support from the government, considerable investment and development has incurred in different sectors such as agriculture, healthcare, space research, and nuclear power through scientific research. For instance, India is gradually becoming self-reliant in nuclear technology. Recently, the Kudankulam Nuclear Power Project Unit-1 (KKNPP 1) with 1,000 MW capacity was commissioned, while the Kudankulam Nuclear Power Project Unit-2 (KKNPP-2) with 1,000 MW capacity is under commissioning. Role of Science and Technology in Urbanisation Pscnotes.com Page 94 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Urbanization is a key environmental issue as well. The rapid pace at which urbanization is taking place in the developing world has an impact on climate change and other global environmental issues. Cities account for more than two-thirds of the global energy demand and result in up to 80 per cent of global greenhouse gas emissions. The urban planning and investment choices that a few large developing countries will make therefore represent one of the most important environmental issues of the twenty-first century. Entire new industries are forming with the aim of switching to clean and renewable energies and managing the world’s resources in a more efficient manner, primarily in developed countries but also in the developing world. Role of science, technology and innovation in the urban context Science, technology and innovation are key elements of sustainable urbanization and will play a growing role as such. Their use may not solve all urbanization problems, yet can provide a multitude of solutions that can be leveraged by cities. The use of science, technology and innovation in the urban context implies the application of both high and low technology and innovative approaches to urban planning and institutional innovation. Science, technology and innovation approaches are widely available for cities to draw upon, yet cities are complex structures that require integrated responses to their problems and there are sometimes difficulties related to such integration. Urban systems need to be designed with multiple uses in mind. Science, technology and innovation offer a range of related options, including high technology, low technology and innovative governance. Combining science, technology and innovation to solve urban problems is often contextual, although there are several good practices to draw upon from cities across the globe. Science, technology and innovation contribute to sustainable urbanization in a variety of ways, including with regard to new capabilities in spatial planning, socioeconomic research, and enhancing cooperation between urban departments, optimizing mobility and enabling sustainable resource management. A science, technology and innovation-oriented mindset also brings about innovative models of thinking in urban governance, such as for participatory budgeting and regional urban planning. Finally, science, technology and innovation contribute to social inclusion by improving the tools available to urban planners to respond to the needs of excluded groups and to increase sensitivity to gender equality. Each urban setting faces different challenges and has different technology needs. In some cases, inexpensive and readily available technologies may be the best solution to urban problems. For example, intermodal transport services can be designed without necessarily requiring expensive high technology means of transport. Promoting bicycles, an affordable, healthy, clean and energy-efficient technology, may be the best option to improve mobility in many cities, for both younger and older citizens. Furthermore, innovation, which in the urban context may refer to any new method, business model, policy, institutional design or regulation, could meet the needs of urban populations in a more efficient, effective and sustainable way. Pscnotes.com Page 95 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 For instance, improved rules or legislation, as well as improved institutions, stakeholder participation models and new means of delivering services, can contribute to sustainable urbanization. As a final point, high technology, low technology and urban innovation can also be integrated to address a specific urban issue in harmony Sustainable urban resource management by Science and Technology Science, technology and innovation for urban energy conservation Science, technology and innovation for waste management Science, technology and innovation for resource-efficient buildings Science, technology and innovation for water and agriculture-- Urban farming and market gardening, Water technologies, Phyto-remediation India's Science and Technology policy The thrust of the Scientific Policy Resolution, 1958 was on capacity-building in advancement of science as the foundation for making a strong nation, which had just freed itself from the shackles of colonial domination . The focus of the Technology Policy Statement, 1983 was attainment of technological self-reliance and building of national strength by reducing vulnerability in strategic areas . The Science and Technology Policy, 2003 launched a massive programme for attracting our best talents to the arena of research in basic sciences, so that India continues to earn respect in a competitive knowledge society. The Science, Technology and Innovation Policy (STIP), 2013 has put our science, technology an innovation (STI) system as the driver for faster, sustainable and inclusive growth . The latest policy envisages creation of a new STI ecosystem, which finds solutions to societal problems and facilitates the entire innovation chain from knowledge to wealth creation, while at the same time attracting best students to this area, ensuring a premier position for India in the scientific world. Investments in Science and Technology Global investments in science, technology and innovation are estimated at $1.2 trillion as of 2009. India‘s R&D investment is less than 2.5% of this and is currently under 1 % of the GDP. Increasing Gross Expenditure in Research and Development (GERD) to 2% of the GDP has been a national goal for some time. Achieving this in the next five years is realizable if the private sector raises its R&D investment to at least match the public sector R&D investment from the current ratio of around 1 :3. The new paradigm is ―Science technology and innovation for the people‖. Pscnotes.com Page 96 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Position in Research Publications The gross budgetary support for the science and technology sector has significantly increased during the last decade. The impact of such increase is becoming evident. India ranks ninth globally in the number of scientific publications and 12th in the number of patents filed. The Composite Annual Growth Rate (CAGR) of Indian publications is around 12±1% and India‘s global share has increased from 1.8% in 2001 to 3.5% in 2011. But the percentage of Indian publications in the top 1 % impact making journals is only 2.5%. By 2020, the global share of publications must double and the number of papers in the top 1 % journals must quadruple from the current levels. Key Elements: Promoting the spread of scientific temper amongst all sections of society. Enhancing skill for applications of science among the young from all social strata. Making careers in science, research and innovation attractive enough for talented and bright minds. Establishing world class infrastructure for R&D for gaining global leadership in some select frontier areas of science. Positioning India among the top five global scientific powers by 2020. Linking contributions of science, research and innovation system with the inclusive economic growth agenda and combining priorities of excellence and relevance. Creating an environment for enhanced Private Sector Participation in R&D. Enabling conversion of R&D outputs into societal and commercial applications by replicating hitherto successful models as well as establishing of new PPP structures. Seeding S&T-based high-risk innovations through new mechanisms. Fostering resource-optimized, cost-effective innovations across size and technology domains. Triggering changes in the mindset and value systems to recognize, respect and reward performances which create wealth from S& T derived knowledge. Creating a robust national innovation system Focus of the Policy Facilitating private sector investment in R&D centres in India and overseas. Promoting establishment of large R&D facilities in PPP mode with provisions for benefits sharing. Permitting multi stakeholders participation in the Indian R&D system. Treating R&D in the private sector at par with public institutions for availing public funds. Bench marking of R&D funding mechanisms and patterns globally. Modifying IPR policy to provide for marching rights for social good when supported by public funds and for co-sharing IPRs generated under PPP. Pscnotes.com Page 97 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Launching newer mechanisms for nurturing Technology Business Incubators (TBls) and science-led entrepreneurship. Providing incentives for commercialization of innovations with focus on green manufacturing Important Observations Policy places greater thrust on innovation, establishing research institutes and encourage women scientists with an aim to position itself among the top five scientific powers in the world by 2020. It talks about modifying the intellectual property regime to provide for marching rights for social good when supported by public funds and co-sharing of patents generated in the public private partnership mode. Aims at producing and nurturing talent in science, to stimulate research in universities, to develop young leaders in the field of science and to reward performance. Seeks to create a policy environment for greater private sector participation in research and innovation and to forge international alliances and collaborations to meet the national agenda. Talks of raising gross expenditure in R&D to two per cent of GDP from the current one per cent in this decade by encouraging enhanced private sector contribution. Seeks to trigger an ecosystem for innovative abilities to flourish by leveraging partnerships among diverse stakeholders and by encouraging and facilitating enterprises to invest in innovations. Criticism: The policy hardly describes any structural or procedural changes which will achieve the grand goal of integrating science, technology and innovation to create value in an inclusive manner. Contribution of Indians in science and technology This list of Indian inventions and discoveries details the inventions, scientific discoveries and contributions of ancient and modern India, including both the ancient and medieval nations in the subcontinent historically referred to as India and the modern Indian state. It draws from the whole cultural and technological history of India, during which architecture, astronomy, cartography, metallurgy, logic, mathematics, metrology and mineralogy were among the branches of study pursued by its scholars. During recent times science and technology in the Republic of India has also focused on automobile engineering, information technology, communications as well as research into space and polar technology. Construction, Civil engineering and Architecture Iron pillar of Delhi:The world's first iron pillar was the Iron pillar of Delhi—erected at the time of Chandragupta II Vikramaditya (375–413). The pillar has attracted attention of archaeologists and materials scientists and has been called "a testament to the skill of ancient Indian blacksmiths" because of its high resistance to corrosion. Stepwell: Earliest clear evidence of the origins of the stepwell is found in the Indus Valley Civilization's archaeological site at Mohenjodaro in Pakistan and Dholavira in India. The three features of stepwells in the subcontinent are evident from one particular site, abandoned by 2500 Pscnotes.com Page 98 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 BCE, which combines a bathing pool, steps leading down to water, and figures of some religious importance into one structure.The early centuries immediately before the common era saw the Buddhists and the Jains of India adapt the stepwells into their architecture. Both the wells and the form of ritual bathing reached other parts of the world with Buddhism. Rock-cut step wells in the subcontinent date from 200 to 400 CE. Subsequently, the wells at Dhank (550-625 CE) and stepped ponds at Bhinmal (850-950 CE) were constructed. Stupa: The origin of the stupa can be traced to 3rd-century BCE India. It was used as a commemorative monument associated with storing sacred relics. The stupa architecture was adopted in Southeast and East Asia, where it evolved into the pagoda, a Buddhist monument used for enshrining sacred relics. Metrology Rulers made from Ivory were in use by the Indus Valley Civilization in what today is Pakistan and Northwestern India prior to 1500 BCE. Excavations at Lothal (2400 BCE) have yielded one such ruler calibrated to about 1/16 of an inch—less than 2 millimeters. Ian Whitelaw (2007) holds that 'The Mohenjodaro ruler is divided into units corresponding to 1.32 inches (33.5 mm) and these are marked out in decimal subdivisions with amazing accuracy—to within 0.005 of an inch. They correspond closely with the "hasta" increments of 1 3/8 inches traditionally used in South India in ancient architecture. Ancient bricks found throughout the region have dimensions that correspond to these units.' Shigeo Iwata (2008) further writes 'The minimum division of graduation found in the segment of an ivory-made linear measure excavated in Lothal was 1.79 mm (that corresponds to 1/940 of a fathom), while that of the fragment of a shell-made one from Mohenjodaro was 6.72 mm (1/250 of a fathom), and that of bronze-made one from Harappa was 9.33 mm (1/180 of a fathom).' The weights and measures of the Indus civilization also reached Persia and Central Asia, where they were further modified. Computers and programming languages J Sharp: Visual J# (pronounced "jay-sharp") programming language was a transitional language for programmers of Java and Visual J++ languages, so they could use their existing knowledge and applications on .NET Framework. It was developed by the Hyderabad-based Microsoft India Development Center at HITEC City in India. Pscnotes.com Page 99 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Kojo: Kojo is a programming language and integrated development environment (IDE) for computer programming and learning. Kojo is an open-source software. It was created, and is actively developed, by Lalit Pant, a computer programmer and teacher living in Dehradun, India. Technology Plough: The earliest known instance of a ploughed field was found at Kalibangan Carbon pigment: The source of the carbon pigment used in India ink was India. In India, the carbon black from which India ink is produced is obtained by burning bones, tar, pitch, and other substances. Ink itself has been used in India since at least the 4th century BCE. Masi, an early ink in India was an admixture of several chemical components. Indian documents written in Kharosthi with ink have been unearthed in Xinjiang. The practice of writing with ink and a sharp pointed needle was common in ancient South India. Several Jain sutras in India were compiled in ink. Iron and mercury coherer: In 1899, the Bengali physicist Sir Jagdish Chandra Bose announced the development of an "iron-mercury-iron coherer with telephone detector" in a paper presented at the Royal Society, London. He also later received U.S. Patent 755,840, "Detector for electrical disturbances" (1904), for a specific electromagnetic receiver. Microwave Communication: The first public demonstration of microwave transmission was made by Jagadish Chandra Bose, in Calcutta, in 1895, two years before a similar demonstration by Marconi in England, and just a year after Oliver Lodge's commemorative lecture on Radio communication, following Hertz's death. Bose's revolutionary demonstration forms the foundation of the technology used in mobile telephony, radars, satellite communication, radios, television broadcast, WiFi, remote controls and countless other applications. Mysorean rockets: The first iron-cased and metal-cylinder rockets were developed by Tipu Sultan, ruler of the South Indian Kingdom of Mysore, and his father Haither Ali, in the 1780s. He successfully used these iron-cased rockets against the larger forces of the British East India Company during the Anglo-Mysore Wars. The Mysore Rockets of this period were much more advanced than what the British had seen, chiefly because of the use of iron tubes for holding the propellant; this enabled higher thrust and longer range for the missile (up to 2 km range). After Tipu's eventual defeat in the Fourth Anglo-Mysore War and the capture of the Mysore iron rockets, they were influential in British rocket development, inspiring the Congreve rocket, and were soon put into use in the Napoleonic Wars. Reversible inhibition of sperm under guidance: RISUG, formerly referred to as the synthetic polymer styrene maleic anhydride (SMA), is the development name of a male contraceptive injection developed at IIT Kharagpur in India by the team of Dr. Sujoy K Guha. Phase III clinical trials are underway in India, slowed by insufficient volunteers. It has been patented in India, China, Bangladesh, and the United States. A method based on RISUG, Vasalgel, is currently under development in the US. Genetics Pscnotes.com Page 100 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Pseudomonas putida: Indian (Bengali) inventor and microbiologist Ananda Mohan Chakrabarty created a species of man made micro organism to break down crude oil. He genetically engineered a new species of Pseudomonas bacteria ("the oil-eating bacteria") in 1971. United States Supreme Court granted Chakrabarty's invention patent even though it was a living species. The court ruling decreed that Chakrabarty's discovery was "not nature's handiwork, but his own..." The inventor Chakrabarty secured his patent in 1980. Indigenization of technology. Developments of New technologies,transfer of technology, dual and critical use technologies In view of rapid globalization, fast depleting material resources, raising economic competition between nations and the growing need to protect intellectual property, it is essential to find cost effective approaches in international scientific collaborations through intensification of established mechanism, contacts and collaborative tie ups. Some new initiatives that may be suggested are : establishment of Centres of Excellence/international class facilities; intensification of cooperation with developing countries; formulation of programmes for attracting Indian researchers settled abroad to work in India; catalyzing technology development through establishment of joint R&D centres; ensuring the linkages for international collaboration with the national programmes etc. Science and Technology hold the key to the progress and development of any nation. Technology plays a Fundamental role in wealth creation, improvement of the quality of life and real economic growth and transformation in any society. The role of Science and Technology in our daily life is altering the way people live, behave, and communicate with profound effects on economic development. Science and Technology are now the key elements to development as the scientific revolutions reinforce economic progress, infrastructure and improve health and education system Innovation is the primary key to the technological growth and leads to better living standards. The degrees to which developing countries can emerge as economic powerhouse depends on their ability to apply insights from science and technology. The potential of Science and Technology for growth is endless. For example, the computing is unlocking infrastructure backlogs and handling integrated supply chains which can transform economic performances by enabling accessible and affordable services in healthcare and education. The emerging technology of internet and cloud-based solutions has transformed human experience. New Science, Technology and Innovation Developments In India While it is the private sector that constitutes the engine of innovation, national policies create environments that can encourage or constrain the ability of firms to innovate. The more innovative firms are, the more they are profitable and the more value-added they create in a nation. It is, therefore, vital for countries to put in place policies to create an effective and efficient national innovation system (NIS). Four conditions need to be met for building an effective national innovation system. Pscnotes.com Page 101 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 These are A. strong and competitive pressures on domestic firms; B. the presence of high quality human capital; C. well developed links between industry, institutions and academia; and D. openness and access to foreign technologies. These determinants of an NIS indicate that innovation involves far more than science and technology. It cannot be denied, however, that a forward-looking S&T policy can be developed to foster an appropriate mix of these determinants. Indeed, the first step towards, and the necessary pre-requisite to, any good NIS is an effective S&T policy. In recognition of this, all advanced and industrialising countries consciously foster an S&T policy. The pressures of international competition have made both knowledge creation and exploitation vital for business success. As a result, the internationalisation of R&D has increasing relevance for strategic management of companies and the strengthening of national innovation systems. The globalisation of R&D is establishing deep roots for several reasons. 1. Firstly, changing geopolitical infrastructures are creating new opportunities for synergistic R&D activities across national frontiers. 2. Secondly, rapidly changing technologies are no longer constrained by geographical boundaries. 3. Thirdly, increasing complexities of technological systems are making it imperative to generate and implement knowledge in emerging fields quickly and collaboratively. 4. Fourthly, the need for brainpower with an ever-increasing sophistication is being met by identifying and employing people with the appropriate skills at appropriate locations wherever they may be. International R&D strategy is thus emerging to meet these challenges. To this end, firms in developed countries and increasingly in some developing countries are being driven to take advantage of world-wide science and technology resources. These factors have spurred the growth of science and technology developments in those nations, which have conducive environments. Israel, Taiwan, Singapore, South Korea and, to a lesser extent, Ireland, have made substantial progress in upgrading their innovative capacity and, as a result, have become beneficiaries of foreign investments in science and technology ventures. Although countries such as India, China and Malaysia, have increased investments in areas related to science, technology and innovation at modest levels, there is little doubt that some of these, especially China and India, are potential scientific powerhouses Trends in India‘s Science and Technology Policy It has long been recognised that investment in science and technology makes substantial contribution to economic growth in terms of higher growth rates of an economy‘s total factor productivity. In addition to direct returns, huge (positive) externalities have also been found to be associated with it. Taking cognisance of the importance of technology‘s role in development, advanced countries nurture continuing development of science and technology and most developing countries adopt R&D policies in the early phases of their development. Science and Technology policy constitutes an integral part of a nation‘s overall industrial policy While the former shapes the pace and direction of technology development, the latter determines Pscnotes.com Page 102 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 the nature of demand. Science and Technology policy of any nation is carved within the background of overall industrial policy. If anything, S&T policy is supposed not only to give meaning to, but more importantly, to ensure achievement of the goals of industrial policy. It is therefore the thrust and direction of industrial policy that determines the tenets of any S&T policy, although it must be said that R&D may lead to results that may also change the course of industrial policy. Even so, S&T policy has almost always been driven by the goals of industrial development policy. Two strands of S&T policy have existed – policies related to technology transfer from abroad through formal modes such as FDI, technology licensing and capital goods imports and domestic technology generation policies. Recent developments Some of the recent developments in the field of science and technology in India are as follows: Mahindra and Mahindra Ltd launched its first-ever driverless tractor on developed at the Mahindra Research Valley hub in Chennai, which can be operated remotely via a tablet. The tractor is expected to be available commercially from early 2018. Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) has 21 rocket launches in the pipeline, along with testing of its heaviest rocket called the Geosynchronous satellite launch vehicle (GSLV) MK- III. India's space business to witness tremendous growth in the next five years, on the back of technology advancement, global space business opportunity and a sharp rise in Indian Space Research Organisation‘s (ISRO) satellite launch capability. ISRO's lunar dust mining plan focuses on generating and transporting energy to the Earth from Helium-3 rich lunar dust from the Moon, as part of its 2030 goal of meeting India's energy needs. The Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) plans to launch 2 satellites in March and April 2017, which includes the satellite meant for the benefit of the South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC) nations. ISRO also targets launch of second lunar mission Chandrayaan-2 in first quarter of 2018. ISRO has launched a record high of 104 satellites in one go on a single rocket from Satish Dhawan Space Centre in Sriharikota, Andhra Pradesh. Space Research and Discovery 1. High-thrust cryogenic engine CE20 (ISRO, India)- To be used in heavy launch vehicle GSLV Mk-III. 2. Galactoseismology (India) Method to detect dwarf galaxies dominated by dark matter. Also explains ripples on outer disk of galaxy. 3. ASTROSAT(ISRO, India) India‘s 1st dedicated multi wavelength space observatory. In Defence and Combat Sector S&T Development INS Astradharini India 1st indigenously-designed and built torpedo launch and recovery vessel. INS Kochi India Indigenously built largest destroyer warship. Akash Missile India Indigenously-built surface-to-air missile. Strike range of 25km and can carry warheads up to 60kg. BrahMos Supersonic Cruise Missile India Successful 48th test firing of BrahMos. Pscnotes.com Page 103 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Has a range of 290km and a Mach 2.8 speed. Akash Weapon System (AWS) India Indigenously developed and inducted into the Indian Army. In Health and Medicine Sector S&T Development ZikaVac Bharat Biotech, India World‘s first vaccine for Zika Virus. BGR-34 India 1st Ayurvedic anti-diabetic drug. BGR is acronym for Blood Glucose Regulator. Artificial Liver Tissue India India‘s 1st artificial liver tissue using 3-D printing technology. In Science and Technology Sector S&T Development NBeG 47 India First machine harvestable chickpea variety. To address labour shortage & reduce hard work. Pruthvi Chip Saankhya Labs, India Chip powers a system that can use TV White Space or wasted spectrum bandwidth to beam Internet to scores of households. Leap Second 2015 India 30th June 2015 clocked 1 second longer as an extra second was added to the clocks world-wide at 23:59:59. World‘s first water-based computer India-America Synchronous computer that operates using the unique physics of moving water droplets. In Research and Discovery Sector S&T Development Tree frog Ghatixalus magnus India Discovered in the high ranges of Idukki district in the Western Ghats of Kerala. Musa Indandamanensis India Sweet banana species. Bananas of this species are very sweet and are eaten by tribal people of the island. 4 new species of Fish; Puntius Nelsoni, Puntius Nigronotus, Systomus Chryseus and Systomus Rufus India Four new species of Fish discovered in Kerala. Butterfly called Banded Tit India Tiny butterfly species discovered in forests of Changlang, Arunachal Pradesh. Snow Leopard India Spotted the endangered snow leopards for the 1st time in the North Sikkim Plateau. New tree frog genus India Discovered a new genus of tree hole-breeding frogs in the forests of northeast. Dracula Ant India Discovered by a group of citizen scientists in the Western Ghats region of Kerala. New fish species named Puntius Dolichopterus India Discovered from a small water stream in Kayamkulam city of Kerala. Blue whales India 1st time after 100 years Blue Whales were sighted off the coast of Maharashtra. New species of fish called Pethia Striata India Discovered in the Kudremukh National Park, Karnataka. Pscnotes.com Page 104 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 New Catfish Species Glyptothorax Senapatiensis India New catfish species in the Chindwin river drainage in Senapati district of Manipur. New species of Geckos, Cnemaspis Adii India Spotted at the ruins of the World Heritage Site of Hampi, Karnataka. Grey Hypocolius India Small passerine bird species and sole member of the genus Hypocolius. Rare Spiders Martensopoda Sanctor and Stenaelurillus Albus India The spiders belong to the Sparassidae and Salticidae families. 2 bloom-forming algal species, Ulva Paschima Bast and Cladophora Goensis Bast India Discovered off the west coast of India Endangered forest owlet, Athene Blewitti) India Species belongs to the typical owls‘ family, Strigidae that is on the verge of extinction. Technology Transfer (also called Transfer of Technology (TOT) and Technology Commercialization)1 are the processes by which the information or knowledge related to the technological aspects travel within the group or between the organizations or entity. Taking this to the broader scenario, give rise to International technology transfer in which the knowledge travels in between the countries, which is not only limited to the Knowledge and information, rather includes skill transferring, methods of manufacturing, physical assets, know-how, and other technical aspects, and henceforth helps in further development of the technology and innovation, by effectively utilizing the technology transferred and finally incorporating it. Technology transfer has been used in the movements of technology from the laboratory to industry or from one application to another domain application or taking developing countries into consideration technology transfer helps in growing access to technologies which are related to other developed countries and henceforth helps in approaching towards the newer technologies and inventions i.e. from Developed to developing countries. Major developments/ achievements of Department of Science and Technology Major developments/ achievements/ Main highlights of the activities of Department of Science and Technology (DST), Ministry of Science & Technology during the Year 2016 are as following: National Initiative for Developing & Harnessing Innovation (NIDHI), a programme to address the complete chain of innovation ecosystem right from scouting to mentoring to scaling up innovations launched by DST. Establishment of a research park at IIT Gandhinagar has been supported at a cost of Rs.90 cr. Science and Engineering Research Board (SERB) has initiated a new scheme viz. Visiting Advanced Joint Research (VAJRA) Faculty Scheme. The scheme envisages to associate distinguished international faculty as Adjunct/Visiting Faculty in Indian institutions for a period of 1-3 month in a year. Overseas Doctoral Fellowship scheme aimed to impart research training of Ph.D. Scholars in Indian institutions for collaborative research abroad was launched by SERB. Fellowship would be for a period upto 12 months. ‗Technology Vision 2035‘ document was released by Hon‘ble Prime Minister, on 3rd January 2016 during 103rd session of Indian Science Congress, held at Mysore University, Mysuru. Devasthal Optical Telescope, an Indo-Belgian venture, successfully established by Aryabhatta Pscnotes.com Page 105 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Research Institute of Observational Sciences (ARIES), Nainital was technically activated by Hon‘ble Prime Minister of India, Shri Narendra Modi and Hon‘ble Prime Minister of Belgium, Mr. Charles Michel, remotely from Brussels. Surya Jyoti: Photovoltaic integrated Micro Solar Dome, is the simple innovative technology developed to meet the lighting need for people who do not have access to reliable supply of electricity. The product has been included for subsidy under Off Grid and decentralized solar application scheme of Ministry of New and Renewable energy. The Ministry of Rural Development has informed to all States and Union Territories to explore the possibility of adopting this innovative technology of Surya Jyoti for the houses constructed under Prime Minister Awas Yojana-Gramin. The National Award for the successful commercialization of indigenous technology was presented to SMITA Research Lab, IIT Delhi for the commercialization of N9 Pure Silver by , the Hon'ble President of India, during the Technology Day function on 11th May 2016. Technology was jointly developed by M/s RESIL Chemicals Private Limited and ARCI, Hyderabad under Nano Mission of DST. Deployment of a mobile RO unit: DST has supported quick deployment and demonstration of a mobile water purification unit developed by CSIR-CSMCRI for producing portable water for drinking. It was demonstrated in Latur, Marathwada region which was facing severe scarcity of drinking water during this year‘s drought period. Dielectric Barrier Discharge (DBD) based plasma system for portable water purification: A technology developed at CEERI Pilani through support by DST‘s Water Technology Initiative (WTI) for Dielectric Barrier Discharge (DBD) based plasma system for disinfection has been successfully transferred for commercialization to Turners Pvt. Ltd. Jaipur. The Water Quality Laboratory at Kohima, Nagaland: The Referral Water Laboratory, fully equipped with the in house sophisticated analytical equipments for Water Quality analysis was inaugurated by the Hon‘ble Union Minister of Science and Technology Dr. Harsh Vardhan at NASTEC, Kohima, Nagaland, Solar Energy Research Institute for India and the United States (SERIIUS): The Indo-US consortium has developed the crucial prototype test loop that demonstrate the multiscale aspects of the supercritical CO2 Brayton cycle (s-CO2) at IISc Bangalore for development of high temperature concentrated solar power in the country. BRICS STI Cooperation: To further strengthen the collaboration amongst the BRICS countries in the areas of Science, Technology and Innovation (STI), the 4th BRICS Science, Technology and Innovation Ministerial Meeting was convened on 8 October, 2016 at Jaipur. DST and RC-UK have agreed to launch India-UK Clean Energy R&D Centre on solar energy, storage and integration with an investment of £ 5 million from each side. Building upon the Thames-Ganga Partnership and recognising the importance of clean and portable water, DST and RCUK have agreed to launch a new collaborative programme on Improving Water Quality and Reusing Waste Water. DST-Intel Collaborative Research for Real-Time River Water and Air Quality Monitoring: Recognizing the importance of developing the online River Water and Air Quality Monitoring systems, DST and Intel has initiated a joint programme at a cost of Rs.33 cr on a 50:50 cost sharing basis in Public-Private Partnership (PPP) mode. A new programme on Interdisciplinary Cyber Physical Systems (ICPS) to foster and promote Pscnotes.com Page 106 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 R&D in this emerging field of research has been launched. A Cyber Physical System (CPS) is a mechanism controlled or monitored by computer-based algorithms, tightly integrated with internet and its users. It is an engineered system that are built from and depend upon, the seamless integration of computational algorithms and physical components Collaboration with the Rutherford Appleton Laboratory (RAL), UK: Initiated to access its neutron facility for carrying out research in Nano Science and Technology. DST constituted ‗Standing Committee for Promoting Women in Science‘ to address a low representation of women in Science & Technology (S&T) domain. To provide opportunities to women scientists and technologists for pursuing research in basic or applied sciences, 227 projects were recommended for support. Twenty nine projects to women scientist were supported for finding out solutions to challenges/issues at the grassroots level for social benefit. To create opportunity of self employment and/or also sustainable career for the women scientists, one year internship in the domain of Intellectual Property Rights (IPRs) to 111 women was provided during the year. Technology demonstrated for cyber-digital-physical reconstruction of Hampi heritage structures. Plans for covering 100 monuments are under formulation. DST-STI Policy Fellowship at post-doctoral level was initiated to generate a critical mass of policy researchers. In the context of Start-up India initiative of the Government, INSPIRE Awards scheme has been revamped to foster culture of innovation among school children of class VI to class X. The scheme has been rechristened as INSPIRE Awards-MANAK (Million Minds Augmenting National Aspiration and Knowledge). The 6th National Level Exhibition & Project Competition was organized during December 10-11, 2016 along with India International Science Festival (IISF) at CSIR-NPL, New Delhi. Information and communication technology We are in a digital era. It is difficult to think of any event in our daily life that is not using Information and Communication Technology. Our schools and classrooms are no exceptions. This course is meant for introducing you with these technologies with the intension that you meaningfully integrate technology in your practices related to teaching and learning. As an ordinary citizen as well as a teacher, you handle enormous data all the time. Data refers to facts, events, activities and transactions which have been recorded. Data is the raw material from which information is produced. Number of boys and girls in your class is a factual description of your classroom. This is an example of data related to the students in the class. In this sense, data is a description of the world. Information is making meaning from the data. Based on the data, you can conclude if girls are more in number in your class. This conclusion is information. In other words, information is processed data. Most of the decisions taken in and around the world by and large are based on the data and information. Information is the key guiding force of the world today. For a wider use of the information, the information must be communicated to people. It is only when the information reaches the intended audience, the purpose of creation of information as well as its communication would be served . Let us take an example. As a teacher, you are Pscnotes.com Page 107 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 organizing a teacher parent meeting. Details of the same need to be communicated to the concerned parents. This should happen within a time frame. As you know, it is neither easy to physically reach every parent within a given time, nor desired. With the availability of technology, it is possible that a teacher now not only can reach the parents but also interact with them in real time. A simple WhatsApp group would serve this purpose. This is only an illustration to say how technology has simplified many complexities of our life. The tasks you as a teacher engage in during the school time and outside require you to generate information very frequently. For example, you need to create a worksheet for a class. You designed a worksheet template. Since the worksheet is for the class use, you need multiple copies of the worksheet. You have to take printout of the worksheets. You transfer the worksheet template to your mail or carry it in a pen drive. In other words, you have stored the information either in a cloud storage service (mail cloud) or in a storage device. Traditionally also radio, television, and print media were the widespread technologies used for communication. The digital revolution has changed the way these traditional technologies function. The analog television has become digital television. In addition to the printed newspaper we also have electronic versions. Along with traditional radio, we also have online radio. All these have started appearing in the classroom to make the learning experiences rich. Components of an ICT system ICT encompasses both the internet-enabled sphere as well as the mobile one powered by wireless networks. It also includes antiquated technologies, such as landline telephones, radio and television broadcast -- all of which are still widely used today alongside cutting-edge ICT pieces such as artificial intelligence and robotics. ICT is sometimes used synonymously with IT (for information technology); however, ICT is generally used to represent a broader, more comprehensive list of all components related to computer and digital technologies than IT. The list of ICT components is exhaustive, and it continues to grow. Some components, such as computers and telephones, have existed for decades. Others, such as smartphones, digital TVs and robots, are more recent entries. ICT commonly means more than its list of components, though. It also encompasses the application of all those various components. It's here that the real potential, power and danger of ICT can be found. ICT's societal and economic impact Pscnotes.com Page 108 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 ICT is leveraged for economic, societal and interpersonal transactions and interactions. ICT has drastically changed how people work, communicate, learn and live. Moreover, ICT continues to revolutionize all parts of the human experience as first computers and now robots do many of the tasks once handled by humans. For example, computers once answered phones and directed calls to the appropriate individuals to respond; now robots not only can answer the calls, but they can often more quickly and efficiently handle callers' requests for services. ICT's importance to economic development and business growth has been so monumental, in fact, that it's credited with ushering in what many have labeled the Fourth Industrial Revolution. ICT also underpins broad shifts in society, as individuals en masse are moving from personal, face-to-face interactions to ones in the digital space. This new era is frequently termed the Digital Age. For all its revolutionary aspects, though, ICT capabilities aren't evenly distributed. Simply put, richer countries and richer individuals enjoy more access and thus have a greater ability to seize on the advantages and opportunities powered by ICT. Consider, for example, some findings from the World Bank. In 2016, it stated that more than 75% of people worldwide have access to a cellphone. However, internet access through either mobile or fixed broadband remains prohibitively expensive in many countries due to a lack of ICT infrastructure. Furthermore, the World Bank estimated that out of the global population of 7.4 billion people, more than 4 billion don't have access to the internet. Additionally, it estimated that only 1.1 billion people have access to high-speed internet. The significance of ICT in enterprises For businesses, advances within ICT have brought a slew of cost savings, opportunities and conveniences. They range from highly automated businesses processes that have cut costs, to the big data revolution where organizations are turning the vast trove of data generated by ICT into insights that drive new products and services, to ICT-enabled transactions such as internet shopping and telemedicine and social media that give customers more choices in how they shop, communicate and interact. But ICT has also created problems and challenges to organizations and individuals alike -- as well as to society as a whole. The digitization of data, the expanding use of high-speed internet and the growing global network together have led to new levels of crime, where so-called bad actors can hatch electronically enabled schemes or illegally gain access to systems to steal money, intellectual property or private information or to disrupt systems that control critical infrastructure. ICT has also brought automation and robots that displace workers who are unable to transfer their skills to new positions. And ICT has allowed more and more people to limit their interactions with others, creating what some people fear is a population that could lose some of what makes it human. Preservation & promotion of culture and indigenous knowledge- Use of Regional Language in ICT Pscnotes.com Page 109 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 ―A nation's culture resides in the hearts and in the soul of its people.‖ -Mahatma Gandhi Indigenous Knowledge (IK) refers to the knowledge, innovations, and practices of indigenous groups in matters related to agriculture and environmental management, medicine and health, and art and language. Traditional Cultural Expressions (TCEs) are also part of IK. Like IK, TCEs have also been passed from one generation to the next (orally or by tradition) and are an integral part of a culture‘s identity and heritage. These expressions include, but are not limited to, music and song, stories, symbols, dances, rituals, architecture, arts and crafts. Indigenous knowledge has been noted to make a significant contribution to sustainable development of local communities, as it is seen as a set of perceptions, information, and behaviour that guide local community members to use the land and natural resources. The goal of managing indigenous knowledge is to provide the right information to the right people at the right time. Traditions represent a critical piece of our culture. They remind us that we are part of a history that defines our past, shapes who we are today and who we are likely to become. It brings families together and enables people to reconnect with friends and functions to strengthen a sense of community. Tradition reinforces values such as freedom, faith, integrity, a good education, personal responsibility, a strong work ethic, and the value of being selfless. Traditional Knowledge includes Cultural Knowledge, Artistic Knowledge, Medicinal Knowledge, Biodiversity/ Natural Resources Knowledge, Agricultural Knowledge, Sacred Knowledge The word, ‗indigenous‘ ordinarily means ‗belonging to‘, or ‗specific to‘, or ‗a particular place‘. Dictionaries define the term indigenous as ―originating or occurring naturally in a country or region. In this sense, the terms ―traditional knowledge‖ and ―indigenous knowledge‖ may be interchangeable. WIPO also states that TK and IK would be interchangeable if we consider the term indigenous to mean, ‗belonging to‘, or ‗specific to‘, or ‗a particular place‘ Some important characteristics of TK can be identified as follows: it is transmitted from generations to generations in many cases, it is transmitted orally for generations from person to person it is being considered by the communities as gift of God and not as a private property such knowledge typically distinguishes one community from another it is usually impossible to identify the original creator of the information it is learned through continuous observation, experience and practice it is inseparable part of communal and cultural life of its holders, and it is usually associated with the biological resources Indigenous Knowledge (IK): The indigenous groups all over the world have peculiar cultural belief systems which demonstrate their immense knowledge and respect for the earth. Pscnotes.com Page 110 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 These systems contain rules that define how the environment should be treated. Their various rituals, ceremonies and prohibitions regulate the use of natural resources and resource management aiming at a balanced ecosystem. Indigenous people are the custodians of the invaluable biological and genetic wealth on the earth. To entitle certain knowledge as indigenous, it must posses certain characteristics, namely, communal ownership and attribution of knowledge sharing of knowledge through specific consent of the relevant group right to use and deal with knowledge collective rights and interests held by indigenous people in their knowledge close interdependence between knowledge, land, and other aspects of culture in indigenous societies oral transmission of knowledge in accordance with well understood cultural principles, and management of knowledge through specific rules including rules regarding maintaining secrecy and sacredness of knowledge. Methods to preserve and promote cultural traditions are Heritage Preservation: Heritage preservation is the visual and tangible conservation of cultural identity. Heritage is the reflection of the identity of the people and is a mirror of our national unity. It represents our history and our identity; our bond to the past, to our present, and the future. Heritage sites need to actively be preserved so that they do not fall into disrepair, and funds need to be allocated. History is important because it brings us all together and this is a cornerstone of nationhood that should be protected by every state and culture. The preservation of cultural heritage in times of conflict is very essential. Theft, war, civil disorder, terrorism, neglect and vandalism are human factors in the accidental or willful destruction of our heritage. Disasters need to be managed in order to control them, or at least to mitigate the effects. Improving our environment for preserving our heritage is a must. Cultural heritage is under attack – from environmental degradation and climate change, from socioeconomic pressures and the accelerating pace of urbanization and from the strains of global tourism. Some methods adopted for better heritage preservation are: 1. Chemical Preservation-Chemical preservation of excavated objects and structures are done to increase their longetivity. 2. Structural Conservation-Structures are improved, stabilized, additionally strengthened and reinforced to undo the harms done by pollution, acid rains, and other chemicals and made natural-disasters resistant, by maintaining their pristine look. In an era of globalization, cultural heritage helps us to remember our cultural diversity, and its understanding develops mutual respect and renewed dialogue amongst different cultures. Pscnotes.com Page 111 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Tourism Development: 37% of the global tourism has a cultural motivation. When tourism is identified as part of an overall development strategy, the identification, protection, and enhancement of historic resources is vital for any sustainable effort. Worldwide, heritage has a significantly greater economic impact per trip. In some places cultural heritage tourism is one of the main economic contributors. The tourism sector is the ‗industry‘ that uses cultural heritage to the greatest extent as support for its backbone activities like hotel accommodation, transport and catering. Due to the exploitation of heritage, many new jobs were generated in the tourism sector. When heritage tourism is developed or done right, the biggest beneficiaries are not the visitors but the local residents who experience a renewed appreciation and pride in their local city and its history. Influence of Media: Films, television and radio broadcasts are other powerful means that can influence culture. Media can travel into the most remote villages and unearth the traditional practices, celebrations, martial arts and present them forcefully and creatively to the entire people. Promotion of people as cultural brand ambassadors, building influence through the local vernacular media, an improved media strategy that promotes cultural content and supports cultural projects with less or no commercial value can also help preserve and promote culture. In addition, for any community to be able to preserve its culture, its people must have pride in their culture. However, if western culture is appreciated more than the indigenous ones, the cultural heritage of the country would undoubtedly go into oblivion. Hence, it is important that, the press and opinion leaders in the country intensify the drive to project the country‘s rich cultural heritage, in order for the public to accept them. Preservation of Intangible Cultural Heritage: Arts strengthen cultural values. Formal theatrical performances, sculptures, paintings, music and food festivals, paintings, folk tales, songs, novels, poems, martial arts and crafts groups, all these should be encouraged. To be kept alive, intangible cultural heritage must remain relevant to a culture and be regularly practiced and learned within communities and between generations. The issue of festivals attracts people from far and near and during such occasion, each tribe celebrates a festival to portray the culture of their people. Traditional music and dance project the cultural identity and heritage. Indigenous musical instruments, such as dhol, pepa etc. are used on such festivals. The importance of cultural celebrations is that they help to imprint the Assamese culture in the minds of both the present and future generation. Campaigns amongst the masses should be done to honor revolution and national resistance wars, commemorate national heroes and martyrs, appreciate our cultural well- known men, pay gratitude to revolutionarily credited people etc. Pscnotes.com Page 112 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Development in Education: The national and state government needs to encourage historians to document the history and indigenous culture of the state. The education on the cultural heritage of Assam must go hand in hand with excursions. Youths should be encouraged to learn the community‘s indigenous culture and visit historical places of interest in order to acquaint themselves with the rich culture of the state. The youth in the various educational institutions can also organize cultural festivals and displays during anniversaries, entertainment and on important occasions. Libraries and museums disseminate information and cultural heritage resources. The upkeep and maintenance of museums and archaeological sites will considerably improve with the introduction of modern technology. At least one museum should be set up in each district with different chambers for visual and other forms of art, architecture, science, history and geography with regional flavor Digital Preservation: Digitalization converts materials from formats that can be read by people (analog) to a format that can be read only by machines (digital). Benefits of digital preservation are as follows: Easy to be viewed from anywhere, at any time of the day Can be readily printed from the web Viewers can find what they are looking for quickly and independently Save staff reference time by answering frequently asked questions on the web Electronically enhanced images can be viewed with greater legibility Increased use of collections and facilitated learning and scholarship The preservation benefits for collections include: Objects do not have to be reshelved or located by staff Objects are not handled frequently thereby reducing wear and tear. Government Action: Both the national and state government should implement the following steps and measures- Tapping of the Public-Private Partnership models should be done for sustenance of Arts and Crafts. Publication through private sector should be encouraged as they have all the modern technology and know-how to produce the best from the worst. Greater involvement of universities in schemes promoting arts and culture as well as inclusion of Fine Arts as a subject in universities Preserving and properly promoting India‘s rich intangible cultural heritage by inventorizing and documenting oral traditions, indigenous knowledge systems, folklores and tribal and oral traditions and dance forms like Bihu and other folk dances besides classical forms. Pscnotes.com Page 113 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Enhancing assimilative capabilities in order to adapt to emergent challenges of globalization and technological innovations. Promoting regional languages Making cultural and creative industries work in tandem for growth and employment. Generating demand for cultural goods and services as a matter of sustenance rather than patronage, thus bringing out the art and culture sector in the public domain. The promotion of export of cultural goods and services. Recognizing ‗cultural heritage tourism‘ as an upcoming industry by building cultural resources with an adaptation of scientific and technological knowledge to local circumstances as well as forming partnerships between local and global bodies. Making possible the infusion of knowledge capital in cultural institutions by flexible engagements. Accelerating propaganda and promoting the awareness of people to participate in cultural activities. Timely discovering and commending typical exemplary individuals and entities that have made a significant contribution to the cultural life. Great efforts should be spent on the collection and exploitation of material and immaterial cultural values. Organizing cultural festivals of some minority ethnic groups who have typical cultural characters. Protecting, preserving, and improving the quality of art and literature, cultural works. Training artistic talents. Organizing contests of art and literature to select the best pieces of works which have a high educational and aesthetic nature. Expanding international cultural exchange. Actively introducing the Assamese cultural quintessence and character in order to improve the prestige and position of our state and country in international arena and making the best use of technological assistance from advanced countries for the development of culture. Strengthening the examination and control and the State management of cultural activities, publication, newspapers and preservation of cultural values, art performances, copyrights, advertisement and cultural services. Preventing anti-cultural and non-cultural phenomena Enhancing the training of managerial and professional staff of cultural branch, especially ethnic minority staff. Cultural staff at grassroots level should be continually and further trained to satisfy the demands of preserving and promoting the cultural traditions of our state. Concluding Remark Culture, as a force, has both its own economic and political consequences in the life of any state. Without culture, a nation is as good as extinct, erased from the surface of the earth, blotted out and, an existence without dignity or recognition. The only way to wipe out a people from the face of the earth is to take away their culture. The blending of one culture with another also has the potential of killing off cultures. We must make an effort to sustain our cultures. The challenge is to preserve our cultures by practicing and making them part of our lives. Pscnotes.com Page 114 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 THE NEED FOR PROTECTING TRADITIONAL KNOWLEDGE Protection of indigenous knowledge is essential in many aspects. Lack of proper legal and policy frameworks for the protection of TK in the developing countries provides a vacuum for the developed and industrialized nations to exploit the traditional knowledge and resources of indigenous communities. Protection of indigenous knowledge will stop the multi-national pharmaceutical companies from the North, who purport to discover herbal medicines owned and used by the indigenous communities for thousands of years, from patenting the medicinal plants and its derivatives at the expense of the indigenous communities. Since, TK incorporates information and know-how on a variety of matters, including resources management, traditional medicines, crafts, artistic designs and cultural assets, its adequate protection is essential to preserve the cultural values of aboriginal communities. It is a cultural heritage property right which must be protected and shared equitably in the interest of all humankind. The need to protect indigenous knowledge is more relevant now than ever before in the IP global market. It has been revealed that commercial interests very often violate indigenous intellectual property rights. Although such violations do not formally constitute a breach of written legal standards, as neither national legislations nor international standards acknowledge the rights of indigenous people, these violations are still accountable to indigenous customary law. The underlying principles for granting protection to TK, inter alia, are equity considerations, conservation concerns, preservation of traditional practices and culture, promotion of its use in modern developments, prevention of appropriation of components of TK by unauthorized parties, facilitating access to TK, etc. Equity Considerations The argument for protection of TK is principally based on equity considerations. TK generates value for new industries especially in the field of pharmaceuticals, plant breeding, food preservation etc. The current system of appropriation of TK for the new lines of modern industries neither recognizes TK adequately nor does it compensate satisfactorily the TK holders. For example, the farmers are not being compensated for the germplasm they create and the value they contribute for the new industry. Similarly, the traditional medicinal practitioners and healers are not being compensated for the information they impart to the bioprospectors regarding the use of medicinal plants found in their surroundings. The holders of TK usually do not charge for the herbs, seeds etc For Stimulating Conservation Another factor underlying the claim for protection of traditional knowledge is based on the importance of such knowledge for conservation purposes. Pscnotes.com Page 115 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 It is an undisputed fact that TK involves vital information highly useful to modern science and health care. However, protection of TK against loss and misappropriation and adequate compensation to traditional knowledge holders are core elements to stimulate the broader use of TK. Since the indigenous population inhabit the world‘s most useful biological diversity, the preservation of the same would be important for the future use. Principle 3 of the Rio Declaration on Environment and Development, 1992 also states that the right to development must be fulfilled so as to equitably meet developmental and environmental needs of present and future generations. An encouragement to preserve and conserve the biological diversity through adequate means is necessary to stimulate the activities of indigenous and local communities. The recognition of rights would encourage them to conserve the natural resources. If fairly compensated, they would have more incentives to conserve and preserve the same not only for the existing generation, but for the generations to come. Preservation of Traditional Practices and Cultures The preservation of TK is not only a key component of the right to selfidentification and a condition for the continuous existence of indigenous and traditional peoples; it is also a central element of the cultural heritage of humanity. The crisis affecting the world‘s diverse cultures and languages is, according to some estimates, far greater than the biodiversity crisis. The recognition of their culture would raise the profile of that knowledge and encourage respect for it, both inside as well as outside the knowledge holding communities. This will make the learning and development of such knowledge a more attractive prospect for the younger members of such communities, thus perpetuating its existence and continuing its traditional lifestyles and cultures. The possibilities of economic returns for the use of that knowledge by third parties acts as a further incentive for community members to respect their knowledge and continue to engage in practices in which that knowledge is used and generated. Lack of motivation in the younger generation to learn the tradition is another reason cited for the protection of TK. There is a fear that TK will suffer extinction with the death of the elders of the community. TK is generally viewed with disdain and as being inferior since it does not confirm to the accepted scientific methods of learning in the context of the modern reductionist approach of science. Only by concerned efforts to protect it and accord it due respect can this trend be stopped Regional language internet usage is where the real growth will be in India In the mid 1990s, 80% of the world wide web had English language content. By 2011, that share had fallen to roughly 27% as other languages – French, German, Spanish, Russian, and Chinese – spread online. India‘s many languages, though, have lagged behind others. Pscnotes.com Page 116 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Second only to the US, India has over 125 million English speakers. Online, English is still India‘s lingua franca, but more of its 1.3 billion people can turn into netizens only if the online use of its 22 other official languages is encouraged. A recent study of 4,612 urban citizens and 2,448 rural Indians by management consultancy KPMG India and search giant Google found that nearly 70% of Indians consider local language digital content more reliable than English content. Of all the internet-using native speakers of an Indian language, most prefer Hindi, the co- official language of the Indian union along with English. By 2021, an expected 201 million Hindi users – 38% of the Indian internet user base – will be online, according to the KPMG-Google study. Marathi, Bengali, and Tamil follow, capturing 9%, 8%, and 6% of the user base respectively. So, native language apps and sites proliferate to make it easier for people to grasp online information. Moreover, increasing the use of native languages could help chat applications and digital platforms deepen their user base The KPMG/Google report identifies a number of apps and web categories that currently have relatively low penetration rates in India but could see rapid growth if local-language integration picks up. Payments, government services, news, and classifieds all could grow at a compound annual growth rate between 26% and 34% from 2016 to 2021 if there is local-language expansion. For example, among those who traditionally shop offline, 50% were willing to shift online if provided with an end-to-end Indian language experience Similarly, over 60% of rural users consider language a barrier to accessing online government services, the report says. Increased use of Indian languages on the internet will come as a relief to them. It could also help better dissemination of regional news as almost 60% of Indian-language internet users prefer such news. Also, nearly 90% of them are more likely to respond to a digital advertisement in their local language as compared to English ads. ―Almost every new user that is coming online – roughly nine out of 10 – is not proficient in English, So, it is fair to say that almost all the growth of usage is coming from non- English users Indian language users already far exceed the number of English language users in the country and will continue to do so–their user base grew from 42 million in 2011 to 234 million in 2016. In the five-year period after that, Indian-language users are expected to grow at an additional rate of 18% to 536 million. In the same period, English-language users are likely to grow by a mere 3% to reach 199 million. Meanwhile, technological advancement could aid and encourage the increased use of local languages. ―Advance voice translation and recognition technology could help Indian language internet users, who find and search navigation using text inputs in their regional language a challenge. Other factors that will likely contribute to bringing India‘s next billion online are reduced data charges, rising disposable income, growth in overall internet penetration and Pscnotes.com Page 117 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 smartphone production, and improvements in digital literacy in rural India, as well as more Indian language-friendly devices and websites. While Reliance Jio‘s low prices and freebies are already moving in that direction, companies like Google are increasingly providing Indian language interface and content. Space Technology- Indian space programs Space Technology- Indian space programs. Application of Satellites for different purposes Despite being a developing economy with its attendant problems, India has effectively developed space technology and has applied it successfully for its rapid development and today is offering a variety of space services globally. Indian Space Program: During the formative decade of 1960s, space research was conducted by India mainly with the help of sounding rockets. The Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) was formed in 1969. Space research activities were provided additional fillip with the formation of the Space Commission and the Department of Space by the government of India in 1972. And, ISRO was brought under the Department of Space in the same year. In the history of the Indian space programme, 70s were the era of Experimentation during which experimental satellite programmes like Aryabhatta, Bhaskara, Rohini and Apple were conducted. The success of those programmes, led to era of operationalisation in 80s during which operational satellite programmes like INSAT and IRS came into being. Today, INSAT and IRS are the major programmes of ISRO. For launching its spacecraft indigenously, India is having a robust launch vehicle programme, which has matured to the state of offering launch services to the outside world. Antrix, the commercial arm of the Department of Space, is marketing India‘s space services globally. Fruitful co-operation with other space faring nations, international bodies and the developing world is one of the main characteristics of India's space programme. The most significant milestone of the Indian Space Programme during the year 2005-2006 was the successful launch of PSLV-C6. On 5 May 2005, the ninth flight of Polar Satellite Launch Vehicle (PSLV-C6) from Satish Dhawan Space Centre (SDSC) SHAR, Sriharikota successfully placed two satellites - the 1560 kg CARTOSTAR-1 and 42 kg HAMSAT - into a predetermined Pscnotes.com Page 118 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 polar Sun Synchronous Orbit (SSO). Coming after seven launch successes in a row, the success of PSLV-C6 further demonstrated the reliability of PSLV and its capability to place payloads weighing up to 1600 kg satellites into a 600 km high polar SSO. The successful launch of INSAT-4A, the heaviest and most powerful satellite built by India so far; on 22 December 2005 was the other major event of the year 2005-06. INSAT-4A is capable of providing Direct-To-Home (DTH) television broadcasting services. Besides, the setting up of the second cluster of nine Village Resource Centres (VRCs) was an important ongoing initiative of the Department of Space during the year. VRC concept integrates the capabilities of communications and earth observation satellites to provide a variety of information emanating from space systems and other IT tools to address the changing and critical needs of rural communities. In October 2008, the first lunar mission launched by ISRO. The spacecraft, Chandrayaan took off from the Satish Dhawan Space Centre and it operated till August 2009. The project was announced by former PM Atal Bihari Vajpayee, as part of his independence day speech in 2003. The greatest achievement of this lunar project was the discovery of a large number of water molecules in moon. ISRO plans to launch its second lunar mission, Chandrayaan 2 by 2018. In 2014, Mangalyaan, India‘s first interplanetary mission was launched, making ISRO the fourth space agency to reach Mars. Mangalyaan gained worldwide repute as being the least expensive Mars mission till date. Recently India has launched 104 staellites at one go, which is a world record. The previous world record is with the Russian space agency with 37 satellites at one go. India has been launching heavy satellites on its Geosynchronous Satellite Launch Vehicle (GSLV) but so far it has only been used for domestic satellites.In recent months though, there have been queries from foreign companies for launches on the GSLV. Application of satellites for different purposes: Satellites based on application can be categorized as follows: Pscnotes.com Page 119 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Earth Observation satellite-> Starting with IRS-1A in 1988, ISRO has launched many operational remote sensing satellites. Today, India has one of the largest constellations of remote sensing satellites in operation. Currently, *thirteen* operational satellites are in Sun-synchronous orbit – RESOURCESAT-1, 2, 2A CARTOSAT-1, 2, 2A, 2B, RISAT-1 and 2, OCEANSAT-2, Megha-Tropiques, SARAL and SCATSAT-1, and *four* in Geostationary orbit- INSAT-3D, Kalpana & INSAT 3A, INSAT - 3DR. Varieties of instruments have been flown onboard these satellites to provide necessary data in a diversified spatial, spectral and temporal resolutions to cater to different user requirements in the country and for global usage. The data from these satellites are used for several applications covering agriculture, water resources, urban planning, rural development, mineral prospecting, environment, forestry, ocean resources and disaster management. Communication satellite-> The Indian National Satellite (INSAT) system is one of the largest domestic communication satellite systems in Asia-Pacific region with nine operational communication satellites placed in Geo-stationary orbit. Established in 1983 with commissioning of INSAT-1B, it initiated a major revolution in India‘s communications sector and sustained the same later. GSAT-18 joins the constellation of INSAT System consisting 14 operational satellites, namely - INSAT-3A, 3C, 4A, 4B, 4CR, 3DR and GSAT-6, 7, 8, 10, 12, 14, 15 and 16. The INSAT system with more than 200 transponders in the C, Extended C and Ku-bands provides services to telecommunications, television broadcasting, satellite newsgathering, societal applications, weather forecasting, disaster warning and Search and Rescue operations. Navigation satellite-> Satellite Navigation service is an emerging satellite based system with commercial and strategic applications. ISRO is committed to provide the satellite based Navigation services to meet the emerging demands of the Civil Aviation requirements and to meet the user requirements of the positioning, navigation and timing based on the independent satellite navigation system. To meet the Civil Aviation requirements, ISRO is working jointly with Airport Authority of India (AAI) in establishing the GPS Aided Geo Augmented Navigation (GAGAN) system. To meet the user requirements of the positioning, navigation and timing services based on the indigenous system, ISRO is establishing a regional satellite navigation system called Indian Regional Navigation Satellite System (IRNSS). (a) GPS Aided GEO Augmented Navigation (GAGAN): This is a Satellite Based Augmentation System (SBAS) implemented jointly with Airport Authority of India (AAI). The main objectives of GAGAN are to provide Satellite-based Navigation services with accuracy and integrity required for civil aviation applications and to provide better Air Traffic Management over Indian Airspace. The system will be interoperable Pscnotes.com Page 120 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 with other international SBAS systems and provide seamless navigation across regional boundaries. The GAGAN Signal-In-Space (SIS) is available through GSAT-8 and GSAT-10. (b) Indian Regional Navigation Satellite System (IRNSS) : NavIC This is an independent Indian Satellite based positioning system for critical National applications. The main objective is to provide Reliable Position, Navigation and Timing services over India and its neighbourhood, to provide fairly good accuracy to the user. The IRNSS will provide basically two types of services Standard Positioning Service (SPS) Restricted Service (RS) Space Segment consists of seven satellites, three satellites in GEO stationary orbit (GEO) and four satellites in Geo Synchronous Orbit (GSO) orbit with inclination of 29° to the equatorial plane. This constellation of seven satellites was named as "NavIC" (Navigation Indian Constellation) by the Honourable Prime Minister of India, Mr. Narendra Modi and dedicated to the Nation on the occasion of successful launch of IRNSS-1G, the seventh and last satellite of NavIC. All the satellites will be visible at all times in the Indian region. All the seven Satellites of NavIC, namely, IRNSS-1A, 1B, 1C, ID,1E, 1F and 1G were successfully launched on July 02, 2013, Apr 04, 2014, Oct 16, 2014, Mar 28, 2015, Jan 20, 2016, Mar 10, 2016 and Apr 28, 2016 respectively and all are functioning satisfactorily from their designated orbital positions. Ground Segment is responsible for the maintenance and operation of the IRNSS constellation. It provides the monitoring of the constellation status, computation of the orbital and clock parameters and navigation data uploading. The Ground segment comprises of TTC & Uplinking Stations, Spacecraft Control Centre, IRNSS Timing Centre, CDMA Ranging Stations, Navigation Control Centre and Data Communication Links. Space segment is compatible with single frequency receiver for Standard Positioning Service (SPS), dual frequency receiver for both SPS & RS service and a multi mode receiver compatible with other GNSS providers. Experimental satellite-> ISRO has launched many small satellites mainly for the experimental purposes. This experiment include Remote Sensing, Atmospheric Studies, Payload Development, Orbit Controls, recovery technology etc. Example- INS-1A, INS-1B, YOUTHSAT, APPLE Small satellite-> Pscnotes.com Page 121 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The small satellite project is envisaged to provide platform for stand-alone payloads for earth imaging and science missions within a quick turn around time. For making the versatile platform for different kinds of payloads, two kinds of buses have been configured and developed. Indian Mini Satellite -1 (IMS-1): IMS-1 bus has been developed as a versatile bus of 100 kg class which includes a payload capability of around 30 kg. The bus has been developed using various miniaturization techniques. The first mission of the IMS-1 series was launched successfully on April 28th 2008 as a co-passenger along with Cartosat 2A. Youthsat is second mission in this series and was launched successfully along with Resourcesat 2 on 20th April 2011. Indian Mini Satellite -2 (IMS-2) Bus: IMS-2 Bus is evolved as a standard bus of 400 kg class which includes a payload capability of around 200kg. IMS-2 development is an important milestone as it is envisaged to be a work horse for different types of remote sensing applications. The first mission of IMS-2 is SARAL. SARAL is a co-operative mission between ISRO and CNES with payloads from CNES and spacecraft bus from ISRO. Student/Academic satellite-> ISRO has influenced educational institutions by its activities like making satellites for communication, remote sensing and astronomy. The launch of Chandrayaan-1 increased the interest of universities and institutions towards making experimental student satellites. Energy Resources .csA34391C2{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Georgia;font- size:24pt;font-weight:bold;font-style:normal;} .cs58C5AC2B{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:5pt 0pt 5pt 0pt;line- height:18pt;background-color:#FFFFFF} .csBABDBF73{color:#424142;background-color:transparent;font-family:Georgia;font- size:15pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal;} .cs8301694B{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:5pt 0pt 5pt 0pt;line- height:14.4pt;background-color:#FFFFFF} .cs38EE794B{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Georgia;font- size:16.5pt;font-weight:bold;font-style:normal;} .csA0474829{color:#424142;background-color:transparent;font-family:Georgia;font- size:15pt;font-weight:bold;font-style:normal;} .csF7F83914{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 0pt;line-height:18pt} .cs6CD5348{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 14pt 0pt;line-height:18pt} .cs37B8753A{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Georgia;font- Pscnotes.com Page 122 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 size:15pt;font-weight:bold;font-style:normal;} .cs2B710C50{color:#424142;background-color:transparent;font-family:Georgia;font- size:11.5pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal;} .csBC3EB777{color:#000000;background-color:#FFFFFF;font-family:Georgia;font- size:15pt;font-weight:bold;font-style:normal;} .csD4DC7984{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 8pt 0pt;line-height:1.079167} .cs1B16EEB5{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Calibri;font- size:11pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal;} Sources of Energy: Conventional and Nonconventional Sources – Energy is one of the most important component of economic infrastructure. It is the basic input required to sustain economic growth. There is direct relation between the level of economic development and per capita energy consumption. Simply speaking more developed a country, higher is the per capita consumption of energy and vice-versa. India‘s per capita consumption of energy is only one eighth of global average. This indicates that our country has low rate of per capita consumption of energy as compared to developed countries. Two Main Sources of Energy: The sources of energy are of following types: Pscnotes.com Page 123 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 (A) Conventional Energy Sources: The energy sources which cannot be compensated, once these are used (after their exploitation) are termed as conventional energy sources. Some important conventional energy sources are discussed below: 1. Coal: Coal is a major conventional energy sources. It was formed from the remains of the trees and ferns grew in swamps around 500 millions year ago. The bacterial and chemical decomposition of such plant debris (which remained buried under water or clay) produced an intermediate product known as peat which is mainly cellulose (C6H10O5)n. Due to progressive decomposition by heat and pressure, the cellulose lost moisture H2 and Oz and got converted in to coal as per the given equation The average formula of coal is (C3/H4/)n. Out of the 6000 billion tons coal stocks under earth crust, 200 tons have been exploited the present society. The coal reserves are found in the states like Jharkhand, Orissa, West Bengal, M.P. and A.P. Some important coal fields are : Talcher, Raniganj, Jharia, Bokaro, Panch Konkam, Signoulli, Chanda etc. 2. Petroleum and natural gases: Petroleum is a complex mixture of hydrocarbons, mostly alkanes and cycloalkanes. It occurs below the earth crust entrapped under rocky strata. In its crude form, the viscous black liquid is known as petroleum and a gas in contact with petroleum layer which flows naturally from oil wells is termed as natural gases. The composition of natural gas is a mixture of mainly methane, (95.0%), small amounts of ethane, propane and butane (3.6%) and traces of CO2 (0.48%) and N2 (1.92%). A liquid mixture of propane and butane can be obtained from natural gas or refinery gases at room temperature under a pressure of 3-5 atmosphere. This is stored and distributed in 40-100 litre capacity steel cylinders. Pscnotes.com Page 124 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The crude petroleum after being refined and purified, are available as petrol, diesel, kerosene, lubricating oil, plastic etc. for commercial and domestic use. In India, the oil deposits, are found at Ganga-Brahmaputra Valley, Bombay high, plains of Gujarat, Thar desert of Rajasthan and area around Andaman Nicobar islands. On the world basis, petroleum deposits are found at Saudi Arab, Iraq, Iran, Kuwait, USA, Mexico, Russia etc. As per the current survey, it is found that world petroleum deposits are diminishing at a very faster rate. If preventive steps are not taken, the existing petroleum will be available maximum up to 40 years. 3. Fuel woods: The rural peoples require fuel wood or fire Wood for their day to day cooking which are obtained from natural forests and plantations. Due to rapid deforestation, the availability of fire wood or fuel wood becomes difficult. This problem can be avoided by massive afforestation (plantation) on degraded forest land, culturable waste land, barren land grazing land etc. 4. Hydropower: Energy obtainable from water flow or water falling from a higher potential to lower potential, is known is hydro- power. It is a conventional and renewable form of energy which can be transmitted to long distance through cables and wires. In India, hydroelectric power is generated by a number of multipurpose river valley projects e.g. Hydro-power project Hirakud, Bhakra Mangal project, Narmada valley project, Nagarjun Sagar project, Sardar Sarovar project etc. 5. Nuclear energy: A small amount of radioactive substance (U235) can produce a lot of energy through the process of nuclear fission. For example, one ton of uranium can provide energy which is much higher than three million tons of coal or 12 million barrels of oil. In order to obtain nuclear energy, nuclear reactors are required. There are around 300 nuclear reactors all over the world. India has only four nuclear power stations (reactors). The nuclear energy can be used in production of electrical energy, as a fuel for marine vessel and space crafts and for the generation of heat in chemical processing plants. In India, Uranium deposits are found at different parts of Rajasthan and Singhbum of Jharkhand. Thorium is recovered from monazite sand found in the state of Kerala. Due to the higher energy releasing tendency of these radioactive substances, these can be used in nuclear reactors to release energy crisis. But the radioactive substances are exhaustible and can be used to develop nuclear weapons of mass destruction. In addition, dumping or radioactive wastes cause serious environmental hazards. Pscnotes.com Page 125 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 (B) Non conventional energy sources: The conventional energy sources discussed above are exhaustible and in some cases, installation of plants to get energy is highly expensive. In order to meet the energy demand of increased population, the scientists developed alternate nonconventional natural Resources sources of energy which should be renewable and provide a pollution free environment. Some nonconventional, renewable and inexpensive energy sources are described below: 1. Solar energy: Solar energy, a primary energy source, is non-polluting and inexhaustible. There are three methods to harness solar energy: (i) Converting solar energy directly into electrical energy in solar power stations using photo cells or photovoltaic cells or silicon solar cell. (ii) Using photosynthetic and biological process for energy trapping. In the process of photosynthesis, green plants absorb solar energy and convert it into chemical energy, stored in the form of carbohydrate. (iii) Converting solar energy in to thermal energy by suitable devices which may be subsequently converted into mechanical, chemical or electrical energy. Since solar energy is non-ending and its conversion to some other energy form is nonpolluting, attention should be paid for the maximum utilization of solar energy. 2. Wind energy: Wind is air in motion. The movement of air takes place due to the convection current set out in the atmosphere which is again due to heating of earth‘s surface by solar radiation, rotation of earth etc. The movement of air occurs both horizontally and vertically. The average annual wind density is 3 kW/m2/day along costal lines of Gujarat, western ghat central parts of India which may show a seasonal variation (i.e., in winter it may go up to 10kW/m2/day).] Since wind has a tremendous amount of energy, its energy can be converted into mechanical or electrical energy using suitable devices, now days, wind energy s converted in to electrical energy which is subsequently used for pumping water, grinding of corns etc. As per available data dearly 20,000 mW of electricity can be generated from wind. In Puri, wind farms are set up which can generate 550 kW of electricity. Pscnotes.com Page 126 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 3. Tidal energy: The energy associated with the tides of the Ocean can be converted in to electrical energy. France constructed the first tidal power plant in 1966. India could take up Ocean thermal energy conversion (OTEC) and by the process it will be capable of generating 50,000 mW of electricity, to meet the power requirements of remote oceanic islands and coastal towns. The Netherlands is famous for windmills. In India, Gujarat and Tamil nadu have windmills. The largest wind farm has been set at Kanyakumari which generates 380 mW of electricity. 4. Geothermal energy: The geothermal energy may be defined as the heat energy obtainable from hot rocks present inside the earth crust. At the deeper region of earth crust, the solid rock gets melted in to magma, due to very high temperature. The magma layer is pushed up due to some geological changes and get concentrated below the earth crust. The places of hot magma concentration at fairly less depth are known as hot spots. These hot spots are known as sources of geothermal energy. Now a days, efforts are being made to use this energy for generating power and creating refrigeration etc. There are a quite few number of methods of harnessing geothermal energy. Different sites of geothermal energy generation are Puga (Ladakh), Tattapani (Suraguja, M.P.), Cambay Basin (Alkananda Valley, Uttaranchal). 5. Bio-mass based energy: The organic matters originated from living organisms (plants and animals) like wood, cattle dung, sewage, agricultural wastes etc. are called as biomass. These substances can be burnt to produce heat energy which can be used in the generation of electricity. Thus, the energy produced from the biomass is known as biomass energy. There are three forms of biomass: (i) Biomass in traditional form: Energy is released by direct burning of biomass (e.g. wood, agricultural residue etc.) (ii) Biomass in nontraditional form: The biomass may be converted in to some other form of fuel which can release energy. For example carbohydrate can be converted into methanol or ethanol which may be used as a liquid fuel. (iii) Biomass for domestic use: Pscnotes.com Page 127 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 When organic matters like cow dung, agricultural wastes, human excreta etc. subjected to bacterial decomposition in presence of water in absence of air, a mixture of CH4, C02, H2, H2S etc. is produced. These gases together is known as biogas. The residue left after the removal of biogas is a good source of manure and biogas is used as a good source of non-polluting fuel. 6. Biogas: Biogas is an important source of energy to meet energy, requirements of rural area. As per given data, around 22,420-million m3 of gas can be produced from the large amount of cow dungs obtained in rural areas in a year. The gas is generated by the action of bacteria on cow dung in absence of air (oxygen). There are two types of biogas plants namely. Fixed done type and floating gas holder type . These plants are commonly known as Gobar gas plants because the usual raw material is cow dung (Gobar). The methodology involves in the process is to prepare a slurry of cow dung with water. Sometimes form waters can also be added to the slurry. The slurry is subjected to bacterial decomposition at 35 .C. There are about 330, 00 biogas plants in India. All India dung production is about 11.30 kg per cattle and 11.60 kg per buffalo with about 67.10 m3 of gas per ton of wet dung. 7. Petro plants: In order to release the pressure on mineral oils (a nonrenewable resource), the scientists have discovered some potential plant species from which liquid hydrocarbons can be extracted. The liquid hydrocarbons present in such plants can be converted in to petroleum. Such plants are known as petro plants which belong to families Apocynaceae, Ascalepiadaceae, Euphrobiaceae; Convolvulaceae and Spontaceae. Still research is on to increase the biomass of the petro plants and effective method of converting their hydrocarbons in petroleum. 8. Dendrothermal energy (Energy plantation): Due to rapid deforestation and overgrazing, a number of denuded wastelands are formed. On these wastelands, fast growing trees and shrubs may be planted which will provide fuel wood, charcoal, fodder, etc. Through gasification, these plants can produce a lot of energy- 9. Baggasse-based plants: Bagggasse is generated as a waste product in sugar mills. This can be utilised to produce electrical energy. As per available data, the sugar mills in India can generate about 2000 mW surplus electricity during crushing season. Pscnotes.com Page 128 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 10. Energy from urban waste: Sewage and solid municipal wastes can also generate energy on their suitable treatments. Nanotechnology Nanotechnology relates to the technology of rearranging and processing of atoms and molecules to fabricate material to Nano specifications such as nano meters, the technology will enable scientist and engineers to see and manipulate matter at the molecular level atom by atom create new structure with fundamentally new molecular organic material and exploit the novel prospects at that scale Scientific achievements of Nanotechnology the concept was first introduced in the year 1959 by an American scientist Richard Feynman who in his famous lectures there stated that there is a plenty of room left at the bottom indirectly mentioned about the techniques of manipulating matter at the bottom level including atoms and molecules the term nanotechnology was Defined by Tokyo scientist University professor in 1974 ,the main objective of Nanotechnology construction of new properties such as they are lighter smaller stronger and more precise There are two approach in nanotechnology top down approach and bottom up approach. In Top down approach Naino objects are constructed from real entities but it is expensive and time consuming the bottom up approach bills larger structure by Linking atoms by atoms using special molecular assembler it is based on a novel of the self assembly technique which is seen in the biological principle of Cell to cell attachment in the tissue repairing process Nanomaterial can be organic nanomaterial or inorganic Carbon based graphene and carbon nanotubes Inorganic Nanomaterials include non particle nanoparticles of aluminium copper augur metal oxide like zinc oxide Nanomaterials , which are used to reduce to nanoscale can be of so different properties compared to word the exhibit on ARM and microscale enabling unique application the vastly increased ratio of surface area to volume lead to all changes in physical thermal and catalytic properties of Nanomaterials Graphene :- the noble prize of Physics 2010 was awarded to to scientist for identification isolation and characterization of crossing which is a single layer of carbon put in a heads up configuration with Tuli crystalline structure it is composed of carbon atoms arranged in tightly bound structure just one attempt it is said that 3 million sheet of graphene on top of each other would be 1 millimetre thick properties of Graphene are:- extreme strength high electrical Pscnotes.com Page 129 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 conductivity Application of Graphene :- it can be used to make super strong material which art in elastic and lightweight to be used in making satellite and airplane it is transparent conductive and can be used in making flexible ultra thin touch screen devices graphing chips work faster than those made out of silicon and also tightly packed and can help make efficient computer it also increases the heat resistant and mechanical strength Carbon nanotube is graphene sheet rolled to form a cylinder nanotube it is hollow and its molecule discovered by Japanese researcher it is high strength strongest and is toughest material on earth in terms of tensile strength which is the ability to be distant stretching ,high electrical conductivity and thermal conductivity. Nanosensors it is a device that make use of unique properties of Nanomaterials and nanoparticles to detect and new type of events in nanoscale Chemical nanosensor are used to measure the magnitudes such as the concentration of a given gas the presence of a specific type of molecule the function of the most common type of chemical nanosensor is based on the fact that electronic properties of Carbon nanotube changed when different type of nanotubes are observed on top of them which locally increases or decreases the number of electrons able to move through carbon nanotube biological Nano sensor used to monitor biomolecular process for Jazz antibody antigen interaction it is usually composed of biological recognition system or bioreactor such as antibody protein and is able to detect cancer virus or bacteria Nanocomposite materials created by introducing nanoparticles on carbon nanotubes into the matrix of microscopic sample material and the resulting nanocomposite may exhibit drastically enhanced properties Application of Nanotechnology information and technology and electronics textile industry In the field of Information Technology nanotech can be used to make tiny transistors of carbon nanotubes that help in developing Naino circuit this will lead to further miniaturization of computers making even more faster and compact the use of carbon nano Tech builders strongly increase the data storage capacity of hard disc replacing CRT with CMD as an electron gun can increase the efficiency of LED including achieving ultra thin flat panels automobiles Network Technology will help in manufacturing is stronger yet lighter and trees Recruiter automobile components the increase in surface area and volume ratio of engine due to use of CNT will make them utilise fuel more efficiently and reduce the exhaust of pollutant the engine will also benefit Pscnotes.com Page 130 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 by becoming more heat resistant textile industry nanofiber make clothes water and it rain repellent and wrinkle free the Lotus is that which give the self cleaning properties also indirectly imported Lotus effect is seen in the Lotus in the form of presence of numerous hydrophobic Nano components due to which the water droplet by taking the dirt Trickle down there by self cleaning the loade Nanomedicine Nanotechnology in area of Health and Science her giving rise to branch of medicine known as nanomedicine which is unique application which can be used in disease diagnosis Nanotechnology in able the development of nanoscale Diagnostic device in the form of leopard ship acting as bio Nano electromechanical devices through which when blood sample is made to pass through it can detect cancer bacterial and viral infection lab on chip deals with handling of small fluid volume less than equal in this low low fluid volume conception produces less waste and analyses is better faster Drug Delivery Nano Technology can be used in formation of nanosized drugs which will help in lowering overall truck conduction and side effects by depositing active agent at specific places in body there by ensuring truck delivery with self precession this will improve bioavailability of drug which refer to rate and extent of absorption of drugs Cancer diagnosis and treatment cancer diagnosis and treatment nanotechnology can locate and eliminate cancer cell using gold nanoshells Metro sales are targeted to bind cancerous cell by attaching antibodies to Nano self service bi irradiating area of the mall with an infrared laser which passed through breast feeding gold nanoshell significantly to cause death of Cancer cell Tissue engineering nanotechnology can help to repair damaged tissue through tissue engineering making eating factor it includes use of a biodegradable nanomaterial such as polycaprolactone coated with collagen to promote Cell to cell attachment it is repairing process Medical nanorobots nanorobot is a technique of creating robot at microscopic scale of NM these nanosized robots can never get human body transport important molecules manipulate manual focus object and communicate with solution by way of miniature Centre this computer control nanorobots can be used in Cancer detection and treatment there is no dressed up as Radiation therapy and chemotherapy which open end up destroying Mohanlal fan control robot will be able to distinguish between different cell type cancerous and normal cell by checking their surface antigen medical nanorobots acting as artificial RBC are called the Spiro cried which can deliver hundred times of season than normal self Shimla Lee medical nanorobots acting as artificial white blood cell can destroy bacteria in process Energy application nanotechnology not only use of renewable and environment friendly source of energy but increase efficiency of energy production by then the ideal fuel for future is said to be hydrogen due to its lightweight and environmental harmless is hydrogen fuel cells were used in automobiles air pollution would be reduced but it can be used only if hydrogen is stored and transported in safe efficient and economical be by using container is made up of nanomaterial nanomaterial can increase conversion efficiency of solar cell under photovoltaic effect by using nanoparticles of Indian selenide is solar LG into electrical energy when compared to present use of Silicon Solar cell smart Windows having Nano coating of vanadium dioxide mixed with tungsten metal act as heat reflective still alone all visible light to pass through window the smart Windows are designed to Z and Adobe to the environment by altering Nano thickness and Pscnotes.com Page 131 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 mixture of coating this makes offices and home today mankol without excessive use of AC there by drastically reducing financial and environmental cost Nanofiltration nanotechnology can be helpful for wastewater treatment producing safe and clean drinking water extremely small size of possible filtration of bacteria and other infection agent nanoparticles of iron oxide are extremely effective at binding and removing arsenic from groundwater there by preventing arsenic groundwater poisoning Santhanam nanoparticle absorb phosphates from aqueous environment applying these in bonds and tools effectively remove available for sides and brother and growth and multiplication of LT that is a lead role so this will benefit commercial fishponds with spend huge amount of money to the remove algae Agriculture nanotechnology has potential to Revolution allies agriculture sector by becoming integral part of Precision farming it is the site specific form of Management using information technology to maximize output that is crop yield while minimising infoset fertilizers and pesticides through geographic information system this will increase the quality of decision making which in turn will make weed control pest control and fertilizer application site specific size and effective Can customer goods smart packaging and food safety and Technology will help develop a smart packaging to optimise product sales like nanocomposite coating process could improve food packaging by placing antimicrobial agent directly on sources of Kotak self nanocomposite could modify the behaviour of files by increasing their barrier properties including mechanical chemical and microbial example silicate nanoparticle can reduce entrance of Oxygen and prevent exit of myself while silver nanoparticle import antimicrobial which include antibacterial and antifungal properties Nano Technology can help to detect contamination of food and prevent Biotech by using an infectious bacteria or virus. Biotechnology Biotechnology is defined as the industrial application of living organisms and their biological processes such as biochemistry, microbiology, and genetic engineering, in order to make best use of the microorganisms for the benefit of mankind. Modern biotechnology provides breakthrough products and technologies to combat debilitating and rare diseases, reduce our environmental footprint, feed the hungry, use less and cleaner energy, and have safer, cleaner and more efficient industrial manufacturing processes. Biotechnology began in the 1970s after the development of genetic engineering that allowed scientists to modify the genetic material of living cells. Genetic engineering is the manipulation of DNA molecules to produce modified plants, animals, or other organisms. DNA is the part of a cell that controls the genetic information of an animal or plant. DNA is a double-stranded molecule that is present in every cell of an organism. The genetic information is contained in individual units or sections of DNA called genes. The genes that are passed from parent to offspring determine the traits that the offspring will have. Applications of Biotechnology Pscnotes.com Page 132 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 1. Health and medicine Fighting infectious diseases : Biotechnology is used extensively in the study of infectious diseases such as SARS (Severe Acute Respiratory Syndrome), and influenza. As a result more effective pharmaceuticals have been developed. Development of vaccines and antibiotics : Using technology, microorganisms are used to develop antibiotics and vaccines to cure diseases. For example, bacteria Bacillus polymysea is used to produce polymyxin B (antibiotic used to cure urinary tract infections), fungus Penicillium notatum is used to produce penicillin (used to cure pneumonia, and many other bacterial infections.) Treating genetic disorders : Disease can occur when genes become defective due to mutations. With advancements in biotechnology, in the near future it will be possible to use gene therapy to replace an abnormal or faulty gene with a normal copy of the same gene. It may be used to treat ailments such as heart disease, inherited diseases such as SCID, and Thalassaemia. In forensic science : A lot of New techniques have been developed such as DNA fingerprinting, besides having a number of other applications which have facilitated the speedy identification of the criminals. 2. Environment Cleaning up and managing the environment : Cleaning up the environment using living organisms is called bioremediation. Naturally occurring, as well as genetically modified microorganisms, such as bacteria, fungi and enzymes are used to break down toxic and hazardous substances present in the environment. 3. Agriculture Biotechnology has also made possible the production of crops improved disease resistan; herbicide-toleran and insecticide-resistan. Plants with improved nutritional value for livestock have also been obtained through biotechnology. Control of pests : One application of biotechnology is in the control of insect pests. The genetic make-up of the pest is changed by causing some mutations. These pests become sterile and do not reproduce further. Pscnotes.com Page 133 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Manufacturing and bio-processing : With the help of new biological techniques it has become possible to grow, the plants that produce compounds for use in detergents, paints, lubricants and plastics on large scale. Food and drinks : Biotechnology, has also made the processing of foods and their products easier. Preservation and storing of food for consumption later has become easy and cheap with the help of biotechnology. Seedless grapes and seedless citrus fruits have been developed using biotechnology. 4. Industry Biotechnology has been used in the industry to produce new products for human consumption. Food additives have been developed which help in the preservation of food. Microorganisms are used in the mass production of items such as cheese, yoghurt, and alcohol. Patents And Intellectual Property Rights .cs29D35F49{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font-size:14pt;font- weight:bold;font-style:normal;} .cs3B54119A{text-align:justify;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 10pt 0pt;line-height:1.5} .csA7555675{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font-size:12pt;font- weight:normal;font-style:normal;} .csC57700C4{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font- size:12pt;font-weight:bold;font-style:normal;} Pscnotes.com Page 134 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 . (TRIPS & TRIMS) Intellectual Property Rights (IPR) are set of rights associated with creations of the human mind. An output of the human mind may be attributed with intellectual property rights. These are like any other property, and the law allows the owner to use the same to economically profit from the intellectual work. Broadly IPR covers laws related to copyrights, patents and trademarks. While laws for these are different in different countries, they follow the international legal instruments. The establishment of the Wold Intellectual Property Organization (WIPO) has established the significance of IPR for the economic growth of nations in the knowledge economy. Philosophy and background of intellectual property rights In the middle of the 16th century, Queen Mary was faced with a difficult question that was brought to her by none other than most powerful publishing house in England at the time. The Stationers, like any other craft guild in the business of printing and producing books loved a monopoly in the profits of their books and terribly feared competition. Therefore, they went to Queen Mary with the request of a royal charter. This charter would allow them to seize illicit editions of their books and bar the publication of books unlicensed by the crown. The Queen suddenly thought that this could indeed be a more efficient way to squash sedition and dissent through censorship by puppeteering this craft guild than previous, perhaps less subtle means like torture and death. In 1557, she granted them this early form of a copyright. Notice how the author or the creator of the work has no place in this agreement and the origins of intellectual property in English law are based on privilege, namely power and profit. This rhetoric, however, changes with the coming of the 18th century and the passing of the Act of Anne in 1707 to one of creativity and learning. The concern for the author has a steady positivist rise after this in the tug of war over intellectual property. In the case Miller v Taylor in 1769, the author sought to extend copyright to common law. Three judges ruled in favour of this motion and two judges ruled against. A closer examination at the reasoning provided by the three assenting judges will tell us almost all the philosophical justifications of intellectual property. The first judge called upon his notion of justice and said it is just that the author control the destiny of his work as it is a product of his labour. The second judge said that extending the copyright would encourage creativity by making the work the creator‘s property. The third judge said it is the authors natural right as the work wouldn‘t exist if not for the mental labour of the author. Together, justice, incentives and natural rights are the cornerstones of the justifications of intellectual property. What are Patents? Patents are a set of exclusive rights granted by a sovereign state to an inventor. These rights are granted for a limited period of time, usually about twenty years. The granting of these rights is in return for public disclosure of the invention. Criteria for Patentability Pscnotes.com Page 135 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Patents protect inventions. These inventions could be either products or processes. All inventions are required to meet the criteria for patentability. These criteria are the presence of a patentable subject matter, novelty, nonobviousness andutility/industrial application. The criterion of an inventive step is particularly important. Mere discoveries are not patentable, and neither are algorithms. TRIPS agreement The Agreement on Trade-Related Aspects of Intellectual Property Rights (TRIPS) is an international legal agreement between all the member nations of the World Trade Organization (WTO). It sets down minimum standards for the regulation by national governments of many forms of intellectual property (IP) as applied to nationals of other WTO member nations. TRIPS was negotiated at the end of the Uruguay Round of the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT) in 1994 and is administered by the WTO. The TRIPS agreement introduced intellectual property law into the international trading system for the first time and remains the most comprehensive international agreement on intellectual property to date. In 2001, developing countries, concerned that developed countries were insisting on an overly narrow reading of TRIPS, initiated a round of talks that resulted in the Doha Declaration. The Doha declaration is a WTO statement that clarifies the scope of TRIPS, stating for example that TRIPS can and should be interpreted in light of the goal "to promote access to medicines for all." Specifically, TRIPS requires WTO members to provide copyright rights, covering content producers including performers, producers of sound recordings and broadcasting organizations; geographical indications, including appellations of origin; industrial designs; integrated circuit layout-designs; patents; new plant varieties; trademarks; trade dress; and undisclosed or confidential information. TRIPS also specifies enforcement procedures, remedies, and dispute resolution procedures. Protection and enforcement of all intellectual property rights shall meet the objectives to contribute to the promotion of technological innovation and to the transfer and dissemination of technology, to the mutual advantage of producers and users of technological knowledge and in a manner conducive to social and economic welfare, and to a balance of rights and obligations. TRIMS agreement The Agreement on Trade-Related Investment Measures (TRIMs) are rules that apply to the domestic regulations a country applies to foreign investors, often as part of an industrial policy. The agreement, concluded in 1994, was negotiated under the WTO's predecessor, the General Agreement on Tariffs and Trade (GATT), and came into force in 1995. The agreement was agreed upon by all members of the World Trade Organization. Trade-Related Investment Measures is one of the four principal legal agreements of the WTO trade treaty. TRIMs are rules that restrict preference of domestic firms and thereby enable international firms to operate more easily within foreign markets. Policies such as local content requirements and trade balancing rules that have traditionally been used to both promote the interests of domestic industries and combat restrictive business practices are now banned. Pscnotes.com Page 136 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 In the late 1980s, there was a significant increase in foreign direct investment throughout the world. However, some of the countries receiving foreign investment imposed numerous restrictions on that investment designed to protect and foster domestic industries, and to prevent the outflow of foreign exchange reserves. Examples of these restrictions include local content requirements (which require that locally produced goods be purchased or used), manufacturing requirements (which require the domestic manufacturing of certain components), trade balancing requirements, domestic sales requirements, technology transfer requirements, export performance requirements (which require the export of a specified percentage of production volume), local equity restrictions, foreign exchange restrictions, remittance restrictions, licensing requirements, and employment restrictions. These measures can also be used in connection with fiscal incentives as opposed to requirement. Some of these investment measures distort trade in violation of GATT Articles III and XI, and are therefore prohibited. Until the completion of the Uruguay Round negotiations, which produced a well-rounded Agreement on Trade-Related Investment Measures (hereinafter the "TRIMs Agreement"), the few international agreements providing disciplines for measures restricting foreign investment provided only limited guidance in terms of content and country coverage. The OECD Code on Liberalization of Capital Movements, for example, requires members to liberalize restrictions on direct investment in a range of areas. The OECD Code's efficacy, however, is limited by the numerous reservations made by each of the members. Ecosystems Eco-System-An ecosystem is defined as a structural and functional unit of biosphere consisting of community of living beings and the physical environment, both interacting and exchanging materials between them. It includes plants, trees, animals, fish, birds, micro-organisms, water, soil, and people. When an ecosystem is healthy (i.e. sustainable) it means that all the elements live in balance and are capable of reproducing themselves Pscnotes.com Page 137 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Components of Ecosystem The components of the ecosystem is categorised into abiotic of non-living and biotic of living components. Both the components of ecosystem and environment are same. 1. Abiotic Components the inorganic and non-living parts of the world. consists of soil, water, air, and light energy etc. involves a ,large number of chemicals like oxygen, nitrogen-, etc. and physical processes including volcanoes, earthquakes, floods, forest fires, climates, and weather conditions. Abiotic factors are the most important determinants of where and how well an organism exists in its environment. Although these factors interact with each other, one single factor can-limit the range of an organism. 1. a) Energy Energy from the sun is essential for maintenance of life. Energy determines the distribution of organisms in the environment. 1. b) Rainfall 2. c) Temperature :-Temperature is a critical factor of the environment which greatly influences survival of organisms. Organisms can tolerate only a certain range of temperature and humidity. 3. d) Atmosphere :It is made up of 21% oxygen, 78% nitrogen , 0.038% carbon dioxide and other inert gases (0.93% Argon, Neon etc). 4. e) Substratum :Land is covered by soil and a wide variety of microbes, protozoa, fungi and small animals (invertebrates) thrive in it 5. f) Materials: Pscnotes.com Page 138 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 (i) Organic compound Such as proteins, carbohydrates, lipids, humic substances are formed from inorganic compound on decomposition. (ii) Inorganic compound Such as carbon, carbon dioxide, water, sulphur, nitrates, phosphates, and ions of various metals are essential for organisms to survive. 1. g) Latitude and altitude Latitude has a strong influence on an area's temperature, resulting in change of climates such as polar, tropical, and temperate. These climates determine different natural biomes. From sea level to highest peaks, wild life is influenced by altitude. As the altitude increases, the air becomes colder and drier, affecting wild life accordingly.( wild life decrease as altitude increase) 2. Biotic Components :Biotic components include living organisms comprising plants, animals and microbes and are classified according to their functional attributes into producers and consumers. Primary producers - Autotrophs (self-nourishing) Primary producers are basically green plants (and certain bacteria and algae). They synthesise carbohydrate from simple inorganic raw materials like carbon dioxide and water in the presence of sunlight by the process of photosynthesis for themselves, and supply indirectly to other non- producers. In terrestrial ecosystem, producers are basically herbaceous and woody plants, while in aquatic ecosystem producers are various species of microscopic algae. 1. b) Consumers — Heterotrophs or phagotrophs (other nourishing) Consumers are incapable of producing their own food (photosynthesis). They depend on organic food derived from plants, animals or both. Consumers can be divided into two broad groups Pscnotes.com Page 139 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 (i) Macro consumers- They feed on plants or animals or both and are categorised on the basis of their food sources. Herbivores are primary consumers which feed mainly on plants e.g. cow, rabbit. Secondary consumers feed on primary consumers e.g. wolves. Carnivores which feed on secondary consumers are called tertiary consumers e.g. lions which can eat wolves. Omnivores are organisms which consume both plants and animals e.g. man. (ii) Micro consumers - Saprotrophs (decomposers or osmotrophs) They are bacteria and fungi which obtain energy and nutrients by decomposing dead organic substances (detritus) of plant and animal origin. The products of decomposition such as inorganic nutrients which are released in the ecosystem are reused by producers and thus recycled. Earthworm and certain soil organisms (such as nematodes, and arthropods) are detritus feeders and help in the decomposition of organic matter and are called detrivores. Conservation of Wild life The Environment Protection Act is an important legislation that provides for coordination of activities of the various regulatory agencies, creation of authorities with adequate powers for environmental protection, regulation of the discharge of environmental pollutants, handling of hazardous substances, etc. The Act provided an opportunity to extend legal protection to non- forest habitats (‗Ecologically Sensitive Areas‘) such as grasslands, wetlands and coastal zones.The Environment (Protection) Act was enacted in 1986 with the objective of providing for the protection and improvement of the environment. It empowers the Central Government to establish authorities charged with the mandate of preventing environmental pollution in all its Pscnotes.com Page 140 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 forms and to tackle specific environmental problems that are peculiar to different parts of the country. The Environment Protection Act is an umbrella legislation that consolidated the provisions of the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act of 1974 and the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act of 1981. Within this framework of the legislations, the government established Pollution Control Boards (PCBs) in order to prevent, control, and abate environmental pollution. Under the EPA, Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification was introduced in 1994, it was modified in 2006 and the latest amendment was in 2009. Under the EIA it has become mandatory to seek environmental clearance for several activities and industries with the involvement of the public as per procedure. Main Features of The Environment Protection Act are:- i) Co-ordination of actions by the State Governments, officers and other authorities ii) Planning and execution of a nation-wide programme for the prevention, control and abatement of environmental pollution. iii) Laying down standards for the quantity of environment in its various aspects. iv) Laying down standards for emission or discharge of environmental pollutants from various sources whatsoever. Provided that different standards for emission or discharge may be laid down under this clause from different sources having regard to the quality or composition of the emission lr discharge of environmental pollutants from such sources. v) Restriction of areas in which any industries, operations or processes or class of industries, operations or processes shall not be carried out or shall be carried out subject to certain safeguards. vi) Laying down procedures and safeguards for the prevention of accidents which may cause environmental pollution and remedial measures for such accidents. vii) Laying down procedures and safeguards for the handling of hazardous substances. Pscnotes.com Page 141 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 viii) Examination of such manufacturing processes, materials and substances as are likely to cause environmental pollution. ix) Carrying out and sponsoring investigations and research relating to problems of environmental pollution. x) Inspection of any premises, plant, equipment, machinery, manufacturing or other processes, materials or substances and giving, by order, of such directions to such authorities, officers or persons as it may consider necessary to take steps for the prevention, control and abatement of environmental pollution. xi) Establishment or recognition of environmental laboratories and institutes to carry out the functions entrusted to such environmental laboratories and institutes under this Act. xii) Collection and dissemination of information in respect of matters relating to environmental pollution. xiii) Preparation of manuals, codes or guides relating to the prevention, control and abatement of environmental pollution. In order to check rapid deforestation due to forestlands being released by state governments for agriculture, industry and other development projects (allowed under the Indian Forest Act) the federal government enacted the Forest Conservation Act in 1980 with an amendment in 1988. The Act made the prior approval of the federal government necessary for de-reservation of reserved forests, logging and for use of forestland for non- forest purposes. The Forest Conservation Act 1980 was enacted to help conserve the country's forests. It strictly restricts and regulates the de-reservation of forests or use of forest land for non-forest purposes without the prior approval of Central Government. To this end the Act lays down the pre- requisites for the diversion of forest land for non-forest purposes. This powerful legislation has, to a large extent, curtailed the indiscriminate logging and release of forestland for non-forestry purposes by state governments. While the federal government imposed such strict restrictions, it did not simultaneously evolve a mechanism to compensate state governments for loss of timber logging revenues. This anomaly coupled with increasing pressure for land due to a burgeoning population has generated considerable resentment within state governments resulting in growing pressure to dilute the restrictive provisions of the Act. Pscnotes.com Page 142 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The Supreme Court of India has currently imposed a complete ban on the release of forestland for non-forestry activities without the prior approval of the federal government. It states that no project should be undertaken in the vicinity of :- Natonal Parks,Wildlife Sanctuaries and Core areas of the Biosphere Reserves. Scenic landscapes,areas of geomorphological significance,unique and represantative biomes and eco-systems,heritage sites/structures and areas of cultural heritage and importance. Fragile eco-systems such as mountains,areas rich in coral formations as well as marine,coastal,desert,wetland,riverine and island eco-systems. Areas rich in biological diversity,genepool and other natural resources. In order to check rapid deforestation due to forestlands being released by state governments for agriculture, industry and other development projects (allowed under the Indian Forest Act) the federal government enacted the Forest Conservation Act in 1980 with an amendment in 1988. The Act made the prior approval of the federal government necessary for de-reservation of reserved forests, logging and for use of forestland for non- forest purposes. The Forest Conservation Act 1980 was enacted to help conserve the country's forests. It strictly restricts and regulates the de-reservation of forests or use of forest land for non-forest purposes without the prior approval of Central Government. To this end the Act lays down the pre- requisites for the diversion of forest land for non-forest purposes. This powerful legislation has, to a large extent, curtailed the indiscriminate logging and release of forestland for non-forestry purposes by state governments. While the federal government imposed such strict restrictions, it did not simultaneously evolve a mechanism to compensate state governments for loss of timber logging revenues. This anomaly coupled with increasing pressure for land due to a burgeoning population has generated considerable resentment within state governments resulting in growing pressure to dilute the restrictive provisions of the Act. The Supreme Court of India has currently imposed a complete ban on the release of forestland for non-forestry activities without the prior approval of the federal government. It states that no project should be undertaken in the vicinity of :- Natonal Parks,Wildlife Sanctuaries and Core areas of the Biosphere Reserves. Scenic landscapes,areas of geomorphological significance,unique and represantative biomes and eco-systems,heritage sites/structures and areas of cultural heritage and importance. Pscnotes.com Page 143 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Fragile eco-systems such as mountains,areas rich in coral formations as well as marine,coastal,desert,wetland,riverine and island eco-systems. Areas rich in biological diversity,genepool and other natural resources. Biodiversity-Defination, types, importance, hotspots, threats and conservation The term biodiversity was coined as a contraction of biological diversity by E.O. Wilson in 1985. Biodiversity may be defined as the variety and variability of living organisms and the ecological complexes in which they exist. In other words, biodiversity is the occurrence of different types of ecosystems, different species of organisms with the whole range of their variants and genes adapted to different climates, environments along with their interactions and processes. Types of biodiversity There are three interrelated hierarchical levels of biodiversity namely, genetic diversity, species diversity and community or ecosystem diversity. Genetic diversity It describes the variation in the number and types of genes as well as chromosomes present in different species. The magnitude of variation in genes of a species increases with increase in size and environmental parameters of the habitat. The genetic variation arises by gene and chromosome mutation in individuals and in sexually reproducing organisms and it is spread in the population by recombination of genetic materials during cell division after sexual reproduction. Species diversity It describes the variety in the number and richness of the spices with in a region. The species richness may be defined as the number of species per unit area. The richness of a species tells about the extent of biodiversity of a site and provides a means for comparing different sites. The species richness depends largely on climatic conditions. The number of individuals of different species with in a region represents species evenness or species equitability. The product species richness and species evenness give species diversity of a region. When a species is confined entirely to a particular area, it is termed as endemic species. Ecosystem diversity It describes the assemblage and Interaction of spices living together and the physical environment a given area. It relates varieties of habitats, biotic communities ecological processes in biosphere. It also tells about the diversity within the ecosystem. It is referred as Land escape diversity because it includes placement and size of various ecosystems. For example, the landscapes like grass lands, deserts, mountains etc. show ecosystem diversity. The ecosystem diversity is due to diversity of niches, trophic levels and ecological processes like nutrient cycling, food webs, energy flow, role of dominant species and various related biotic interactions. Such type of diversity can generate more productive and stable ecosystems or communities capable of tolerating various types of stresses e.g. drought, flood etc. Importance of biodiversity The biodiversity has the following importance‘s: Productive values Biodiversity produces a number of products harvested from nature and sold in commercial markets. Indirectly it provides economic benefits to people which include Pscnotes.com Page 144 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 water quality soil protection, equalisation of climate, environmental monitoring, scientific research, recreation etc. Consumptive value The consumptive value can be assigned to goods such as fuel woods, leaves, forest products etc. which may be consumed locally and do not figure in national and international market. Social value The loss of biodiversity directly influences the social life of the country possibly through influencing ecosystem functions (energy flow and biogeochemical cycle). This be easily understood by observing detrimental effects of global warming and acid rain which cause an unfavorable alteration in logical processes. Aesthetic value Aesthetic values such as refreshing fragrance of the flowers, taste of berries, softness of mossed, melodious songs of birds, etc. compel the human beings to preserve them. The earth‘s natural beauty with its colour and hues, thick forest, and graceful beasts has inspired the human beings from their date of birth to take necessary steps for its maintenance. Similarly botanical and zoological gardens are the means of biodiversity conservation and are of aesthetic values. Ecological value Biodiversity holds great ecological value because it is indispensable to maintain the ecological balance. Any disturbance in the delicately fabricated ecological balance maintained by different organisms, will lead to severe problems, which may threaten the survival of human beings. Biodiversity hotspots A biodiversity hotspot is a biogeographic region that is both a significant reservoir of biodiversity and is threatened with destruction. Indian Biodiversity Hotspot area Western Ghats (Sahyadri Hills) The Western Ghats, also known as the Sahyadri Hills , is a mountain chain running from the north to the South and is isolated by the Arabian Sea to the West, the arid Deccan Plateau to the East, and the Vindhya-Satpura ranges to the North. They have different vegetation types: scrub jungles and grasslands at low altitudes, dry and moist deciduous forests, montane grasslands and shoals, and the precious tropical evergreen and semi evergreen forests. Complex topography, high rainfall and relative inaccessibility have helped the region retain its biodiversity. Of the 15,000 flowering plant species in India, there are an estimated 4,780 species in the Western Ghats region. There is also a great diversity of traditional crop plants and an equal diversity of animal life. A large number of amphibians, freshwater fishes and invertebrate groups are endemic to Western Ghats. Indo-Burma (Eastern Himalayas ) The hotspot contains the Lower Mekong catchment. It begins in eastern Bangladesh and then extends across north-eastern India, south of the Bramaputra River, to encompass nearly all of Myanmar, part of southern and western Yunnan Province in China, all of the Lao People's Democratic Republic, Cambodia and Vietnam, the vast majority of Thailand and a small part of Peninsular Malaysia. In addition, the hotspot covers the coastal lowlands of southern China (in southern Guangxi and Guangdong), as well as several offshore islands, such as Hainan Island (of China) in the South China Sea and the Pscnotes.com Page 145 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Andaman Islands (of India) in the Andaman Sea. The hotspot contains the Lower Mekong catchment. Threats to biodiversity Biodiversity is considered as a reservoir of resources to be used for the manufacture of food, medicine, industrial products, etc. But with an increased demand of rapid population growth, biodiversity is gradually depleting. Habitat destruction The primary cause of loss of biodiversity is habitat loss or destruction which is resulted due to the large industrial and commercial activities associated with agriculture, irrigation, construction of dams, mining, fishing etc. Habitat fragmentation With increased population, the habitats are fragmented into pieces by roads, fields, canals, power lines, towns etc. The isolated fragment of habitats restricts the potential of species for dispersal and colonization. In addition, the habitat fragmentation also brings about microclimatic changes in light, temperature, wind etc. Pollution The most dreaded factor inducing loss of biodiversity is environmental pollution which include air pollution, Water pollution, industrial pollution, pollution due to chemical Pastes, pesticides radioactive materials etc. Over exploitation The natural resources are over exploited to meet growing rural poverty, intensive technological growth and globalization of economy. All these factors together may be responsible for the extinction of a number of species. Conservation of Biodiversity Biodiversity is being depleted by the loss of habitat, fragmentation of habitat, over exploitation of resources, human sponsored ecosystems, climatic changes, pollution invasive exotic spices, diseases, shifting cultivation, poaching of wild life etc. Since the human beings are enjoying all the benefits from biodiversity, they should take proper care for the preservation of biodiversity in all its form and good health for the future generation i.e., the human being should prevent the degradation and destruction of the habitats thereby maintaining the biodiversity at its optimum level. Conservation of biodiversity is protection, upliftment and scientific management of biodiversity so as to maintain it at its threshold level and derive sustainable benefits for the present and future generation. In other words, conservation of bio-diversity is the proper management of the biosphere by human beings in such a way that it gives maximum benefits for the present generation and also develops its potential so as to meet the needs of the future generations. Environmental pollution and degradation The major causes of the environmental degradation are modern urbanization, industrialization, over-population growth, deforestation etc. Environmental pollution refers to the degradation of quality and quantity of natural resources. Pscnotes.com Page 146 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Mahatma Gandhi‘s principle of ―enoughness‖ in his saying ―the earth provides enough to satisfy every persons need but not for every person‘s greed‖ According to World Commission on Environment and Development, Our Common Future (1987) , Sustainable development is development that meets the needs of the present without compromising the ability of future generations to meet their own needs. It contains within it two key concepts: the concept of needs, in particular the essential needs of the world's poor, to which overriding priority should be given; and the idea of limitations imposed by the state of technology and social organization on the environment's ability to meet present and future needs." Environmental influences are important both at the prenatal and postnatal stages of human development. At the prenatal stage, when a fetus is in the mother‘s womb, internal or external harmful agents, such as certain legal or illegal drugs, alcohol, lead and pollutants can harm the unborn baby‘s development. The mother‘s nutrition, diseases and emotional stress can also affect the development of the fetus. The environment provides various resources to man-both renewable and nonrenewable. Renewable resources are those resources which are replenished easily over time, and hence can be used without the possibility of the resource becoming depleted or exhausted. Examples of renewable resources include trees in the forests, fishes in the ocean, etc. Non-renewable resources, on the other hand, are those resources which can get exhausted or depleted over time as they are used up. Examples of non-renewable resources include fossil fuels and minerals like petroleum,natural gas, coal, etc. Thus these resources need to be used carefully, while keeping in mind the requirements of the future generations. Economic Growth and Sustainability Over-consumption has led to depletion of resources Main environmental threats o Depletion of resources o Global warming o Expansion of waste arising from production and consumption o Population pressure Pscnotes.com Page 147 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 o Pollution o Loss of biodiversity and extinction of species. Green National Income Account o Conventional national income accounting does not capture the environmental degradation due to production and consumption o This omission leads to misrepresentation of improvements in social welfare o Since there is no market for many environmental resources, it is difficult to place monetary values on them o Index of Sustainable Economic Welfare: adjusts the national income to make an allowance for defensive spending (i.e. that incurred in cleaning up for pollution and other forms of environmental damage) Economic Sustainability o Calls for reforms in the manner that we conduct our economic activity o Removing unfair trade barriers and subsidies that harm the environment o Upholding the polluter pays principle o Tax not on labour but on consumption Ecological Sustainability Sustainable forest management o ‗Forest Principle‘ adopted at the 1992 Rio Summit o In 2007, GA adopted the Non Legally Binding Instrument on All Types of Forests. The instrument is the first of its kind and is committed to promote SFM by bringing all stakeholders together o Ministerial Conference on Protection of Forests in Europe defined SFM as the attainment of balance between society‘s increasing demands for forest products and benefits, and the preservation of forest health and diversity. o Forest managers must assess and integrate a wide array of sometimes conflicting factors to produce sound forest plans o Ecosystems approachhas been adopted by the CBD. The CBD definition of Ecosystems Approach is known as the Malawi Principles. o Ecosystems Approach is a strategy of management of land, water and living resources in a way that promotes conservation and sustainable use in an equitable way. Focused on use of scientific methodologies for each level of biological organisation and their interaction. Pscnotes.com Page 148 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 o SFM was recognised by the parties to CBD in 2004 to be a concrete means of applying the Ecosystems Approach to forest ecosystems Objectives of SFM o Maintain environmental stability through preservation of ecological balance that has been adversely affected due to the depletion of forest cover o Preserve the natural heritage of the country o Improve productivity of forests o Protecting through cooperation with local communities on the principle of Joint Forest Management The rapid pace of population growth has led to the excessive utilization of natural resources. Huge population also leads to huge production of wastes. The resultant outcomes are loss of biodiversity, pollution of air, water and soil and increased pressure on arable land. All these have been putting great stress on the environment. If you take the case of India, it supports 17 percent of world population on just 2.4 per cent of the world land area. The earth‘s carrying capacity in terms of its food resource is approaching its limits. Oceanic supply of fish, rangelands which support livestock, and the hydrological cycle to produce freshwater are strained. The backlog of unused agricultural technology is shrinking in industrial and developing countries alike, slowing the rise in cropland productivity. At the same time, soil erosion, air pollution, soil compaction, aquifer depletion, the loss of soil organic matter, and the waterlogging and salting of irrigated land are all slowing food production. At present, it appears that nothing can reverse the worldwide decline in grain output per person. The bottomline is that the world‘s farmers can no longer be counted on to feed the projected additions to the present population. Attaining a humane balance between food production and population growth now depends more on family planners instead of farmers. The Environment Protection Act is an important legislation that provides for coordination of activities of the various regulatory agencies, creation of authorities with adequate powers for environmental protection, regulation of the discharge of environmental pollutants, handling of hazardous substances, etc. The Act provided an opportunity to extend legal protection to non-forest habitats (‗Ecologically Sensitive Areas‘) such as grasslands, wetlands and coastal zones.The Environment (Protection) Act was enacted in 1986 with the objective of providing for the protection and improvement of the environment. It empowers the Central Government to establish authorities charged with the mandate of preventing environmental pollution in all its forms and to tackle specific environmental problems that are peculiar to different parts of the country. The Environment Protection Act is an umbrella legislation that consolidated the provisions of the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act of 1974 and the Air (Prevention and Control of Pollution) Act of 1981. Within this framework of the legislations, the government established Pollution Control Boards (PCBs) in order to prevent, control, and abate environmental pollution. Under the EPA, Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification was introduced in 1994, it was modified in 2006 and the latest amendment was in 2009. Under the EIA it Pscnotes.com Page 149 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 has become mandatory to seek environmental clearance for several activities and industries with the involvement of the public as per procedure. Main Features of The Environment Protection Act are:- i) Co-ordination of actions by the State Governments, officers and other authorities ii) Planning and execution of a nation-wide programme for the prevention, control and abatement of environmental pollution. iii) Laying down standards for the quantity of environment in its various aspects. iv) Laying down standards for emission or discharge of environmental pollutants from various sources whatsoever. Provided that different standards for emission or discharge may be laid down under this clause from different sources having regard to the quality or composition of the emission lr discharge of environmental pollutants from such sources. v) Restriction of areas in which any industries, operations or processes or class of industries, operations or processes shall not be carried out or shall be carried out subject to certain safeguards. vi) Laying down procedures and safeguards for the prevention of accidents which may cause environmental pollution and remedial measures for such accidents. vii) Laying down procedures and safeguards for the handling of hazardous substances. viii) Examination of such manufacturing processes, materials and substances as are likely to cause environmental pollution. ix) Carrying out and sponsoring investigations and research relating to problems of environmental pollution. x) Inspection of any premises, plant, equipment, machinery, manufacturing or other processes, materials or substances and giving, by order, of such directions to such authorities, officers or persons as it may consider necessary to take steps for the prevention, control and abatement of environmental pollution. xi) Establishment or recognition of environmental laboratories and institutes to carry out the functions entrusted to such environmental laboratories and institutes under this Act. xii) Collection and dissemination of information in respect of matters relating to environmental pollution. xiii) Preparation of manuals, codes or guides relating to the prevention, control and abatement of environmental pollution. ENVIRONMENT POLLUTION defined as 'an addition or excessive addition of certain materials to the physical environment (water, air and lands), making it less fit or unfit for life'. Pollutants are the materials or factors, which cause adverse effect on the natural quality of any component of the environment. Classifications 1. According to the form in which they persist after release into the environment. • Primary pollutants: These persist in the form in which they are added to the environment e.g. DDT, plastic. • Secondary Pollutants: These are formed by interaction among the primary pollutants. For example, peroxyacetyl nitrate (PAN) is formed by the interaction of nitrogen oxides and Pscnotes.com Page 150 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 hydrocarbons. 2. According to their existence in nature. • Quantitative Pollutants: These occur in nature and become pollutant when their concentration reaches beyond a threshold level. E.g. carbon dioxide, nitrogen oxide. • Qualitative Pollutants: These do not occur in nature and are man-made. E.g. fungicides, herbicides, DDT etc. 3. According to their nature of disposal. • Biodegradable Pollutants: Waste products, which are degraded by microbial action. E.g. sewage. • Non-biodegradable Pollutants: Pollutants, which are not decomposed by microbial action. E.g. plastics, glass, DDT, salts of heavy metals, radioactive substances etc 4. According to origin • Natural • Anthropogenic AIR POLLUTION aggravated because of four developments: Increasing traffic, growing cities, rapid economic development, and industrialization contamination of air by the discharge of harmful substances Major air pollutants and their sources 1. Carbon monoxide (CO) • It is a colourless, odourless gas that is produced by the incomplete burning of carbon - based fuels including petrol, diesel, and wood. • It is also produced from the combustion of natural and synthetic products such as cigarettes. • It lowers the amount of oxygen that enters our blood. It can slow our reflexes and make us confused and sleepy. 2. Carbon dioxide (CO2) principle greenhouse gas 3. Chloroflorocarbons (CFC) • gases that are released mainly fromair-conditioning systems and refrigeration. • When released into the air, CFCs rise to the stratosphere, where they come in contact with few other gases, which lead to a reduction of the ozone layer that protects the earth from the harmful ultraviolet rays of the sun. Pscnotes.com Page 151 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 4. Lead present in petrol, diesel, lead batteries, paints, hair dye products, etc. affects children in particular. cause nervous system damage and digestive problems and, in some cases, cause cancer. 5. Ozone • occurs naturally in the upper layers of the atmosphere. • at-the ground level, it is a pollutant with highly toxic effects. • Vehicles and industries are the major source of ground-level ozone emissions. • Ozone makes our eyes itch, burn, and water. It lowers our resistance to cold and pneumonia. 6. Nitrogen oxide (Nox) • causes smog and acid rain. It is produced from burning fuels including petrol, diesel, and coal. • Nitrogen oxide can make children susceptible to respiratory diseases in winters. 7. Suspended particulate matter (SPM) • consists of solids in the air in the form of smoke, dust, and vapour that can remain suspended for extended periods • The finer of these particles when breathed in can lodge in our lungs and cause lung damage and respiratory problems. 8. Sulphur dioxide (S02) • a gas produced from burning coal, mainly in thermal power plants. • Some industrial processes, such as production of paper and smelting of metals, produce sulphur dioxide. • a major contributor to smog and acid rain. • Sulphur dioxide can lead to lung diseases 9. Smog • a combination of the words fog and smoke. Smog is a condition of fog that had soot or smoke in it. • interaction of sunlight with certain chemicals in the atmosphere. • primary components of photochemical smog is ozone. • Ozone is formed through a complex reaction involving hydrocarbons, nitrogen oxides, and sunlight. It is formed when pollutants released from gasoline, diesel- powered vehicles and oil- based solvents react with heat and sunlight from biofuels, the four most serious pollutants are particulates, carbon monoxide, polycyclic organic matter, and formaldehyde Pollutants i) Volatile organic compounds The main indoor sources are perfumes, hair sprays, furniture polish, glues, air fresheners, moth repellents, wood preservatives, and other products. ii) Biological pollutants It includes pollen from plants, mite, and hair from pets, fungi, parasites, and some bacteria. iii) Formaldehyde Pscnotes.com Page 152 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Mainly from carpets, particle boards, and insulation foam. It causes irritation to the eyes and nose and allergies. iv) Radon It is a gas that is emitted naturally by the soil. Due to modern houses having poor ventilation, it is confined inside the house and causes lung cancers. Fly Ash Ash is produced whenever combustion of solid material takes place. Composition 1. Aluminium silicate (in.large amounts) 2. silicon dioxide (Si02) and 3. Calcium oxide (Ca0). Fly ash particles are oxide rich and consist of silica, alumina, oxides of iron, calcium, and magnesium and toxic heavy metals like lead, arsenic, cobalt, and coppers Policy measures of MoEF: • The Ministry of Environment and Forests vide its notification in 2009, has made it mandatory to use Fly Ash based products in all construction projects, road embankment works and low lying land filling works within 100 kms radius of Thermal Power Station. • To use Fly Ash in mine filling activities within 50 kms radius of Thermal Power Stations. • Arresters: These are used to separate particulate matters from contaminated air. • Scrubbers: These are used to clean air for both dusts and gases by passing it through a dry or wet packing material. Government Initiatives (1) National Air Quality Monitoring Programme In India, the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) has been executing a nationwide programme of ambient air quality monitoring known as National Air Quality Monitoring Programme (NAMP). The National Air Quality Monitoring Programme (NAMP) is undertaken in India (i) to determine status and trends of ambient air quality; (ii) to ascertain the compliance of NAAQS; (iii) to identify non-attainment cities; (iv) to understand the natural process of cleaning in the atmosphere; and (v) to undertake preventive and corrective measures. Annual average concentration of SOx levels are within the prescribed National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS). National Ambient Air Quality Standards (NAAQS) were notified in the year 1982, duly revised in 1994 based on health criteria and land uses . The NAAQS have been revisited and revised in November 2009 for 12 pollutants, which include. sulphur dioxide (S02), nitrogen dioxide (NO2), particulate matter having size less than 10 micron (PM10),particulate matter having size less than 2.5micron (PM2.5), ozone, lead, carbon monoxide (CO), arsenic, nickel, benzene, ammonia, and. Benzopyrene. WATER POLLUTION Addition of certain substances to the water such as organic, inorganic, biological, radiological, heat, which degrades the quality of water so that it Pscnotes.com Page 153 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 becomes unfit for use. Putrescibility is the process of decomposition of organic matter present in water by microorganisms using oxygen. Water having DO (dissolved oxygen) content below 8.0 mg/L may be considered as contaminated. Water having DO content below. 4.0 mg/L is considered to be highly polluted. Water pollution by organic wastes is measured in terms of Biochemical Oxygen Demand- (BOD). BOD is the amount of dissolved oxygen needed by bacteria in decomposing the organic wastes present in water. Chemical oxygen demand (COD) is a slightly better mode used to measure pollution load in water. It is the measure of oxygen equivalent of the requirement of oxidation of total organic matter (i.e. biodegradable and non- biodegradable) present in water. A cripling deformity called Minamata disease due to consumption of fish captured from mercury contaminated Minamata Bay. Water contaminated with cadmium can cause itai itai disease also called ouch-ouch disease (a painful disease of bones and joints) and cancer of lungs and liver. The compounds of lead cause anaemia, headache, loss of muscle power and bluish line around the gum Excess nitrate in drinking water reacts with hemoglobin to form non -functional met haemoglobin, and impairs oxygen transport. This condition is called methaemoglobinemia or blue baby syndrome. Over exploitation of ground water may lead to leaching of arsenic from soil and rock sources and contaminate ground water. Chronic exposure to arsenic causes black foot disease. It also causes diarrhoea,-peripheral neuritis, hyperkerotosis and also lung and skin cancer. SOIL POLLUTION Industrial waste includes chemicals such as mercury, lead, copper, zinc, cadmium, cynides, thiocynates, chromates, acids, alkalies, organic substances etc Four R's: Refuse, Reduce, Reuse, and Recycle NOISE POLLUTION Sound is measured in decibels (dB). An increase of about 10 dB is approximately double the increase in loudness. A person's hearing can be damaged if exposed to noise levels over 75 dB over a prolonged period of time. The World Health Organization recommends that the sound level indoors should be less than 30 dB. Ambient Noise Level Monitoring - Noise Pollution (Control and Regulation) Rules, 2000 define ambient noise levels for various areas as follows- A. Industrial Area—75DB to 70Db (Day time-6am to 10pm and night time 10pm to 6am ..75 is day time and 70 is night time) B. Commercial Area--65 to 55 C. Residential Area--55 to 45 D. Silence Zone-- 50 to 40 • The Government of India on Mar 2011 launched a Real time Ambient Noise Monitoring Network. • Under this network, in phase- I, five Remote Noise Monitoring Terminals each have been installed in different noise zones in seven metros (Delhi, Hyderabad, Kolkata, Mumbai, Pscnotes.com Page 154 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Bangalore, Chennai and Lucknow). In Phase II another 35 monitoring stations will be installed in the same seven cities. Phase III will cover installing 90 stations in 18 other cities. Phase-III cities are Kanpur, Pune, Surat, Ahmedabad, Nagpur, Jaipur, Indore, Bhopal, Ludhiana, Guwahati, Dehradun, Thiruvananthpuram, Bhubaneswar, Patna, Gandhinagar, Ranchi, Amritsar and Raipur. Silence Zone is an area comprising not less than 100 metres around hospitals, educational institutions, courts, religious places or any other t area declared as such by a competent authority. RADIO ACTIVE POLLUTION Non-ionising radiations affect only those components which absorb them and have low penetrability. They include short-wave radiations such as ultraviolet rays, which forms a part of solar radiation. Sunburns is due to these radiation Ionising radiations have high penetration power & cause breakage of macro molecules They include X-rays, cosmic rays and atomic radiations -(radiations emitted by radioactive elements Alpha particles, can be blocked by a piece of paper and human skin. Beta particles can penetrate through skin, while can be blocked by some pieces of glass and metal. Gamma rays can penetrate easily to human skin and damage cells on its way through, reaching far, and can only be blocked by a very thick, strong, massive piece of concrete radium-224, uranium-238, thorium-232, potassium-40, carbon-14, etc. The nuclear arms use uranium-235 and plutonium-239 for fission and hydrogen or lithium as fusion material The radio nuclides with long half-time are the chief source of environmental radioactive pollution. E — WASTE E-waste is not hazardous if it is stocked in safe storage or recycled by scientific methods or transported from one place to the other in parts or in totality in the formal sector. The e-waste can be considered hazardous if recycled by primitive methods Survey was carried out by the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) during 2005 In India, among top ten cities; Mumbai ranks first in generating e-waste followed by Delhi, Bangalore, Chennai, Kolkata, Ahmadabad, Hyderabad, Pune, Surat and Nagpur. SOLID WASTE the discarded (abandoned or considered waste-like) materials does not include solid or dissolved materials in domestic sewage, or solid or dissolved materials in irrigation return flows or industrial discharge s0 Conventional plastics have been associated with reproductive problems in both humans and wildlife. Dioxin (highly carcinogenic and toxic) by-product of the manufacturing process is one of the chemicals believed to be passed on through breast milk to the nursing infant. Burning of plastics, especially PVC releases this dioxin and also furan into the atmosphere. Pyrolysis-It is a process of combustion in absence of oxygen or the material burnt under controlled atmosphere of oxygen. It is an alternative to incineration. The gas and liquid thus obtained can be used as fuels. Pscnotes.com Page 155 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Waste Minimization Circles (WMC) helps Small and Medium Industrial Clusters in waste minimization in their industrial plants. assisted by the World Bank with the Ministry of Environment and Forests acting as the nodal ministry. being implemented with the assistance of National Productivity Council (NPC), New Delhi. aims to realise the objectives of the Policy Statement for Abatement of Pollution (1992), which states that the government should educate citizens about environmental risks, the economic and health dangers of resource degradation and the real economic cost of natural resources. BIOREMEDIATION the use of microorganisms (bacteria and fungi) to degrade the environmental contaminants into less toxic forms. Phytoremediation is use of plants to remove contaminants from soil and water . Rhizofiltration • a water remediation technique that involves the uptake of contaminants by plant roots. • used to reduce contamination in natural wetlands and estuary areas. Environment Impact Assessment It is a study to evaluate and identify the predictable environmental consequences and the best combination of economic and environmental costs and benefits of the proposed project. On the basis of EIA, an Environmental Management Plan (EMP) is prepared, which is a description of the means by which the environmental consequences as pointed out in the EIA will be mitigated. Together the whole draft is termed as EIA-EMP report. Why EIA is conducted: 1. To systematically examine both beneficial and adverse consequences of the proposal. 2. To ensure that those consequences are taken into account during project design. 3. To identify possible environmental effects of the proposal and means to mitigate them. 4. To predict whether there will be significant adverse effects even after the mitigation. 5. To lessen conflicts by promoting community participation and informing decision makers. Notification on Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) of developmental projects 1994 under the provisions of Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 making EIA mandatory for 29 categories of developmental projects. One more item was added to the list in January, 2000. environmental impact assessment statutory for 30 activities Environment Impact Assessment Notification of 2006 has categorized the developmental projects in two categories, i.e., Category A and Category B 'Category A' projects are appraised at national level by expert appraisal committee Pscnotes.com Page 156 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 India has constituted the State Level Environment Impact Assessment Authority (SEIAA) and State Level Expert Appraisal Committee (SEAC) to decentralize the environmental clearance process The objective of EIA is to foresee and address potential environmental problems/ concerns at an early stage of project planning and design. The EIA notification establishes four stages for obtaining Environmental Clearance. 1. Screening 2. Scoping and consideration of alternatives Baseline data collection 3. Impact prediction 4. Assessment of alternatives, delineation of mitigation measures and environmental impact statement 5. Public hearing 6. Environment Management Plan Decision making 7. Monitoring the clearance conditions Screening- It is only for Categories B Screening Criteria are based upon: Scales of investment; • Type of development; and, • Location of development B1 Categories project require Environmental Impact Assessment while B2 category projects are exempted from EIA. State Level Expert Appraisal Committee determine about project categories Disaster as a Non-traditional security and safety challenge, disaster mitigation and management Disaster Management History shows that India is exposed to national disasters. Cyclones, floods, earthquakes, droughts and floods are major threats. About 60 percent of the landmass is prone to earthquakes of various intensities, over 40 million hectares is prone to floods and 68 percent of the area is susceptible to drought. This not only results in loss to thousands of lives, but also in terms of loss in private, community and public assets. While substantial scientific and material progress has been made, the loss of lives and property due to disasters has not decreased. Government of India has now brought about a paradigm shift in its approach to disaster management, from being relief centric to one with greater emphasis on preparedness, prevention and mitigation. Pscnotes.com Page 157 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 This approach proceeds from the conviction that development cannot be sustained unless disaster mitigation is built into the development process. Another cornerstone of the approach is that mitigation has to be inter- disciplinary spanning across all sectors of development. Disaster Management occupies an important place in the policy framework as it is the poor and underprivileged who are worst affected on account of calamities and disasters. Disaster Management is a multi-disciplinary area in which a wide range of issues that range from forecasting, warning, search and rescue, relief, reconstruction and rehabilitation are included. It is multi-sectoral as it involves administrators, scientists, planners, volunteers and communities. Their roles and activities span the pre-disaster, during disaster and post-disaster plans. All these activities are complementary and supplementary to each other and here is a critical need for coordinating these activities. Natural disasters directly impact economies, agriculture, food security, water, sanitation, environment and health. It is therefore one of the single largest concerns for most of the developing nations. Apart from the economic aspect, such disasters also have social and psychological dimensions that needs to be studied and appropriate strategies for mitigation developed. Today, we have a range of early warning systems for a range of natural hazards. However, it is not enough to ensure that communities are safe from disasters. This is where disaster mitigation can play an important role. What is disaster management? The United Nations defines a disaster as a serious disruption of the functioning of a community or a society. Disasters involve widespread human, material, economic or environmental impacts, which exceed the ability of the affected community or society to cope using its own resources. The Red Cross and Red Crescent societies define disaster management as the organisation and management of resources and responsibilities for dealing with all humanitarian aspects of emergencies, in particular preparedness, response and recovery in order to lessen the impact of disasters. Types of disasters There is no country that is immune from disaster, though vulnerability to disaster varies. There are four main types of disaster. 1. Natural disasters: including floods, hurricanes, earthquakes and volcano eruptions that have immediate impacts on human health and secondary impacts causing further death and suffering from (for example) floods, landslides, fires, tsunamis. Natural Types of Disasters · Agricultural diseases & pests · Hurricanes and tropical storms · Damaging Winds · Landslides & debris flow · Drought and water shortage · Thunderstorms and lighting Pscnotes.com Page 158 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 · Earthquakes · Tornadoes · Emergency diseases (pandemic · Tsunamis influenza) · Wildfire · Extreme heat · Winter and ice storms · Floods and flash floods · Sinkholes · Hail 1. Environmental emergencies: including technological or industrial accidents, usually involving the production, use or transportation of hazardous material, and occur where these materials are produced, used or transported, and forest fires caused by humans. 2. Complex emergencies: involving a break-down of authority, looting and attacks on strategic installations, including conflict situations and war. 3. Pandemic emergencies: involving a sudden onset of contagious disease that affects health, disrupts services and businesses, brings economic and social costs. Man-Made and Technological Types of Disasters · Hazardous materials · Chemical threat and biological weapons · Power service disruption & blackout · Cyber attacks · Nuclear power · Explosion plant and nuclear blast · Civil unrest · Radiological emergencies Any disaster can interrupt essential services, such as health care, electricity, water, sewage/garbage removal, transportation and communications. The interruption can seriously affect the health, social and economic networks of local communities and countries. Disasters have a major and long-lasting impact on people long after the immediate effect has been mitigated. Poorly planned relief activities can have a significant negative impact not only on the disaster victims but also on donors and relief agencies. So it is important that physical therapists join established programmes rather than attempting individual efforts. Pscnotes.com Page 159 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Local, regional, national and international organisations are all involved in mounting a humanitarian response to disasters. Each will have a prepared disaster management plan. These plans cover prevention, preparedness, relief and recovery Phases of Disaster The National Governor’s Association designed a phase of disaster model to help emergency managers prepare for and respond to a disaster, also known as the ‘life cycle’ of comprehensive emergency management. The four phases of disaster: o Mitigation o Preparedness o Response o Recovery The model helps frame issues related to disaster preparedness as well as economic and business recovery after a disaster. Each phase has particular needs, requires distinct tools, strategies, and resources and faces different challenges. The issues addressed below relate to the resiliency and recovery of the local economy and business community before and after a major disaster. PREPAREDNESS MITIGATION Education, Outreach and Training Pre-Disaster Mitigation Efforts Business Continuity & Emergency Management Planning RESPONSE RECOVERY Immediate Response to Stakeholders Post-Disaster Economic Recovery Plan Establish Business Recovery Center Phases of Disaster Mitigation Mitigation involves steps to reduce vulnerability to disaster impacts such as injuries and loss of life and property. This might involve changes in local building codes to fortify buildings; revised zoning and land use management; strengthening of public infrastructure; and other efforts to make the community more resilient to a catastrophic event. Pscnotes.com Page 160 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Preparedness Preparedness focuses on understanding how a disaster might impact the community and how education, outreach and training can build capacity to respond to and recover from a disaster. This may include engaging the business community, pre-disaster strategic planning, and other logistical readiness activities. The disaster preparedness activities guide provides more information on how to better prepare an organization and the business community for a disaster. Response Response addresses immediate threats presented by the disaster, including saving lives, meeting humanitarian needs (food, shelter, clothing, public health and safety), cleanup, damage assessment, and the start of resource distribution. As the response period progresses, focus shifts from dealing with immediate emergency issues to conducting repairs, restoring utilities, establishing operations for public services (including permitting), and finishing the cleanup process. Triage efforts assess and deal with the most pressing emergency issues. This period is often marked by some level of chaos, which can last a month or more, depending on the nature of the disaster and the extent of damage. Federal resources, such as action from the Federal Emergency Management Agency (in the case of a major disaster declaration) and non-profit resources such as the Red Cross are deployed immediately Business re-entry into the economy begins during this phase. Businesses initially may face issues with access to their site, preliminary damage assessment, and communications with staff, vendors, suppliers and customers. Ongoing issues may include access to capital and workers, the repair of damaged property or inventory, and a diminished customer base. It is in this phase that long-term future of a region’s business base will be saved or lost. Business Recovery Centers are quickly set up in a community to centralize small business recovery resources (e.g. SBA, SBDC, SCORE, CDFI, etc), local bank officers, technical assistance providers, and other critical assistance for maintaining business continuity and/or get businesses up and running. Federal resources from SBA, FEMA, HUD, EDA, USDA, etc., as well as state programs, start to arrive; temporary housing goes up; and the planning for the reconstruction of damaged infrastructure, facilities, and areas begins. The response phase typically continues through the sixth month, again depending on the nature of the disaster. It is not uncommon for disasters to reveal a weakened economic development landscape, with significant gaps in organizational capacity, staff and resources. Thus, economic development agencies and stakeholders may need additional staff, capacity building assistance, and training. Recovery Recovery is the fourth phase of disaster and is the restoration of all aspects of the disaster’s impact on a community and the return of the local economy to some sense of normalcy. By this time, the impacted region has achieved a degree of physical, environmental, economic and social stability. Pscnotes.com Page 161 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The recovery phase of disaster can be broken into two periods. The short-term phase typically lasts from six months to at least one year and involves delivering immediate services to businesses. The long-term phase, which can range up to decades, requires thoughtful strategic planning and action to address more serious or permanent impacts of a disaster. Investment in economic development capacity building becomes essential to foster economic diversification, attain new resources, build new partnerships and implement effective recovery strategies and tactics. Communities must access and deploy a range of public and private resources to enable long- term economic recovery. Highlights of the National Disaster Management Plan The National Disaster Management Plan (NDMP) is the first ever national plan prepared in the country. Following are the highlights of the NDMP: The NDMP has been aligned broadly with the goals and priorities set out in the Sendai Framework for Disaster Risk Reduction. The Vision of the Plan is to “Make India disaster resilient, achieve substantial disaster risk reduction, and significantly decrease the losses of life, livelihoods, and assets – economic, physical, social, cultural and environmental – by maximizing the ability to cope with disasters at all levels of administration as well as among communities. For each hazard, the approach used in this national plan incorporates the four priorities enunciated in the Sendai Framework into the planning framework for Disaster Risk Reduction under the five Thematic Areas for Actions: o Understanding Risk o Inter-Agency Coordination o Investing in DRR – Structural Measures o Investing in DRR – Non-Structural Measures o Capacity Development o The Response part of the Plan has identified eighteen broad activities which have been arranged into a matrix to be served as a ready reckoner: o Early Warning, Maps, Satellite inputs, Information Dissemination o Evacuation of People and Animals o Search and Rescue of People and Animals o Medical Care o Drinking Water/ Dewatering Pumps/ Sanitation Facilities/ Public Health o Food & Essential Supplies o Communication o Housing and Temporary Shelters o Power o Fuel o Transportation o Relief Logistics and Supply Chain Management o Disposal of Animal Carcasses Pscnotes.com Page 162 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 o Fodder for livestock in scarcity-hit areas o Rehabilitation and Ensuring Safety of Livestock and other Animals, Veterinary Care o Data Collection and Management o Relief Employment o Media Relations o The Plan has also incorporated a Chapter on Strengthening Disaster Risk Governance. o The generalized responsibility matrix given in this section summarizes the themes for strengthening Disaster Risk Governance and specifies agencies at the Centre and State with their respective roles. o The matrix has six thematic areas in which Central and State Governments have to take actions to strengthen disaster risk governance: Mainstream and integrate DRR and Institutional Strengthening Capacity Development Promote Participatory Approaches Work with Elected Representatives Grievance Redress Mechanism Promote Quality Standards, Certifications, and Awards for Disaster Risk Management The National Disaster Management Plan (NDMP) provides a framework and direction to the government agencies for all phases of disaster management cycle. The NDMP is a dynamic document in the sense that it will be periodically improved keeping up with the emerging global best practices and knowledge bases in disaster management. Globally, the approach towards post-disaster restoration and rehabilitation has shifted to one of betterment reconstruction. The NDMP provides a generalized framework for recovery since it is not possible to anticipate all the possible elements of betterment reconstruction. The Plan also highlights that the disaster risk reduction will be achieved by mainstreaming the requirements into the developmental plans. Disaster Management Support Programme in India by ISRO India has been traditionally vulnerable to natural disasters on account of its geo-climatic conditions. Floods, droughts, cyclones, earthquakes and landslides have been recurrent phenomena. About 60% of the landmass is prone to earthquakes of various intensities; over 40 million hectares is prone to floods; close to 5,700 km long coastline out of the 7,516 km, is prone to cyclones; about 68% of the cultivable area is susceptible to drought. The Andaman & Nicobar Islands, the East and part of West coast are vulnerable to Tsunami. The deciduous/ dry-deciduous forests in different parts of the country experience forest fires. The Himalayan region and the Western Ghats are prone to landslides DMS programme Pscnotes.com Page 163 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Under the DMS programme, the services emanating from aerospace infrastructure, set up by ISRO, are optimally synthesized to provide data and information required for efficient management of natural disasters in the country. The Geostationary satellites (Communication and Meteorological), Low Earth Orbiting Earth Observation satellites, aerial survey systems together with ground infrastructure form the core element of the observation Systems for disaster management. The Decision Support Centre established at National Remote Sensing Centre (NRSC) of ISRO is engaged in monitoring natural disasters such as flood, cyclone, agricultural drought, landslides, earthquakes and forest fires at operational level. The information generated from aero-space systems are disseminated to the concerned in near real time for aiding in decision making. The value added products generated using satellite imagery helps in addressing the information needs covering all the phases of disaster management such as, preparedness, early warning, response, relief, rehabilitation, recovery and mitigation. National Institute of Disaster Management (NIDM) National Institute of Disaster Management (NIDM) has been entrusted with the nodal responsibility for human resource development, capacity building including training & education, research, documentation and policy planning in the field of disaster management. Upgraded from the National Centre for Disaster Management of the Indian Institute of Public Administration on the 16th October, 2003, NIDM is steadily marching forward to fulfill its mission to make a disaster resilient India by developing and promoting a culture of prevention and preparedness at all levels, and emerge as a Centre of Excellence. Union Home Minister is the President of the Institute and, its Governing Body is chaired by Vice Chairman of National Disaster Management Authority (NDMA). Mission and Objectives Mission of NIDM is to strive relentlessly towards making a disaster free India by developing and promoting a culture of prevention and preparedness at all levels, provide assistance in policy formulation and to facilitate in reducing the impact of disasters through achieving the following objectives: Planning and promoting training and capacity building services including strategic learning. Research, documentation and development of national level information base. System development and expertise promotion for effective disaster preparedness and mitigation. Promoting awareness and enhancing knowledge and skills of all stakeholders. Strengthening institutional mechanisms for training and capacity building of all stakeholders. To become National Resource Centre for the Central and State Governments in the field of Disaster Management in collaboration with other premier institutions Disaster manangement: some case studies Aspects of Disaster Management Disaster Prevention Disaster Prevention is the concept of engaging in activities which intend to prevent or avoid potential adverse impacts through action taken in advance, activities designed to provide protection from the occurance of disasters. Pscnotes.com Page 164 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Disaster Preparedness Disaster preparedness activities embedded with risk reduction measures can prevent disaster situations and also result in saving maximum lives and livelihoods during any disaster situation, enabling the affected population to get back to normalcy within a short time period. Minimisation of loss of life and damage to property through facilitation of effective disaster response and rehabilitation services when required. Preparedness is the main way of reducing the impact of disasters. Community-based preparedness and management should be a high priority in physical therapy practice management. Disaster Response / Relief Focused predominantly on immediate and short-term needs the division between this response/relief stage and the subsequent recovery stage is not clear-cut. Some response actions, such as the supply of temporary housing and water supplies, may extend well into the recovery stage. Rescue from immediate danger and stabilization of the physical and emotional condition of survivors is the primary aims of disaster response/relief, which go hand in hand with the recovery of the dead and the restoration of essential services such as water and power. Chernobyl Atomic Plant Tragedy 1986 The Chernobyl Power Complex, lying about 130 km north of Kiev, Ukraine, and about 20 km south of the border with Belarus, consisted of four nuclear reactors of the RBMK-1000 design (see information page on RBMK Reactors). Units 1 and 2 were constructed between 1970 and 1977, while units 3 and 4 of the same design were completed in 1983. The accident caused the largest uncontrolled radioactive release into the environment ever recorded for any civilian operation, and large quantities of radioactive substances were released into the air for about 10 days. This caused serious social and economic disruption for large populations in Belarus, Russia, and Ukraine. Two radionuclides, the short-lived iodine-131 and the long-lived caesium-137, were particularly significant for the radiation dose they delivered to members of the public. The casualties included firefighters who attended the initial fires on the roof of the turbine building. All these were put out in a few hours, but radiation doses on the first day were estimated to range up to 20,000 millisieverts (mSv), causing 28 deaths – six of which were firemen – by the end of July 1986. The next task was cleaning up the radioactivity at the site so that the remaining three reactors could be restarted, and the damaged reactor shielded more permanently. About 200,000 people ('liquidators') from all over the Soviet Union were involved in the recovery and clean-up during 1986 and 1987. They received high doses of radiation, averaging around 100 millisieverts. Some 20,000 of them received about 250 mSv and a few received 500 mSv. Later, the number of liquidators swelled to over 600,000 but most of these received only low radiation doses. The highest doses were received by about 1000 emergency workers and on-site personnel during the first day of the accident. The plant operators' town of Pripyat was evacuated on 27 April (45,000 residents). By 14 May, some 116,000 people that had been living within a 30-kilometre radius had been evacuated and later relocated. About 1000 of these returned unofficially to live within the contaminated zone. Most of those evacuated received radiation doses of less than 50 mSv, although a few received 100 mSv or more. In the years following the accident, a further 220,000 people were resettled into less contaminated areas, and the initial 30 km radius exclusion zone (2800 km2) was modified and extended to cover 4300 square kilometres. This resettlement was due to application of a criterion of 350 mSv projected lifetime radiation dose, though in fact radiation in most of the Pscnotes.com Page 165 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 affected area (apart from half a square kilometre) fell rapidly so that average doses were less than 50% above normal background of 2.5 mSv/yr. See also following section on Resettlement. Bhopal Gas Tragedy 1984 In the early morning hours of December 3, 1984, a poisonous grey cloud (forty tons of toxic gases) from Union Carbide India Limited (UCIL's)1 pesticide plant at Bhopal spread throughout the city. Water carrying catalytic material had entered Methyl Isocyanate (MIC) storage tank No. 610. What followed was a nightmare. The killer gas spread through the city, sending residents scurrying through the dark streets. No alarm ever sounded a warning and no evacuation plan was prepared. When victims arrived at hospitals breathless and blind, doctors did not know how to treat them, as UCIL had not provided emergency information. Since 1980, the Bhopal plant had caused death and injury to many. In December 1981, plant operator Mohammed Ashraf was killed by a phosgene gas leak. Two other workers were injured. In May 1982, three American engineers from the chemical products and household plastics division of UCC came to Bhopal. Their task was to appraise the running of the plant and confirm that everything was functioning according to the standards laid down by UCC. The issue of the danger posed by the pesticide plant to Bhopal was raised in the Madhya Pradesh Assembly in December 1982. However, T S Viyogi, labour minister in the Arjun Singh5 government allayed all fears saying, "A sum of Rs. 250 million has been invested in this unit. The factory is not a small stone, which can be shifted elsewhere. There is no danger to Bhopal, nor will there ever be." Equally confident was Mukund: "The gas leak just can't be from my plant. The plant is shut down.6 Our technology just can't go wrong, we just can't have such leaks," he said. Within months after the disaster, the GoI issued an ordinance appointing itself as the sole representative of the victims for any legal dealings with UCC as regards compensation. The ordinance was later replaced by the Bhopal Gas Leak (Processing of Claims) Act, 1985. Armed with this power, the GoI filed its suit for compensation and damages against UCC in the United States District Court for the Southern District of New York. Besides filing the suit, one of its prime responsibilities was to register the claims of each and every gas victim in Bhopal. Analysts felt that this job was never done, or rather, not with any seriousness for the next ten years. The government set up various inquiry commissions to investigate the causes of the disaster; they remained half-hearted initiatives at best. UCC, on the other hand, moved more quickly with its 'investigations': it announced by March 1985 that the disaster was due to 'an act of sabotage' by a Sikh terrorist. Then they shifted blame to a disgruntled worker. kutch earthquake 2001 The 2001 Gujarat earthquake, also known as the Bhuj earthquake, occurred on 26 January, India's 51st Republic Day, at 08:46 AM IST and lasted for over 2 minutes. The epicentre was about 9 km south-southwest of the village of Chobari in Bhachau Taluka of Kutch District of Gujarat, India. The intraplate earthquake reached 7.7 on the moment magnitude scale and had a maximum felt intensity of X (Extreme) on the Mercalli intensity scale. The earthquake killed between 13,805 and 20,023 people (including 18 in southeastern Pakistan), injured another 167,000 and destroyed nearly 400,000 homes. Reconstruction Four months after the earthquake the Gujarat government announced the Gujarat Earthquake Reconstruction and Rehabilitation Policy. The policy proposed a different approach to urban and rural construction with the estimated cost of rebuilding to be US$1.77 billion. The main objectives of the policy included repairing, building, and strengthening houses and public Pscnotes.com Page 166 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 buildings. Other objectives included the revival of the economy, health support, and reconstruction of the community and social infrastructure. Housing The housing policy focused on the removal of rubble, setting up temporary shelters, full reconstruction of damaged houses, and the retrofitting of undamaged units. The policy established a community-driven housing recovery process. The communities affected by the earthquake were given the option for complete or partial relocation to in-situ reconstruction. The total number of eligible houses to be repaired was 929,682 and the total number of eligible houses to be reconstructed was 213,685. By 2003, 882,896 (94%) houses were repaired and 113,271 (53%) were reconstructed. City planning The Environmental Planning Collaborative (EPC) was commissioned to provide a new city plan for the city of Bhuj. The plan focused on creating a wider roadway network to provide emergency access to the city. The EPC used land readjustment (LR) in the form of eight town planning schemes.This was implemented by deducting land from private lot sizes to create adequate public land for the widening of roadways.The remaining land was readjusted and given back to the original owners as final plots. Relief In order to support the reconstruction and rehabilitation of the city, the Government of Gujarat created four assistance packages worth up to US$1 billion. These packages assisted about 300,000 families. The government also announced a US$2.5 million package to revive small, medium, and cottage industries. The World Bank and the Asian Development Bank also provided loans worth $300 million and $500 million respectively. Assistance was received from many countries and organisations. Indian tsunami 2004 The 2004 Indian Ocean earthquake occurred at 00:58:53 UTC on 26 December with the epicentre off the west coast of Sumatra, Indonesia. The shock had a moment magnitude of 9.1– 9.3 and a maximum Mercalli intensity of IX (Violent). The undersea megathrust earthquake was caused when the Indian Plate was subducted by the Burma Plate and triggered a series of devastating tsunamis along the coasts of most landmasses bordering the Indian Ocean, killing 230,000–280,000 people in 14 countries. A great deal of humanitarian aid was needed because of widespread damage of the infrastructure, shortages of food and water, and economic damage. Epidemics were of special concern due to the high population density and tropical climate of the affected areas. The main concern of humanitarian and government agencies was to provide sanitation facilities and fresh drinking water to contain the spread of diseases such as cholera, diphtheria, dysentery, typhoid and hepatitis A and B. There was also a great concern that the death toll could increase as disease and hunger spread. However, because of the initial quick response, this was minimized. In the days following the tsunami, significant effort was spent in burying bodies hurriedly due to fear of disease spreading. However, the public health risks may have been exaggerated, and therefore this may not have been the best way to allocate resources. The World Food Programme provided food aid to more than 1.3 million people affected by the tsunami. Fukushima Daiichi Japan Nuclear Disaster 2011 Pscnotes.com Page 167 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 11 March 2011. A magnitude 9.0 offshore earthquake hit Japan. This was followed by a 14- metre tsunami which swept into the coastal towns, destroying multitudes of infrastructure in its path. Unfortunately, the waves also struck the Fukushima Daiichi nuclear plant. From the natural disaster, 9.0 earthquake followed by a tsunami it was truly unfortunately become a man-made disaster when the nuclear reactor melt-function cause many death in the country. The power plant shouldn't have shut down automatically when the earthquake happen because when the plant was build it already have been consider to avoid this accident happen when the natural disaster happen. Japanese parliamentary panel challenged claims by the plant's operator, Tokyo Electric Power (Tepco), that the triple meltdown at the plant in north-east Japan had been caused solely by a 14-metre tsunami on 11 March last year. The panel said the magnitude-9 earthquake that preceded the waves could not be ruled out as a cause of the accident. It accused Tepco and regulators at the nuclear and industrial safety agency of failing to take adequate safety measures, despite evidence that the area was susceptible to powerful earthquakes and tsunamis. Since 2006, the regulators and Tepco were aware of the risk that a total outage of electricity at the Fukushima Daiichi plant might occur if a tsunami were to reach the level of the site. But it accused Tepco of ignoring warnings going as far back as 2006 that a tsunami could cause a blackout at the plant. Uttrakhand Flash Flood 2013 In June 2013, a multi-day cloudburst centered on the North Indian state Uttarakhand caused devastating floods and landslides becoming the country's worst natural disaster since the 2004 tsunami. The reason the floods occurred was that the rainfall received was on a larger scale than the regular rainfall the state usually received. The Army, Air Force, Navy, Indo-Tibetan Border Police (ITBP), Border Security Force, National Disaster Response Force (NDRF), Public Works Department and local administrations worked together for quick rescue operations. Several thousand soldiers were deployed for the rescue missions. Activists of political and social organisations were also involved in the rescue and management of relief centres. The national highway and other important roads were closed to regular traffic. Helicopters were used to rescue people, but due to the rough terrain, heavy fog and rainfall, manoeuvring them was a challenge. By 21 June 2013, the Army had deployed 10,000 soldiers and 11 helicopters, the Navy had sent 45 naval divers, and the Air force had deployed 43 aircraft including 36 helicopters. From 17 to 30 June 2013, the IAF airlifted a total of 18,424 people - flying a total of 2,137 sorties and dropping/landing a total of 3,36,930 kg of relief material and equipments. Indo Tibetan border Police (ITBP) a Force which guards the Indo China borders on the high himalayas with its 3 Regional Response Centres (RRCs) based at Matli (Uttarkashi), Gauchar (Chamoli) and Pithoragarh swung into action and started rescue and relief operation. 2000 strong ITBP force with its mountaineering skills and improvisation methods started rescue of stranded pilgrims. It was a simultaneous effort by ITBP at Kedar ghati, Gangotri valley and Govind ghat areas. According to official figures by ITBP, they were able to rescue 33,009 pilgrims in 15 days on their own from extreme remote and inaccessible areas.Before Army or Air Force called in, being deployed in the nearby areas, ITBP took the first call and saved many lives. They also distributed food packets to stranded pilgrims who were in a pathetic condition being not having any food for more than 72 hours at many places. Allahabad Kumbh Stampede 2013 Pscnotes.com Page 168 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 On 10 February 2013, during the Hindu festival Kumbh Mela, a stampede broke out at the train station in Allahabad, Uttar Pradesh, India, killing 42 people and injuring at least 45. According to initial reports, the stampede broke out after a railing on a footbridge collapsed at the Allahabad railway station. Eyewitnesses, however, said that the stampede was triggered after the railway police charged at the crowd with wooden sticks in order to control the huge rush at the station. 42 people were killed by the crush of people, including 29 women, 12 men, and an eight-year-old girl who died after waiting almost two hours for help. At least 45 people were injured in addition. In an unrelated event earlier that day, two people were killed in another stampede. Ujjain Tragedy 1994 The Ujjain incident reportedly occurred because of a delay in opening the gates to the sanctum sanctorum, outside which nearly 20,000 devotees had gathered since the early hours of the morning. s the crowd surged forward, some people slipped and fell on the marble staircase leading to the main complex, sparking panic. Within a minute, there was a huge pile of people. It was only when we started helping them get on their feet that we realised that those at the bottom were dead. J & K Flood 2014 On the afternoon of September 4 of 2014, two days before Jammu and Kashmir was ravaged by its worst floods in more than 50 years, three hydrological stations on the Jhelum river, which runs through the valley, had detected that serious danger was lurking. Less than 50 km upstream of Srinagar, the Sangam station, operated by the Central Water Commission (CWC), indicated that water levels had risen from 5.7 m on September 3 to 10.13 m on September 4. That's more than the height of a storey in a regular house. Nearer the capital, the Ram Munshi Bagh hydrological station registered a jump of more than 3 m in the water level between the afternoons of September 3 and 4. Further downstream, the Safapora hydrological station also recorded readings of a similar jump in the same period. The information provided by these three stations should have set alarm bells ringing within the state administration which should have then prepared itself for a major flood hitting the area. It could have provided a 24-hour window to evacuate people from lowlying areas, deploy special response teams and to arrange for rationing supplies. Except that none of this happened. The explanation for this inaction is staggering-these CWC stations are not flood forecasting stations. They are merely supposed to monitor the flow of water from India to Pakistan under the Indus Water Treaty of 1960. When they detected the rise in water levels, the information was quickly passed on to the local administration but they simply looked past it, thinking it had nothing to do with flood management. No one bothered to join the dots. That role is supposed to be performed by the NDMA, headquartered in a plush building in New Delhi's Safdarjung Enclave. Since the NDA Government took office in May this year, it has secured the resignations of five of its members including its vicechairman, thereby rendering the body headless. While there are still technical experts housed in the building, an NDMA official explains that a lack of leadership means that no work has happened there for months now. The NDMA, however, is not directly involved with disaster management in each state. Its mandate is to frame policy and put structures in place. Disaster management in the states is supposed to be carried out by the state disaster management authority and district disaster management authorities, all of whom are supposed to have incident response teams in place to Pscnotes.com Page 169 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 deal with such situations. Here again, both the NDMA and state government failed. In February 2012, the state government had approved a three-tier disaster management policy but it was never able to create a separate department which would only deal with disasters. The task was assigned to the respective divisional commissioners or deputy commissioners of the area who presumably had several other things to deal with. Internal Security .csEC2CE3D8{color:#FF0000;background-color:#FFFFFF;font-family:Arial;font- size:14pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal;} .cs93BC4C5F{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 12pt 36pt} .cs7126AC6B{color:#FF0000;background-color:#FFFFFF;font-family:Arial;font-size:16pt;font- weight:bold;font-style:normal;} .cs6DA126DA{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font- size:14pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal;} .cs6831B22{text-align:left;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 18pt;background-color:#FFFFFF;list-style- type:disc;color:#000000;font-family:Arial;font-size:14pt;font-weight:bold;font-style:normal} .cs29D35F49{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font-size:14pt;font- weight:bold;font-style:normal;} .csF29898F8{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 8pt 0pt;background-color:#FFFFFF} .cs40314EBF{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 10pt 0pt;line-height:1.15} .cs981DB57A{color:#000000;background-color:#FFFFFF;font-family:Arial;font-size:14pt;font- weight:normal;font-style:normal;} .cs79EC83CE{text-align:left;margin:22pt 0pt 22pt 0pt;background-color:#FFFFFF;list-style- type:disc;color:#000000;font-family:Arial;font-size:14pt;font-weight:bold;font-style:normal} .csD9286675{text-align:left;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 0pt;line-height:1.15;list-style- type:square;color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Wingdings;font- size:14pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal} .cs933CE012{color:#000000;background-color:#FFFFFF;font-family:Arial;font-size:14pt;font- weight:bold;font-style:normal;} .csA02E1410{color:#000000;background-color:#FFFFFF;font-family:Arial;font-size:14pt;font- weight:normal;font-style:italic;} .csD95C6491{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 36pt;line-height:1.15} .cs893D87B6{text-align:justify;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 1pt 0pt;line-height:18pt;page- break-after:avoid;page-break-inside:avoid;background-color:#FFFFFF} .csBB9A6325{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font- size:14pt;font-weight:bold;font-style:normal;text-decoration: underline;} .csF1CDA055{text-align:justify;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 1pt 0pt;background- color:#FFFFFF} .cs4D2C52BD{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font- size:14pt;font-weight:bold;font-style:italic;} Pscnotes.com Page 170 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 .cs75A07D5F{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font- size:16pt;font-weight:bold;font-style:normal;} .csA7EB140E{text-align:left;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 0pt;line-height:18pt;background- color:#FFFFFF;list-style-type:square;color:#000000;font-family:Wingdings;font-size:14pt;font- weight:normal;font-style:normal} .cs863B8143{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 36pt;line- height:18pt;background-color:#FFFFFF} .cs915D23E{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 8pt 18pt;line-height:18pt;background- color:#FFFFFF} .cs3E233B67{text-align:left;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 0pt;background-color:#FFFFFF;list-style- type:decimal;color:#000000;font-family:Arial;font-size:14pt;font-weight:normal;font- style:normal} .csCB85FE24{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font- size:14pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal;text-decoration: underline;} .csF896AF9C{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 36pt;background- color:#FFFFFF} .csDF125C2D{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 0pt;background- color:#FFFFFF} .csA39172E0{text-align:left;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 0pt;background-color:#FFFFFF;list-style- type:square;color:#000000;font-family:Wingdings;font-size:14pt;font-weight:normal;font- style:normal} .cs9DF0CAA3{text-align:left;margin:6pt 12pt 6pt 0pt;background-color:#FFFFFF;list-style- type:decimal;color:#000000;font-family:Arial;font-size:14pt;font-weight:normal;font- style:normal} .csEDDD91C2{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 8pt 36pt;background- color:#FFFFFF} .cs47829CAA{color:#000000;background-color:#FFFFFF;font-family:Arial;font-size:14pt;font- weight:normal;font-style:normal;text-decoration: underline;} .cs810EF838{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:6pt 0pt 6pt 0pt;background-color:#FFFFFF} .cs5443C08C{text-align:left;margin:5pt 0pt 1pt 0pt;mso-margin-top-alt:auto;background- color:#FFFFFF;list-style-type:disc;color:#000000;font-family:Arial;font-size:10pt;font- weight:normal;font-style:normal} .cs176A7F6A{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:4pt 0pt 0pt 0pt;background-color:#FFFFFF} .cs8F8638C3{text-align:center;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 0pt;background- color:#F8F9FA} .csFC56BB59{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 10pt 0pt;line- height:16.8pt;background-color:#F8F9FA} .cs4CC123D{text-align:justify;margin:0pt 2pt 12pt 0pt;line-height:18pt;list-style- type:square;color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Wingdings;font- size:14pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal} .csD6A597CC{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font- size:14pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal;text-decoration: none;} .cs9E25E2BD{text-align:justify;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 2pt 12pt 36pt;line-height:18pt} .csBF5220EC{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font- size:14pt;font-weight:bold;font-style:italic;text-decoration: underline;} .csAF74774C{text-align:justify;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 2pt 12pt 2pt;line-height:18pt} Pscnotes.com Page 171 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 .csFB89E02E{text-align:justify;margin:0pt 2pt 12pt 2pt;line-height:18pt;list-style- type:disc;color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font-size:10pt;font- weight:normal;font-style:normal} .cs9C4758E0{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font-size:14pt;font- weight:normal;font-style:italic;} .cs125548B6{text-align:left;margin:6pt 0pt 6pt 0pt;background-color:#FFFFFF;list-style- type:disc;color:#000000;font-family:Arial;font-size:10pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal} .cs4676808D{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:6pt 0pt 6pt 36pt;background- color:#FFFFFF} .cs8ECA3583{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:2pt 2pt 2pt 0pt;line-height:18pt;page-break- after:avoid;page-break-inside:avoid} .csA601F893{text-align:left;margin:5pt 0pt 4pt 0pt;line-height:18pt;mso-margin-top- alt:auto;list-style-type:disc;color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font- size:10pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal} .csA77E0BCE{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:5pt 0pt 4pt 36pt;line-height:18pt;mso- margin-top-alt:auto} .cs9E285153{text-align:justify;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 2pt 12pt 38pt;line-height:18pt} .csCBEC6818{color:#000000;background-color:#FFFFFF;font-family:Arial;font-size:14pt;font- weight:bold;font-style:normal;text-decoration: underline;} .cs2D798C37{text-align:justify;margin:0pt 0pt 6pt 0pt;background-color:#FFFFFF;list-style- type:disc;color:#000000;font-family:Arial;font-size:10pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal} .cs3547F338{text-align:justify;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 6pt 8pt;background- color:#FFFFFF} .cs1B16EEB5{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Calibri;font- size:11pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal;} .csDB2157AC{text-align:justify;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 6pt -10pt;background- color:#FFFFFF} .csFAAFC525{text-align:left;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 0pt;line-height:1.15;list-style- type:decimal;color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font-size:14pt;font- weight:normal;font-style:normal} .csB1933BE7{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 72pt;line-height:1.15} .cs956CB455{text-align:justify;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 22pt;line-height:15pt} .cs3C18711E{text-align:justify;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 0pt;line-height:15pt;list-style- type:square;color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Wingdings;font- size:10pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal} .csF2D6D3B8{text-align:justify;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 0pt;line-height:15pt} .csE99BA06F{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 7pt;line-height:1.15} .cs8A490D99{text-align:left;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 0pt;line-height:15pt;list-style- type:square;color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Wingdings;font- size:10pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal} .csF7F83909{text-align:left;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 0pt;line-height:15pt} .cs70223908{text-align:justify;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt -30pt;line-height:15pt;list-style- type:decimal;color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font-size:14pt;font- weight:bold;font-style:normal} .csB6EA2C26{text-align:justify;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 28pt;line-height:15pt} .cs8D3044A8{color:#000000;background-color:#FFFFFF;font-family:Arial;font-size:16pt;font- Pscnotes.com Page 172 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 weight:normal;font-style:normal;} .csF42C4B08{color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Arial;font- size:16pt;font-weight:bold;font-style:normal;text-decoration: underline;} .csC6FC9026{text-align:justify;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 40pt;line-height:15pt} .csF4357EDD{text-align:justify;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt -14pt;line-height:15pt;list-style- type:square;color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Wingdings;font- size:10pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal} .csCCB7DB2F{text-align:justify;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 36pt;line-height:15pt;list-style- type:square;color:#000000;background-color:transparent;font-family:Wingdings;font- size:10pt;font-weight:normal;font-style:normal} .cs387F6018{text-align:justify;text-indent:0pt;margin:0pt 0pt 0pt 72pt;line-height:15pt} Role of external state and Non-state actor's in creating challenges to internal security Challenges to Internal security through communication networks Role of media and Social networking sites in internal securityChallenges Basics of cyber security Role of biometric devices in security IT Act (2000) Security challenges in border areas linkages of organized crime with terrorism. Management in border areas by various security forces/agencies. Role of external state and Non-state actor's in creating challenges to internal security State actors are nations/countries which are also known as ―states‖. They have sovereignty over their own territory and that sovereignty is recognized on the international stage by international organizations such as the United Nations. Non-state actors are organized groups that do not hold any officially recognized territory, though they may control some territory through force of arms. The best example of this today is ISIS who are an armed terrorist group that until recently controlled large swaths of Syria and Iraq. Pscnotes.com Page 173 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The External State Connections China Northeastern India is inhabited by Mongoloid tribes who have close ethnic and cultural ties with the tribes in China, Tibet and Burma. Barring Khasis and Jaintias of Meghalaya, almost all hill tribes belong to the Tibeto-Chinese fold and to the Tibeto-Burmese family. Bangladesh East Pakistan, Bangladesh since 1971, was host to many insurgent activities unleashed against India in the northeastern region. The anti-India operations have been largely possible because of the presence of an overwhelming illegal immigrant Bangladeshi population in the northeast. The porosity of the Indo-Bangladesh border has led to many unanticipated problems for India. Myanmar India shares a 1670 km long land border and a maritime border of 200 km with Myanmar. Some Burmese tribals belonging to the Kuki Chin Group are fighting for merger of lands inhabited by them with India. Countries that are unfriendly towards India find an opportunity in the ongoing turmoil in the northeast and their involvement has made the problems that much more difficult to resolve. Non State actors Act of Terrorism, insurgency or extremism by any individual or a groups which has no direct or indirect linkages with any government or any government organization, is said to be done by non-state actors. The emergence of non-state terrorist actors and the rise of their international influence is accelerating. Much of their activity is clandestine and outside the accepted international norms. International and state-sponsored terrorism, often motivated by fundamentalist ideologies, backed by secretive but efficient financial networks, use of IT, clandestine access to chemical- biological and nuclear materials, and illicit drug trafficking, has emerged as a major threat to international stability. They pose threats to multireligious, multiethnic and pluralistic societies. India is at the receiving end of these violent elements and is likely to remain a target of international terrorism in the future. Strategies need to be evolved to counter the threat of Weapons of Mass Destruction (WMD) terrorism as well as cyber-terrorism. Pscnotes.com Page 174 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Challenges to Internal security through communication networks Communication networks are a part of our critical information infrastructure. Communication networks refer to an interconnection of communicating entities such as computers, laptops, mobiles, telephones etc. via which provides the basis for information exchange for all other sectors including voice, data, video, and Internet connectivity. Communication network should not be confused with the computer networks such as LAN, WAN etc. because they are merely one form of the Communication networks. Various communication networks are the backbone of much of the critical infrastructure in many sectors today such as civil aviation, shipping, railways, power, nuclear, oil and gas, finance, banking, IT, law enforcement, intelligence agencies, space, defence, and government networks. As such, communications systems serve part in parcel with other key internal and external security and emergency preparedness. Moreover, the communication networks are very much dependent on each other in a very complex way. The collapse of one communication network can affect adversely many sectors. There numerous network threats that can have adverse impact on communication network: Network Packet Sniffers When large information is sent via a network, it is broken into smaller pieces, which are called network packets. Generally these network packets are sent as clear text over the networks i.e. information sent across the network is not encrypted. Social Engineering Attacks Social engineering refers to psychological tricks used to persuade people to undermine their own online security. This can include opening an email attachment, clicking a button, following a link, or filling in a form with sensitive personal information. IP Spoofing When an attacker situated outside the targeted network pretends to be a trusted computer then the mode of attack is termed as IP spoofing. IP spoofing can be done either by using an IP address of targeted network pool or by using an authorized & trusted external IP address. Phishing Pscnotes.com Page 175 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Phishing refers to a technique used to gain personal information for the purpose of identity theft, using fraudulent e-mail messages that appear to come from legitimate organizations such as banks. Denial of Service Most popular form of attack, denial of service (DoS) attacks are also among the most difficult to completely eliminate. Among the hacker community, DoS attacks are regarded as trivial and considered bad form because they require so little effort to execute. When this type of attack is launched from many different systems at the same time, it is often referred to as a distributed denial of service attack (DDoS). DDoS is not actually hacking the website but is a common technique used to temporarily bring down websites. Password Attacks Password attacks usually refer to repeated attempts to identify a user account and/or password; these repeated attempts are called brute-force attacks. If this account has sufficient privileges, the attacker can create a back door for future access. Password attacks can easily be eliminated by not relying on plaintext passwords in the first place. Using OTP or cryptographic authentication can virtually eliminate the threat of password attacks. Distribution of Sensitive Information Most of the computer break-ins that organizations suffer are at the hands of troublesome present or former employees. Man-in-the-Middle Attacks Man-in-the-middle attacks refer to access to network packets that come across the networks. An ISP can gain access to all network packets transferred between one network and any other network. It can launch such an attack. Application Layer Attacks Application layer attacks are performed by identifying the well-known weaknesses in software that are commonly found on servers, such as sendmail, Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), and FTP etc. Pscnotes.com Page 176 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Virus and Trojan Horse Applications Viruses and Trojan horse applications are the primary vulnerabilities for end-user computers. Viruses refer to malicious software that is attached to another program to execute a particular unwanted function on a user‘s workstation. Scareware Scareware is fake/rogue security software. There are millions of different versions of malware, with hundreds more being created and used every day. Spam As spam expands into other areas online, traditional email spam still remains a significant problem, especially in business. Workers still need to keep their inboxes clear of junk, and advanced mail filtering systems are a necessity in any business hoping to use email efficiently. Ransomware Ransomware is a class of malware which restricts access to the computer system that it infects, and demands a ransom paid to the creator of the malware in order for the restriction to be removed. Role of media and Social networking sites in internal security Challenges. Social Media can be defined as any web or mobile based platform that enables an individual or agency to communicate interactively and enables exchange of user generated content and it is explained by a number of tools, which includes blogs, Wikis, discussion forums, micro-blogs, twitter and social networking sites. Internet has become a platform for coordination of plans of attack, communication with cells, or propaganda and information and spread of hate campaign or messages that can hurt the sentiments of people. Pscnotes.com Page 177 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Social Media in recent times has become synonymous with Social Networking sites such as Facebook or Micro Blogging sites such as Twitter. The advantages of Social media are so many but they are posing threat to in various forms like Cyber Terrorism, Fraud, crime, spreading violence, etc. According to the Cisco 2013 Annual Security Report, the highest concentration of online security threats are on mass audience sites, including social media. The rapid spread of false information through social media is among the emerging risks identified by the World Economic Forum in its Global Risks 2013 Report. National Security is of prime importance for any nation to maintain peace and harmony. Nations face numerous internal security challenges and Social Media act as the platform for that. Social media is not security threat in itself but the users of these services can pose the threats by their anti-social endeavours. With limited government oversight, industry standards or incentives to educate users on security, privacy and identity protection, users are exposed to identity theft and fraud. Additionally, these platforms have huge confidential user information, and are likely vulnerable to outside or inside attack which is detrimental to . Different threats due to Social Media are: 1. Cyber Terrorism: Pscnotes.com Page 178 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The biggest challenge for internal security of nation through social networking site is cyber terrorism. Today terrorists select Social Media as a practical alternative to disturb the function of nations and other business activities because this technique has potential to cause huge damage. It poses enormous threat in international system and attracts the mass media, the security community, and the information technology corporation. At the same time, due to the convenience, affordability and broad reach of social media platforms like YouTube, Facebook and Twitter, terrorist groups have increasingly used social media to further their goals and spread their message. Social Media became a platform for coordination of plans of attack, communication with cells, or propaganda and information and spread of hate campaign or messages that can hurt the sentiments of people. These groups now have their own websites where they can convey their propaganda and, for most of them, they advise their readers and followers not to trust the media which are seen as the enemy. The chat service like Skype, which includes voice and video capabilities, has become particularly popular with terrorist cells. Chat rooms and electronic forums enable the insurgent and extremists groups to communicate with members and supporters all over the world, to recruit new followers and to share information at little risk of identification by authorities. Youths are especially targeted for propaganda, incitement and recruitment purposes by terrorist groups. 2. Fraud: Social networking sites also invite fraudsters to take excellent opportunity to become wealthy by applying deceiver schemes. 3. Criminal Activity and Money laundering: Internet Media is a major resource for developing serious crime. As Internet is growing explosively, online criminals try to present fraudulent plans in many ways. Social networking sites also pose major challenge in financial and organized crime which destabilizes the system. It creates threat to a company's security because of what employees might disclose and they are on prime target for cyber criminals. Pscnotes.com Page 179 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 4. International users: The other national and international users such as the political parties, NGO's, hackers pose a serious threat using the social media. For example, during the civil turmoil in the Arab Spring Uprising, the various governments were threatened through the social media. 5. To Bring Revolution: Some countries in the world feel threatened by the fact that social media can bring the people together and thus, create a revolution. This in turn can cause political instability 6. Communal Violence and Fanning Tensions: Importantly, social media also seems to be playing a significant role in polarising different communities in India and compounding India's Security challenges. The viral videos and false updates of communal clashes, riots and terrorists attack have created a massive impact in the life of public. The power of media and the process of public opinion formation in a free society had undergone radical change due to Internet and faster means of communications like SMS, whats app, viber and simplified mobile internet. The chain of events beginning with the clashes in our North-east and which caused very serious and mass exodus of North-east population from several Indian cities has revealed the fragility of our national Cohesion. 7. Virtual Community: Popular social networking websites are another means of attracting potential members and followers. These types of virtual communities are growing increasingly popular all over the world, especially among younger demographics. This can build Anti-national Sentiments among Society. 8. Hacking: Pscnotes.com Page 180 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Hackers write or use ready-made computer programs to attack the target computer. By using Social Media hackers breach the national security and steal important data of defence or other strategic sectors. This can kneel the whole country without using Arms and Ammunition. Although social media has the potential to be a threat to national security, it also has the opportunity to strengthen National Security and to be used to benefit the Government. One of the fastest growing ways that Governments are using social media is as a warning or trend prevention tool. As a monitoring tool, the government is able to recognize the first signs of any hostile or potentially dangerous activity by collecting and analyzing messages in order to try to predict events that could be a danger to National Security. Another important use of social media by the government is as an institutional Communication Tool. Social Media provides a medium that creates cohesion between federal agencies by increasing both communication and transparency. Basics of cyber security Cyber security is a process, technique or procedure to ensure information security goals. Aim of Information Security is to provide CIA i.e. 1. Confidentiality of information 2. Integrity of information 3. Availability of information These 3 parameters (CIA) are called security goals/security services. The other security objectives also include such other parameters as authenticity, authorisation, accounting and non-repudiation. Cyber Security is the security of information and its communicating channels as applied to computing devices such as computers and smartphones, as well as computer networks such as private and public networks, including the Internet as a whole. The field covers all the processes and mechanisms by which computer-based equipment, information and services are protected from unintended or unauthorized access, change or destruction. Computer security also includes protection from unplanned events and natural disasters. Cyber security is a complex issue that cuts across multiple domains and calls for multi-dimensional, multilayered initiatives and responses. Pscnotes.com Page 181 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The act of protecting ICT systems and their contents has come to be known as cyber security. A broad and debatable concept, cyber security can be a constructive term. It generally refers to a set of activities and other measures intended to protect from attack, disruption, or other threats to computers, computer networks, related hardware and devices software, and the information they hold and communicate, including software and data, as well as other elements of cyberspace. Cyber security is also associated with the technical term, information security, which is explained in federal law as protecting information and information systems from illegal access, use, disclosure, disruption, modification, or damage in order to provide integrity, confidentiality and availability. Integrity denotes to guarding against improper information modification or destruction, and includes ensuring information non repudiation and authenticity. Confidentiality signifies preserving authorized restrictions on access and disclosure, including ways of protecting personal privacy and proprietary information. Availability indicates ensuring timely and reliable access to and use of information. Cyber security concentrates on protecting computers, networks, programs and data from unintended or unauthorized access, change or destruction. Governments, military, corporations, financial institutions, hospitals and other businesses gather process and store huge confidential information on computers and pass on that data across networks to other computers. With the growing volume and complexity of cyber attacks, more attention is necessary to protect sensitive business and personal information, as well as protect national security. Role of biometric devices in security Biometric devices measure biological elements (like human features) in order to perform functions, such as logging health/fitness data and authenticating users. There are many different uses for the technology and a variety of methods for its implementation. Types of biometric data include visual, audio, spatial and behavioral. According to these characteristics, the sub-divided groups are: Pscnotes.com Page 182 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Chemical biometric devices: Analyses the segments of the DNA to grant access to the users. Visual biometric devices: Analyses the visual features of the humans to grant access which includes IRIS recognition, Face recognition, Finger recognition and Retina Recognition. Behavioural biometric devices: Analyses the Walking Ability and Signatures (velocity of sign, width of sign, pressure of sign) distinct to every human. Olfactory biometric devices: Analyses the odour to distinguish between varied users. Auditory biometric devices: Analyses the voice to determine the identity of a speaker for accessing control. Roles and uses of Biometric devices Workplace IRIS and Fingerprint recognition at New delhi Terminal 4 Biometrics are being used to establish better and accessible records of the hours employee's work. Immigration As the demand for air travel grows and more people travel, modern day airports have to implement technology in such a way that there are no long queues. Handheld and personal devices Thumbprint recognition become accessible to millions with the iPhone 5S. The fingerprint sensor, also called Touch ID is used to unlock the phone, authorise payments and buy app store applications. Passwords can be forgotten and recovering them can take time, whereas Biometric devices rely on biometric data which tends to be unique to a person, hence there is no risk of forgetting the authentication data. Pscnotes.com Page 183 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 IT Act (2000) The Government of India enacted the Information Technology (I.T.) Act with some major objectives to deliver and facilitate lawful electronic, digital, and online transactions, and mitigate cyber-crimes. The original Act contained 94 sections, divided in 13 chapters and 4 schedules. The laws apply to the whole of India. Persons of other nationalities can also be indicted under the law, if the crime involves a computer or network located in India. Salient Features of I.T Act The salient features of the I.T Act are as follows − Digital signature has been replaced with electronic signature to make it a more technology neutral act. The formations of Controller of Certifying Authorities was directed by the Act, to regulate issuing of digital signatures It elaborates on offenses, penalties, and breaches. It outlines the Justice Dispensation Systems for cyber-crimes. It defines in a new section that cyber café is any facility from where the access to the internet is offered by any person in the ordinary course of business to the members of the public. The Act also amended various sections of Indian Penal Code, 1860, Indian Evidence Act, 1872, Banker's Book Evidence Act, 1891, and Reserve Bank of India Act, 1934 to make them compliant with new technologies. Highlights of the Amended Act The newly amended act came with following highlights − It stresses on privacy issues and highlights information security. It elaborates Digital Signature. It clarifies rational security practices for corporate. It focuses on the role of Intermediaries. New faces of Cyber Crime were added. Section 66A - Section 66A prescribes the punishment for sending "offensive' messages through computers or any other communication device such as a mobile phone or a tablet, and a conviction can fetch a maximum of three years in jail. Pscnotes.com Page 184 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Security challenges in border areas linkages of organized crime with terrorism. Organised crime: Organized crime is described as any group having a corporate structure whose main aim is to obtain money through unlawful activities often surviving on fear and corruption. Today, organized crime is business at large scale that is conducting global commerce for the trafficking of illegal services and products as well as developing the associated supply chains. Criminal organizations are conducting commerce across traditional nation-state boundaries that permit illegal groups to work in synchronisation with other like groups. These crimes include: Bribery, Murder, Counterfeiting, Embezzlement of Union Funds, Mail Fraud, Wire Fraud, Money Laundering, Obstruction of Justice, Murder for Hire Drug Trafficking, Prostitution Sexual Exploitation of Children, Alien Smuggling, Trafficking in Counterfeit Goods, Kidnapping Gambling, Arson Robbery, Sports Bribery Extortion, Drugs, and Theft from Interstate Shipment/Interstate. Narcotic trafficking and Terrorism Started as an organised crime has emerged as a threat to nation states because of its association with terrorist groups. Narcotic drugs are most profitable commodity that it generates quick money only hard cash. India’s worries get magnified because India has a location between golden crescent and golden triangle which are world’s major narcotics producing and exporting regions. This unique location leads India to become a popular route for drug trafficking which can lead to rise of Narco- terrorism and finally instability in the country. Drug Trafficking and Terrorism Terrorists indulge in drug trafficking directly to support their own cause. Sympathizers involve in drug trafficking and send the illegal profits to fund the terrorist movements. Terrorists and drug lords join to gain access to the powers to utilise their connections with political powers. Arm Trafficking and Terrorism The illegal arms trafficking aids terrorists and terrorist groups operating around the world and it is central to the global war on terror. These arms are not only the weapons of choice in the Pscnotes.com Page 185 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 majority of today‘s regional conflicts but also for many terrorists and terrorist groups operating around the world. Terrorists give protection and support to drug traffickers with fire arms, and the drug traffickers, being acquainted with the routes, assist the terrorists in border crossings to bring arms and drugs in the target country. Human Trafficking and Terrorism Terrorism is an expensive business, and better technology has made it easier to track money online, and Terrorist organizations not only utilize human trafficking for financial support, they also use to obtain an entry point into countries. India is found to be both the country of origin and destination for trafficking in women. Human trafficking is not only one of the first financial steps into the transnational and trans-criminal financial network but that it is the bedrock of these criminal syndicates. Management in border areas by various security forces/agencies To deal with security, India has different forces that are specialized to deal with different security threat. Conventionally, forces were meant to be only Defence forces but with rising internal challenges and other threats related to border management, disaster management etc, various forces have come to the for. These forces and agencies in India at broad framework are Security Forces and Agencies 1. 1. Armed Forces 2. Paramilitary Forces 3. Central Armed Police Forces 4. Central Intelligence and Investigation 5. Central Forensic Institute 6. Other Institute 7. State Armed Police Forces ARMED FORCES: Pscnotes.com Page 186 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 They provide security against external threats and conventional warfare ie To assert the territorial integrity of India. To defend the country if attacked by a foreign nation. To support the civil community in case of disasters (e.g. flooding). To participate in United Nations peacekeeping operations in consonance with India’s commitment to the United Nations Charter. There are three Armed forces: Indian Army: The army's main objective was to defend the nation's frontiers. However, over the years, it has also taken up the responsibility of providing internal security, especially in insurgent-hit Kashmir and north-east. Indian Navy: The role of navy is to ensure that no hostile maritime power can degrade own national security and interests. Indian Air force: Mission of Air force is “Defence of India and every part thereof including preparation for defense and all such acts as may be conducive in times of war to its prosecution and after its termination to effective demobilisation. Its Primary objective being safeguarding the Indian territory in conjunction with other armed forces by defending Indian Air Space. PARAMILITARY FORCES: They assist Armed forces very closely and led by officers of Indian Armed forces. Previously term ‗Paramilitary forces‘ was used to refer to variety of armed services that aid the operation of law enforcement agencies of India and Armed forces but in 2011 on request of army a new definition was adopted which excluded Central Armed Police forces. There are currently three Paramilitary forces: Pscnotes.com Page 187 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 1. Assam-Rifles: It guards Indo-Myanmar Border. Also engaged in internal security of North East states. Conduct counter insurgency operations in the north-east and other areas where deemed necessary, under control of the army. Act as penultimate interventionist force of the central government in internal security situation, under the control of army; when the situation goes beyond the control of central paramilitary operations 2. Special-Frontier-Forces: Engaged in Counter terrorism Intelligence_gathering Also provide close protection to VIPs along with SPG. 3. Indian Coastal Guard: Emergence of the Coast Guard in India on 01 Feb., 1977 as a new service was the result of an awareness that had been growing for some time in the Government for the requirement to enforce National Laws in the waters under national jurisdiction and ensure safety of life and property at sea. The Coast Guard in its present shape was formally inaugurated on 18 Aug 1978 as an independent armed force of the union with the enactment of the Coast Guard Act 1978 by the Parliament with its motto as `VAYAM RAKSHAMAH; which means `WE PROTECT'. CENTRAL ARMED POLICE FORCES: On the recommendation of Border Management Task Force which was constituted after Kargil war, provision was made for One Border One force and accordingly various forces were created. All these CAPF agencies function under the aegis of Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA) of the Government of India. 1. Central Industrial Security Force (CISF): The CISF came into existence in 1969 with a modest beginning, having three battalions, to provide integrated security cover to the Public Sector Undertakings (PSUs). Pscnotes.com Page 188 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 CISF is currently providing security cover to nuclear installations, space establishments, airports, seaports, power plants, sensitive Government buildings and even heritage monuments. 2. Sashastra Seema Bal (SSB): SSB was set up in early 1963 in the wake of the Indo-China conflict to inculcate feelings of national belonging in the border population and develop their capabilities for resistance through a continuous process of motivation, training, development, welfare programmes and activities in the then NEFA, North Assam, North Bengal, hills of Uttar Pradesh, Himachal Pradesh, and Ladakh. The scheme was later extended to Manipur, Tripura, Jammu (1965), Meghalaya (1975), Sikkim (1976) border areas of Rajasthan and Gujarat (1989), Manipur, Mizoram and some more areas of Rajasthan and Gujarat (1988), South Bengal, Nagaland (1989) and Nubra Valley, Rajouri and Poonch district of Jammu and Kashmir (1991). 3.Border Security Force (BSF): Established on 1st December, 1965, it is one of the Central Armed Police Forces. Its primary role is to guard India's international borders during peacetime and also prevent trans-border crime. Like all Central Armed Police Forces of India, the BSF is under the administrative control of the Ministry of Home Affairs. It is one of the many law enforcement agencies of India. 4.Central Reserve Police Force (CRPF): The Central Reserve Police Force came into existence as Crown Representative‘s Police on 27th July, 1939. It became the Central Reserve Police Force on enactment of the CRPF Act on 28th December, 1949. It is a reserve force to assist state police in law and order. 5.Indo Tibetan Border Police Force (ITBPF) : ITBPF was raised on 24 Oct,1962.Presently, ITBP is deployed on border, guarding duties from Karakoram Pass in Ladakh so Jachep La in Arunachal Pradesh covering 3488 km of Indo-China Pscnotes.com Page 189 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Border and manning Border Outposts on altitudes ranging from 9000‘ to 18700‘ in the Western, Middle and Eastern Sector of the Indo-China Border. ITBPF is a Specialized Mountain Force and most of the officers & men are professionally trained mountaineers and skiers. Being the first responder for natural disaster in the Himalayas, ITBPF has been carrying out numerous rescue and relief operations. 6.National Security Guard (NSG): The National Security Guard (NSG) was set up in 1984 as a Federal Contingency Deployment Force to tackle all facets of terrorism in the country. The NSG was modeled on the pattern of the SAS of the UK and GSG-9 of Germany. It is a task- oriented Force and has two complementary elements in the form of the Special Action Group (SAG) comprising Army personnel and the Special Ranger Group (SRG), comprising personnel drawn from the Central Para Military Forces / State Police Force. 7.Railway Protection Force(RPF): To protect Railway property. To do all conducive means for the free movement of the railways. Protection and safeguarding the passengers. 8.Special Protection Group (SPG): It provides security cover to Prime minister, VVIPS and their immediate family members. 9.National Disaster Response Force (NDRF): The National Disaster Response Force (NDRF) is a disaster response agency under National Disaster Management Authority (NDMA) created by the Ministry of Home Affairs, Government of India. It was established in 2009 in Delhi, for disaster management and specialised response to natural and man-made disaster. Pscnotes.com Page 190 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 CENTRAL INTELLIGENCE AND INVESTIGATIVE AGENCIES : a) Intelligence_Bureau(IB): Gather Intelligence from within India Execute counter Intelligence and counter terrorism operations b) National Investigative Agencies (NIA) : It is a federal agency established to combat terror in India. It acts as the Central Counter Terrorism Law Enforcement Agency. The agency is empowered to deal with terror related crimes across states without special permission from the states. NIA was created after the 2008 Mumbai terror attacks as the need for a central agency to combat terrorism was realised. c) Research and Analysis Wing (RAW): Formed in September, 1968. Its creation was necessitated post Sino-Indian War of 1962 and Indo-Pakistani War of 1965 which showed various gaps in intelligence gathering undertaken by Intelligence Bureau (which then handled both internal and external intelligence) d) National Crime Record Bureau (NCRB): To prepare an enabling IT environment - policy framework, guidelines, architecture, best practices for Police Forces throughout the country To improve knowledge based pro-active policing with the use of IT for improving internal efficiency, effectiveness and public service delivery To provide training in IT and Finger Print Science for capacity building in Police Forces e) Narcotics Control Bureau (NCB): To fight from Drug Trafficking on Pan India Level. f) Directorate of Revenue Intelligence (DRI): Collection of intelligence about smuggling of contraband goods, narcotics, under-invoicing etc. through sources of India and abroad, including secret sources. Pscnotes.com Page 191 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Analysis and dissemination of such intelligence to the field formations for action and working on such intelligence, where necessary. g) Central Bureau of Investigation (CBI): The CBI was established in 1941 as the Special Police Establishment, tasked with domestic security. It was renamed the Central Bureau of Investigation on 1st April, 1963. Its motto is "Industry, Impartiality, Integrity". The CBI is under the control of Department of Personnel and Training of the Ministry of Personnel, Public Grievances and Pensions. While analogous in structure to the FBI, the CBI's powers and functions are limited to specific crimes by Acts (primarily the Delhi Special Police Establishment Act, 1946). h)Central Forensic Institutes: Central Forensic Science Laboratory (CFSL) Directorate of Forensic Science Central Finger Print Bureau i)Other Institutions: National Intelligence Grid: It is an integrated intelligence grid which will link databases of several departments and ministries of Government of India as to gather comprehensive pattern of intelligence i.e 360 degree intelligence. First proposed in the aftermath of Mumbai Terrorist attack. NATGRID is a crucial initiative that will help plug our vulnerabilities by upgrading and enhancing our capability to detect and respond to such threats at the earliest possible time. Pscnotes.com Page 192 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Multi Agency Centre: MAC is a multi-agency centre for Counter Terrorism whose mandate is to share terrorism related inputs on a day-to-day basis. Introduction to Economy of Uttar Pradesh The economy of Uttar Pradesh, with a geographical area of 24.093 million hectares, is agriculture dominated with about approximately 80% of total geographical area as agriculture land. The agriculture sector contributes about 40% of the State GDP and 75% of employment. An estimated 35% of the State population is living below poverty line. About 70% of agriculture is dependent on irrigation. The net and gross sown area in the State is 16.68 and 25.52 million hectares respectively. With a GSDP of Rs.11, 45, 234 crores in 2015-162, Uttar Pradesh is the third largest economy of India contributing 8.4% to the country‘s economy. Uttar Pradesh has a number of locally specialised business clusters such as sports items in Meerut, brassware in Moradabad, perfumes in Kannuaj, leather in Kanpur, shoes in Agra, embroidered sarees in Varanasi, carpet in Bhadohi, chikan work in Lucknow etc. Uttar Pradesh is also amongst the top manufacturing destinations in India contributing more than 8% of national manufacturing output. The state is a leading electronic hardware exporter in the country and has also emerged as a key hub for IT/ ITeS and service sector including software, captive business process outsourcing (BPO) and R&D services. The tertiary sector has been driven by trade, hotels, real estate, finance, insurance, transport, communications and other services. The net and gross irrigated areas from all sources are 13.12 and 18.94 million hectares respectively with about 11.7 million of crops land currently irrigated by surface water systems at an average cropping intensity of about 100%. It is the fifth largest state of India. It accounts for 6.88 percent of total area of the country. The population of the state was about 200 million as per census of 2011, which accounted for 16.49 percent of the total population of India. Uttarakhand was also a part of Uttar Pradesh till November, 2000. The state is divided into 4 divisions, namely. Western (30 districts), Eastern (28 districts), Central (10 districts) and Bumdelkhand (7 districts). In 2016-17,Uttar Pradesh's GSDP was Rs 12.37 lakh crore. After the economic reforms the economy of Uttar Pradesh has developed at a great phase with a greater focus on the secondary and tertiary sector which is clearly visible by the following developments:- Pscnotes.com Page 193 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 MANUFACTURING • 1,43,617 Industrial units (MSME and Heavy units) already set up during the 12h FiveYearPlan(July2015)with a total investmentot INR21.956Cr. • 53,242 (MSME and Heavy units) established during FY 2014-15 with an investment of INR 7.671 Cr. and employment generation ot 4.86,963. • Total capital Investment ol INR 17,533 Cr. in MSMEs during 12' Five Year Plan • 12th Five Year Plan envisages industrial growth rate ol 11.2% p.a. and an estimated investment ol INR 3.17.754 Crores in manufacturing sector • UP has about 25 lakh Handicraft Artisans in different crafts Infrastructure • UP accounts tor about 7.5 % ot the total National Highway (NH) network of the Country • 47 National Highways connect the state with 9 neighbouring states and other parts of India • State has largest Ralway network in the country spanning over 8,763 KM • International Airports at Lucknow and Varanasi and 2 other domestic airports at Alahabad and Gorakhpur. • Metro Rail Link from Noida to Greater Noida with a total Length of 29.707 km • 302.2 km long Agra to Lucknow, the longest Access controled Expressway project in the country, is under construction and is expected to be completed in a record time of 22 months. • Lucknow Metro work on ful swing. The expected completion date for the 8.5 km priority section from Transport Nagar to Charbagh is December 2016. a record time of 28 months. IT and Service Industry 6th largest software exporter at INR13,352 crores (2013-14) with a 4.88 % share of Indian exports .Noida and Greater Noida have emerged as major IT-BPM Hubs budgets of Uttar Pradesh Overview of UP Economy: State Budget Pscnotes.com Page 194 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Uttar Pradesh is the most populous state in India with a population of ~200 million people. Uttar Pradesh shares its borders with Nepal on the north, the Indian states of Uttarakhand and Himachal Pradesh towards the northwest, Haryana, Delhi and Rajasthan on the west, Madhya Pradesh on the south, Chhattisgarh and Jharkhand to the southeast and Bihar in the east. The Gross State Domestic Product (GSDP) of Uttar Pradesh grew at a CAGR of around 10.80 per cent between 2011-12 and 2017-18 to reach Rs 13.39 trillion (US$ 207.83 billion). The Net State Domestic Product (NSDP) grew at a CAGR of around 10.68 per cent between 2011-12 and 2017-18 to reach Rs 11.86 trillion (US$ 184.00 billion). Uttar Pradesh is a favoured tourist destination in India due to the location of Taj Mahal, one of the Eight Wonders of the World, in Agra. In 2017, around 2.37 million domestic and foreign tourists visited the state of Uttar Pradesh. Under the state budget 2018-19, Rs 1,240 crore (US$ 192.4 million) has been allocated to boost religious tourism. In February 2018, state government launched a new Tourism policy to attract investments worth Rs 5,000 crore (US$ 772.32 million) every year, to increase domestic tourist footfall by 15 per cent and foreign tourist footfall by 10 per cent. Uttar Pradesh had a total installed power generation capacity of 24,917 megawatt (MW) as of April 2018. Uttar Pradesh is the largest producer of food grains in India and accounted for about 17.83 per cent share in the country‘s total food grain output in 2016-17. Food grain production in the state in 2016-17 stood at 49,144.6 thousand tonnes. Major food grains produced in the state include rice, wheat, maize, millet (bajra), gram, pea and lentils. Pulses production in the state stood at 1,985.0 thousand tonnes in 2017-18 and production of vegetables are 28,226.19 thousand tonnes in 2017-18, the state remains largest producer of vegetables in India. In 2016-17, Uttar Pradesh is recognised as a major milk-producing state in the country, accounting for around 16.83 per cent share in the total milk produced in the country. During 2016-17, the state‘s milk production was around 27.77 million tonnes, growing at a CAGR of 4.21 per cent from 2011-12 to 2016-17. Owing to the state‘s large base of skilled labourers, it has emerged as a key hub for IT and ITeS industries, including software, captive business process outsourcing (BPO) and electronics. The state has become a hub for the semiconductor industry with several major players having their offices and R&D centres in Noida. Pscnotes.com Page 195 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The state offers a wide range of subsidies, policy and fiscal incentives as well as assistance for businesses under the Industrial and Service Sector Investment Policy, 2004 and Infrastructure & Industrial Investment Policy, 2012. The state has well-drafted, sector-specific policies for IT and biotechnology. The new Uttar Pradesh Civil Aviation Promotion Policy 2017 has been brought to promote investments and trade in Uttar Pradesh and will also promote tourism while increased road connectivity along with air connectivity will create more employment avenues. The state has attracted Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) equity inflows worth US$ 652 million during the period April 2000 to December 2017, according to data released by Department of Industrial Policy and Promotion (DIPP). As per Investor Summit 2018, Uttar Pradesh government will focus on key sectors such as IT and ITeS, Dairy, Electronics, Tourism, Manufacturing, Renewable Energy and Agro & Food Processing The major factor driving the growth in the manufacturing sector is the availability of robust infrastructure, extensive road network, large pool of talent, and various investments and incentives offered by the state government. In state budget 2018-19, Uttar Pradesh government has increased its railway budget to Rs 36,000 crore (US$ 5.59 billion) for development of several railway projects as compared to previous year. Uttar Pradesh accounts for strong demand for fertilisers on account of the high availability of acreage coupled with the large size of the state. Richness in the availability of raw material is an important factor for setting up cement plants and the state has 13 cement plants. As per state budget 2018-19, Rs 15 crore (US$ 2.33 million) has been allocated for National Programme for Dairy Development (NPDD) schemes which will help to boost production of dairy products. Importance of Industry, Infrastructure and physical resources of Uttar Pradesh Uttar Pradesh is the most populous state in India, with a large pool of skilled, semi-skilled and unskilled labour. Alternately, the population is also looked upon as the largest consumer base in the country with around 200 million people. It is the largest producer of food grains among all states in India and accounted for about 17.83 per cent share in the country‘s total food grain output in 2016-17. Food grain production in the state in 2017-18 stood at 51,252.7 thousand tonnes and 18,416.3 thousand tonnes in 2018-19. Pulses production in the state stood at 2,208.0 thousand tonnes in 2017-18 (4th Advance estimates) and 660.7 thousand tonnes under kharif season in 2018-19 (1st Advance Estimates). Pscnotes.com Page 196 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Production of vegetables is 27,515.92 (Provisional) thousand tonnes in 2017-18. The state has become a hub for the semiconductor industry with several major players having their offices and research and development (R&D) centres in Noida. Between 2011-12 and 2017-18, Gross State Domestic Product (GSDP) expanded at a Compound Annual Growth Rate (CAGR) of 11.29 per cent to Rs 13.76 trillion (US$ 213.44 billion) whereas the Net State Domestic Product (NSDP) expanded at a CAGR of 11.24 per cent to Rs 12.22 trillion (US$ 189.62 billion). As of January 2019, Uttar Pradesh had an installed power generation capacity of 25,060.93 MW (comprising 6,218.20 MW under state utilities, 12,374.84 MW under private utilities & 6,467.89 MW under central utilities). The state‘s resources, policy incentives, infrastructure and climate are best suited for investments in diverse sectors such as Information Technology (IT), agro-based and food processing, light engineering goods, sports goods, textiles, leather-based, tourism and biotechnology. The state has a well-developed social, physical and industrial infrastructure. It also has good connectivity through 48 national highways, six airports and rail links to all major cities. The state has witnessed a high rate of infrastructure growth in the recent past. There has been a considerable rise in the number of industrial clusters/hubs and Public-Private-Partnership (PPP) projects in the infrastructure domain. The Uttar Pradesh State Industrial Development Corporation (UPSIDC) and the Department of Infrastructure and Industrial Development are responsible for the development of industrial infrastructure in the state. The state has a robust industrial infrastructure, including 15 industrial areas, 12 specialised parks, four growth centres and industrial infrastructure development centres (IIDC). As of December 2018, Uttar Pradesh had 21 notified, 12 operational SEZs and 24 formally approved SEZs. Merchandise exports from Uttar Pradesh reach US$ 13.80 billion in 2017-18 and US$ 11.96 billion in April-December 2018. Pscnotes.com Page 197 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 In 2017, domestic tourist arrivals in the state were 234 million and stood second. Foreign tourist arrivals had crossed over 3.57 million and rank third. According to the Department of Industrial Policy & Promotion (DIPP), cumulative FDI inflows1 in Uttar Pradesh, during April 2000 to December 2018, amounted to US$ 686 million. Some of the major initiatives taken by the government to promote Uttar Pradesh as an investment destination are: The Government of Uttar Pradesh presented Rs 4,28,384.52 crore (US$ 66.47 billion) Budget for 2018-19. In January 2018, 10 cities have been included by the central government up to the fourth round of the Smart Cities Mission in the state. As of July 2018, Rs 800 crore (US$ 119.33 million) has been released for smart city projects in Uttar Pradesh. As per Investor Summit 2018, Uttar Pradesh government will majorly focus on key sectors such as: o IT and ITeS o Dairy o Electronics o Tourism o Manufacturing o Renewable Energy o Agro & Food Processing In June 2018, Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs approved construction of 9.9 km long new 6 lane bridge across river Ganga at Phaphamau in Allahabad with a cost of Rs 1,948.25 crore (US$ 290.61 million). In state budget 2018-19, Uttar Pradesh government has increased its railway budget to Rs 36,000 crore (US$ 5.59 billion) for development of several railway projects as compared to previous year. As of October 2018, the Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs had approved new railway line between Bahraich and Khalilabad, the total length will be 240.26 km with an estimated cost of Rs 4,939.78 crore (US$ 703.87 million). The state is in the process of implementing and testing the public–private partnership model in the power sector with an input-based franchisee system. As per state budget 2018-19, Rs 29,883 crore (US$ 4.64 billion) has been allocated to power sector schemes. The state cabinet approved UP Defence and Aerospace Units and Employment Promotion Policy 2018, with an intention to generate 0.25 million jobs and expects an investment of Rs 50,000 crores (US$ 7.46 billion) over the next five years. Pscnotes.com Page 198 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The state offers a wide range of subsidies, policy and fiscal incentives as well as assistance for businesses under the Industrial and Service Sector Investment Policy, 2004 and Infrastructure & Industrial Investment Policy, 2012. The Uttar Pradesh Information Technology and Start-up Policy, 2016 is aimed at promoting Uttar Pradesh as a preferred and attractive location for investments for various IT/ITeS companies and for establishing IT Parks as well as IT cities for the development of IT Infrastructure in the state. The government of Uttar Pradesh has sanctioned 20 SEZs across the state, such as IT and ITeS, electronic hardware and software, handicrafts and agro-based industries. The state has proposed 40 IT/ITeS parks (apart from IT SEZs), two biotech zones and a knowledge park. Infra-Structure: Airports The state has six domestic airports, located at Agra, Allahabad, Gorakhpur, Kanpur, Lucknow and Varanasi. International flights operate from Chaudhary Charan Singh International Airport, Lucknow, and Lal Bahadur Shastri Airport, Varanasi. Lucknow airport received 4,117,598 passengers and Varanasi airport received 1,994,596 passengers during April 2013 to March 2014*. New airports have been proposed at Shrawasti and Kushinagar districts. In February 2014, seven new airports were also proposed for Meerut, Moradabad, Faizabad, Agra, Allahabad, Bareilly and Kanpur. Pscnotes.com Page 199 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 · In May 2018, Uttar Pradesh government received approval from the Civil Aviation Ministry for the construction of Noida International Greenfield Airport at the North of Jewar Village in Uttar Pradesh Railways · Uttar Pradesh has the biggest railway network in the country with a railway density of 40 km which is double the rail density of the India. · Agriculture, cement, fertilizers, coal and manufacturing are the major sectors and industries served by the railways. · Various parts of the state are catered to five of the 17 railway zones in India. These are Northern Railways, North Eastern Railways, East Central Railways, North Central Railways and West Central Railways. · As per state budget 2018-19, Uttar Pradesh government has increased its railway budget compared to previous year to Rs 36,000 crore (US$ 5.59 billion) for development of several projects such as re-development of Charbagh railway station, Lucknow Junction and Gomti Nagar stations , over bridge at Malhaur and development of passenger amenities at Alamnagar station. · As of October 2018, the Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs had approved a new railway line between Bahraich and Khalilabad, the total length will be 240.26 km with an estimated cost of Rs 4,939.78 crore (US$ 703.87 million) Roads · Uttar Pradesh is well-connected to its 9 neighbouring states & other parts of India through 48 national highways. The length of national highways running through the state accounts for about 8.5% of the total National Highway (NH) length in India. Yamuna Expressway has 6 lanes & is 165-km long with controlled-access which connects Greater Noida with Agra. Pscnotes.com Page 200 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 · As of December 2018, 14,804 habitations were eligible under Pradhan Mantri Gram Sadak Yojana (PMGSY) , out of which 11,751 were cleared and further 11,748 habitations were connected. a) Roads Length 422,412 b) National highways 11,737 c) State highways 7,147 d) Other roads 169,153 e) Rural roads 86,827 · Budget 2018-19 (Project) Funds allocated a) Bundelkhand expressway Rs 650.00 crore (US$ 100.85 million) b) Gorkahpur link expressway Rs 550.00 crore (US$ 85.34 million) c) Purvanchal expressway Rs 1,000.00 crore (US$ 155.16 million) d) Agra-Lucknow expressway Rs 500.00 crore (US$ 77.58 million) e) Upgradation of a national highway (two-lane to four-lane) (March 2018) Rs 770.04 crore (US$ 119.48 million) Power: · Uttar Pradesh was one of the state to bring in power sector reforms in the country. The fundamental restructuring of the state power sector was processed in mid 1990s, wherein world bank was one of the main agencies funding in power sector reforms in India. · As of January 2019, Uttar Pradesh had an installed power§ generation capacity of 25,060.93 MW (comprising 6,218.20 MW under state utilities, 12,374.84 MW under private utilities & 6,467.89 MW under central utilities). · Thermal power contributed 18,529.21 MW to the state’s total§ installed power generation capacity, followed by a contribution of 3,368.63 MW by hydropower, 289.48 MW by nuclear power & 2,873.61 MW by renewable power. · Energy requirement in the state was 92,400 million units (MU)§ between Apr-Dec 2018. · Power generation in the state for 2018-19^ reached 104,792.98§ GWH Pscnotes.com Page 201 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 · As per state budget 2018-19, Rs 29,883 crore (US$ 4.64 billion) has been allocated to power sector schemes. · Uttar Pradesh Electricity Regulatory Commission has approved§ transmission capital expenditure worth Rs 20,000 crore (US$ 3.11 billion) between FY18-20, an increase of 107 per cent over FY15-17. · State-owned power companies Uttar Pradesh Rajya Vidyut Utpadan Nigam Limited (UPRVUNL) Power generation (thermal) Uttar Pradesh Jal Vidyut Nigam Limited (UPJVNL) Power generation (hydro) Uttar Pradesh Power Corporation Limited (UPPCL) Power transmission Paschimanchal Vidyut Vitran Nigam Limited (PVVNL) Power distribution Purvanchal Vidyut Vitran Nigam Limited (PuVVNL) Power distribution Madhyanchal Vidyut Vitran Nigam Limited (MVVNL) Power distribution Dakshinanchal Vidyut Vitran Nigam Limited (DVVNL) Power distribution Pscnotes.com Page 202 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Telecom · The Uttar Pradesh circle has good telecom infrastructure, with all the major players providing services in the state. The state has a huge postal circle (17,670 post offices) divided into six regions: Allahabad, Agra, Bareilly, Gorakhpur, Kanpur and Lucknow. · By the end of November 2018, 40.03 million subscribers had§ submitted requests for mobile number portability in Uttar Pradesh. · In December 2017, major telecom companies are being called in for§ providing connectivity as part of the Government of India’s plan of setting up 5 million smart meters across Uttar Pradesh and Haryana. Telecom Infrastructure (March 2014) Wireless connectionsM 166,071,201 Wire-line connections 764,619 Internet subscribers 65,960,000 Teledensity (in per cent) 70.01 Major telecom operators in Uttar Pradesh Bharat Sanchar Nigam Limited (BSNL) Bharti Airtel Idea Cellular Vodafone Essar Aircel Ltd Reliance Communications Tata Teleservices Pscnotes.com Page 203 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Industrial Infrastructure: The state has a robust industrial infrastructure, including 15 industrial areas, 12 specialised parks, four growth centres and industrial infrastructure development centres (IIDC). As of September 2014, the state had 22 notified special economic zones (SEZs). The state has proposed 40 IT/ITeS parks (apart from IT SEZs), two biotech zones and a knowledge park. Development of integrated agro/food processing zones has been proposed at Hapur, about 54 km from Delhi. Integrated logistics hubs (free-trade warehousing zones) have been proposed in collaboration between IL & FS, Mineral and Mining Trading Corporation and Mitsui (Japan). Thus far, the state government has recommended 56 SEZs proposals to the Government of India. Of these proposals, 21 SEZs have been notified. Until date, Uttar Pradesh has nine functional SEZs. Under a central government scheme, integrated industrial development centres have been established to encourage development of micro and small industries at Kosi Kotwan (Mathura), Etah, Banthar (Unnao), Baghpat, Masuri Gulawati (Ghaziabad), Kursi Road (Barabanki) and Chandauli. The Greater Noida Phase-II has 19.0 per cent land reserved for industrial use. An IT City is proposed to be built on about 100 acres of government land at Gajaria farms on Sultanpur Road in Lucknow. The state government granted approval for the city in April 2012. Uttar Pradesh is the biggest beneficiary of the Eastern Dedicated Freight Corridor project, with a 57.0 per cent share in the total length of 1,839 km. Industrial parks Infrastructure (type) Location Area (acres) Growth centres Bijoli, Jhansi 385 Growth centres Shajahanpur 311 Growth centres Dibiyapur 246 Growth centres Jainpur 331 Agro parks Barabanki 180 Agro parks Varanasi 261 Apparel parks Tronica City 146 Textile and hosiery parks Kanpur 173 Leather technology parks Banthar, Unnao 233 Export promotion industrial parks Greater Noida 200 Pscnotes.com Page 204 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Export promotion industrial parks Shastripuram, Agra 102 13,000 sq ft, of which 9,296 sq ft of area is being utilised by 15 Software Technology Parks of India (STPI) units. The park is fully operational. Physical Infrastructure: Uttar Pradesh government targets improving basic urban infrastructure and water supply in 61 cities and towns with a population of above one lakh each by 2019-20. As per state budget 2018-19, a total amount of Rs 11,500.00 crore (US$ 1.78 billion) has been allocated to ‘Pradhan Mantri Awas Yojna’ and around Rs 200.00 crore (US$ 31.03 million) allotted ‘Mukhya Mantri Awas Yojna’. The Government of Uttar Pradesh has proposed an investment of 5,000.00 crore (US$ 775.80 million) for the Swachch Bharat Mission (Grahmin) in State Budget 2018-19. In the State Budget 2018-19, an allocation of Rs 1,500.00 crore (US$ 00 million) for National Rural Drinking Water programme and Rs 120.00 crore (US$ 18.62 million) for State Rural Drinking Water Programme has been made. Under the Smart Cities Mission launched by the central government in Uttar Pradesh, 13 cities were proposed to be developed as smart cities. In August 2015, 12 cities were shortlisted to be developed as smart cities, namely - Kanpur, Lucknow, Allahabad, Jhansi, Moradabad, Aligarh, Saharanpur, Bareilly, Varanasi, Ghaziabad Agra and Rampur. Out of these, 7 cities have been included by the central government, until the third round of the mission. In the fourth round released in January 2018, 3 new cities have been chosen, namely, Bareilly, Moradabad and Saharanpur. As per state budget 2018-19, amount of Rs 1,650 crore (US$ 256.01 million) has been allocated for ‘Smart City Mission’. As of July 2018, Rs 800 crore (US$ 119.33 million) has been released for smart city projects in Uttar Pradesh Social Infrastructure Education: Pscnotes.com Page 205 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Uttar Pradesh has 72 universities out of which 28 are state universities, 9 are deemed universities, 6 central universities, and 29 private universities. As of 2017-18, Uttar Pradesh has 74 universities, 6,922 colleges and 3,143 Industrial Training Institutes. The state is one of the few states to have successfully implemented the “education for all” policy. Consequently, the state has made various investments towards escalation of the standard of education across various levels. The state has a good presence of private players in the education sector. In the state budget 2018-19, the state government allocated Rs 2,048 crore (US$ 317.77 million) for Mid-Day-Meal, Rs 18,167 crore (US$ 2.82 billion) for Sarva Shiksha Abhiyan. Allocations of Rs 480 crore (US$ 74.48 million) and Rs 167 crore (US$ 4.03 million) have been made for ‘Rashtriya Madhyamik Shiksha Abhiyan’ and ‘Rashtriya Uchchatar Shiksha Abhiyan’, respectively According to the provisional data of Census 2011, Uttar Pradesh has a literacy rate of 69.72 per cent; the male literacy rate is 79.24 per cent and the female literacy rate is 59.26 per cent. Major Educational Institutes in Uttar Pradesh 1. Indian Institute of Technology, Kanpur. 2. Indian Institute of Management, Lucknow. 3. Aligarh Muslim University, Aligarh. 4. Motilal Nehru National Institute of Technology, Allahabad. 5. Asian Academy of Film and Television, Noida. 6. Indian Veterinary Research Institute, Izatnagar. 7. Banaras Hindu University, Varanasi. 8. National Institute of Technology (NIT), Allahabad. Health: The state has a 3-tier public healthcare infrastructure, comprising primary health centres (PHCs), health units, community health centres (CHCs) & sub-centres. As per state budget 2018-19, the state had 170 mobile medical units (MMU) to provide a range of preventive & curative healthcare services at PPP route, the state also has 100 new Ayurveda hospitals. In February 2019, the state had 3,594 primary health centres, 21,050 sub-centres, 4,412 community health centres and 192 district hospitals and 6 sub-district hospitals Industrial Infrastructure: Pscnotes.com Page 206 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Uttar Pradesh, a state with an access to a robust industrial infrastructure, has 15 industrial areas, 12 specialised parks, 4 growth centres & Industrial Infrastructure Development Centres (IIDC). As of January 2019Uttar Pradesh had 21 notified, 12 operational SEZs and 24 formally, approved SEZs. The state has proposed 40 IT/ITeS parks (apart from IT SEZs), 2 biotech zones & a knowledge park. The development of integrated agro/food processing zones has been proposed at Hapur, about 54 km from Delhi. The state government sanctioned 20 SEZs in the state to accommodate various sectors such as IT/ITeS, textiles, handicrafts, and non-conventional energy. IT/ITeS accounted for the maximum share of approved SEZs in the state which accounted for 80 per cent of the 20 SEZs, followed by electronic products contributing 18 per cent to the overall share. In July 2018, Uttar Pradesh attracts 80 leading industrialists to invest Rs 60,000 crore (US$ 8.95 billion) in 81 projects across various sector. Tier–II cities are attractive destinations for the IT/ITeS industry and Uttar Pradesh can tap the potential of its cities such as Lucknow that are in proximity to Noida and NCR. During 2016-17*, the total exports from the operating SEZs in the state of Uttar Pradesh stood at US$ 1.64 billion. Under central government scheme, various integrated industrial development centres have been developed so as to boost the development of micro small & medium industries at Etah, Banthar (Unnao), Kosi Kotwan (Mathura), Kursi Road (Barabanki) & various other places. The Greater Noida Phase-II has 19 per cent land reserved for industrial use. In February 2018, Essel group announced MoUs worth Rs 180 bn (US$ 2.78 billion) to boost state infrastructure by manufacturing Ebuses Physical Resources Of UP Uttar Pradesh is the fifth largest State of India after Rajasthan, Maharashtra, Madhya Pradesh and Andhra Pradesh in area. For administrative purposes, the state is divided into 18 divisions and 75 districts. There are 303 sub divisions, 313 Tehsils, 11 Municipal Corporation, 689 Cities, 820 community development blocks, 52,000 Gram Sabha, 1,07,452 revenue villages, out of which 97,941 are inhabitant and 9,511 uninhabitant in the state. Uttar Pradesh, the most populated state is located in the northern region of India and shares its borders with Nepal on the north, the Indian states of Uttarakhand and Himachal Pradesh towards the northwest, Haryana, Delhi and Rajasthan on the west, Madhya Pradesh on the south, Chhattisgarh and Jharkhand to the southeast and Bihar in the east. Uttar Pradesh is Situated between 23°52’N and 31°28’N latitudes and 77°3′ and 84°39’E longitudes (Important) Uttar Pradesh can be divided into three distinct physical regions based on the Physical Settings : The Shivalik foothills and Terai in the North The Gangetic Plain in the centre – Highly fertile alluvial soils; flat topography broken by numerous ponds, lakes and rivers; slope 2 m/km The Vindhya Hills and plateau in the south – Hard rock Strata; varied topography of hills, plains, valleys and plateau; limited water availability. Pscnotes.com Page 207 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The southernmost range of Himalayas is known as Siwalik. The Himadri and Himachal ranges of the Himalayas have been formed much before the formation of Siwalik range. The rivers rising in the Himadri and Himachal ranges brought gravel, sand and mud along with them, which was deposited in the rapidly shrinking Tethys Sea. In course of time, the earth movements caused folding of these relatively fresh deposits of sediments, giving rise to the least consolidated Siwalik range. The average height of the Siwalik range is very low, about 600 metres only. Relief and Structure: The Ganga plain which dominates the landscape and nearly covers three fourth of the geographical area of the State, lies between the rocky Himalayan belt in the north and the southern hilly tract comprised of mainly Pre-Cambrian rocks. Flexing of the Indian lithosphere in response to the compressive forces due to collision, and thrust fold loading produced the Ganga Plain foreland basin. It is filled with recent alluvial sediments which are at places more than 1,000 m. thick and an amalgam of sand, silt, clay in varying proportions. The southern hilly tract is roughly parallel to the Ganga-Yamuna lineament. The tract is underlain by granitic complex in Bundelkhand region and in Sonbhadra. It is overlain by rocks Mahakoshal (Bijawar) and Vindhyan Super group. The younger rock comprise of coal bearing Gondwana in south Sonbhadra and basaltic rocks in southern part of Lalitpur. The granitic complex is considered to be potential for the search of metallic minerals like copper, lead, zinc, molybdenum, gold, nickel, Uranium and Platinum group of elements. The overlying sediments of Mahakoshal (Bijawar) and associated Iron Formation show a potential for the search of copper, uranium, and gold in Lalitpur and andalusite, sillimanite, gold, calcite, marble and clay in sonbhadra. The lower Vindhyan sediments of Sonbhadra contain deposits of cement grade limestone, flux grade dolomites, building stone and are also potential for the search of placer gold and other metals. The Upper Vindhyan sandstones are suitable for making decorative slab/tiles or ballast. Deposits of silica sands and bauxite are available in Allahabad and chitrakoot districts while coal deposits occur in the Gondwana rocks in southwestern corner of Sonbhadra. The thin strip of land running from Saharanpur in the west to Deoria in the east is known as Bhabhar and Terai. The Bhabhar area in Saharanpur, Bijnor and Pilibhit districts skirts round the Shivalik hills. Torrential streams and rivers desending the mountaineous slopes slow down here, leaving behind boulders brought from the upper reaches of the Himalayan hills. Some 34 Kilometers in width in the west, the tract goes on getting narrower in its march towards the east. Smaller streams seem to get lost in the thick mass of boulders but reappear some distance away, moving slowly and depositing a thin layer of soil which converts itself into a marshy patch called the Terai. The Terai area, which runs through parts of Saharanpur, Bijnor, Rampur, Barelly, Pilibhit, Lakhimpur Kheri, Bahraich, Gonda, Basti, Siddarthnagar, Gorakhpur, Mahrajganj and Deoria districts was once a belt, some 80 to 90 kilometers wide , covered with forests and tall, dense grasses. In the recent years, however, owing to the land acquisition programme of the State Pscnotes.com Page 208 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Government the Terai belt has shrunk considerably, Wheat, rice and sugar cane are the main crops grown in Terai together with jute in certain stretches. Outside the Terai and Bhabhar belt, the plains are fertile and flat save certain trans-Yamuna portions in Agra and Mathura districts where ravines and red stone hillocks abound on the eastern end of the Arawali range. Irrigated by Ganga, Yamuna and their tributaries, the plains slope in two formations- from north to south in the west and west north to south east in the east, yielding two major crops a year i.e. rice in Kharif & wheat in Rabi Season. Mineral Resources Uttar Pradesh is the principal holder of country‘s andalusite & diaspore resources and possesses 78% andalusite 37% diaspore and 10% pyrophyllite. Important minerals occurring in Uttar Pradesh are: coal in Singrauli coalfields,Sonbhadra district. diaspore & pyrophyllite in Hamirpur, Jhansi, Lalilpur and Mahoba districts. Naini area of Allahabad contains High quality of silica sand, an important source of glass sand, containing 98% SiO2, and a very low Fe2O3 is found in Shankargarh. Lohargath in Allahabad district and also Bargarh in Banda district It is also found in Aligarh ind Chitrakoot districts. Detailed analysis of various Minerals of Uttar Pradesh is as follows:- Cement and other Limestone based Industry The State was producing only 1.4 millions tonnes of Cement as against a demand of 6 million tonnes. The investigations carried out show the possibility of tapping additional reserves of Limestone for Cement as well as for Steel and other Chemical industries in the following areas. Large Cement Plants Kannach-Basuhari, Sonbhadra About 145 Million tonnes of Cement grade Limestone has been outlined for setting up a million tonnes Cement plant expandable up to 2 million tonnes. Mini Cement Plants: A vast potential for Cement grade Limestone has been outlined in block VI of Kajrahat Limestone deposit in Sonbhadra which can be considered for Mini cement plant. Dolomite Deposits occur in the Kajrahat belt and are estimated about 15 million tonnes near Bari Village of Sonbhadra. Rock Phosphate Pscnotes.com Page 209 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 About 6 Million tonnes of low grade (+16% P2O5 ) Phosphate occur in Lalitpur. The high grade ore is being sold as a direct fertilizer and to elemental Phosphorus plants. A mining and beneficiation project in Lalitpur is under Visit our Online store for Exclusive UPPCS Offersformulation in joint sector for producing 1,30,000 tonnes of concentrate annually with +35% P2O5 . Downstream industries are also under consideration. Silica Sand Extensive deposits of high grade Silica Sand occur near Shankargarh and Bargarh in Allahabad and Chitrakoot distt. Some of these deposits are mined by private lease holders on a small scale. Based on Lalapur deposits additional large scale mining and beneficiation units has been established by National Mineral Development Corporation. Pyrophyllite and Diaspore Small deposits of Pyrophyllite and Diaspore occur in Hamirpur, Mahoba Jhansi and Lalitpur districts. These are mined by private individuals and sold as a filler&handicrafts. These mines can be developed to produce large quantities of classified products for ceramics and refractory industry. Bauxite and Synthetic Emery About 8.4 million tones of metal grade Bauxite occur south of Manikpur in Chitrakoot district. Sand Lime Bricks The Bricks offer competitive price and attractive colours and hence are in great demand. Few more plants can be set up in the state. In addition, production of Fly Ash-Lime Bricks can also be considered, since large stocks of fly ash are lying unused. Setting up of such eco friendly plants will save the excavation of earth and also the fuel wood used for making Red bricks. Granite A large potentiality of dimensional Granite, suitable for blocks slabs and tiles exists in district Lalitpur, Jhansi, Mahoba, Banda and Sonbhadra and few areas in Lalitpur, are producing dimensional Granite, which has a potential export market. There is a potentiality for establishing more plants in the Joint sector. Sandstone Vindhyan sandstone occur in Agra, Lalitpur, Chitrakoot, Allahabad, Mirzapur, Varanasi and Sonbhadra districts. These are exploited by private parties and marketed as Slabstone, Millstone and Building stone. These districts provide opportunity for indigenous market and export too. Placer Gold Pscnotes.com Page 210 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Large areas of river beds of Saharanpur district contain gold ranging from 0.1-0.2 gm/cubic meter of sand. Beneficiation tests completed so far indicate 60-80% of gold recovery using simple gravity methods. China Clay There are possibilities of proving large deposits of China clay at Naudiha, Ramgarh, Kon & Nigahein and Jaljalia in distt. Sonbhadra. The clay occur in the weathering zone below sandstone in 5-15 meter thick zone and width of individual pockets vary from 150-200 meters. The recovery of the clay fraction is over 50%. The deposits are presently under exploratation.17 Million Tonnes of china clay deposit is available for entrepreneurs. It is available at Naudiha 40 Kms from Chopan. This area is well connected by metal road. The china clay of Naudiha- Ramgarh is a low grade Plastic-clay and could be used in low temperature stone-ware body for the production of crockery etc. Andalusite Low grade andalusite deposits occur in Harnakachar area near Wyndhamganj and Bagisoti area of Sonbhadra. GSI had estimated about 14 million tones reserves in Wyndhamganj area. Potential occurrences can be considered for exploitation. Low Grade Iron Ore Large reserves of low grade (25-30% iron) iron ore which can be easily upgraded to 45% iron using gravity methods occur at Girar, Lalitpur. These reserves can be utilized for making sponge iron. Wildlife and Eco-Tourism 1. National Chambal Sanctuary –The National Chambal Sanctuary is famous for the rare Gangetic dolphin. The Sanctuary was founded in 1979 and is a part of a large area co-administered by Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh, and Uttar Pradesh. Apart from the Gangetic dolphin, the other inhabitants of the sanctury include magar (crocodile) and ghariyal (alligator), chinkara, sambar, nilgai, wolf and wild bear. 2. Bakhira Bird Sanctuary– situated near Gorakhpur. This is an important and largest natural flood plain wetland in the eastern U.P., which provides a wintering & staging ground for a number of migratory waterfowls & a breeding ground for resident birds. 3. Sohagabarwa Wildlife Sanctuary– This area was declared a Sanctuary in the year 1987 and is spread over an area of 482 km2. It is the prominent attraction of Maharajganj District and includes seven forest ranges of the adjoining areas. The Sanctuary acts as the corridor between the Sanctuaries in Nepal & Bihar. It is one of the habitats of tiger in U.P. 4. Chandra Prabha Wildlife Sanctuary –The Sanctuary is located in Chandauli District, in the south eastern part of U.P beautiful picnic spots, dense forest, and scenic waterfalls like Raj Dari & Dev Dari & a dam nearby called Chandra Prabha Dam. It was the habitat of Asiatic Lion from 1957- 1970 but after that lions disappeared from here. It serves as a natural & ideal habitat with its Pscnotes.com Page 211 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 grasslands, many caves in Vindhyan area & waterfalls for a host of animals & plants (medicinal also). Chandra Prabha & Karmnasha rivers, flowing through the sanctuary have a variety of fish. 5. Kaimur Wildlife Sanctuary– The Kaimur Wildlife Sanctuary, established in 1982, is spread over an area of about 501 km2 of Mirzapur & Sonbhadra District. The Sanctuary has a wide variety of wildlife in its lush green dense forest cover with numerous waterfalls, treasure of pre-historic caves, rock paintings & heritage of rare fossils. Lakhania Paintings (Rock Paintings)- Rock paintings found in the cave of this area are about 4000 year old and were discovered in 1968. Most of the paintings are in terracotta colour & depict hunting, cattle grazing, war scenes, worshipping, bee-keeping, decorative floor designs, meeting, domestic chores etc. 6. Katarniaghat Wildlife Sanctuary –This Wildlife Sanctuary is situated near Nepal border in the Tarai region of Bahraich district and is a part of Dudhawa Tiger Reserve. Girwa & Kodiala Rivers which join together and are later known as Ghaghra traverse the sanctuary. 7. Suhelwa Wildlife Sanctuary– The Sanctuary is divided into two parts, viz, East & West. The Sanctuary was established in 1988. Suhelwa is connected with the forest of Mahadevpuri in Nepal. It is one of the habitats of tigers in U.P., which is the main attraction of the Suhelwa Wildlife Sanctuary. Rivers: 1. Ganga-Ganga is formed by 6 headstreams and 5 of their confluences. Bhagirathi is considered as source of river ganga which rises at the foot of gangotri glacier at gamukh at an elevation of 3892 mts, though there are many small streams that feed bhagirathi . The six headstreams are the Alaknanda, Dhauliganga, Nandakini, Pindar, Mandakini, and Bhagirathi rivers. The five confluences, known as the Panch Prayag, are all along the Alaknanda. They are, in downstream order, Vishnuprayag, where the Dhauliganga joins the Alaknanda;Nandprayag, where the Nandakini joins; Karnaprayag, where the Pindar joins, Rudraprayag, where the Mandakini joins; and finally, Devprayag, where the Bhagirathi joins the Alaknanda to form the Ganges River proper. It is the longest river of India and largest and most fertile basin the country. 2. Bhagirathi –It is considered as source of river Ganga, rises at the foot of Gangotri glacier. The upper catchment of the river is glaciated and thus continuously feeds the river throughout the year. The river cuts spectacular gorges as it cuts through the granites and crystalline rocks of the middle Himalayas. Its main tributary is Bhilganga which joins it at Tehri, where the tehri dam has been constructed. 3. Alaknanda –The headwaters of the Alaknanda are formed by snowmelt from such peaks as Badrinath, Kamet, Satopant glaciers in Uttarakhand. Its meets the Bhagirathi river at Devprayag. Its main tributaries are Mandakini, Nandakini, and Pindar Rivers. The Alaknanda river drains part of chamoli, Tehri and Pauri districts. Pilgrimage centre Badrinath and natural spring Tapt Kund lie along the bank of the Alaknanda river . 4. Ramganga –tributary of ganga draining through the shivalik ranges and is fed by springs emanating from the reservoirs of underground water. Ramganga flows by the Corbett National Park near Ramnagar of Nainital district from where it descends upon the plains. Meets ganges near Kannauj Bareilly city of Uttar Pradesh is situated on its banks 5. Gomti –The Gomti originates from Gomat Taal which formally known as Fulhaar jheel, near Madho Tanda, Pilibhit, India. It extends 900 km (560 mi) through Uttar Pradesh and meets the Ganges River near Saidpur, Kaithi in Ghazipur. Another major tributary is the Sai River, which joins near Jaunpur. It meets Ganges near Ghazipur. Pscnotes.com Page 212 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 6. Sai –Tributary of Gomati which joins it in Jaunpur. Towns of Raiebareily and Pratapgarh are situated on it. 7. Sharda –Originates from the greater Himalayas at Kalapani at an altitude of 3600 mts. River is known as Kali river in Nepal where temple of goddess kali is situated in kalapani, near Lipulekh pass at the border of India and Tibet .and after descending into india it is called as sarda. 8. Ghaghra –It is a perennial river originating near Mansarovar lake, joins sharda river near brahmaghat UP. Ghaghra river joins Ganges at dariganj bhiar.It is largest tributary of ganges in terms of volume. The river flows through katarniaghat wildlife sanctuary, part of Dudhwa National Park. The upper course of river is famous for gangetic dolphins 9. Saryu –it is left bank tributary of Ghaghra, meets Ghaghra in bahraich district, Ayodhya is situated on the banks of river Saryu. 10. Rapti –Rises south of prominent E-W ridge midway between Dhaulagiri and mahabharat ranges in Nepal. Fed by springs. City of Gorakhpur lies on its banks and cause frequent floods in the rainy season. 11. Varuna –The Varuna River is a minor tributary of the Ganges River. It is named after the god Varuna. The name Varanasi itself is interpreted to be derived from the name of the river Varuna 12. Yamuna –originates from yamunotri glacier in the lower Himalayas, uttarkashi distict of Uttarakhand. Flows for 1370 kms before it meets ganges at Allahabad. River is fed by Tons(in Uttarakhand) and Giri(HP) it forms boundary of Haryana ,passes through delhi along the border of UP passing through major cities like baghpat, noida , mathura , agra ,Firozabad, etawah , hamirpur. The industrial development all along the course of river is now the major cause of Yamuna being polluted so much. 13. Sirsa –Travels parallel to Yamuna river in S-E direction. Passes along the Etawah district. 14. Sengar –tributary of sirsa, moves along the bad land and ravines of Chambal valley. 15. Chambal –the river rises in the malwa on the northern slopes of vindhyan near Mhow. The river is part of the confluence of 5 rivers near etawah district called “Pachnada”(in hindi). The river is famous for the ravines that have been created due to flooding and break of channel by the Chambal river. Most rice and oil seed are grown along the banks. Chambal is liable to heavy floods due to step gradient of its bed before it debouches on the alluvial plains. The volume discharge is greater than Yamuna. Clear waters and alligators are common in the river. Hydropower and irrigation projects Gandhi Sagar (MP) and Ranapratap Sagar (Rajasthan) and Kota barrage build on Chambal river. 16. Kuwari river –A tributary of Chambal, rises from northern border of MP ,northern slopes of Vindhyas, moves in a semicircular tract before meeting Chambal in Auraiya District, though subject to sudden and freshets during rains yet remains an insignificant stream in the hot season. 17. The Ahneya and Puraha– These take rise in a series of lakes, the former near Kakan and the latter near Sauj in the Mainpuri district and little more than the drainage channels for carrying off superfluous rain water. In the hot or cold season they are normally dry but in rains, the Puraha, owing to its sinuous course, injures a considerable amount of land on either bank. 18. Pandu– It is the only stream of the Etawah district which flows into the Ganga. It rises in the extreme north-east of Bidhuna tahsil in a large clay depression forming a lake lying between Sabhad and Nurpur. It flows eastwards into the Farrukhabad district. 19. Betwa– the Betwa rises in the Vindhya Range just north of Hoshangabad in Madhya Pradesh and flows north-east through Madhya Pradesh and flow through Orchha to Uttar Pradesh. Matatila Dam, an undertaking between the states of Madhya Pradesh and Uttar Pradesh, Paricha Dam, Rajghat Dam situated on Betwa river. The ambitious project Betwa–Ken link , estimated to cost Pscnotes.com Page 213 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 over Rs.9000 crore, is expected to be included in the 12th Five-Year Plan was in recent news as of Min of Env. and Forest declined the required environmental clearanc 20. Dhasan –The Dhasan River is a right bank tributary of the Betwa River. 21. Jawai river –Flows through Bundelkhand region, acts as lifeline of this region due to variability in Monsoon over this region 22. Ken river – is one the major rivers of the Bundelkhand region of central India, and flows through two states, Madhya Pradesh and Uttar Pradesh. Rises from Vindhyas. It is a tributary of the Yamuna, The Raneh Falls on the Ken river and Ken Ghariyal Sanctuary are tourist attractions. Gangau Dam has been constructed at the confluence of the Ken and Simri rivers. The Ken River passes through Panna National Park. Banda city is located on banks of river Ken. 23. Baghain River – Also rises from Northern slope of Vindhyas and meets Ken river perpendicular making rectangular drainage. 24. Tons River / Tamsa– The Tamsa River (also known as the Tons River) is a tributary of the Ganges flowing through the Indian states of Madhya Pradesh and Uttar Pradesh. The Tamsa rises in a tank at Tamakund in the Kaimur Range at an elevation of 610 meters. It flows through the fertile districts of Satna and Rewa. The river receives the Belan in UP and joins the Ganges at Sirsa, 300 km from Sangam. The Tamsa River while descending through the Rewa Plateau and draining northwards makes a vertical falls of 70m known as Purwa Falls, Chachai Falls (127m) on the Bihad River, a tributary of the Tamsa, the Keoti Falls (98m) on the Mahana River, a tributary of the Tamsa, and Odda Falls (145m) on the Odda River, a tributary of the Belah River, which is itself a tributary of the Tamsa. 25. Belan River – Tributary of Tons , rising from Kaimur Hills, meets Tons at the boundary of Up and MP. 26. Son River – The Son originates near Amarkantak in Madhya Pradesh,just east of the headwater of the Narmada River. The Son parallels the Kaimur hills, flowing east-northeast through Uttar Pradesh, Jharkhand and Bihar states to join the Ganges just above Patna. Its chief tributaries are the Rihand and the North Koel. The Bansagar Dam in Madhya Pradesh is made on this river. 27. Rihand River– The Rihand headwaters originate in the Bagelkhand region of Madhya Pradesh state, and flow towards the north into Sonbhadra District of Uttar Pradesh. Here it joins the Son River. The Rihand Dam was built across the river in 1962 for hydropower generation; the reservoir made behind the dam is called Govind Ballabh Pant Sagar. 28. Kanhar River – The Kanhar River is a tributary of the Son River and flows through the Indian states of Chhattisgarh, Jharkhand and Uttar Pradesh. Rises from ChotaNagpur Plateau, flowing through Sonbhadra district in Mirzapur division of Uttar Pradesh. It confluences with the Son River to the north-east of the village of Kota. It has a rocky bed almost throughout its course. A rapid mountain torrent, flowing through forested areas. Sukhdari Falls is 100 feet high. It located near the meeting point of the borders of Chhattisgarh, Jharkhand and Uttar Pradesh. 29. Gopad river – Gopad River, one of the main tributaries of the Son River, emerges from the hills on the north of radial drainage Baghelkhand plateau. 30. Karmanasa River – is a tributary of the Ganges. Flows through the Indian states of Uttar Pradesh and Bihar. Along the boundary between Uttar Pradesh and Bihar on the northern face of Kaimur Range . Its tributaries are the Durgavati, the Chandraprabha. Devdari falls, at an edge of the Rohtas Plateau. Vegetation: Pscnotes.com Page 214 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 By legal status, Reserved Forest constitutes 65.9%, Protected Forest 14.4% and Unclassed Forest 19.7% . There are three forest types, namely Tropical Moist Deciduous, Tropical Dry Deciduous and Tropical Thorn. Sal is an important forest formation of the State. Forests are distributed largely in the northern and partly in the southern parts of the State. The central part is devoid of forest vegetation as it is mainly under agriculture. A forest cover increase was recorded by the Forest Survey of India report of 1999, in the districts of Hardoi, Kheri, Saharanpur, because plantation was under taken 4-5 years earlier and also due to effective protection measures. A decrease in forest cover was observed in the districts of Banda, Jhansi, Mirzapur, and Sonbhadra which was largely on account of biotic pressures. Uttar Pradesh has been categorized into three major eco-zones on the basis of forest and vegetation types. These three zones are:- the Terai region; the Gangetic plains (West and East Uttar Pradesh); the Bundelkhand of Uttar Pradesh including the Vindhya ranges. The terai region of Uttar Pradesh is a very important ecosystem for many threatened species of tall wet grasslands and swamps and is the topmost priority for conservation . It supports many threatened bird species such as the Swamp Francolin Francolinus gularis and Bengal Florican Houbaropsis bengalensis . Earlier, the terai was continuous, but now it occurs in pockets in protected areas of India and Nepal such as the Royal Chitwan National Park (NP), Royal Bardia NP, Royal Parsa Wildlife Reserve and Royal Sukhlaphanta Wildlife Reserve in Nepal, and Karterniaghat Wildlife Sanctuary (WLS), Kishanpur WLS, and Dudwa NP in Uttar Pradesh and Valmiki WLS in Bihar. Reserved Forests (RF) A wasteland, forest area that is the property of government can be constituted as RF under the provision of the Indian Forest Act. Activities leading to damage to the forest are prohibited: clearing of forest; setting up of fire; kindling or carrying fire; causing damage to the trees, felling, girdling, logging, tapping, stripping of barks; quarrying of stones; poisoning of rivers; hunting of animals; trespassing of cattle and; cultivation Protected Forest (PF) The Indian Forest Act empowers the State government to declare any forest or wasteland, which is the property of the government or over which it has proprietary rights including the whole or any part of its forest produce, as PF. No act is prohibited unless notified. Forest and Wildlife Department Uttar Pradesh, conducts departmental tree plantation work during rainy season, to increase the forest and tree cover in the state various schemes are being implemented by the Uttar Pradesh government large scale tree plantation programme is being conducted in the state through social forestry, social forestry in urban areas, green belt development scheme and total forest cover scheme. The task of tree plantation is implemented by Forest and Wildlife Department in coordination with the other government departments. The efforts are being made to ensure ample participation of localities, women, farmers, public representatives and students in tree plantation programmes. The Forest and Wildlife Department and the state government are actively engaged to ensure the success of plantation work and high quality plantation. Pscnotes.com Page 215 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The various varieties of Rosewood, Neem, Cassia, Gulmohar, Jakranda, Cirrus, Kanji, Mango, Chitwan, Banyan, Pipal, Ficus, Mulsri, Bauhinia, Kadamb, Tamarind, Bel and Mahua are being planted in the state as per soil and climatic conditions. The state government is emphasizing on more and more plantation of large and conventional trees. The state government is making sustained efforts towards the establishments on green belt, development of eco tourism and success of plantations to increase the forests and tree cover in the state. In order to uplift living standard of communities living in forest areas and to include them in development and management of forests, the forestry works are being executed by constituting joint village forest management committees and eco development committees. In this way, efforts are being made to economically uplift the people living surrounding the forest areas by engaging them in wildlife protection and in forestry activities. Climate: The climate of Uttar Pradesh (U.P.) is primarily defined as humid subtropical with dry winter (CWa) type with parts of Western U.P. as semi-arid (BS) type. However based on the Köppen climate classification, it can be classified mostly as Humid Subtropical with dry winter type with parts of Eastern U.P. as Semi-Arid (BS) type. U.P. has a climate of extremes. With temperatures fluctuating anywhere from 0 °C to 50 °C in several parts of the state and cyclical droughts and floods due to unpredictable rains, the summers are extremely hot, winters cold and rainy season can be either very wet or very dry. The primary temperature, rainfall and wind features of the three Distinct Seasons of U.P. can be summarized as below: 18 Summer (March–June): Hot & dry (temperatures rise to 45 °C, sometimes 47-48 °C); low relative humidity (20%); dust laden winds. Monsoon (June–September): 85% of average annual rainfall of 990 mm. Fall in temperature 40- 45° on rainy days. Winter (October–February): Cold (temperatures drop to 3-4 °C, sometimes below -1 °C); clear skies; foggy conditions in some tracts. Given significant climatic differences, U.P. has been divided into two meteorological subdivisions – U.P. East and U.P. West. IMD office situated at Airport, Lucknow is nodal for providing all the weather related forecasts & details. Average Rainfall Precipitation in Uttar Pradesh is primarily a summer phenomenon, the Bay of Bengal branch of the Indian Monsoon is the major bearer of rain in most parts of U.P. It is the South-West Monsoon which brings most of the rain here, although rain due to the western disturbances and Pscnotes.com Page 216 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 North-East Monsoon also contribute small quantities towards the overall precipitation of the state. The mean south-west monsoon (June, July, August & September) rainfall (799 mm) contributes 84.4% of annual rainfall (946 mm). Mean monthly rainfall during July (268 mm) is highest and contributes about 28.3% of annual rainfall. The mean rainfall during August is slightly lower and contributes about 26.5% of annual rainfall. June and September rainfall contribute 11.2% and 18.4% of annual rainfall, respectively. Contribution of pre-monsoon (March, April & May) rainfall and postmonsoon (October, November & December) rainfall in annual rainfall is 7.1% and 4.9% respectively. Coefficient of variation is higher during the months of November, December,January and February. Soils Six well defined and distinct soil groups differing from one another in their geological formation and pedogenic characters have been recognized. These are Bhabar soils, Tarai soils, Vindhyan soils, Bundelkhand soils, Aravali soils and Alluvial soils. Each of these soil groups have developed under the combined influence of a wide range of soil forming factors including climate, vegetation and parent materials. The major coverage of alluvial soil in further grouped as saline alkaline- soils, Karail soils and Bhatt soils. Soils in most of the districts of Uttar Pradesh are low in available Nitrogen, forty one districts have low in available Phosphorus status and fourteen districts are medium in available Phosphorus (Bareilly, Moradabad, Bijnor, Farukabad, Faizabad, Bahraich, Gond, Hardoi, Lakhimpur and Sitapur). Available Potassium is low in twenty nine districts. Seventeen percent soils are medium in available Potassium status, and four percent soils high Potassium. Soils of recent alluvium, Ganga plains and uplands, central lowlands, Yamuna uplands and Kanpur districts are rated medium to high in available Sulphur. The available Zinc status in Basti, Deoria, Azamgarh, Ballia, Ghazipur and Jaunpur are low. However, the soils in Ghazipur, Jaunpur, Varanasi, Deoria and Gorakhpur districts rated high in Zinc status. Soils of Bulandshar, Meerut, Muzaffarpur, Hamirpur and Banda districts are highly deficient in available Zinc. Availability of Iron in the soils varied in the following order Hill > Alluvial >Vindhyan > Bundelkhand >Tarai. Soils of Unnao, Hardoi, and Farukhabad are low in available Iron status. Uttar Pradesh: human resources and skill development Pscnotes.com Page 217 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The State has a reasonably large set up of ITIs/polytechnics and degree colleges imparting education and training in vocational areas but the quantity as well as quality of trainings provided by these institutions is a cause of concern. The total availability of seats in these institutions (approximate annual intake of 3.5 to 4 lakh) is to be seen in the perspective that approximately 20 lakh youth drop out of the formal general education streams between class Vth and XIth and a further 8 to 10 lakh drop out after completing class XIIth. Thus, every year 20 to 25 lakh youth are available to join the labour force provided they are appropriately guided and provided facilities exist to equip them with useful and employable skills. This challenge is to be addressed by launching short duration skill development programmes which are employment oriented and which are designed based on the skill needs of the economy. Several departments of the state aim to contribute to this goal through implementation of various central schemes but, as subsequent discussion would disclose, the achievements are far short of the target. Vocational and Professional Education for Skill Development in ITIs/Polytechnics and Degree Institutions Uttar Pradesh has a population of about 20 crore which accounts for one-sixth of India's population. The State has about 1500 ITI and ITCs which have an annual intake of approximately 1,80,000 students. There are about 330 polytechnics, both government and private, which have an annual intake of approx. 97000 students. In addition, there are approx. 700 degree level institutions, mostly in private sector, with an annual intake of approx. 200,000 in technical courses (engineering and management). Thus, the formal vocational education and training infrastructure provides skilling opportunity to 4 to 4.5 youth in the age group of 18 to 23 years. It may however be noted that the average annual graduation from ITIs, Polytechnics and Degree sectors has been less than 3.0 lakh per year as the capacity of the private institutions has not been fully utilised and as significant capacity in private ITIs and Polytechnics has been added in last 2 years where first batches are yet to graduate. The key issues that need to be addressed in regard to the formal vocational and training sector are: Capacity Utilization of private sector ITIs, Polytechnics and degree colleges has been less than 60% in recent years. This is due to several reasons. First, many of these institutions have been set up recently, so it will take some time for them to get established. Second, the quality of instruction in many private institutions is not satisfactory. Third, the employment scenario in recent years has become bleak. This has seriously impacted the admissions and large number of institutions offering MBA / PGDM and MCA degrees have shut down. Pscnotes.com Page 218 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The Existing capacity demands attention to the quality of trainings given and the kind of employability they can lead to. It is estimated that less than 30% of the graduates from ITIs and Polytechnics are able to get gainful employment after completion of course. It therefore becomes essential that quality issues in terms of curriculum and course structure, infrastructure, teachers and employability prospects be addressed. Over a period of time, capacity of the vocational sector institutions needs to be increased to address the skewness and also to provide adequate access to the youngsters. For example, the availability of seats per lakh population in ITIs and ITCs is only 74 as compared to the national average of 110. The same situation pertains to the diploma sector. Skill Trainings under the Apprenticeship Training Act There are about 20,000 seats available for Apprenticeships in U.P. The Government aims to ensure that the capacity is used to the optimum. There is potential to increase this capacity by engaging with all big industries, factories and company offices in the state. The quality of these trainings shall be a priority and a system shall be put in place to avoid all discrepancies in admissions. Performance under the Skill Development Initiative (SDI) Scheme in Uttar Pradesh In pursuance of the directions given by the Government of India, Skill Development Mission was launched in October 2008 in the state with Principal Secretary, Vocational Education as Mission Director and Secretaries of Rural Development, Finance, Small Industries etc as members of the Mission Executive body. A task force was also constituted under the chairmanship of the Chief Secretary for brining in convergence amongst the skill development programmes being run by various departments and for monitoring of these programmes. It was around this time that Skill Development Initiative (SDI) scheme was launched by Directorate General of Training and Employment (DGET), GOI where skill development programmes (more than 1400 programmes notified as Modular Employability Skills (MES) course, each of a duration ranging between 200 to 450 hrs) were to be conducted by public and private institutions registered as Vocational Training Providers (VTPs). These VTPs were registered by DGET in collaboration with the state government and were to be reimbursed at the rate of Rs 15 per hour of training per trainee. Implementation of the SDI scheme was approved by the state cabinet, which also decided that the infrastructure available with state government departments be made available to VTPs for running these courses. More than 1600 VTPs were registered in the state which reportedly trained approximately 240,000 persons over next two years. However, all these VTPs were derecognized by GOI on complaints of fraud and matter relating to payments claimed by more than 450 VTPs amounting to approx. Rs 100 crore is still being resolved. GOI launched the revamped SDI scheme in August 2010, with the same operational features but with the difference that responsibility for registration of VTPs and payments were devolved to State level Skill development societies. However, the scheme is yet to take off. Although a skill development society was constituted in March 2011 and advertisement was issued for registration of new VTPs in end 2011, so far only 157 VTPs have been registered with only 17 of these being private institutions. As of now only 1500 youth are undergoing training and most of the recently registered VTPs are yet to become fully functional. Some of the main reasons that Pscnotes.com Page 219 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 seem to have contributed to this state of affairs are (a) the disillusionment of private sector providers with the scheme due to pending payment issues (b) absence of a dedicated organization for implementation of the scheme as no staff. for sanctioned for the society for managing the scheme (c) lack of leadership provided to ITIs who are as it is facing a severe shortage of trainers and (d) lack of district organization for mobilization of youth and for monitoring of the scheme. kill Development Trainings by various departments under Central Schemes As discussed earlier, the skill development is also encouraged through schemes and funds made available by several central government ministries and departments. Many of these schemes are being implemented in the state but achievements are not very satisfactory as disclosed by the following details: Urban Department: The Swarna Jayanti Shahari Rozgar Yojana (SJSRY) is being implemented through this department. For the year 2012-13 about 11,700 have been trained out of a total target of 1,25,000 under the Skills Training for Employment Promotion amongst the Urban Poor (STEP-UP) component. The scheme prescribes average cost of per training as Rs 10,000 per capita. About Rs.63 crores are earmarked for the STEP-UP component under SJSRY every year. Rural Department: The Swarnajayanti Gram Swarozgar Yojana (SGSY) is soon to be replaced by National Rural Livelihoods Mission (NRLM). At present, the placement linked skill training under NRLM is being implemented directly by the Central government on the basis of the projects submitted by state government. So far 61 projects have been sanctioned and the department is preparing to get 17 more projects approved. These 15 | P a g e projects are not uniformly dispersed across districts and so far placement linked training, 85,562 rural BPL youth have been trained in 2 years against a target of 120,715. Vocational and Technical Education Skill Development Initiative Scheme-Modular Employable Skills (SDI-MES) currently has about 157 VTPs registered. About 1,500 students have been trained under this scheme in the last year. The State has an allocation of ~ Rs. 100 crores under this scheme. There is a need to increase the number of VTPs registered to optimally utilize the funds available under this scheme. The Department of Technical Education runs the Community Development through Polytechnics scheme under which 27,000 students were trained. It currently has a capacity to train about 36,000 students. Government Schemes of UP Kushtavstha disabled maintenance grant scheme Chief Minister, Uttar Pradesh made an announcement as to start Disability (Due to) Leprosy Nutrition Grant Scheme for the first time in India with its for the nourishment of Leprosy Disabled people. Pscnotes.com Page 220 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Besides ongoing Handicap Nourishment Grant Scheme, decision of granting funds to the people here suffering due to the disability attributed to leprosy has also been taken, by Handicapped Welfare Department. Features of the Scheme are as following:- The Scheme benefits those, here suffering due to the disability attributed to leprosy (whatever is the percentage of disability) and who is also the holder of Handicap Certificate which has been issued by the Chief Medical Officer of concerned district of Uttar Pradesh. PWDs (attributable to leprosy) & citizen of Uttar Pradesh too. People who are receiving sums under the Old age pension, destitute women pension and other pension schemes will not be entitled to this pension/grant. For above pension/grant B.P.L. ceiling is applicable. No age limit. Amount of grant for beneficiaries is Rs.2500/- government may amen the amount from time to time. Payment of grants will be transferred to beneficiaries‘ account through e-payment mode. In the FY 2015-16, the is provision of Rs.15 crore has been made in the budget. Application, will be presented in prescribed format at Tehsil office in urban areas and at Gram Panchayat in rural areas. Under this scheme, grant will be approved by Sub-District Magistrate (SDM) for urban areas and concerned Gram panchayat will approve grant for rural areas. For payment of pension, approved application will be forwarded to District Handicapped Welfare Department Officer, through Block Development Officer (BDO) by Gram Panchayat. If name of any eligible PWD is not proposed by Gram Panchayat for grant, then after delay of one month, BDO can conduct investigation and can approve to grant the beneficiary. In his respective district, District Divyang sashaktikaran officer will receive application in his office and will make list of it, and will implement first-come-first –serve policy. Incomplete application received for this scheme WILL NOT BE REJECTED, instead documents/certificates are not attached with application, will be made complete by the District Divyang sashaktikaran officer office. Grant amount of new applicant, will be paid as per the availability of budget. Artificial Limbs/Assistive Equipments Scheme Objective and Purpose The main objective of this scheme is to provide financial grant to person with disabilities (whose annual income is not more than the decided BPL limit i.e., Rs.46080/- for rural areas and Rs.56460/- for urban areas and this income is eligible for per family on annual basis or as per the amendments made by the Uttar Pradesh Government) for the purchase of artificial organs and assistance equipment etc. Rate of Grant Pscnotes.com Page 221 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Under this scheme, for the purchase of artificial organs and assistance equipment for person with disabilities maximum amount of financial grant will be Rs.8000/- or the grant as decided by or amended by the Uttar Pradesh Government. Eligibility and Conditions Any person with disability of any age who should also be the resident of Uttar Pradesh. Such person with disability, whose minimum disability is 40% and should be certified by Authorized Authority of State Government. In the state of mental retardation, the state of the blocked or incomplete development of the chit which is specially characterized by abnormalities of growth, which has been certified by the authorized officer. Recommended for the artificial limbs / accessories required for Person with disabilities by the Medical Officer. Such person with disabilities who are not benefited by the Indian Government/State Government/Local Bodies in last three years for equipment. However, for the regular students of any educational institution this limit will be for one year. Income Persons with Disabilities who come under poverty line (Rs.46080/- in rural areas and Rs.56460/- in urban areas, this income is eligible per family annually) will be eligible for the grant or as per the guidelines of Uttar Pradesh government. To receive grant, income certificate issued by Hon'ble Member of Parliament, Hon'ble MLA, Mayor, Parshad, Nagar Panchayat Chairman, Jila Panchayat Chairman, First category Magistrate of district, Tehsildar, BDO and Gram Pradhan will be eligible. Details of Equipment Under the scheme, as per the disability, artificial organ/assistance equipment will be provided to the Persons with Disability:- Mobility Assistance Equipment like:- Tricycle, Wheelchair, C.P. Chair, Cratches, Walking Steek and Walking Frame/Rolletars. Students who are visually impaired will be provided with educational equipment like mathematical frame, abacus, geometry kits and braille educational kits. Blind stick for visually impaired persons. For hearing impaired persons, different types of hearing-aided equipment and education kit. M.S.I.D. kit (Multi-Sensory Education Development Kit) for children and students with mental disabilities. Daily activity kits (A.D.L. Kit) to people suffering from leprosy. In case of multi-disability or person with disabilities who need more than one assistance/aid equipment, they will be provided with maximum Rs.8000/- financial grant. Procedure of grant and restrictions Pscnotes.com Page 222 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Prescribed application-form will have to be submitted to concern District PWD Empowerment Officer, Office. District PWD Empowerment Officer will provide approval of financial grant to applicants as per the amount available, on 'First Come and First Serve Basis' by categorising applications received. Under this scheme, if any application is cancelled, then list of such applicants will be kept secured with the clear reason of cancellation. For the effective implementation of this manual, important guidelines will be released by the Director, PWD Empowerment Department. Under this scheme, decision of government over any controversial subject will be the last and will be applicable to all. How to apply Persons with disabilities, can apply through Jan Suvidha Kendra/Lokvani and Public District PWD Empowerment Officer Office and can receive the updated status of E-application. Procedure of Equipment Distribution Aid Equipment will be distributed to beneficiaries through districts camp on basis of first come first take. Marriage Promotion Award Scheme: Eligibility and Conditions 40% or more disability (Certificate issued by Chief Medical Officer, doctors of Community Health Centre/Primary Health Centre). All persons with disability, who are resident of Uttar Pradesh of any category. Such persons with disabilities whose age is 18 years or more, but less than 60 years. Collection of loan given on the basis of disability, will be done after three month of payment as Rs.500/- quarterly instalment, which will be divided into 30 equal instalments. Person with disabilities, who are not convicted or punished in any criminal or financial issues and whose no government amount is pending for payment. Person with disability should have its own 110 ft. of land for the construction of shop or is capable of purchasing his own land. Lease of Tenancy for 05 years should be done by the person with disability for the operation of shop. Selection of site for shop construction/purchase/rent Urban Area: Such areas where business or trade can grow. Pscnotes.com Page 223 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Rural Area: Such areas where commute system is easy and where business or trade can grow. Income: Person with disability, whose annual income should not be double of the income decided by the government for the below poverty line. Rate: For the construction of shop Rs.20,000/- is granted and for operation of shop/khokha/gumti/thela Rs.10,000 will be granted. Out of Rs.20,000/-, Rs.15,000/- will be provided on normal interest rate of 4% and Rs.5,000/- will be given in the form of grant. In same way out of Rs.10,000/-, Rs.7,500/- will be provided on normal interest rate of 4% and Rs.2,500/- will be given in the form of grant. Under this scheme, person with disabilities can apply online through Jan Suvidha Kendra/Lokvani and can also receive updated status of E-application. Procedure of Payment: Application form will be accepted on first come first serve basis and payment will be done through E-payment in respected bank accounts. Collection of loan Approved original loan for the construction of shop will be collected after the one year of full payment of loan as quarterly instalment of Rs.500/- and 30 equal instalment will be made. For the purchase of shop, collection of approved loan will be done after the three months of full payment of loan as quarterly instalment of Rs.500/- and 30 equal instalment will be made. For the purchase of khokha/gumti/thela loan approved will be collected, after the three months of payment, on the rate of Rs.250/- quarterly and 30 equal instalments will be made. After the collection of loan taken for construction of shop/purchase of khokha/gumti/thela, rate of interest will be collected. This collection will be done in 24 equal monthly instalments. Beneficiary can also pay the complete amount of interest at once. Corrective Surgery treatment grant for PWDs Benefit from Scheme: 1. To lessen the disabilities of various kind, required corrective surgery is done, so that the PWDs could also live like normal people. 2. For payment of surgery treatment, maximum Rs.8,000/- per person per year will be granted, for which money will be granted to the beneficiary from concerned government hospital. Criteria to get benefited from scheme: 1. PWDs income or their parents income is not more than Rs.6,000/- p.a. 2. Should be the citizen of India. Pscnotes.com Page 224 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 3. Should be the permanent citizen Uttar Pradesh or should be the domicile of Uttar Pradesh for minimum 5 years. 4. Should not be the culprit of any criminal case. Free bus transportation for PWDs by Uttar Pradesh State Road Transport Corporation (UPSRTC): Traveling facility will be given to Uttar Pradesh buses of Road Transport Corporation for a different purpose except from the beggary. While starting the journey, person with disability can show his/her certificate of disability to authorised employee/officer of Transport Corporation which is being issued by Chief Medical Officer and can start his/her journey. Uttar Pradesh State Road Transport Corporation Lucknow will provide important certificates in each financial year to Uttar Pradesh State Road Transport Corporation in which details like, how much person with disabilities have taken the benefit of travelling free in each quarter, along with permissible amount given for a demand letter through Director, PWD Empowerment will be included. State Level Awards for Empowerment of Persons with Disabilities: Every year on occasion of ‗World Persons with Disabilities Day‘ on 3rd December efficient persons with disabilities/ self-employed persons with disabilities, employers of persons with disabilities, excellent placement officers, people working in interest of disabled persons and individuals/ organizations who are excellently working for the welfare persons with disabilities are honoured with State Level Awards Benefit from Scheme 1. Persons with disabilities who work excellently despite of their disability, self-employed persons with disabilities, employers who employed persons with disabilities, Assistant Placement Officer who has provided employment to persons with disabilities and voluntary organizations that have worked excellently in the field of disability are awarded to achieve new dimensions in the implementation / work area and mobility of the schemes. 2. One shield, certificate and an amount of Rs. 25000/- cash is given as award. Operation of Braille Press To facilitate reading-writing of visually impaired students of the state, a Press is being operated for publishing the books in Braille. This Braille Press is established in students Hostel located at Nishatganj, Lucknow for visually impaired students studying in higher education. In this Braille Press, work of publishing books in Braille is carried out in different subjects to facilitate reading and writing of students studying in Blind Schools operated by the department. Darpan: Pscnotes.com Page 225 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 DARPAN is comprehensive,generic and configurable multilingual Dashboard product for Member of Parliaments,Chief Ministers,Governors,Chief Secretaries,Divisional Commissioners and DMs/DCs across Districts & States.It facilitates presentation of real time data on Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) of selected schemes/projects to the senior functionaries of the State Government as well as District Administration which can be used for planning, evaluation and monitoring. It enhances analysis through data collection by consolidating multiple data sources into one centralized, easy-to-access platform. Identifying trends in data to gain enhanced perspectives of the projects, the dashboard allows users to personalize their view to prioritize the information they require. Darpan is initiative of NIC,UP to efficiently display department information which needs to achieve one or more objectives,consolidated and arranged in a single frame so that information can be monitored effectively by Honb‘le Chief Minister at a glance. To support dynamic real time monitoring of project,Web services are consumed at regular interval to display state specific data at various micro and macro levels. Regular data updation is done at predefined frequency through APIs.Darpan is designed and developed to address wide range of objectives and monitoring the strategy of government of U.P. which can check department activities in order to achieve service level targets. Farmers Loan Waver Scheme GoUP is committed to redeem crop loans up to rupees 1 lakh of individual small and marginal farmers, whose crop loans were disbursed by lending institutions on or before 31 March 2016. This redemption would be done after adjusting the repayments/credits received from the farmer during Financial Year (FY) 2016-17. Criteria for the scheme: The farmer taking the loan, bank branch (through which the loan has been granted) and the farmer‘s owned land, all shall be in the state of Uttar Pradesh. The total area of all the lands owned by the Small farmer would not exceed 2 hectares and by the marginal farmers would not exceed 1 hectare. The farmer whose crop loans were restructured due to occurrence of natural calamities in accordance with the guidelines of the Reserve Bank of India (RBI) will be covered under this scheme. Crop loans taken by farmers for cultivation on government-leased land, as per the Revenue Records of government. Features: Farmers come out from the trap of money lenders. They do not fall back into the debt trap and get a fresh start. Farmers stop to move out from villages to cities for earning and repaying the loan amount. They are physically and mentally available for development of the villages. Farmers are motivated to trust in agricultural sector which engages them in crop production in nation interest. Pscnotes.com Page 226 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Farmers can grow crops in crop season on time, it makes them financially stable. This scheme protects them from alcohol, gambling and violence due to the mental instability arises because of the crop failure. It creates peaceful, constructive and positive environment in the villages which is required for the sustained growth and development of the villages. Grievance disposal mechanism is very helpful for the farmers which provide platform of disposals in quick, transparent and efficient manner. Farmers do not need to waste their time, money and energy by approaching government offices. They use their energy in crop production with full of enthusiasm. Development of farmers steer the development of the villages which gives opportunity to the farmers to be part of the sustained growth of villages in constructive manner. e-Pariksha: PARIKSHA is a complete solution for the paperless recruitment of suitable candidates against the vacant posts published by various recruitment agencies (State Public Service Commission / State Selection Boards/ Government Organizations or Departments/ PSUs/ Universities etc…). It enables the candidates to carry out the entire process digitally since from the online form submission to its final selection under the paperless environment and also facilitates the recruitment agencies to conduct the complete recruitment process as laid down by Government to fulfill the vacant posts laying in the various Government Departments/ Institutions/ Organizations through different modes (Direct/ Screening Test/ Examination). PARIKSHA was designed, developed and published as product under ―Implementation of National e-Gov AppStore‖ which has been rolled out in various recruitment agencies of Uttar Pradesh and in other states viz. Bihar. Candidates from all states apply against different vacancies through PARIKSHA so it has the coverage from entire India. Commissions/Selection Boards/ Universities etc. of Uttar Pradesh has implemented the PARIKSHA product for conducting various kinds of recruitment. The Applicants can download PARIKSHA Mobile App to know the information about the Govt. vacancies in the state and can accomplish the complete process since from application form submission to final recruitment. PARIKSHA Mobile application is available for download from Google Play Store, eGov Mobile Apps Store and PARIKSHA web portal. PARIKSHA Project is nominated and published on eGovApp Store by Meity and win ―SKOCH Smart Technology Award 2015‖. Nivesh Mitra: ―NIVESH MITRA" is a dedicated Single Window System of Govt. of Uttar Pradesh to collaborate in the holistic development of industry friendly environment through progressive regulatory processes, efficient system and effective measurable timelines. The main objective of the system is to enable ‗ease of doing business in Uttar Pradesh‘ through facilitating the entrepreneurs with the electronic based transparent system for online submission and tracking of applications including online fee payment. Pscnotes.com Page 227 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Entrepreneurs setting up small, medium & large scale industry have to file application forms mandatorily through this system. Nivesh Mitra provides the facility of online submission and updating of all forms required for various approvals by the entrepreneurs. Entrepreneurs can make payments towards processing fee of applications online through Internet Banking, Rajkosh and other online payment option. Features ―NIVESH MITRA‖ is an entrepreneur friendly application to enhance ease of doing business in U.P. Transparent, unified, one-stop solution for investor on-boarding & time bound delivery of services. Online access, document submission & processing of application forms for setting up of industries/enterprises. Provision of Common Application Form (CAF) for applying to pre-establishment and pre-operation clearances/approvals. Details filled by entrepreneur in CAF being auto populated in clearance specific application form. Online payment of processing of application fees. Provision to download final approved digitally signed NOC in pdf format. The ‗Know your Approvals‘ feature to assist investors in understanding the approvals required. Seamless integration with department concerned. Saves time and effort as repeated visits to different departments not required. Reduced timelines for clearances/approvals. Automatic SMS and e-mail response to entrepreneur generated at each stage. Online monitoring of applications can be done by entrepreneur, department concerned & DIC at District level, Divisional level and State level. Grievance redressal/Online feedback submission on draft government policies. e-Sathi (Janhit Guarantee Act): eDistrict of U.P. Government intends to provide Government services to citizens through Citizen Service Centers(CSC) for minimizing effort and time to provide prompt and effective services to public. Services from different departments are brought under one umbrella at one place. This project has been implemented in all the 75 districts of U.P. State. Some of the services are also made available through online portal. It utilizes backend computerization to enable the delivery of services and ensures transparency for effective and efficient delivery of services. The entire online application is developed and being technically coordinated by U.P. state Centre of NIC. The certificates issued through eDistrict are also integrated with Digital Locker, a pioneer scheme of Government of India. The Departments which have their own portal and already having mechanism for processing of citizen services may be connected to eDistrict Integrated Services on the fly. Till now 236 Pscnotes.com Page 228 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 services of 38 Departments are integrated with eDistrict Integrated Services portal. Some of the main services delivered under eDistrict Integrated Services are Application for New Ration Card, Employment Registration, seed Booking etc. The eDistrict Services and eDistrict Integrated Services are continuously providing citizen services to the citizens. The eDistrict Integrated Services have enhanced the capability of eDistrit Portal through many folds. Till now eDistrict Portal and eDistrict Integrated Services together have delivered more than 14 crore services to citizens. The Government of UP has authorized 10 District Service Providers (DSP) for delivery of these services throughout 75 district of UP. These DSPs have opened more than 73,000 CSC centers across the U.P. State with target of at least one center per Gram Panchayat in rural area. The DSPs are maintaining their pre-paid wallet at Center of e-Governance, U.P. and its complete accounting is maintained at edistrict portal. The DSPs recharge their wallet in online payment mode. Features: Citizen can avail the online services of UP Government from their nearest CSC through OR Using the Citizen Services Online Portal In which citizen can apply for online services of and may download Digitally Signed Certificate directly to their registered accounts. The Certificate Issued through eDistrict are also available in Digital Locker. Application Status Tracking and Verification of issued certificates are available On-line. SMS Gateway and Payment Gateway is also integrated. Financial management and Quota Module is available for User Charges collection and distribution. AAPURTI: ‗AAPURTI‘ - The web portal of Food & Civil Supplies Department, UP (http://fcs.up.nic.in) has been designed as per Guidelines for Indian Government Websites (GIGW). The web portal is bilingual (Hindi & English) and responsive. for compatibility with Smart Phones and Tablets. List of all NFSA beneficiaries and advanced search facility is available on the web portal. It provides all information related to the Food & Civil Supplies Department like about the department, contact details of department officers, Government Orders and notifications etc. , various information related to PDS like district-wise allocation report (drill down upto the Fair Price Shop level), list of godowns, link for downloading e-Challan etc. Toll free no for complaint registration, link for online complaint registration and complaint status is available on the web portal. Features Automation of Ration distribution has been done in 12,556 FPS through Aadhaar based biometric authentication using PoS devices. Pscnotes.com Page 229 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Beneficiary reaches the FPS and provides ration card ID to FPS dealer. FPS dealer selects member name and transaction is initiated using Ration Card member ID and biometric data as input. After successful authentication, entry of commodity wise quantity is done and Ration is delivered. PoS transactions are updated to State PDS Server on day end. In May, 2018 60,157.698 MT wheat and 40,581.260 MT Rice has been distributed to 41,00,586 Ration Card holders. E-Nagar Sewa: Uttar Pradesh has developed a responsive, scalable, adaptive and easy to use e-Governance Application for urban citizen for various activities of Urban Governance named as eNagarSewa. A citizen can register on the application, eNagarSewa and can avail various online services. The application is implemented in two states namely Uttar Pradesh and Andaman & Nicobar Islands. In UP, it is covering 60 Amrut towns which will cover 16 Municipal Corporations and 44 Municipal Councils. In Andaman & Nicobar Islands, it is covering one Municipal Council namely Port Blair Municipal Council. The application has 20 Modules which are implemented in various Urban Local Bodies which are fully configurable and adaptive. The eNagarSewa has services for ULB counters and Online services to the citizens. NIC UP is also selected as Nodal Department to provide services to ULB under Amrut & Smart City project of Government of India & implemented by Government of Uttar Pradesh. The eNagarSewa is developed in such a way that it provides stable, reliable and scalable application. To have seamless e governance services to the citizens, it is essential to have a better delivery mechanism, better information management and ensuring citizen participation in governance. eNagarSewa intends to introduce automation and implementation of integrated framework for e-Governance by leveraging ICT with an aim to streamline, improved, and strengthen functioning of Local Governments and service delivery to citizens. Features E-NagarSewa is a product which is scalable for entire country. Presently serving 61 Urban Local Bodies ( 60 in UP and 1 in AND(Port Blair) Integrated with three payment gateways for Payments of taxes, Property Mutation, Water/Sewerage Connection and Trade Licences. Focused on providing ―Ease of doing business‖ services to citizens (Online & Counter Services). Digital Payment Initiative – Ready for Bharat QR Code in all Citizen Utility and Commercial Services Payments( includes house tax/water tax/Sewerage tax bills) All modules in eNagarSewa adhere to complete electronic workflow promoting paperless office. All certificates are made available free of cost digitally signed at the portal. 1860 hospitals are integrated with eNagarSewa wich in turn facilitates easy access of provisional Birth/Death certificate. SMS Services are used to inform the citizens for activity on their application registered with ULB. Pscnotes.com Page 230 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Facilitation of configuring services at ULB level as well as State level. Mobile App at Google Play Store for – Tracking applications by Citizens Mobile App at Google Play Store for – Monitor Services through e-NagarSewa by Administration Facilitation of Various MIS reports for Decision Support System and Executive Support System Jan SunWai Samadhan: During the course of public-government interface, or interaction, the citizen may feel wronged— whether real or supposed. This forms valid grounds of complaint. Also to promote participative Democracy, capturing demands and suggestions from citizens is important. In Uttar Pradesh initially initiatives to redress grievances were isolated initiatives at different levels like CM Office, District, Tehsils and State Government Departments, running on different platforms and had no interlinking. Some good work like PG portal was started at Central Government level, while Madhya Pradesh also took lead through its CM Helpline Call centre. Rajasthan, Orissa, etc have also started their own online systems for grievance redressal. But no notable work has been done in recent past. Also nowhere we found a comprehensive System which could bring all redressal services of the state onto a single platform and also which has complete e-flow from top level to lowest level with full transparency. The state-of-the-art IGRS is low cost and low maintenance project and is designed, developed and maintained in-house by NIC. This portal is completely online and it allows electronic flow of references and ATRs from top to bottom. CM office, government departments, directorates, commissionaires, DM/SSP offices, Nagar Nigam, Development authorities, Universities, Divisions, District level officers, Tehsil, Block, Thana and other lower level offices have been integrated in the new system. Portal is a simple, user friendly, citizen centric application that enables citizens to file reference i.e. complaints/ Demands/ Suggestions online as well as from their mobile and get disposal from concerned department with ease and avoids any physical points. After successful registration each reference will be provided a unique Reference number and get automatically forwarded to the concerned officer for redressal. Concerned department officers use their credentials to upload ATR‘s against grievance. Citizen can use reference number to track progress of grievances, send reminder & also for giving feedback after disposal. Monitoring officers can evaluate disposal using app. This integration helped in strengthening of already existing grievance redressal forums and also provided new avenues (online route) to applicant for sending their applications. Features: Complete e-Flow – completely electronic flow of references and ATRs from top to bottom Online lodging of grievances, reminder, view status and action taken reports. Online forwarding of Grievances to multiple sub-ordinate offices/Departments. Forwarding of Reminders/Clarifications for the older grievances crossing SLA timelines. Pscnotes.com Page 231 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 This system will have flexibility to expand at multiple levels as per the requirement of the concerned Department, District /Tehsil administration for desired depth and accurate redressal of grievances. System generated reminders will enable the senior authorities to comply on grievances received with minimum effort and strict action against non-compliances by the concerned officials. Support for UNICODE compliant languages. As a citizen if anyone wanted to share any suggestion, higher authorities will able to keep a count of the number of suggestions received in a particular department and response of the concerned department against those suggestions. This will streamline the entire process of interactive governance.The suggestions or demand (wish list) received through this app coming directly from citizens/public representatives will helpful to the Chief Minister/Ministers/MP/MLA/Grampradhan etc. and Principal Secretary / Commissioner/DMs/ District level Officers to formulate the plan and fund allocation for different schemes. Monthly performance Reports with Ranking of officers for healthy competition Feedback mechanism- Revival of complaint if feedback is negative. 1000 seats 24*7 CM Helpline Call Center (Toll Free No. 1076) has been established with both Inbound Process i.e. Registering Complaints from Citizens on calls /Addressing queries and Outbound Process i.e. Taking feedback from citizens on disposed complaints. GIS based as well as Query based statistical Dashboard will help in generating analytical reports as per the requirement of the concerned Department/District for effective monitoring and analysis of pending grievances and resolution provided. Citizen can file applications as well as track status online from his home, internet cafe or Kiosks established in Districts across state. Bhulekh: To provide transparency and reliability in managing land spaces of state, the Uttar Pradesh State Government has adopted technology for smooth processing of matters related to land records with full transparency. The Digital Land Management System deployed using technology and workflow comprises of several digital initiatives that include Computerisation of Land Records/RoR (Bhulekh) Computerisation of Revenue Court Cases (RCCMS) Features: All RoRs have been digitised and can be viewed online Digitally signed copy of RoR may be obtained from Tehsil/ CSC on payment of nominal fee. Unique identity/number for each Revenue plot Aadhaar seeding and share-holding in RoR Pscnotes.com Page 232 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Online applications for Mutation and other permissions PRERNA: PRERNA (PRoperty Evaluation & RegistratioN Application) is specially designed to reorient the Stamps & Registration Department towards 100% automation in the registration process and speedy delivery of registered documents to the citizens of Uttar Pradesh. The Purpose of ―PRERNA‖ is to computerize the registration process in the state of Uttar Pradesh, in such a manner that the day-to-day activities of property registration can be streamlined. It is designed to eliminate the maladies affecting the conventional registration system by introducing electronic delivery of all registration services. ―Stamps & Registration Department is one of the important Departments and provides the second largest amount of revenue to the state. Citizens are directly connected with its services; hence adoption of modern, online and advanced techniques has not only upgraded the quality of service but also improved the image of the state. The main functions performed at Sub Registrar Offices (SROs) are follows: - Valuation of immovable Properties. Registration of documents. Collection of Stamp Duty, Transfer Duty, Registration Fee, etc. Preservation of registered documents. Issuing certified copies of documents. Issuing encumbrance certificates etc. Hindu Marriage Registration now Marriage Registration Features: Online filing of Registration Application On Line generation of deeds On Line capturing of photographs & Thumb Impression Market Value Assistance Computation of stamp duty, registration fee/fines etc. Endorsement & Printing of photograph & Thumb Impression Generation of Encumbrance Certificate Scanning of registered document Electronic recording of scanned document On Line Search on registered deeds. Monitoring of revenue Web service to integrate department specific application e-Pension: Pscnotes.com Page 233 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 e-Pension System is the process by which the physical pension approval process activity is carried out using internet and other associated technologies in a faster, and secure environment using adopting industry standard open technologies in state of Uttar Pradesh. The e-Pension system covers group A, B and C level government official (except- IAS, IPS, Police & Secretariat services) of state, whose salaries are being drawn through IPO system. Highlights Rolled out in 75 districts covering 12 Lakhs employees. Reduced pension approval life cycle and transparency in approval process. SMS and E-mail alert to pensioner on each stage of approval. Electronic movement of pensioner file using DSC. Reduction in transactional cost. Online sending of digitally signed authorities to disbursing agencies for payment. Pensioner can track status of his/her case on website. Pensioner can download pensioner half through portal. Features e-Pension System is means of standardizing and monitoring of pension approval process. It facilitates the control and reduction of discretion. In re-engineering, processes have been re- examined with the intention of : Simplifying processes – for example entry of pensioner‘s data through newly designed e- Pension Proforma. Abolishing out-dated practices- Paradigm shift from manual system to online system i.e. submission of Pensioners‘ information, verification and calculation of pensioners‘ information and posting of pensioners‘ authorities has be made online. SMS and e-mail notification to stakeholders and pensioners at each stage of approval or objection. Tracking of File movement – The pensioner information (file) moves electronically at each stage of pension approval process. System maintains audit trail information. Administrators can keep track of each record on real time basis. Auto Generation of Authorities- Auto calculation & generation of digitally signed authorities (PPO, GPO, and CPO) after successful online verification/scrutiny by approvers adhering to the rules and procedures. Service Delivery- The posting digitally signed authorities electronically to disbursing agency and pensioners‘ thus causing saving in exchequer. Reduction in Pension Approval Time- e-Pension System has brought drastic reduction in pension approval and disbursement to pensioner bank account. Consistency & Uniformity in Process- System ensures uniformity and consistency in business rules across state. Secure Transaction- System provides secure & efficient document transmission. Centralized Data base- System maintains centralized database of all pensioners who have been retired and who are going to be retired in coming months (DDO wise, District-wise , Division-wise and State-wise) Pscnotes.com Page 234 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Performance Monitoring- System maintains performance monitoring at various levels of management on real-time basis which was absent in manual system. Zeroing Fake Pensioner- The system has zeroed the possibility of creation of fake pensioner by integration with IPO system. UPHAAR (Home Gaurds): ‗UPHAAR‘ – UP Home Guard Automation And Rotation System is a web based deployment system. The objective of UPHAAR is to radically improve fair deployment of homeguards and automate the complete workflow and internal processes. Features Around 1.0 lakh home guards are deployed monthly. So far 31 lakh deployed across 9600 duty place in 75 districts through-UPHAAR. Monthly Bilingual (Unicode) SMS-Alert are sent to deployed Homeguards containing Duty Place and Duty Duration information well in advance. Mahila Samman Kosh: As a step towards women empowerment, Rani Laxmi Bai Mahila Samman Kosh is an ambitious scheme of GoUP for ensuring monitory and medical relief to the women and girls who are victims of heinous crimes, and therefore require immediate relief to facilitate them in regard of their treatment and to promote their economic self-reliance. GoUP in technical collaboration with NIC UP has developed an ICT solution by integrating Administration, Health, Women welfare, treasury & Police departments for the execution of this Scheme. The portal http://msk.upsdc.gov.in developed by NIC UP team fetches every FIR filed state wide under defined sections of heinous crimes like Dowry Death, grievous hurt by Acid Attack, Rape, POCSO or Sexual Assault from police state data server and put it under the credentials of nodal police officer of concerned district. Through DSC nodal police officer verify the FIR along with arrangement of medico legal, at this stage case became visible under the credentials of nodal medical officer and Administration of the district. The medical officer is responsible to perform medico legal along with uploading it on portal with DSC, while administration gives his consent electronically for the claim through portal. Pscnotes.com Page 235 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Finally Financial Management Unit (FMU) at state level does payment directly into the account of the victim through portal since portal is also integrated with PFMS and e-Treasury. Main beauty of this solution is that victim need not to file the claim for relief since it automatically originates with the FIR. Features: This system provides a common platform which facilitates data sharing amongst all of stakeholders. A total relief of Rs. 130 Crore is given to 3410 victims or children of deceased victims across state, which includes 1031 Dowry Deaths, 93 Acid Attacks, 529 rapes under different sections and 1760 cases under POCSO & other Sexual Assault sections. Single point Drawing Disbursing (FMU) established to maintain online contributions & payments instead of multiple at district level. Officers are bound to perform duties well in time since laxity can be seen and responsibility can be fixed from highest level. A total of Rs. 34 Lakh online donations have been received as charity from the individual donors. E-Madarsa: E-Madarsa Portal was designed by the NIC UP State Unit Lucknow for providing an ICT tools to the GoUP for effective monitoring and control of Madarsa educational system. Right from year 1953, Uttar Pradesh Madarsa Board is functional but even up to 2018 state wide forged or unrecognized Madarsa and unorganized/ untraceable record at Board level were main reasons for defective and uncontrolled Madarsa education system. E-Madarsa Portal was designed by the NIC UP State Unit Lucknow for providing an ICT tools to the GoUP for effective monitoring and control of Madarsa educational system. Right from year 1953, Uttar Pradesh Madarsa Board is functional but even up to 2018 state wide forged or unrecognized Madarsa and unorganized/ untraceable record at Board level were main reasons for defective and uncontrolled Madarsa education system. To maintain comprehensive MIS of all Madarsa, online registration for every Madarsa was made mandatory with uploading of all relevant documents. It is the responsibility of departmental district Level officer to digitally authenticate and accept or reject the claim against every registration after checking the Madarsa recognition documents uploaded along with physical verification of building, HR, Infra and facilities. At state level Registrar, Madarsa Board also digitally sign against every accepted Madarsa on the portal, So that facilities, funds and educators can be provided by Government only to these recognized and valid Madarsa. This methodology has wiped off all fraudulent, fake and unrecognized Madarsa from the system. Pscnotes.com Page 236 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Features: E-Madarsa portal got 20,547 registrations for Madarsa out of which 13,320 were found valid in a transparent manner. Now facilities from Government can be claimed only by these Madarsa, It facilitated Government in achieving the goals of this educational system. Online controlling of admission and examination has also added a land mark achievement by eliminating fake students, a total of 2,95,836 students registered for examination in comparison of previous years 3,71,052 students. Online absent feeding from examination centers resulted a huge drop of 62,825 registered students during examination, while 77,827 failed due to proper examination answer sheet evaluation center allotment and online marks feeding. Passing percentage during this Academic session is 62.57% (130103 / 207930) in comparison to previous year 70.89% (263061 / 371052). Madarsa Educational Board is now in the way of achieving the educational objective by imposing NCERT standards, so that students with good knowledge will come out and may compete with other Boards of Education. E-Parinaypatra: Marriage Registration Certificate is issued by the Stamps & Registration Department, GoUP to both Husband and Wife whose marriage has already been solemnized. It is a very simple, unique and first kind of registration system in the country, where registrant will get the Marriage Certificate online without going to Marriage Registrar Office after authenticating the details from Aadhaar. In e-Parinaypatra, Registrant has to apply online through departmental website http://igrsup.gov.in. In this process the details of Husband & Wife (like Name, Age, Fathers Name, Address, email, mobile no. and photograph) are captured from Aadhaar. Online payment of Registration fee has to be paid though net banking. After the successful payment Marriage Registration Certificate in Hindi & English will be sent to the registrants email/login instantly Online payment of Registration fee has to be paid though net banking. After the successful payment Marriage Registration Certificate in Hindi & English will be sent to the registrants email/login instantly Features: Pscnotes.com Page 237 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 On Line Aadhaar based registration of marriage. OTP based Aadhaar Authentication. Capturing of applicant details & photographs from Aadhaar. Online payment of Registration Fee. Auto Generation of Marriage Certificate. Marriage Registration Certificate is available in Hindi & English e-TULA: The department of Legal Metrology is established under the ministry of Consumer Protection and Weights & Measures. This is the objective and liability of the department to ensure accuracy of weighing & measuring instruments, which are used in commercial transactions & protection by verifying & stamping them at prescribed periodical intervals. e-TULA, an integrated e-Governance solution, has been developed using open-source technology with a vision to provide effective & efficient system issuance of Licenses/Verification Certificates based on progressive use of Information technology and to ensure an environment which is congenial for prospering of Consumer protection in the state of UP. e-TULA is a successful implementation as a central Web for 151 labs of the department in 75 districts of State. It has got 3 major categorization of inter-related web applications based on the functioning of the department:- 1.Department Portal 2.Citizen Online Services Portal 3.Officials Dashboard Features Role based, Office work-flow based centralized web for Online Application from any-where any-time. Receipt Acknowledgement. Issuance of Licences to Dealers , Manufacturers and Repairers of Weights & measures. Renewal of Licences to Dealers , Manufacturers and Repairers of Weights & measures. Verification / Rejection/ Re-Verification Certificates as per the in-office and/or on-site inspection of Weight Bridges, Petrol pumps, CNG, Storage Tanks, Flow-meter and Auto Taxi. MIS Reporting System on all automated service. Mobile App for Inspectors to provide inspection reports from inspection site itself. Citizen Services Portal is available on Internet 24 x 7 anytime from anywhere. Pscnotes.com Page 238 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Complete Portal Integrated with NiveshMitra, a dedicated Single Window System of Govt. of Uttar Pradesh, for Licenses for dealers/manufacturers/repairers of weights & measures and registration for packaged commodities. Complete Portal Integrated with Community Service Centers(CSC)–38000 for Verification Certificates Other Government programmes and welfare schemes in uttar Pradesh Mukhyamantri Free Laptop Yojana The work of providing free laptops to every youth of the state Uttar Pradesh has been started. There is a proposal to provide laptops to 22-23 lakh youth. Only young people studying in UP will get the benefit of this scheme. In BJP‘s resolution letter, the announcement was made to provide free laptops with 1 GB data to the youth. Bhagya Laxmi Yojana A new scheme named Bhagya Laxmi Yojana is being launched by Uttar Pradesh Chief Minister Yogi Adityanath to provide financial assistance to the girls of the state. The state government of Uttar Pradesh will issue the bond of Rs.50000 at the time of birth of the girls in the poor family. Under Bhagya Laxmi Yojana Yogi Government will provide the amount in installments to the girls. mukhyamantri annapurna bhojnalay yojana Under the scheme, morning breakfast and day and night meals will be provided. Under the scheme, Daliya, idli-sambhar, poha and tea-pakora will be given in breakfast, and at the time of food, roti, seasonal vegetables, Arhar dal and rice will be provided. Annapurna Bhojnalay will be opened in all the municipal areas of the state. Swavalamban Yojana The Uttar Pradesh government is implementing a program to utilize the services of trained youths in agriculture for the welfare of the farmers. The objective of the program is to provide all facilities through agriculture graduate ―One Staff Shop‖ to the farmers under the banner of Krishi Kendra(Agri Junction). Pscnotes.com Page 239 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 These Krishi Kendra will provide following facility under one roof: Recommendations for soil test facility and use of fertilizer. Supply of all farm inputs like seeds of high quality, fertilizers, bio-fertilizers, micro- nutrients, wormi- compost , pesticides and insecticides. Arrange availability of farm implements on hire-basis. Extension services and direction of farm. The farmer can get quality, farm inputs an farm direction at ―One Staff Shops‖ established at all developmental blocks and tehsil head quarter. Along with this, young agriculture graduates will be capable of self-employment. In the financial year 2016-17,target for establishment of 1000 Agri-junction was set(including 399 remaining in 2015-16)in which grant of Rs. 60,000/-is admissible by the government but letter for financial/administrative sanction has been sent by Directorate vide letter no. Prashar-57 dt. 26.04.2016 to Principal Secretary (Agriculture), GOUP. Scheme for free electricity Uttar Pradesh has launched a free household power connection scheme for the poor in the state to mark former prime minister Atal Bihari Vajpayee‘s birth anniversary. The government has a target of covering 16 million by 2018-end, driven by Yogi Adityanath government‘s motto ‗Prakash hai to vikas hai‘ (the barometer of development is light), he state. 60000 LEd street light in ghazibad Uttar Pradesh Government, have made many changes in the old proposals. A proposal has been made under Akhilesh Sarkaar government to provide 60,000 Light in District Ghaziabad. After change the government, Bhartiya Janta Party changed it proposal. Now BJP would provide 60,000 LED lights across city. Govt. has also start a campaign for it which will be known as, ―Ghaziabad AB Hoga Aur Bhi Rostion‖. Suryamitra yojna This is an employment scheme.Aims of UP Surya Mitra Scheme are as follows; The aim behind UP Surya Mitra scheme is to develop the youths of UP and to develop their skills. Aim behind this scheme to promote solar energy Power projects and its benefits in the state. Aim to make the youths self-dependent and young entrepreneurs in this sector (solar power). UJALA scheme An ordinary bulb is an extremely energy inefficient form of lighting with just 5% of the electricity input converted to light. Efficient light bulbs like Light-emitting Diode (LEDs) Pscnotes.com Page 240 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 consumes only one-tenth of energy used by ordinary bulb to provide the same or better light output. However, high cost of LEDs has been a barrier in adoption of such efficient lighting systems. The DELP on-bill financing scheme proposes to overcome this cost barrier. The scheme is being named "UJALA" - an acronym for Unnat Jyoti by Affordable LEDs for All. Main Issues In national priority setting, the following recurring and emerging issues for sustainable agricultural development and poverty alleviation must be considered: Population pressure and demographic transition; Resource base degradation and water scarcity; Investment in agriculture, structural adjustment and impact on the poor; Globalization and implication on the poor; Modern science and technology and support to research and technology development; and Rapid urbanization and urbanization of poverty, and deceleration in rural poverty reduction. Vision The Agriculture Policy document must articulate a clear vision on following few basic parameters of the agricultural sector around which a policy framework must be developed. Organization of agriculture: A clear long-term vision where inter-sectoral linkages are explicit. Sustainability and natural resource management: Prescription must lie in the domain of political economy. Otherwise, allocating funds for watershed development, agroforestry, soil conservation, and so on will not produce desired results. Institutional change: Policy document must spell out new approaches and new institutions free from the shackles of bureaucratic and self-help framework. Investment priorities: There is a need to develop a consensus on investment themes, priorities and policies. Policy document must lend strength to the claim for greater investment in rural areas, and also re-examine its programmes in the light of complementarities. Risk management Strategies Enhancing Yield of Major Commodities Pscnotes.com Page 241 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Yield of major crops and livestock in the region is much lower than that in the rest of the world. Considering that the frontiers of expansion of cultivated area are almost closed in the region, the future increase in food production to meet the continuing high demand must come from increase in yield. There is a need to strengthen adaptive research and technology assessment, refinement and transfer capabilities of the country so that the existing wide technology transfer gaps are bridged. For this, an appropriate network of extension service needs to be created to stimulate and encourage both top-down and bottom-up flows of information between farmers, extension workers, and research scientists to promote the generation, adoption, and evaluation of location specific farm technologies. Ample scope exists for increasing genetic yield potential of a large number of vegetables, fruits as well as other food crops and livestock and fisheries products. Besides maintenance breeding, greater effort should be made towards developing hybrid varieties as well as varieties suitable for export purposes. Agronomic and soil researches in the region need to be intensified to address location specific problems as factor productivity growth is decelerating in major production regimes. Research on coarse grains, pulses and oilseeds must achieve a production breakthrough. Hybrid rice, single cross hybrids of maize and pigeonpea hybrids offer new opportunities. Soybean, sunflower and oil palm will help in meeting future oil demands successfully. Forest cover must be preserved to keep off climatic disturbances and to provide enough of fuel and fodder. Milk, meat and draught capacity of our animals needs to be improved quickly through better management practices. Integrated nutrient management Attention should be given to balanced use of nutrients. Phosphorus deficiency is now the most widespread soil fertility problem in both irrigated and unirrigated areas. Correcting the distortion in relative prices of primary fertilizers could help correct the imbalances in the use of primary plant nutrients. Arresting deceleration in total factor productivity Public investment in irrigation, infrastructure development (road, electricity), research and extension and efficient use of water and plant nutrients are the dominant sources of TFP growth. Bridging Yield Gaps Vast untapped potential in the yield exists for all crops in most of the states accounting for more than three-fourths of crop area. Emphasis must be given to the states in which current yield levels are below the national average yield. Bihar, Orissa, Assam, West Bengal and Uttar Pradesh are the priority states accounting for 66% of rice area which need emphasis on bridging yield gaps to attain target demand and yield growth. For wheat we must focus mainly on Uttar Pradsh, Madhya Pradesh, Bihar and Rajasthan accounting for 68% of wheat area. Water for Sustainable Food Security India will be required to produce more and more from less and less land and water resources. Alarming rates of ground water depletion and serious environmental and social problems of some of the major irrigation projects on one hand, and the multiple benefits of irrigation water in Pscnotes.com Page 242 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 enhancing production and productivity, food security, poverty alleviation, as mentioned earlier, are well known to be further elaborated here: In India, water availability per capita was over 5000 cubic metres (m3 ) per annum in 1950. It now stands at around 2000 m3 and is projected to decline to 1500 m3 by 2025. Further, the quality of available water is deteriorating. Also, there are gross inequalities between basins and geographic regions. Accent on Diversification of Agriculture and Value Addition In the face of shrinking natural resources and ever increasing demand for larger food and agricultural production arising due to high population and income growths, agricultural intensification is the main course of future growth of agriculture in the region. Research for product diversification should be yet another important area. Besides developing technologies for promoting intensification, the country must give greater attention to the development of technologies that will facilitate agricultural diversification particularly towards intensive production of fruits, vegetables, flowers and other high value crops that are expected to increase income growth and generate effective demand for food. Accent on Empowering the Small Farmers Contributions of small holders in securing food for growing population have increased considerably even though they are most insecure and vulnerable group in the society. The off- farm and non-farm employment opportunities can play an important role. Against expectation under the liberalized scenario, the non-agricultural employment in rural areas has not improved. Greater emphasis needs to be placed on non-farm employment and appropriate budgetary allocations and rural credit through banking systems should be in place to promote appropriate rural enterprises. Specific human resource and skill development programmes to train them will make them better decision-makers and highly productive. Human resource development for increasing productivity of these small holders should get high priority. Thus, knowledge and skill development of rural people both in agriculture and non-agriculture sectors is essential for achieving economic and social goals. A careful balance will therefore need to be maintained between the agricultural and non-agricultural employment and farm and non-farm economy, as the two sectors are closely inter-connected. Extension Activities: The government is taking up extension activities in a big way and utilizing the campaign modes to educate farmers in all possible forms. Polam Pilusthondi: The main objective of the scheme is to strengthen the extension reach at farmers‘ doorstep for increasing productivity, profi tability, sustainability and explore the possibilities of value addition to increase the income of the farmers. In order to foster rapid and sustainable agricultural growth and raise increased farm income key strategies such as providing effective extension services, promoting farmer led extension, scientifi c approach, improved use of technologies are being used. Pscnotes.com Page 243 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Focused Areas: During the Polam Pilusthondhi Programme, the main emphasis is being given on the following issues: Distribution of Soil health cards and soil test based fertilizer application. Correction of Micro nutrient defi ciency Encouraging the Organic farming / Natural Farming/ Zero budget natural farming Soil & Water conservation measures ( Dead furrows, Recharging of Bore wells, Recharge of Ground Water, Farm ponds, rainguns etc) Issue of Certifi cate of Cultivation to Tenant farmers for obtaining Institutional Credit and other benefits Pest and Disease Attack and Remedial measures to be taken up. Drought Mitigation Chandranna Rythu Kshetralu: Inculcating best management practices Important crops like Paddy, Pulses, Coarse cereals, Oil seeds and Cotton are cultivated in considerable extent in the state. The production and productivity levels in case of majority of crops are below the possible potential. In order to enhance the productivity of these crops, special programme involving the gross root level functionaries and farmers, Chandranna Rythu Khsetralu- (CRKs) are being conducted on farm demonstrations with latest technological interventions. Chandranna Rythu Kshetralu programme is implemented to promote best agronomic and farm management practices for achieving increase in productivity and reducing cost of cultivation. CRK is an on farm demonstrations of 10 Ha. each cluster at fi eld level with a subsidy of Rs.5000/- per Ha. During 2017-18, 3307 CRKs were organized in all the 13 districts in the State in all the major crops i.e., Rice, Groundnut, Pulses, Maize, Cotton and Sunfl ower. Multi-Purpose Extension System : The Government introduced Multi-Purpose Extension System in place of Adarsha Rythus for every 1000 Ha. of cultivable area. 4017 Multi-Purpose Extension Offi cers (MPEOs) are working in the State. The Performance of MPEOs is being assessed on monthly basis based on the Key Performance Indicators and MPEOs are graded based on the marks obtained on performance. Latest technical information on various schemes, objectives, guide lines, subsidy pattern and suggestions to the farmers related to the concerned season/ month are being published in the Telugu Monthly magazine ‗Padi Pantalu‘. Pscnotes.com Page 244 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Soil samples analysis and soil health cards: Soil sampling and soil testing program is organized in a systematic manner to evaluate the fertility status and identify soil problems. The departmental Soil Testing Laboratories are equipped with advanced equipment (AAS, MPAES) to analyse 12 parameters i.e., PH, EC, OC, N, P, K, S, Zinc, Iron, Copper, Magnesium and Boron. The results of the soil analysis are being communicated to the respective farmers in the form of soil health cards. Fertilizer recommendations on the available nutrient contents on soil fertility status are to be given to the farmers in the soil health cards. During 1st cycle of soil health card scheme 13.48 lakh soil samples were analyzed and 54.28 lakh soil health cards were distributed to the farmers. The 2nd cycle of soil health card scheme i.e from 2017-18 and 2018-19 is under progress. Enhancing Agricultural productivity - Soil Health Management: Soil Health Management in a sub mission under NMSA, which aims to increase soil nutrient status and thus enhance crop productivity for ensuring food security and sustaining rural development. Analysis of soil samples has indicated that 42% of soils in Andhra Pradesh are potentially defi cient in Zinc(Zn), 22% in Iron(Fe), 7% in Manganese (Mn),3% in Copper (Cu), 19% in Boron (B) and 11% in Molybdenum(Mo). Studies also revealed that 20-24% of soils in AP are defi cient in Sulphur. These large scale defi ciencies of multiple nutrients such as micro and secondary nutrients are reducing the response to the added N, P, K nutrients also. It is planned to take up a massive programme such as publicity on correction of micronutrient defi ciency through local media, Polam Pilustondi, wall poster and pamphlets, Hoardings and moving media etc. in the districts where micronutrient defi ciencies are high wide. All the micro nutrients are being positioned and distributed on saturation mode. Yield impact studies taken up under the project has shown 8-15% yield increase over the control plots. During 2017-18 the Govt. has increased the subsidy from 50% to 100% duly relaxing the 2Ha. limit per farmer and 87,250 M.tons of micronutrients distributed through Aadhar enabled biometric system based on soil test results on production of Soil Health Card.. Information and Communication Technology: Coverage of crop booking on real-time through e-crop booking software has supported the tenant farmers through LEC, CoC (Certifi cate of Cultivation). Thus these actual cultivators have enjoyed the fi rst low hanging subsidy fruits of the department through Digital Krishi Kalyan, Farm Machineries, Vaddi Leni Runalu. Concepts like FOSS (Farmer One Stop Shop) Farmer data base creations, Big data analysis, Internet of Things (IoT), Smart Home Technologies, cloud computing, mobile governance, Machine Pscnotes.com Page 245 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Learning, IVR, AR (Augmented Reality) &VR (Virtual Reality), Everything on Demand (Uberization), GPS fencing, Assets mapping, and Automation areas are going to further bolster the Information Technology pursuit by the AP Agriculture Department which is still peddling in new wider angles. D-Krishi – a mobile based DBT solution for distribution of e-Seed& Micro Nutrients: D- Krishi is a unique, simple, sustainable, secure and standard and user friendly mobile based DBT solution offered to farmers. Farmer or any one member of the farmer‘s family is the main benefi ciary wherein land records, Aadhar and family database (Ration card) are integrated. Based on the landownership data of the farmer linked to his Aadhar ID, the area of land and associated eligible seed quantity shall be calculated by the system. Drought proofing measures : Two thirds of the area cultivated in the state is rain-fed. Keeping in view the climate change, government is giving emphasis on drought proofi ng. Technologies like automatic Weather Stations, Piezo meters, Soil Moisture meters etc are being used extensively. Water being a key factor in dry land farming, greater emphasis is given to ground water recharge through Farm Ponds (Panta Sanjeevini) and Neeru-Chettu, Geo mapping of all water resource bodies. Crop Insurance Pradhan Mantri Fasal Bima Yojana (PMFBY) Government of India announced a crop insurance policy namely ―Pradhan Mantri Fasal Bima Yojana‖ in place of NAIS & MNAIS from Kharif 2016 season onwards. It Pscnotes.com Page 246 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 incorporates the best features of all previous schemes and at the same time removing, all previous shortcomings/ weaknesses. The major improvements made are: Farmer‘s premium contribution in Kharif is 2% and in Rabi it is 1.5% for Food Crops and Oilseed Crops. Annual Commercial & Horticulture crops – farmer premium share will be maximum of 5%. Premium subsidy will be paid by the Central and State Governments on equal proportion (50:50). Cover for inundation apart from Hail storm and Postharvest crop damage. Action plan to cover 50% of the area under Crop Insurance. Under PMFBY scheme, in Kharif 2017, Paddy crop is covered under ―Village Insurance Unit‖ in 12 districts, Red gram in Ananthapuramu district and other 18 crops covered under Mandal Insurance Unit.13 Districts have been grouped into two clusters with balanced risk profi le and sum insured. The results of the CC Experiments are being compiled through online system for quick settlement insurance claims. During Rabi 2017-18, Paddy crop is covered under ―Village Insurance Unit‖ in 5 Districts ( East Godavari, West Godavari, Krishna, Nellore & Chittoor, Bengalgram in 3 districts (Prakasam, Kurnool & Kadapa), Maize in Guntur District and 10 crops ( Rice, Maize, Jowar, Greengram, Blackgram, Bengalgram, Groundnut, Sunfl ower, Red Chilly, Onion covered under Mandal Insurance Unit. All the districts have been grouped into two clusters with balanced risk profi le and sum insured. Unified Package Insurance Scheme (UPIS) (Pilot scheme): Apart from PMFBY & WBCIS, GOI has also announced ―Unifi ed Package Insurance Scheme (UPIS) on pilot basis during 2017-18. Srikakulam district is selected to implement UPIS during 2016-17 on pilot basis. The pilot scheme includes seven sections viz., 1. Crop Insurance (PMFBY/WBCIS), 2. Personal Accident Insurance (PMSBY), 3. Life Insurance (PMJJBY) 4.Building & Pscnotes.com Page 247 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Contents Insurance (fi re and allied perils), 5.Agriculture Pump Sets Insurance, 6.Student Safety Insurance, 7. Agriculture Tractor Insurance Out of these seven sections Crop Insurance (PMFBY / WBCIS) is compulsory. However, farmer can choose at least two sections from remaining six to avail applicable premium subsidy under PMFBY/WBCIS. Agricultural Credit: The Annual Credit Plan for the year 2017-18 was Rs.87470.67 cr. towards Agriculture Credit. Rs.49054.81 cr. (56.08 %) was disbursed up to Sept. 2017 under Agriculture Credit. An amount of Rs.38893.59 crores (61.63%) was disbursed under crop loans (short term loans) against the target of Rs.63105.51 crores and an amount of Rs.10161.22 crores (41.70%) was disbursed against the target of Rs.24365.16 crores under Agriculture Term Loans including allied activities. Credit to Land Licensed Cultivators (Tenant farmers): The State Government has taken up a major initiative to facilitate financing to the land licensed cultivators (tenant farmers) through passing an act named the ―Andhra Pradesh land licensed cultivators Act No 18 of 2011‘‘ to provide loan and other benefi ts eligibility cards to land licensed cultivators (tenant farmers). Rythu Sadhikara Samstha Agricultural Debt Redemption Scheme to farmers: Government of AP is implementing the Agriculture Debt Redemption scheme with an outlay of Rs.24000 Crores. At present 3 installments of Debt Redemption is being released for the farmer families who are entitled for Debt Redemption of more than Rs.50000/-. Including the 3rd installment so far released, in to Rs.14,428 Crores has been released. Pscnotes.com Page 248 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 While releasing the II installment of Debt Redemption the farmers are given interest @10% for one year on 2nd installment and for 2 years @10% while releasing the 3rd installment. In respect of Horticultural crop loan Debt Redemption it is considered upto maximum of Rs.50000/-@ Rs.10000 per Acre and for Horticulture Debt Redemption so far Rs.384.47 crores was released in favour of 2.23lakh Loan accounts of farmers Vaddileni Runalu and Pavala Vaddi Scheme on Crop Loans: To mitigate the fi nancial burden of the farmers, the Government has announced Rythu Sri (vaddileni panta runalu/pavala vaddi) scheme on crop loans disbursed. The Government has announced Interest free crop loans to all the farmers up to Rs.1.00 lakh and Pavala Vaddi for crop loans from Rs.1.00 lakh to Rs.3.00 lakhs if repaid in time (maximum period of one year). Rashtriya Krishi Vikasa Yojana – A GoI Initiative : Rashtriya Krishi Vikas Yojana (RKVY) is one of the flagship programme of Government of India with Central and State sharing 60:40. The State Level Sanction Committee (SLSC) has sanctioned projects worth of Rs. 782.85 crores during 2017-18. Out of which, Rs.120.89 crores has been sanctioned to Agriculture Sector. Horticulture : The agrarian state of Andhra Pradesh is heading towards a value addition platform from the conventional production approach. ‗Horticulture‘ sector has been recognized as an essential component for food and nutritional security in the State. Efforts are being made to make Andhra Pradesh maintain its supremacy in the production of Oilpalm, Papaya, Citrus and Chillies, Mango and Tomato. Micro irrigation through drip and sprinkler mechanisms have proved effective both in terms of cost and output. The government is implementing strategies to make Rayalaseema as a Horticulture hub. Under extension programme undertaken in a big way, it is targeted to cover one million farmers in next three years under Farmer Producer Organisations for Agriculture & Allied sectors in order to establish forward and backward linkages and to promote the products of Andhra Pradesh to global standards. It contributes about 8.18% of the State GVA and is moving towards value enhancement in addition to focus on production. The Pscnotes.com Page 249 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Government is committed to encourage horticulture and it is expected that value addition from this sub-sector will soon cross the agriculture share Wide range of agro-climatic conditions of Andhra Pradesh are conducive for growing a large variety of Horticultural crops, including, root and tuber crops, ornamental crops, plantation crops like coconut, cashew and cocoa etc. During the year 2016-17, the Government has set a target of 20% growth in output and to achieve this, there is need for new initiatives, new interventions and implementations with the support and coordination of farmers and entrepreneurs. Horticulture – the key growth driver in primary sector : The State Government has developed a comprehensive strategy for achieving sustainable and inclusive double digit economic growth to make the state of Andhra Pradesh amongst the three best states in India by 2022 and a developed state by 2029 on key social and economic indicators. The Government is committed to the farmer centric programmes and identified horticulture sector as one of the top priority sectors. This vision is sought to be realized through seven inter-related Missions and Primary Sector Mission is one among them consisting of agriculture and allied sectors. GVA from Horticulture Sector during 2016- 17 was Rs.34013 crores (constant price) with a growth rate of 17.00% over 2015-16. The returns from Horticulture per unit of land are higher as compared to Agriculture. Horticulture, as a climate resilient alternative involving less risk, assures higher income to farmers. In the context of global warming & climate change and increasing per capita income of middle class, this sector has more potential as food habits are changing and people are becoming more health conscious. During the year 2016-17 the area under Horticulture crops is 15.92 lakhs acres with a production of 268.57 lakh MTs. Andhra Pradesh stands at 1stposition in productivity for Chillies, Cocoa, Lime, Oil Palm, Papaya and Tomato, 2nd in Cashew, Mango and Sweet Orange in India. A.P. Ranks 1st in area and production of fruits and spices and 2nd in Micro Irrigation area coverage. Area and Production of Horticultural crops during 2016-17 and 2017-18 Productivity of Horticulture Crops : Andhra Pradesh stands at 1st position in productivity for Chillies (5 MTs/Ha), Oil Palm (19 MTs/Ha), Papaya (100 MTs/ Ha) and Tomato(44MTs/Ha), 2nd in Cashew (0.9 MT/Ha), Mango (12 MTs/Ha) and Sweet Orange(20Mts/Ha) in India. AP Coconut trees record highest productivity: Andhra Pradesh stands at 4th position in coconut cultivation with an area of 261430 acres and production of 209144 no. of nuts in lakhs. The average productivity of coconut in the country is 4247 nuts/acre, where as the State stands at First position in productivity with 5482 nuts/acre. Best quality ball copra is produced in Andhra Pradesh. Oil Palm : only tree species with highest edible oil recovery Andhra Pradesh ranks 1st in area and production of Oil Palm in India. This is the only tree species that is 100% under contract farming with tie up of processing plants for extraction of oil and income from the tree is Pscnotes.com Page 250 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 all round the year. In A.P. this crop is presently under cultivation in 3,91,562 acres with 14.82 lakh MTs production. Forest Andhra Pradesh State is bestowed with two mighty river systems of Krishna and Godavari. The State has wide and varied vegetation types enriched by a variety of flora and fauna. Andhra Pradesh located strategically in the central region of the Indian sub- continent, has representatives of the magnificent Indian plant and animal life. Its varied topography ranging from the hills of Eastern Ghats and Nallamallas to the shores of Bay of Bengal supports varied ecotypes, which in turn support a rich diversity of flora & fauna. Packed with abundance of rich flora and fauna life, the forests in Andhra Pradesh make for highly rejuvenating getaways. Tourists often head to the forests near Andhra Pradesh to experience jungle safaris. The famed wildlife in Andhra Pradesh is mainly scattered across these forests. While the benefits from dense forests are numerous, the tangible benefits like Timber, Bamboo, Fuel wood, Fodder, Non-Timber Forest Products etc., are quantifiable. Intangible benefits like maintenance of ecological balance, conservation of soil and moisture, regulating the water flow, sequestering carbon-dioxide from the atmosphere etc., are not quantified but are of great signifiance. Forest cover has been recognized as critical for a living environment as it influences the quality and quantity of air and water. The role of forests as carbon sinks endows them added recognition as an important environmental factor. With the responsibility of management of forests vested with the State Forest administration, the Central interventions are directed essentially towards reinforcing the capacity of States to undertake the National Policy mandates towards conservation and sustainable use of resources. The core objective of forest sector development strategy is to enhance green cover by integrating it with livelihood opportunities. As per the forest records, the state ranks 9th in India having forest cover area of 36909.38 Sq. Kms which amounts to 23.04%. Of this forest area, the Very Dense Forest is 649.79 Sq. Kms the Moderate Dense Forest is 11792.18 Sq. Kms, Open Forest is 10931.01 Sq. Kms Scrub Forest is 9455.24. Kms Non-Forest is 3708.08 Sq. Kms and Water Bodies is 373.08 Sq. Kms. Forest Produce: The Departmental Extraction of Timber, Fuel and Pulp Wood, Faggot Wood, Long Bamboo and Bamboo Industrial Cuts (BIC) from natural forests as well as plantations was introduced from the year 1976-77, after disbanding the previously existing contractor system. Pscnotes.com Page 251 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 At present there is a moratorium on extraction of timber from natural forests except for bamboo from overlapping bamboo forests. The major activity comprises harvesting timber and poles from matured plantations of Teak, Eucalyptus, Casuarinas etc. and long bamboos and BIC from bamboo coupes as per prescriptions of the working plan of respective divisions. The physical targets and achievements of Departmental Extraction of Forest Produce of Timber, Fuel, Poles and Bamboos Forest Revenue: Forest products in the state include Red sander, Timber, Bamboo, Firewood & Charcoal etc. The income accrued from forestry sector in the State was Rs.18.92 crore in 2017- 18 (upto Nov, 2017). Social Forestry : The State Government has launched a massive people‘s movement involving public and farmers in a big way to increase tree cover outside reserve forests to improve environment and to provide gainful employment to thousands of unemployed youth. Public distribution of seedlings, raising community land plantations/ avenue/ shelterbelt plantations; and raising of institutional plantations have been done under Social Forestry programme. Vanamahostavam-Vanam-Manam : The Government has launched ―Vanam-Manam‖ on 01.07.2017 witVana-mahostavam in Kondaveedu Forest Block at Obulanaidu Palem village of Guntur District. The tentative target of planting for 2017-18 under VanamManam is 25 crore by all stakeholders. The Vanam-Manam programme has two components viz. ―Vanamahotsava‖, a tree plantation programme and ―Prakruthi Pilusthondi‖, a programme for creating awareness and ensuring participation of various stakeholders. The Vanam–Manam Campaign has started on the 1st Saturday of July, 2017 and it is continued for 127 days. Every Saturday afternoon and 4th Saturday of each month were earmarked to reinforce environmental conservation efforts and to increase awareness on forest protection. The campaign ended with ―Karthika Vana Samaaradhana‖ on 04-11-2017 at Nagaravanam Perecherla, Guntur. Afforestation: The department has raised 4850 ha of block plantation and 479 km of Avenue plantation as against the target of 4,739 ha. of block plantation and 650 km of Avenue plantation respectively for the year 2017-18. 158.99 lakh saplings have been utilised for planting in the forest areas and 418.49 lakh saplings have been utilised for distribution. Presently Pscnotes.com Page 252 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 54.11 lakh tall seedlings and 36.37 lakh fruit bearing species like Jama, Usiri, Neredu etc., are available in the year 2017-18 (upto December, 2017). Forest Protection Schemes Intensification of Forest Management Scheme: The objectives of forest protection scheme include prevention and control of fi re, survey and maintenance of boundaries, preparation of working plans, development of infrastructure and protection of forests and wildlife. Under this scheme 1.74 lakh claims with an extent of 10.26 lakh acres are received. Of which 1.63 lakh claims with an extent of 9.81 lakh acres are surveyed. Remaining are under progress. Plantation Activities: Eucalyptus Plantations: The APFDC has been raising Eucalyptus Clonal plantations and with 31963 Ha. it is the single largest grower among PSUs in India. There are proposals to raise another 1000-2000 Ha. in the next 3 to 4 years. Due to improved site preparation, use of quality planting material and management practices, optimum yields are obtained from the plantations. Bamboo Plantations: Bamboo plantations are raised over an area of 2416 ha. The Corporation is intending to expand the Bamboo plantations over an area of 100 Ha in the next 3 to 4 years to ensure more supply of raw material per annum to the Paper Industries besides raw material to the artisans. Coffee Plantations: The Corporation is maintaining about 4,010 ha. of existing coffee plantations in the agency areas of Visakhapatnam and East Godavari Districts with intensive cultivation practices, by following scientifi c methods. These plantations are generating about 5.00 lakh mandays of employment to the tribals all-round the year Pepper Cultivation: APFDC has 1.80 lakh Pepper standards in its Coffee Estates in the agency areas of Visakhapatnam and East Godavari Districts comprising of high yielding varieties like Panniyur- Pscnotes.com Page 253 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 I, Purnima, Sreekara, Subhakara, Panchami, Panniyur-5. It is proposed to plant another 1.15 lakh standards with pepper in the next 5 years. Cashew Plantations: The Corporation has got cashew plantations over an area of 5795 ha. along the coastal belt in Prakasam and Nellore districts and in the inlands of West Godavari and Chittoor districts. Presently, the older plantations are being replanted with high yielding Cashew varieties using scion banks. ANIMAL HUSBANDRY AND DAIRY Sustained efforts – Stabilized Primary sector Technology in agriculture - bringing together global leaders in cutting edge technologies to aid small and marginal farmers Drought – a thing of the past – Sustained growth in Agriculture and Allied sectors - Growth despite deficit rainfall Soil Health Cards to farmers - distribution based on soil test recommendations. 43 lakh MTs reduction in consumption of Fertilizers during 2017 over 2016. Saving of Rs.220 Cr to farmers. Supply of seed - Subsidy using biometric system, e-crop booking and geo-tagging of water sources – key innovative initiatives. ―Zero Budget Natural Farming‘‘ a comprehensive and long term welfare initiative - to reach 5 lakh farmers and to cover 5 lakh hectares. Andhra Pradesh to become a horticulture hub. Micro Irrigation - A.P ranks 2nd in the country in the coverage with 20.60 lakh Ha. in 2017-18 benefitting 6.25 lakh farmers. Area coverage under Horticulture targeted to touch 40 lakh hectares by 2029 from 16.43 lakh hectares in 2017-18. Minimizing post-harvest losses which are about 5%-15% and enhancing food processing capacity of local crops Cold Chain Corporation is being set-up to reduce the post-harvest losses and add value to the produce To achieve self-sufficiency of fodder at village level - ‗Oorura Pashugrasa Kshetralu‘ State bags 10th Global leadership award-2017. Spectacular growth in Fisheries. AP to become Aqua hub of the World.. AP envisions No.1 position in processing capacity, value and highest exports of sea food. Linking markets through e-NAM to improve farmers‘ income Haritha-Andhra Pradesh - Government targets 50% green cover by 2029. Animal Husbandry : Animals provide nutrient rich food products, draught power, dung as organic manure and domestic fuel Hides and skin and are a regular source of cash income for rural Pscnotes.com Page 254 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 households. Livestock are a natural capital, which can be easily reproduced to act as a living bank with offspring as interest and the best insurance against the vagaries of nature due to drought, famine and other natural calamities. This is the sector where the poor contribute to growth directly instead of getting benefit from growth generated elsewhere. Livestock have been an integral component of India‘s agricultural and rural economy since times immemorial, supplying energy for crop production in terms of draught power and organic manure, and in turn deriving their own energy requirements from crop by products and residues. The progress in the sector is inclusive in nature as it results in balanced development of the rural economy particularly in reducing poverty amongst the weaker sections. Livestock provides stability to family income especially in the arid and semi-arid regions of the State. Growth in livestock - inclusive and pro poor: Most of the animal farming activities such as fodder collection, feeding, watering, healthcare, management, milking and household-level processing, value addition and marketing are performed by women. The growth in livestock sector is demand-driven, inclusive and pro poor. The rate of return on investment from Livestock sector is comparatively very high. Livestock sector apart from contributing to the state economy in general and to agricultural economy in particular, also provides employment generation opportunities, asset creation, coping mechanism against crop failure and social and financial security. Livestock is the main source of animal protein for the population. Demand for animal food products is responsive to income changes, and is expected to increase in future. Milk, Meat and Egg – the key growth drivers: The Animal Husbandry, from a humble beginning of backyard poultry, has grown into a dynamic industry. Milk and Meat production has also made a quantum leap with the production increasing substantially. Andhra Pradesh has some of the richest livestock resources in the country and is one of the most advanced states in Livestock sector. The State attained a prominent position in the country in Livestock Sector over the years because of its increasing livestock resources, gradual enlightenment of farmers and dedicated and sustained efforts of the Government. The State Government identifi ed Livestock Sector as the most promising sector and Milk, Meat and Egg are the key Growth Engines. Milk is the single largest commodity contributing highest economy to the State. Popular breeds – pride of the state : Andhra Pradesh takes pride in the country in having famous and world renowned Livestock breeds like Ongole and Punganur in cattle, Godavari Buffaloes, Nellore in sheep and Aseel in poultry. As per Livestock Census 2012, 62.54 lakh out of 126.65 lakh (49.38%) households in the state are engaged in Livestock / Livestock related rearing activities. The Livestock resources in the state include 47.42 lakh Cattle, 64.65 lakh Buffaloes, 135.67 lakh Sheep (1st in country), 45.06 lakh Goats, 1.57 lakh pigs, 0.13 lakh other Livestock, 294.37 lakh total Livestock & 817.85 lakh poultry (3rd in country). Support to the livestock sector: Pscnotes.com Page 255 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Animal Husbandry schemes have been formulated to attain well-laid National policies aimed at improving livestock production, fifighting protein hunger, improving nutritional standards of human population and provision of technical support for the maintenance and improvement of livestock. Growing contribution to GSDP : The contribution of livestock sector to the Gross State Domestic Product (GSDP) of the State is Rs. 76974 Crores at Current Prices, which is 10.46% of the GSDP as per Advanced Estimates of 2017-18. The sector grew at 13.05% at Constant Prices and 15.89% at Current Prices during 2017-18. The GVA from Livestock Sector surpassed that of Agriculture for the fi rst time during 2015-16. Best Practices implemented to achieve Double Digit Growth in Livestock Sector Fodder Security Policy, Poultry development Policy and Small Ruminant (Sheep and Goat) development Policy (fi rst time in the country), · Fodder conservation through fortifi ed silage, production & distribution, · TMR (Total Mixed Ratio) production and distribution, · OPGK (Oorura Pashu Grasa Kshethralu) to achieve self-reliance in fodder development · Distribution of feeding inputs @ Rs. 1/-Kg of Green Fodder, @ Rs. 2/- per Kg Silage, @ Rs.3/- per Kg of Dry fodder, @ Rs. 3.50/- per Kg Total Mixed Ration and @ Rs. 4/- per Kg concentrate feed to reduce the cost of production · Sex Sorted semen · IVF / Embryo Transfer Technolgy Livestock Breeding Activities: Artifi cial Insemination Centers The Artifi cial Inseminations (AI) facility is made available to more than 80% Breedable Cattle and Buffaloes in the state through 6377 Artificial Insemination centers which include – 3021 Animal Husbandry Departmental Institutions; 2875 Gopal Mitra/ MAITRIs; and 481 other AI Centres (Dairy Union, BAIF, RASS, JK Trust & Veterinary College) Centres. 40.49 Lakh Artifi cial Inseminations were conducted and 15.86 Lakh improved progeny calves were born during 2016-17. During this year upto November 2017, (26.67 Lakh) Artifi cial Inseminations were conducted and (10.72 Lakh) improved progeny calves were born. Dairy Development Key achievements of Andhra Pradesh Dairy Development Cooperative Federation (APDDCF): APDDCF is supplying Vijaya Vajra+ UHT Milk (enriched with vitamin A & D) of 38 lakh liters per month to more than 25000 AWCs across 257 Projects covering 13 districts of Andhra Pradesh. The preliminary studies and feedback have shown that the acceptance of ―Anna Amrutha Hastham‖ by the target group is overwhelming and had good impact on improving maternal nutrition and improved birth weights. A Dairy Plant of 50,000 LPD capacity at an outlay of Rs. 6.50 Cr. is being established under RKVY at G.Kothapalli in West Godavari. An Ultra High Treated (UHT) Milk packaging plant of 80,000 LPD capacity is being established through IDMC on turnkey basis at an outlay of Rs. 26.42 Cr. under RKVY at Madanaplle in Chittoor District. · Rs. 2.50 Cr. was sanctioned for implementation of Ratio Balancing Programme (RBP) covering 50 villages in each of the four(4) districts of East Godavari , West Godavari, Ananathapuramu and Kadapa. Pscnotes.com Page 256 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Revived Milk Procurement operations in 10 BMCUs through Public Private Participation; 5 BMCUs in Kadapa procuring 6000 LPD and 5 in East Godavari procuring 6000 LPD. Sheep and Goat Development Activities: The State has brought out a Small Ruminant Development Policy (2015-2020) with an allocation of Rs. 575 Crores to tackle inbreeding problems in Sheep fl ocks and to check migration of fl ocks during summer season through supply of Silage & TMR to the shepherds at affordable prices. The policy is also aimed to encourage stall feeding and housing to the Sheep fl ocks. The Government has also decided to promote Meat sector in the State through establishment of Meat Development Corporation of Andhra Pradesh. Poultry Development: The Poultry Development Policy (2015-2020) will support poultry farmers through sanction of interest subsidy on working capital and also offer incentives to the entrepreneurs who wish to establish processing plants for eggs and chicken and to reduce the cost of production in poultry farming through concessional power tariff. Under TSP, each district with 2400 units of Rural Back Yard Poultry units (Manakodi), targets were fi xed to the Srikakulam, Vizianagaram, Visakhapatnam, East Godavari & West Godavari districts. Under SCSP, nearly 15000 units of MANAKODI targets were given to the all the districts in the state. Livelihood activities: 8390 Heifer units (cow and buffaloes) were distributed to SC families. Animal Husbandry Department is working in convergence with SC/ST/BC/Kapu Corporations to ground more number of units. Established 129 clusters for ‗Strengthening of Desi Backyard Poultry for Livelihood and Nutritional Security for Women in Tribal Areas (ITDA)‘ in collaboration with WASSAN – benefi tted 12900 Tribal farmers. Uttar Pradesh: Economy current affairs Uttar Pradesh grants Revenue Status to 3 forest villages under FRA, 2006 The Uttar Pradesh Government in the first week of July 2018 granted Status of Revenue Village to three villages inhabited by the Tongia Scheduled Tribe in and around forests in Saharanpur district under the Forest Rights Act, 2006 (FRA). These villages are - Kaluwala, Sodhinagar and Bhagwatpur. President Ram Nath Kovind inaugurates ‘One District one Product’ Summit in UP Pscnotes.com Page 257 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The ‗One District One Product‘ (ODOP) scheme aims to promote one traditional industry in every district such as lock industry in Aligarh, Banarasi silk-weaving in Varanasi and biscuit- making in Amethi. UP is uniquely famous for product-specific traditional industrial hubs across 75 districts, including Bhadohi (carpet), Lucknow (chikan), Kanpur (leather goods), Agra (leather footwear), Moradabad (brassware) Meerut (sports goods) and Saharanpur (wooden products). U P Economy : Factual scenario The Gross State Domestic Product of Uttar Pradesh for 2018-19 (at current prices) is estimated to be Rs 14,88,934 crore. This is 8% higher than the revised estimates for 2017-18. GSVA at constant prices is estimated to be ` 780937 crore in 2014-15, ` 827345 crore in 2015-16 and ` 881181 crore in 2016-17 showing a growth of 3.5% in 2014-15, 5.9% in 2015-16 and 6.5% in 2016-17. Total expenditure for 2018-19 is estimated to be Rs 4,28,385 crore, a 16.3% increase over the revised estimates of 2017-18. In 2017-18, there was a decrease of Rs 16,259 crore (4.2%) in the expenditure over the budget estimates. Total receipts (excluding borrowings) for 2018-19 are estimated to be Rs 3,53,784 crore, an increase of 15.9% as compared to the revised estimates of 2017-18. In 2017-18, total receipts (excluding borrowings) fell short of the budgeted estimate by Rs 14,369 crore. Revenue surplus for the next financial year is targeted at Rs 27,099 crore, or 1.82% of the Gross State Domestic Product (GSDP). Fiscal deficit is targeted at Rs 44,053 crore (2.96% of GSDP). The allocations for energy, irrigation, and rural development are estimated to witness the highest increase in allocations over the previous year. Allocations for agriculture are expected to witness a 59% decrease. The total expenditure in 2018-19 is targeted at Rs 4,28,385 crore. This is 16.3% higher than the revised estimates of 2017-18. This expenditure is proposed to be met through receipts (other than borrowings) of Rs 3,53,784 crore and borrowings of Rs 67,115 crore. Total receipts for 2018-19 (other than borrowings) are expected to be 15.9% higher than the revised estimates of 2017-18. Capital expenditure for 2018-19 is proposed to be Rs 1,06,864 crore, which is an increase of 30.5% over the revised estimates of 2017-18. This includes expenditure which affects the assets and liabilities of the state, and leads to creation of assets (such as bridges and hospital), and repayment of loans, among others. Revenue expenditure for 2018-19 is proposed to be Rs 3,21,520 crore, which is an increase of 12.2% over revised estimates of 2017-18. This expenditure includes payment of salaries, maintenance, etc. In 2018-19, Uttar Pradesh is expected to spend Rs 62,980 crore on servicing its debt (i.e., Rs 30,547 crore on repaying loans, and Rs 32,434 crore on interest payments. This is 20.4% higher than the revised estimates of 2017-18. 63,213 crore allocated for education. Out of this amount Rs 50,142 crore will be spent on primary education, and Rs 9,387 crore on secondary education, and Rs 2,656 crore on higher education. Pscnotes.com Page 258 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 32,019 crore will be spend on social welfere . out of which Rs 2,560 crore has been allocated for the Vridhavasta evam Kisan Pension‘ scheme for 2018-19. 27,575 crore are allocated for energy sector. 62% of this allocation is for revenue expenses (such as payment of interests and subsidy), and the 38% is on capital expenses. The state will operationalise 170 national mobile medical units through the PPP model. 100 new ayurvedic hospitals will be established..20,157 crore have been allocated to medical and public health. 19,733 crore budgeted to rural development. Out of this, Rs 2,923 crore will be spent on roads and bridges, and Rs 1,166 crore will be spent on housing. 14,291 crore had been allocated to irrigation sector. The Saryu Nehar Programme has been allocated Rs 1,614 crore. Madhya Ganga Nehar Programme has been allocated Rs 1,701 crore. 13,484 crore are given to urban development sector. Rs 1,650 crore has been allocated for the Smart Cities Mission. Cities selected under the Mission are Lucknow, Kanpur, Agra, Varanasi, Allahabad, Aligarh, Jhansi, Moradabad, Bareli, and Saharanpur. The total revenue receipts for 2018-19 are estimated to be Rs 3,48,619 crore, an increase of 14.3% over the revised estimates of 2017-18. Of this, Rs 1,51,522 crore (43% of the revenue receipts) will be raised by the state through its own resources, and Rs 1,97,098 crore (57% of the revenue receipts) will be devolved by the centre in the form of grants and the state‘s share in taxes. Non Tax Revenue: Uttar Pradesh has estimated to generate Rs 28,822 crore through non- tax sources in 2018-19. This is an increase of 64.7% over the revised estimates of 2017- 18. This is driven by a 187% increase (Rs 8,271 crore) in receipts from the sinking fund (typically maintained to repay debt). Tax Revenue: Total own tax revenue of Uttar Pradesh is estimated to be Rs 1,22,700 crore in 2018-19. The composition of the state‘s tax revenue is shown in Figure 2. The tax to GSDP ratio is targeted at 8.2% in 2018-19, which is higher than the revised estimate of 6.9% in 2017-18. This implies that growth in collection of taxes is expected to be higher than the growth in the economy (8%). State Goods and Services Tax (GST) is expected to be the largest component of Uttar Pradesh‘s own tax revenue in 2018-19. It is expected to generate Rs 49,422 crore (40% of the own tax revenue). The state is expected to generate Rs 23,000 crore through the state excise duty. This is 19% higher than revised estimates of 2017-18. Further, the state is expected to raise Rs 22,078 crore from the levy of sales tax on items such as alcohol for human consumption and petroleum products. Tax revenue will also be generated by levying stamp duty on real estate transactions, taxes on vehicles, and land revenue Policy initiatives: highlights Pscnotes.com Page 259 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Healthcare: A 500-bed super speciality hospital, and paramedical and nursing college will be constructed at the Dr. Ram Manohar Lohia Institute of Medical Sciences, Lucknow. Further, the emergency medicine department at the Sanjay Gandhi Postgraduate Institute of Medical Sciences will be expanded, and an additional 200 beds will be added. The government will launch ‗Ek Janpad, Ek Utpaad’ scheme to promote artisans at the district- level. The state has implemented the ‗Uttar Pradesh Khanan Neeti-2017‘ for the mining sector. The policy seeks to control illegal mining and bring transparency. The government will implement an evolved mining system in the state, with assistance from the central government, for satellite tracking of mining activities. Solar energy: The state has set a target of generating 10,700 MW of power using solar energy by 2022. The budget allocates Rs 25 crore for setting up grid-connected rooftop solar power plants. Further, Rs 30 crore has been allocated for the Pt. Deen Dayal Upadhyaya Solar Street Light scheme. Rs 250 crore has been allocated for establishing a start-up fund in the state. Revenue deficit of state It is the excess of revenue expenditure over revenue receipts. A revenue deficit implies that the government needs to borrow in order to finance its expenses which do not create capital assets. The budget estimates a revenue surplus of Rs 27,099 crore (or 1.82% of GSDP) in 2018-19. This implies that revenue receipts are expected to be higher than the revenue expenditure, resulting in a surplus. The estimate indicates that the state is within the target of eliminating revenue deficit, prescribed by the 14th Finance Commission. Fiscal deficit It is the excess of total expenditure over total receipts. This gap is filled by borrowings by the government, and leads to an increase in total liabilities. In 2018-19, fiscal deficit is estimated to be Rs 44,053 crore, which is 2.96% of the GSDP. The estimate is within the 3% limit prescribed by the 14th Finance Commission. This limit may be relaxed to a maximum of 3.5%, if states are able to contain their debt and interest payments to certain specified levels. UP govt announces sops for SC/ST, minority entrepreneurs under ODOP scheme Uttar Pradesh government on Tuesday announced sops for promoting Micro, Small and Medium Enterprises (MSME), especially those owned by the minorities and other weaker sections of society. The MSMEs will be provided financial incentives under the government‘s flagship One District, One Product (ODOP) scheme that aims to foster the traditional industries. Pscnotes.com Page 260 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Under the scheme, the state would provide almost 25% subsidy on project cost to new enterprises being set up under ODOP. While, 25% subsidy or Rs 625,000, whichever is lower, would be given to projects of up to Rs 2.5 million, the corresponding figure for projects costing between Rs 2.5 million and Rs 5 million is 20% or Rs 625,000, whichever is higher. Uttar Pradesh to ensure sugar arrears payment before October 20 Uttar Pradesh will ensure that the entire sugarcane arrears of little less than Rs 100 billion, accruing to the state‘s farmers from 2017-18, would be paid before October 20. Haier Appliances to set up Rs 30.69 bn industrial park in Greater Noida In one of the largest investments by a Chinese durable major in the country, Haier Appliances India will put in Rs 30.69 billion to set up its second industrial park in Greater Noida. On Friday, a memorandum of understanding was signed by the company and the Uttar Pradesh government. Free education from KG to PG in Uttar Pradesh, Yogi government's next plan Yogi Adityanath's Uttar Pradesh government may provide free education from Kindergarten to Postgraduate level in the state and an announcement in this regard is expected to be made soon. Uttar Pradesh government tables supplementary budget of Rs 34,833 crore The Uttar Pradesh government today tabled the first supplementary budget to the tune of Rs 34,833.24 crore for FY2018-19 in the UP Legislative Assembly, to meet the additional expenditure for the year. Earlier in February this year, the Yogi Adityanath government had passed a budget of Rs 4.26 lakh crore for the ongoing fiscal year. Mahesra bridge Uttar Pradesh Chief Minister Yogi Adityanath today blamed the previous state government for the delay in construction of the Mahesra bridge on the Sonauli- Gorakhpur road. Jewar airport The construction for the Jewar International Airport in Greater Noida will begin before the 2019 general elections with the Uttar Pradesh government having approved the setting up of a joint venture company to acquire 1,441hectare of land for the project at a cost of nearly Rs 4,000 crore. UP signs MOU with south korea Pscnotes.com Page 261 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 A memorandum of u.nderstanding with South Korea to enhance cooperation in the field of tourism, skill development, farming and culture. Agriculture and Animal Husbandry The estimates of Crop subsector have been prepared by using the Crop wise Area and Production data provided by Directorate of Agriculture, Govt. of U.P. The GSVA of Crop subsector shows a growth of (-) 5.4 % ,4.9 % and 8.6 % respectively in 2014-15, 2015-16 and 2016-17. 8. The GSVA of Livestock subsector shows a growth of 5.6% in 2014-15, 3.7% in 2015-16 and 3.4% in 2016-17. Industry The main indicators used to estimate industry sector estimates are All India Annual Survey of Industries, All India Wholesale Price Index (WPI), All India Index of Industrial Production (IIP) and MCA21 Database. The GSVA of manufacturing subsector shows a growth of (-)10.0% in 2014-15, 1.1% in 2015-16 and 8.5% in 2016-17. Services The GSVA of services sector shows a growth of 9.2% in 2014-15, 8.0% in 2015-16 and 7.0% in 2016-17. Per Capita Income Per Capita Income of State at current prices (in terms of NSDP at current prices) is estimated to be ` 42267 in 2014-15, ` 46299 in 2015-16 and ` 51920 in 2016-17 showing a growth of 5.3% in 2014-15, 9.5% in 2015-16 and 12.1% in 2016-17. SpiceJet opens five new air routes in Uttar Pradesh An agreement was signed between the Uttar Pradesh government and private air carrier Spice Jet on Wednesday to fly on five new routes in the state, an official said. The new routes on which flights will begin after clearances from the Union Civil Aviation Ministry and the UP government are Varanasi-Kolkata, Varanasi-Bengaluru, Kanpur-Mumbai, Kanpur-Bengaluru and Gorakhpur-Bengaluru. Govt to set up Khadi Parks to promote 'Brand UP', boost job creation To boost indigenous khadi and institutionalise the sector for local job creation, the Yogi Adityanath government is looking at setting up of Khadi Parks in Uttar Pradesh. Pscnotes.com Page 262 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The first Khadi Park is proposed at Kanpur Nagar district‘s Bilhaur town, which is situated about 100 km from the state capital of Lucknow. Uttar Pradesh: Unorganised Manufacturing Sector statistics The number of unorganised manufacturing enterprises estimated after the survey analysis was 163538. At State level the broad activity category 'Manufacture of food products' outnumbered in establishment number(25%) followed by the category 'Manufacture of wearing apparel' 16% and 'Manufacture of textiles' 11%. The survey revealed that Kanpur Nagar had the highest share (7%) in total number of unorganised manufacturing enterprises followed by Agra (6%), Meerut (5%), Allahabad (4%) and Ghaziabad (3%) GB Nagar had the highest share (19.90%) of estimated number of workers of unorganised manufacturing enterprises in India followed by Hardoi (11%), Agra(6%), Kanpur Nagar(6%) and Ghaziabad(5%). Proprietary enterprises (i.e. enterprises owned by a single household) had dominant share (93%) of unorganised manufacturing enterprises and the rest were operated either on partnership basis or by SHG/Trust or by Others About 90% of the unorganised manufacturing enterprises were operational the yearlong while about 5% of the enterprises under survey coverage operated for 9 months and the rest 5% remained operational for less than a quarter of the reference year About 49% of the unorganised manufacturing enterprises were owned by persons belonging to Other Backward Classes (OBC), 43% owned by persons belonging to the category Others, 7% owned by Scheduled Castes and a negligibly small part 0.85% owned by Scheduled Tribes. At the State level the districts Kanpur Nagar and Agra (7% each) had the most number of enterprises registered with any of the registering authorities followed by Ghaziabad (5%) and then by Meerut and G.B. Nagar (about 4% each). About 25% of the unorganised manufacturing enterprises had reported of not having received any financial assistance from government. The rest 75% received assistance from the government in form of financial loans. Uttar Pradesh along with Maharashtra in race to become $1 trillion economy According to the Central Statistics Office, the size of the Maharashtra and Uttar Pradesh economies was $308 billion and $172 billion, respectively, in 2015-16. In 2016-17, UP became a $196 billion economy, while data for Maharashtra is not available for that year. Industrial corridor in bundelkhand Pscnotes.com Page 263 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Prime Minister Narendra Modi has announced that his government will establish a Rs 20,000- crore defence industrial production corridor in Bundelkhand -- a region divided between Uttar Pradesh and Madhya Pradesh -- that will generate 2,50,000 jobs and bring development to one of the most impoverished regions of the country. UP Investors Summit 2018: CM Adityanath signs 1,045 MoUs, worth Rs 4.2 trn Uttar Pradesh has signed 1,045 pacts worth Rs 4.28 trillion on the first day of the UP investors' summit. Adani Group will invest Rs 35,000 crore in Uttar Pradesh Adani Group today said it will invest Rs 35,000 crore in Uttar Pradesh over the next five years in various sectors. Promising to stand with the leadership in transforming the state, Gautam Adani of the Adani Group committed an aggregate investment of Rs 35,000 crores in UP. Classifications, generations, applications and limitations of digital computers Computer Classification: By Size and Power Computers differ based on their data processing abilities. They are classified according to purpose, data handling and functionality. According to functionality, computers are classified as: Analog Computer: A computer that represents numbers by some continuously variable physical quantity, whose variations mimic the properties of some system being modeled. Personal computer: A personal computer is a computer small and low cost. The term"personal computer" is used to describe desktop computers (desktops). Workstation: A terminal or desktop computer in a network. In this context, workstation is just a generic term for a user's machine (client machine) in contrast to a "server" or "mainframe." Pscnotes.com Page 264 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Minicomputer: A minicomputer isn't very mini. At least, not in the way most of us think of mini. You know how big the personal computer is and its related family. Mainframe: It refers to the kind of large computer that runs an entire corporation. Supercomputer: Itis the biggest, fastest, and most expensive computers on earth. Microcomputer: A personal computer is a microcomputer. According to purpose or functionality, computers are classified as general purpose and special purpose computers. General purpose computers solve large variety of problems.They are said to be multi purpose for they perform a wide range of tasks. Examples of general purpose computer include desktop and laptops. On the other hand,special purpose computers solve only specific problems.They are dedicated to perform only particular tasks.Examples of special purpose computers can include calculators and money counting machine. Generation of Digital Computers According to age,computers are grouped in terms of generations. They include;1st generation computers,2nd generation computers,3rd generation computers,4th generation computers, and finally 5th generation. 1st generation computers.This is a generation of computers that were discovered between the years 1946 and 1957.These computers had the following characteristics: They used vacuum tubes for circuiting.They used magnetic drums as memory for data processing.Their operating system was quite low as compared to the later generations.An operating system can be defined as a collection of programs designed to control the computer's interaction and communication with the user. A computer must load the operating system like Microsoft into memory before it can load an application program like Ms Word.These computers required large space for installation.They were large in size and could take up the entire room.They consumed a lot of power.They also produced huge amounts of energy and power which saw machines breaking down oftenly. Using the computers,programming capabilities was quite low since the computers relied on machine language.Machine language can only be understood by Pscnotes.com Page 265 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 the computer but not human beings .Their input was based on punched cards and paper tapes. 2nd generation computers. These computers existed between the years 1958 and 1964.They possessed the following features:These computers used transistors for circuitry purposes.They were quite smaller in size compared to the 1st generation computers. Unlike the 1st generation computers, they consumed less power. Their operating system was faster.During this generation, programming languages such as COBOL and FORTRAN were developed.This phase of computers relied on punched cards too for input and printouts. 3rd generation computers.These are computers that existed between 1965 and 1971.The computers used integrated circuits(ICs) for circuitry purposes.The computers were smaller in size due to the introduction of the chip.They had a large memory for processing data. Their processing speed was much higher.The technology used in these computers was small scale integration (SSI) technology. 4th generation computers. The computers under this generation were discovered from 1972 to 1990s. The computers employed large scale integration (LSI) technology.The size of memory was /is high/large,hence faster processing of data.Their processing speed was high.The computers were also smaller in size and less costly in terms of installation.This phase of computers saw introduction of keyboards that could interface well with processing system.During this phase, there was rapid internet evolution.Other advances that were made included the introduction of GUI(graphical user interface) and mouses.Other than GUI, there exist other user interfaces like natural-language interface,question-and-answer interface,command line interface(CLI). 5th generation computers.These are computers that are still under development and invention. There development might have began in 1990s and continues in to the future. These computers use very large scale integration (VLSI) technology. The memory speed of these computers is extremely high.The computers can perform parallel processing. It is during this generation that Artificial Intelligence (AI) concept was generated e.g voice and speech recognition. These computers will use quantum Pscnotes.com Page 266 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 computation and molecular technology.They will be able to interpret data and respond to it without direct control by human beings. Applications and Limitations of Digital Computers In a very general way, it can be said that the advantages of the digital computer compared to the analog computer,I are its greater flexibility and precision, while its disadvantages are its higher cost and complexity. Information storage can be easier in digital computer systems than in analogue ones. New features can often be added to a digital system more easily too. Computer-controlled digital systems can be controlled by software, allowing new functions to be added without changing hardware. Often this can be done outside of the factory by updating the product's software. So, the product's design errors can be corrected after the product is in a customer's hands. Information storage can be easier in digital systems than in analog ones. The noise-immunity of digital systems permits data to be stored and retrieved without degradation. In an analog system, noise from aging and wear degrade the information stored. In a digital system, as long as the total noise is below a certain level, the information can be recovered perfectly. Digital computers play an important role in life today as they can be used to control industrial processes, analyse and organize business data, assist in scientific research and designing of automobiles and aircraf, and even help making special effects in movies. Some Main Applications of Digital Computers are as follows - Recording Information Official statistics keepers and some scouts use computers to record statistics, take notes and chat online while attending and working at a sports event. Analyzing Movements Pscnotes.com Page 267 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The best athletes pay close attention to detail. Computers can slow recorded video and allow people to study their specific movements to try to improve their tendencies and repair poor habits. Writers Many sportswriters attend several sporting events a week, and they take their computers with them to write during the game or shortly after while their thoughts are fresh in their mind. The main disadvantages are that digital circuits use more energy than analogue circuits to accomplish the same tasks, thus producing more heat as well. Digital circuits are often fragile, in that if a single piece of digital data is lost or misinterpreted, the meaning of large blocks of related data can completely change. Definition of digital computer, Elements of computer: Input unit, Output unit, Primary memory, Secondary memory and Processing unit. Computer is an electronic device that is designed to work with Information. term computer is derived from the Latin term„computare‟, this means to calculate or programmable machine. Computer cannot do anything without a Program. It represents the decimal numbers through a string of binary digits. The Word 'Computer' usually refers to the Center Processor Unit plus Internal memory. Charles Babbage is called the "Grand Father" of the computer. The First mechanical computer designed by Charles Babbage was called Analytical Engine. It uses read-only memory in the form of punch cards. Digital Computer Definition Pscnotes.com Page 268 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The basic components of a modern digital computer are: Input Device, Output Device, Central Processor Unit (CPU), mass storage device and memory. A Typical modern computer uses LSI Chips. Four Functions about computer are: accepts data Input processes data Processing produces output Output stores results Storage Input (Data): Input is the raw information entered into a computer from the input devices. It is the collection of letters, numbers, images etc. Process: Process is the operation of data as per given instruction. It is totally internal process of the computer system. Output: Pscnotes.com Page 269 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Output is the processed data given by computer after data processing. Output is also called as Result. We can save these results in the storage devices for the future use. All general-purpose computers require the following hardware components: Memory: enables a computer to store, at least temporarily, data and programs. Mass storage device: allows a computer to permanently retain large amounts of data. Common mass storage devices include solid state drives (SSDs) or disk drives and tape drives. Input device: usually a keyboard and mouse, the input device is the conduit through which data and instructions enter a computer. Output device: a display screen, printer, or other device that lets you see what the computer has accomplished. Central processing unit (CPU): the heart of the computer, this is the component that actually executes instructions. In addition to these components, many others make it possible for the basic components to work together efficiently. For example, every computer requires a bus that transmits data from one part of the computer to another. CPU (Processing Unit) CPU (pronounced as separate letters) is the abbreviation for central processing unit. Sometimes referred to simply as the central processor, but more commonly called processor, the CPU is the brains of the computer where most calculations take place. In terms of computing power, the CPU is the most important element of a computer system. Components of a CPU Pscnotes.com Page 270 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The two typical components of a CPU include the following: The arithmetic logic unit (ALU), which performs arithmetic and logical operations. The control unit (CU), which extracts instructions from memoryand decodes and executes them, calling on the ALU when necessary. Relationship between the elements of the CPU, input and output, and storage Printed Circuit Boards, Microprocessors On large machines, the CPU requires one or more printed circuit boards. On personal computers and small workstations, the CPU is housed in a single chip called a microprocessor. Since the 1970's the microprocessor class of CPUs has almost completely overtaken all other CPU implementations. The CPU itself is an internal component of the computer. Modern CPUs are small and square and contain multiple metallic connectors or pins on the underside. The CPU is inserted directly into a CPU socket, pin side down, on the motherboard. Pscnotes.com Page 271 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Each motherboard will support only a specific type (or range) of CPU, so you must check the motherboard manufacturer's specifications before attempting to replace or upgrade a CPU in your computer. Modern CPUs also have an attached heat sink and small fan that go directly on top of the CPU to help dissipate heat. MEMORY Memory is major part of computers that categories into several types. Memory is best storage part to the computer users to save information, programs and etc, The computer memory offer several kinds of storage media some of them can store data temporarily and some them can store permanently. Memory consists of instructions and the data saved into computer through Central Processing Unit (CPU). Types of Computer Memory: Memory is the best essential element of a computer because computer can‟t perform simple tasks. The performance of computer mainly based on memory and CPU. Memory is internal storage media of computer that has Pscnotes.com Page 272 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 several names such as majorly categorized into two types, Main memory and Secondary memory. 1. Primary Memory / Volatile Memory. 2. Secondary Memory / Non Volatile Memory. 1. Primary Memory / Volatile Memory: Primary Memory also called as volatile memory because the memory can‟t store the data permanently. Primary memory select any part of memory when user want to save the data in memory but that may not be store permanently on that location. It also has another name i.e. RAM. Random Access Memory (RAM): The primary storage is referred to as random access memory (RAM) due to the random selection of memory locations. It performs both read and write operations on memory. If power failures happened in systems during memory access then you will lose your data permanently. So, RAM is volatile memory. RAM categorized into following types. DRAM SRAM DRDRAM 2. Secondary Memory / Non Volatile Memory: Secondary memory is external and permanent memory that is useful to store the external storage media such as floppy disk, magnetic disks, magnetic tapes and etc cache devices. Secondary memory deals with following types of components. Read Only Memory (ROM) : ROM is permanent memory location that offer huge types of standards to save data. But it work with read only operation. No data lose happen whenever power failure occur during the ROM memory work in computers. ROM memory has several models such names are following. 1. PROM: Programmable Read Only Memory (PROM) maintains large storage media but can‟t offer the erase features in ROM. This type of RO Pscnotes.com Page 273 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 maintains PROM chips to write data once and read many. The programs or instructions designed in PROM can‟t be erased by other programs. 2. EPROM : Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory designed for recover the problems of PROM and ROM. Users can delete the data of EPROM thorough pass on ultraviolet light and it erases chip is reprogrammed. 3. EEPROM: Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory similar to the EPROM but it uses electrical beam for erase the data of ROM. Cache Memory: Mina memory less than the access time of CPU so, the performance will decrease through less access time. Speed mismatch will decrease through maintain cache memory. Main memory can store huge amount of data but the cache memory normally kept small and low expensive cost. All types of external media like Magnetic disks, Magnetic drives and etc store in cache memory to provide quick access tools to the users. Data, Data processing, business data processing, data storage, file management system and data base management systems. Data, Data Processing and Database management System Data processing and data management are critical components of business organizations. DATA PROCESSING Data processing refers to the process of performing specific operations on a set of data or a database. A database is an organized collection of facts and information, such as records on employees, inventory, customers, and Pscnotes.com Page 274 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 potential customers. As these examples suggest, numerous forms of data processing exist and serve diverse applications in the business setting. Data processing primarily is performed on information systems, a broad concept that encompasses computer systems and related devices. At its core, an information system consists of input, processing, and output. In addition, an information system provides for feedback from output to input. The input mechanism (such as a keyboard, scanner, microphone, or camera) gathers and captures raw data and can be either manual or automated. Processing, which also can be accomplished manually or automatically, involves transforming the data into useful outputs. This can involve making comparisons, taking alternative actions, and storing data for future use. Output typically takes the form of reports and documents that are used by managers. Feedback is utilized to make necessary adjustments to the input and processing stages of the information system. The processing stage is where management typically exerts the greatest control over data. It also is the point at which management can derive the most value from data, assuming that powerful processing tools are available to obtain the intended results. The most frequent processing procedures available to management are basic activities such as segregating numbers into relevant groups, aggregating them, taking ratios, plotting, and making tables. The goal of these processing activities is to turn a vast collection of facts into meaningful nuggets of information that can then be used for informed decision making, corporate strategy, and other managerial functions. DATA AND INFORMATION Data consist of raw facts, such as customer names and addresses. Information is a collection of facts organized in such a way that it has more value beyond the facts themselves. For example, a database of customer names and purchases might provide information on a company's market demographics, sales trends, and customer loyalty/turnover. Turning data into information is a process or a set of logically related tasks performed to achieve a defined outcome. This process of defining relationships between various data requires knowledge. Knowledge is the body or rules, guidelines, and procedures used to select, organize, and manipulate data to make it suitable for specific tasks. Consequently, information can be considered data made more useful through the Pscnotes.com Page 275 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 application of knowledge. The collection of data, rules, procedures, and relationships that must be followed are contained in the knowledge base. CHARACTERISTICS OF VALUABLE INFORMATION. In order for information to be valuable it must have the following characteristics, as adapted from Ralph M. Stair's book, Principles of Information Systems: 1. Accurate. Accurate information is free from error. 2. Complete. Complete information contains all of the important facts. 3. Economical. Information should be relatively inexpensive to produce. 4. Flexible. Flexible information can be used for a variety of purposes, not just one. 5. Reliable. Reliable information is dependable information. 6. Relevant. Relevant information is important to the decision-maker. 7. Simple. Information should be simple to find and understand. 8. Timely. Timely information is readily available when needed. 9. Verifiable. Verifiable information can be checked to make sure it is accurate. DATA MANAGEMENT Data are organized in a hierarchy that begins with the smallest piece of data used by a computer—for purposes of this discussion, a single character such as a letter or number. Characters form fields such as names, telephone numbers, addresses, and purchases. A collection of fields makes up a record. A collection of records is referred to as a file. Integrated and related files make up a database. An entity is a class of people, objects, or places for which data are stored or collected. Examples include employees and customers. Consequently, data are stored as entities, such as an employee database and a customer database. An attribute is a characteristic of an entity. For example, the name of a customer is an attribute of a customer. A specific value of an attribute is referred to as a data item. That is, data items are found in fields. The traditional approach to data management consists of maintaining separate data files for each application. For example, an employee file would be maintained for payroll purposes, while an additional employee file might be maintained for newsletter purposes. One or more data files are Pscnotes.com Page 276 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 created for each application. However, duplicated files results in data redundancy. The problem with data redundancy is the possibility that updates are accomplished in one file but not in another, resulting in a lack of data integrity. Likewise, maintaining separate files is generally inefficient because the work of updating and managing the files is duplicated for each separate file that exists. To overcome potential problems with traditional data management, the database approach was developed. The database approach is such that multiple business applications access the same database. Consequently, file updates are not required of multiple files. Updates can be accomplished in the common database, thus improving data integrity and eliminating redundancy. The database approach provides the opportunity to share data, as well as information sources. Additional software is required to implement the database approach to data management. A database management system (DBMS) is needed. A DBMS consists of a group of programs that are used in an interface between a database and the user, or between the database and the application program. DATA ORGANIZATION. Data organization is critical to optimal data use. Consequently, it is important to organize data in such a manner as to reflect business operations and practices. As such, careful consideration should be given to content, access, logical structure, and physical organization. Content refers to what data are going to be collected. Access refers to the users that data are provided to when appropriate. Logical structure refers to how the data will be arranged. Physical structure refers to where the data will be located. One tool that database designers use to show the logical relationships among data is a data model, which is a map or diagram of entities and their relationships. Consequently, data modeling requires a thorough understanding of business practices and what kind of data and information is needed. DATABASE MODELS. The structure of the relationships in most databases follows one of three logical database models: hierarchical, network, and relational. A hierarchical database model is one in which the data are organized in a top-down or inverted tree-like structure. This type of model is best suited for Pscnotes.com Page 277 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 situations where the logical relationships between data can be properly represented with the one-parent-many-children approach. A network model is an extension of the hierarchical database model. The network model has an owner-member relationship in which a member may have many owners, in contrast to a one-to-many-relationship. A relational model describes data using a standard tabular format. All data elements are placed in two-dimensional tables called relations, which are the equivalent of files. Data inquiries and manipulations can be made via columns or rows given specific criteria. Network database models tend to offer more flexibility than hierarchical models. However, they are more difficult to develop and use because of relationship complexity. The relational database model offers the most flexibility, and was very popular during the early 2000s. DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS. As indicated previously, a database management system (DBMS) is a group of programs used as an interface between a database and an applications program. DBMSs are classified by the type of database model they support. A relational DBMS would follow the relational model, for example. The functions of a DBMS include data storage and retrieval, database modifications, data manipulation, and report generation. A data definition language (DDL) is a collection of instructions and commands used to define and describe data and data relationships in a particular database. File descriptions, area descriptions, record descriptions, and set descriptions are terms the DDL defines and uses. A data dictionary also is important to database management. This is a detailed description of the structure and intended content in the database. For example, a data dictionary might specify the maximum number of characters allowed in each type of field and whether the field content can include numbers, letters, or specially formatted content such as dates or currencies. Data dictionaries are used to provide a standard definition of terms and data elements, assist programmers in designing and writing programs, simplify database modifications, reduce data redundancy,increase data reliability, and decrease program development time. Pscnotes.com Page 278 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The choice of a particular DBMS typically is a function of several considerations. Economic cost considerations include software acquisition costs, maintenance costs, hardware acquisition costs, database creation and conversion costs, personnel costs, training costs, and operating costs. Most DBMS vendors are combining their products with text editors and browsers, report generators, listing utilities, communication software, data entry and display features, and graphical design tools. Consequently, those looking for a total design system have many choices. DATA WAREHOUSING. Data warehousing involves taking data from a main computer for analysis without slowing down the main computer. In this manner, data are stored in another database for analyzing trends and new relationships. Consequently, the data warehouse is not the live, active system, but it is updated daily or weekly. For example, Wal-Mart uses a very large database (VLDB) that is 4 trillion bytes (terabytes) in size. Smaller parts of this database could be warehoused for further analysis to avoid slowing down the VLDB. FUTURE TRENDS and BUSINESS DATA PROCESSING A private database is compiled from individual consumer or business customer names and addresses maintained by a company for use in its own marketing efforts. Such a database may have originated as a public database, but typically once the company begins adding or removing information it is considered a private database. By contrast, public databases are those names, addresses, and data that are complied for resale in the list rental market. This is publicly available data (i.e., any business can purchase it on the open market) rather than lists of specific customers or targets. However, a new trend is combining features of the two approaches. Cooperative databases are compiled by combining privately held response files of participating companies so that costs are shared. Many consider this to be a future trend, such that virtually all catalog marketers, for example, would use cooperative databases. Geographic Information Systems (GIS) are becoming a growing area of data management. GIS involves the combining demographic, Pscnotes.com Page 279 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 environmental, or other business data with geographic data. This can involve road networks and urban mapping, as well as consumer buying habits and how they relate to the local geography. Output is often presented in a visual data map that facilitates the discovery of new patterns and knowledge. Customer Resource Management (CRM) is another area where data process and data management is deeply involved. CRM is a set of methodologies and software applications for managing the customer relationship. CRM provides the opportunity for management, salespeople, marketers, and potentially even customers, to see sufficient detail regarding customer activities and contacts. This allows companies to provide other possible products or useful services, as well as other business options. Security of this information is of significant concern on both sides of the equation. File Management System Also referred to as simply a file system or filesystem. The system that an operating system or program uses to organize and keep track of files. For example, a hierarchical file system is one that uses directories to organize files into a tree structure. Although the operating system provides its own file management system, one can buy separate file management systems. These systems interact smoothly with the operating system but provide more features, such as improved backup proceduresand stricter file protection. Pscnotes.com Page 280 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Definition of Internet, search tools, web browsers, e-mail and search engines. IT applications: E-cards, E- shopping, E- commerce. INTERNET The Internet is a global network of billions of computers and other electronic devices. With the Internet, it's possible to access almost any information, communicate with anyone else in the world, and do much more. It's important to realize that the Internet is a global network of physical cables, which can include copper telephone wires, TV cables, and fiber optic cables. Even wireless connections like Wi-Fi and 3G/4G rely on these physical cables to access the Internet. Pscnotes.com Page 281 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 On visiting a website, the computer sends a request over these wires to a server. A server is where websites are stored, and it works a lot like computer's hard drive. Once the request arrives, the server retrieves the website and sends the correct data back to computer. The World Wide Web—usually called the Web for short—is a collection of different websites you can access through the Internet. A website is made up of related text, images, and other resources. Websites can resemble other forms of media—like newspaper articles or television programs—or they can be interactive in a way that's unique to computers. The purpose of a website can be almost anything: a news platform, an advertisement, an online library, a forum for sharing images, or an educational site. Web Browser is an application software that allows us to view and explore information on the web. In other words, a browser is a software program created as a simplified means to present and explore content on the World Wide Web. These pieces of content, including pictures, videos, and web pages, are connected using hyperlinks and classified with Uniform Recourse Identifiers (URLs). There have been many different web browsers that have come and gone over the years. The first, named WorldWideWeb (later changed to Nexus), was invented by Tim Berners-Lee in 1990. However, the first graphical browser and widely used browser that help bring popularity to the Internet was NCSA Mosaic. List of current Internet browsers Pscnotes.com Page 282 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Browser Vendor Internet Explorer Microsoft Google Chrome Google Mozilla Firefox Mozilla Netscape Navigator Netscape Communications Corp. Opera Opera Software Safari Apple Sea Monkey Mozilla Foundation K-meleon K-meleon Email Email is a service which allows us to send the message in electronic mode over the internet. It offers an efficient, inexpensive and real time mean of distributing information among people. E-Mail Address Each user of email is assigned a unique name for his email account. This name is known as E-mail address. Different users can send and receive messages according to the e-mail address. Pscnotes.com Page 283 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 E-mail is generally of the form username@domainname. For example, [email protected] is an e-mail address where webmaster is username and tutorialspoint.com is domain name. The username and the domain name are separated by @ (at) symbol. E-mail addresses are not case sensitive. Spaces are not allowed in e-mail address. E-mail Message Components E-mail message comprises of different components: E-mail Header, Greeting, Text, and Signature. E-mail Header The first five lines of an E-mail message is called E-mail header. The header part comprises of following fields: From Date To Subject CC BCC FROM The From field indicates the sender‟s address i.e. who sent the e-mail. DATE The Date field indicates the date when the e-mail was sent. Pscnotes.com Page 284 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 TO The To field indicates the recipient‟s address i.e. to whom the e-mail is sent. SUBJECT The Subject field indicates the purpose of e-mail. It should be precise and to the point. CC CC stands for Carbon copy. It includes those recipient addresses whom we want to keep informed but not exactly the intended recipient. BCC BCC stands for Black Carbon Copy. It is used when we do not want one or more of the recipients to know that someone else was copied on the message. Greeting Greeting is the opening of the actual message. Eg. Hi Sir or Hi Guys etc. Text It represents the actual content of the message. Signature This is the final part of an e-mail message. It includes Name of Sender, Address, and Contact Number. E-mail System E-mail system comprises of the following three components: Mailer Mail Server Mailbox Pscnotes.com Page 285 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Mailer It is also called mail program, mail application or mail client. It allows us to manage, read and compose e-mail. Mail Server The function of mail server is to receive, store and deliver the email. It is must for mail servers to be sunning all the time because if it crashes or is down, email can be lost. Mailboxes Mailbox is generally a folder that contains emails and information about them. E-mail Protocols are set of rules that help the client to properly transmit the information to or from the mail server. Here in this tutorial, we will discuss various protocols such as SMTP, POP, and IMAP. SMPTP SMTP stands for Simple Mail Transfer Protocol. It was first proposed in 1982. It is a standard protocol used for sending e-mail efficiently and reliably over the internet. Key Points: SMTP is application level protocol. SMTP is connection oriented protocol. SMTP is text based protocol. It handles exchange of messages between e-mail servers over TCP/IP network. Apart from transferring e-mail, SMPT also provides notification regarding incoming mail. Pscnotes.com Page 286 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 When you send e-mail, your e-mail client sends it to your e-mail server which further contacts the recipient mail server using SMTP client. These SMTP commands specify the sender‟s and receiver‟s e-mail address, along with the message to be send. The exchange of commands between servers is carried out without intervention of any user. In case, message cannot be delivered, an error report is sent to the sender which makes SMTP a reliable protocol. IMAP IMAP stands for Internet Mail Access Protocol. It was first proposed in 1986. There exist five versions of IMAP as follows: 1. Original IMAP 2. IMAP2 3. IMAP3 4. IMAP2bis 5. IMAP4 Key Points: IMAP allows the client program to manipulate the e-mail message on the server without downloading them on the local computer. The e-mail is hold and maintained by the remote server. It enables us to take any action such as downloading, delete the mail without reading the mail.It enables us to create, manipulate and delete remote message folders called mail boxes. IMAP enables the users to search the e-mails. Pscnotes.com Page 287 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 It allows concurrent access to multiple mailboxes on multiple mail servers. POP POP stands for Post Office Protocol. It is generally used to support a single client. There are several versions of POP but the POP 3 is the current standard. Key Points POP is an application layer internet standard protocol. Since POP supports offline access to the messages, thus requires less internet usage time. POP does not allow search facility. In order to access the messaged, it is necessary to download them. It allows only one mailbox to be created on server. It is not suitable for accessing non mail data. POP commands are generally abbreviated into codes of three or four letters. Eg. STAT. Comparison between POP and IMAP S.N. POP IMAP Generally used to support single Designed to handle multiple 1 client. clients. Messages are accessed online 2 Messages are accessed offline. although it also supports offline mode. 3 POP does not allow search It offers ability to search Pscnotes.com Page 288 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 facility. emails. All the messages have to be It allows selective transfer of 4 downloaded. messages to the client. Only one mailbox can be created Multiple mailboxes can be 5 on the server. created on the server. Not suitable for accessing non- Suitable for accessing non- 6 mail data. mail data i.e. attachment. POP commands are generally IMAP commands are not 7 abbreviated into codes of three or abbreviated, they are full. Eg. four letters. Eg. STAT. STATUS. It requires minimum use of server Clients are totally dependent 8 resources. on server. Mails once downloaded cannot Allows mails to be accessed 9 be accessed from some other from multiple locations. location. Users can view the headings The e-mails are not downloaded 10 and sender of e-mails and then automatically. decide to download. POP requires less internet usage IMAP requires more internet 10 time. usage time. Search Engine and Search Tools Pscnotes.com Page 289 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Search Engine refers to a huge database of internet resources such as web pages, newsgroups, programs, images etc. It helps to locate information on World Wide Web. User can search for any information by passing query in form of keywords or phrase. It then searches for relevant information in its database and return to the user. Search Engine Components Generally there are three basic components of a search engine as listed below: 1. Web Crawler 2. Database 3. Search Interfaces Web crawler It is also known as spider or bots. It is a software component that traverses the web to gather information. Database All the information on the web is stored in database. It consists of huge web resources. Search Interfaces This component is an interface between user and the database. It helps the user to search through the database. Search Engine Working Web crawler, database and the search interface are the major component of a search engine that actually makes search engine to work. Search Pscnotes.com Page 290 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 engines make use of Boolean expression AND, OR, NOT to restrict and widen the results of a search. Following are the steps that are performed by the search engine: The search engine looks for the keyword in the index for predefined database instead of going directly to the web to search for the keyword. It then uses software to search for the information in the database. This software component is known as web crawler. Once web crawler finds the pages, the search engine then shows the relevant web pages as a result. These retrieved web pages generally include title of page, size of text portion, first several sentences etc. These search criteria may vary from one search engine to the other. The retrieved information is ranked according to various factors such as frequency of keywords, relevancy of information, links etc. User can click on any of the search results to open it. Search Engine Processing Indexing Process Indexing process comprises of the following three tasks: Text acquisition Text transformation Index creation Text Acquisition It identifies and stores documents for indexing. Pscnotes.com Page 291 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Text Transformation It transforms document into index terms or features. Index Creation It takes index terms created by text transformations and create data structures to support fast searching. Query Process Query process comprises of the following three tasks: User interaction Ranking Evaluation User Interaction It supporst creation and refinement of user query and displays the results. Ranking It uses query and indexes to create ranked list of documents. Evaluation It monitors and measures the effectiveness and efficiency. It is done offline. Examples Following are the several search engines available today: Search Description Engine It was originally called BackRub. It is the most popular Google search engine globally. Bing It was launched in 2009 by Microsoft. It is the latest web-based search engine that also delivers Yahoo‟s Pscnotes.com Page 292 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 results. It was launched in 1996 and was originally known Ask as Ask Jeeves. It includes support for match, dictionary, and conversation question. It was launched by Digital Equipment Corporation in AltaVista 1995. Since 2003, it is powered by Yahoo technology. AOL.Search It is powered by Google. It is top 5 internet portal and 13th largest online property LYCOS according to Media Matrix. It is subsidiary of Amazon and used for providing website Alexa traffic information. Search Tools There are three basic types of search tools that most people use to find what they are looking for on the Web. Search Engines Subject Directories Meta Search Tools None of these search tools allow to search the entire Web; that would be an almost impossible task. However, one can use these Web search tools to scour different parts of the Web, obtain different types of information, and broaden the Web search horizons. Search the Web with Search Engines Search engines are large, spider(software programs) created databases of web pages that help searchers find specific information on any given Pscnotes.com Page 293 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 subject. When anyone type in a keyword or phrase and the search engine retrieves pages that correspond to the search query. Search results gathered from these search engines are not always relevant to the keywords entered since these engines are not intuitive and cannot infer dynamically what it is, one might be searching for (although results are getting better all the time). This is why it's important to learn how to search as efficiently as possible using such techniques as Boolean search, or basic Google search techniques. Interpretation of relevancy is different in each search engine. Many search engineshave included categories to direct users to more relevant sites based on these particular topics. Search the Web with Subject Directories Subject directories, in general, are smaller and selective that search engines. They use categories to focus the search, and their sites are arranged by categories, not just by keywords. Subject directories are handy for broad searches, as well as finding specific websites. Most subject directories' main purpose is to be informational, rather than commercial. A good example of a search directory is Yahoo, a combination search engine/search directory/search portal, or one of the original search directories, Open Directory or DMOZ for short. Search the Web with Metasearch Engines Metasearch engines get their search results from several search engines. Users will receive the best hits to their keywords from each search engine. Metasearch tools are a good place to start for very broad results but do not (usually) give the same quality results as using each search engine and directory. IT applications- E-Cards, E-Shopping, E-Commerce Pscnotes.com Page 294 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 E-Cards An electronic card (e-card) is a special occasion, greeting or post card created and customized within a website and sent through the Internet to the recipient. Customizations may include a wide variety of backgrounds and text fonts including some as cursive writing, graphic images, cartoon- style animations (proprietary to Adobe), video and sometimes even music. This term is also known as ecard, icard, i-card, digital postcard, cyber greeting card or digital greeting card. Virtual cards were first started by Judith Donath at MIT Media Lab in 1994 and were created by the website called The Electronic Postcard. Virtual card recipients are often sent an email with a link to a website where the card was created. Then the card may be viewed, played, copied, printed, etc. Such websites invariably include banner ads and others selling a variety of products. Some websites use virtual cards to market and draw attention to their other products and services, which may be their main product or service. The recipient is offered the opportunity to send their own customized cards to friends, family, etc. using their desktop machines, mobile devices and phones. Advantages of virtual cards include the ease of sending them to many recipients, being environmentally friendly compared to paper/hard copy cards and the versatile and highly customizable content. E-Shopping When you buy a product or a service over the internet, instead of going to a traditional brick-and-mortar store, it is called online shopping. Globally, an increasing number of people are buying over the Internet because it is more convenient. Online Products starting with groceries and greeting cards to cell phones and ringtones for the cell phones, everything can be purchased online. While most people Pscnotes.com Page 295 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 still find it convenient to buy their groceries from the neighbourhood shop, many people are purchasing rail and air tickets over the Internet. In addition, people and corporates as well, are also purchasing a variety of services online — such as a broking service or job search service. Brief History Online shopping became popular during the Internet boom in 1999-2000. Amazon.com, the online bookstore founded by Jeff Bezos, created history by becoming the first bookstore with a presence only on the Internet. Following the success of Amazon, many bookstores with a physical presence also created an online presence on the Internet. Later, portals such as Yahoo.com and MSN.com also started online shopping channels where people could buy more than just books. Closer home, portals such as Indiatimes.com and Rediff.com came up with similar options for the Indian consumer. Advantages of shopping online It is convenient, faster and sometimes also cheaper. For instance, rather than standing in a long queue and waiting for your turn to purchase a ticket, people are finding it simpler to log on to a website and buy it. In some instances, one may have to pay a premium for an online purchase but it is still preferred because the convenience factor is higher. Payment Although online players in India are coming up with innovative ways to make payments, credit cards are still the most widely accepted form of making payments over the Internet. Security of payment Security standards for online shopping are now well-established, so it is safe to pay online using your credit card. Your credit card details and other information are encrypted and sent over a secure layer over the Internet. Although no system is completely fraud-proof, the large number of people Pscnotes.com Page 296 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 going online bears testimony to the acceptance and safety of online shopping. Future scope Now a days, with more advanced technologies many things are about to come. Cheap internet and Mobile with widely avilable services as well as incresing Mobile apps, giving huge boost to online shopping. With Digital India Scheme and technology development, online shopping has been spread very fast in India. E Commerce E-commerce is a transaction of buying or selling online. Electronic commerce draws on technologies such as mobile commerce, electronic funds transfer, supply chain management, Internet marketing, online transaction processing, electronic data interchange (EDI), inventory management systems, and automated data collection systems. Examples of Ecommerce Online Shopping Buying and selling goods on the Internet is one of the most popular examples of ecommerce. Sellers create storefronts that are the online equivalents of retail outlets. Buyers browse and purchase products with mouse clicks. Though Amazon.com is not the pioneer of online shopping, it is arguably the most famous online shopping destination. Electronic Payments When you are buying goods online, there needs to be a mechanism to pay online too. That is where payment processors and payment gateways come into the picture. Electronic payments reduce the inefficiency associated with writing Pscnotes.com Page 297 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 and mailing checks. It also does away with many of the safety issues that arise due to payment made in currency notes. Online Auctions When you think online auction, you think eBay. Physical auctions predate online auctions, but the Internet made auctions accessible to a large number of buyers and sellers. Online auctions are an efficient mechanism for price discovery. Many buyers find the auction shopping mechanism much interesting than regular storefront shopping. Internet Banking Today it is possible for you to perform the entire gamut of banking operations without visiting a physical bank branch. Interfacing of websites with bank accounts, and by extension credit cards, was the biggest driver of ecommerce. Online Ticketing Air tickets, movie tickets, train tickets, play tickets, tickets to sporting events, and just about any kind of tickets can be booked online. Online ticketing does away with the need to queue up at ticket counters. Types of Ecommerce Ecommerce can be classified based on the type of participants in the transaction: Business to Business (B2B) B2B ecommerce transactions are those where both the transacting parties are businesses, e.g., manufacturers, traders, retailers and the like. Business to Consumer (B2C) Pscnotes.com Page 298 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 When businesses sell electronically to end-consumers, it is called B2C ecommerce. Consumer to Consumer (C2C) Some of the earliest transactions in the global economic system involved barter -- a type of C2C transaction. But C2C transactions were virtually non-existent in recent times until the advent of ecommerce. Auction sites are a good example of C2C ecommerce. Benefits of Ecommerce The primary benefits of ecommerce revolve around the fact that it eliminates limitations of time and geographical distance. In the process, ecommerce usually streamlines operations and lowers costs. Specialized Forms of Ecommerce On some platforms, ecommerce has shown the promise of explosive growth. Two such examples are: M Commerce Mcommerce is short for "mobile commerce." The rapid penetration of mobile devices with Internet access has opened new avenues of ecommerce for retailers. F Commerce Fcommerce is short for "Facebook commerce." The immense popularity of Facebook provides a captive audience to transact business. Basic element of Communication systems, data transmission mode, transmission media, network topologies, network types, communication protocols, network security mechanism. Pscnotes.com Page 299 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Elements of a Communication System Elements of a communication system The above figure depicts the elements of a communication system. There are three essential parts of any communication system, the transmitter, transmission channel, and receiver. Each parts plays a particular role in signal transmission, as follows: The transmitter processes the input signal to produce a suitable transmitted signal suited to the characteristics of the transmission channel. Signal processing for transmissions almost always involves modulation and may also include coding. The transmission channel is the electrical medium that bridges the distance from source to destination. It may be a pair of wires, a coaxial cable, or a radio wave or laser beam. Every channel introduces some amount of transmission loss or attenuation. So, the signal power progressively decreases with increasing distance. The receiver operates on the output signal from the channel in preparation for delivery to the transducer at the destination. Receiver operations include amplification to compensate for transmission loss. These also include demodulation and decoding to reverse the signal procession performed at the transmitter. Filtering is another important function at the receiver. The figure represents one-way or simplex (SX) transmission. Two way communication of course requires a transmitter and receiver at each end. A Pscnotes.com Page 300 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 full-duplex (FDX) system has a channel that allows simultaneous transmission in both directions. A half-duplex (HDX) system allows transmission in either direction but not at the same time. Transmission Modes in Computer Networks Transmission mode means transferring of data between two devices. It is also called communication mode. These modes direct the direction of flow of information. There are three types of transmission mode. They are : Simplex Mode Half duplex Mode Full duplex Mode SIMPLEX Mode In this type of transmission mode data can be sent only through one direction i.e. communication is unidirectional. We cannot send a message back to the sender. Unidirectional communication is done in Simplex Systems. Examples of simplex Mode is loudspeaker, television broadcasting, television and remote, keyboard and monitor etc. HALF DUPLEX Mode Pscnotes.com Page 301 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 In half duplex system we can send data in both directions but it is done one at a time that is when the sender is sending the data then at that time we can‟t send the sender our message. The data is sent in one direction. Example of half duplex is a walkie- talkie in which message is sent one at a time and messages are sent in both the directions. FULL DUPLEX Mode In full duplex system we can send data in both directions as it is bidirectional. Data can be sent in both directions simultaneously. We can send as well as we receive the data. Example of Full Duplex is a Telephone Network in which there is communication between two persons by a telephone line, through which both can talk and listen at the same time. In full duplex system there can be two lines one for sending the data and the other for receiving data. Pscnotes.com Page 302 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 TRANSMISSION MEDIA Factors to be considered while choosing Transmission Medium Transmission Rate Cost and Ease of Installation Resistance to Environmental Conditions Distances Coaxial Cable Coaxial is called by this name because it contains two conductors that are parallel to each other. Copper is used in this as centre conductor which can be a solid wire or a standard one. It is surrounded by PVC installation, a sheath which is encased in an outer conductor of metal foil, barid or both. Outer metallic wrapping is used as a shield against noise and as the second conductor which completes the circuit. The outer conductor is also encased in an insulating sheath. The outermost part is the plastic cover which protects the whole cable Fiber Optic Cable Pscnotes.com Page 303 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 These are similar to coaxial cable. It uses electric signals to transmit data. At the centre is the glass core through which light propagates. In multimode fibres, the core is 50microns, and In single mode fibres, the thickness is 8 to 10 microns. The core in fiber optic cable is surrounded by glass cladding with lower index of refraction as compared to core to keep all the light in core. This is covered with a thin plastic jacket to protect the cladding. The fibers are grouped together in bundles protected by an outer shield. Fiber optic cable has bandwidth more than 2 gbps (Gigabytes per Second) Unguided or wireless media sends the data through air (or water), which is available to anyone who has a device capable of receiving them. Types of unguided/ unbounded media are discussed below : Radio Transmission MicroWave Transmission Radio Transmission Its frequency is between 10 kHz to 1GHz. It is simple to install and has high attenuation. These waves are used for multicast communications. Types of Propogation Radio Transmission utilizes different types of propogation : Troposphere : The lowest portion of earth's atmosphere extending outward approximately 30 miles from the earth's surface. Clouds, jet planes, wind is found here. Ionosphere : The layer of the atmosphere above troposphere, but below space. Contains electrically charged particles. Microwave Transmission It travels at high frequency than the radio waves. It requires the sender to be inside of the receiver. It operates in a system with a low gigahertz range. It is mostly used for unicast communication. Pscnotes.com Page 304 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 There are 2 types of Microwave Transmission : 1. Terrestrial Microwave 2. Satellite Microwave Terrestrial Microwave For increasing the distance served by terrestrial microwave, repeaters can be installed with each antenna .The signal received by an antenna can be converted into transmittable form and relayed to next antenna as shown in below figure. It is an example of telephone systems all over the world Satellite Microwave This is a microwave relay station which is placed in outer space. The satellites are launched either by rockets or space shuttles carry them. These are positioned 36000KM above the equator with an orbit speed that exactly matches the rotation speed of the earth. As the satellite is positioned in a geo-synchronous orbit, it is stationery relative to earth and always stays over the same point on the ground. This is usually done to allow ground stations to aim antenna at a fixed point in the sky. Pscnotes.com Page 305 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Pscnotes.com Page 306 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 NETWORK TOPOLOGIES Network Topology refers to the layout of a network and how different nodes in a network are connected to each other and how they communicate. Topologies are either physical (the physical layout of devices on a network) or logical (the way that the signals act on the network media, or the way that the data passes through the network from one device to the next). Mesh Topology In a mesh network, devices are connected with many redundant interconnections between network nodes. In a true mesh topology every node has a connection to every other node in the network. There are two types of mesh topologies: Full mesh topology: occurs when every node has a circuit connecting it to every other node in a network. Full mesh is very expensive to implement but yields the greatest amount of redundancy, so in the event that one of those nodes fails, network traffic can be directed to any of the other nodes. Full mesh is usually reserved for backbone networks. Pscnotes.com Page 307 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Partial mesh topology: is less expensive to implement and yields less redundancy than full mesh topology. With partial mesh, some nodes are organized in a full mesh scheme but others are only connected to one or two in the network. Partial mesh topology is commonly found in peripheral networks connected to a full meshed backbone. 2. Star Topology In a star network devices are connected to a central computer, called a hub. Nodes communicate across the network by passing data through the hub. Main Advantage: In a star network, one malfunctioning node doesn't affect the rest of the network. Main Disadvantage: If the central computer fails, the entire network becomes unusable. Pscnotes.com Page 308 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 3. Bus Topology In networking a bus is the central cable -- the main wire -- that connects all devices on a local-area network (LAN). It is also called the backbone. This is often used to describe the main network connections composing the Internet. Bus networks are relatively inexpensive and easy to install for small networks. Ethernet systems use a bus topology. Main Advantage: It's easy to connect a computer or device and typically it requires less cable than a star topology. Main Disadvantage: The entire network shuts down if there is a break in the main wire and it can be difficult to identify the problem if the network shuts down. 4. Ring Topology Ring Topology: A local-area network (LAN) whose topology is a ring. That is, all of the nodes are connected in a closed loop. Messages travel around the ring, with each node reading those messages addressed to it. Main Advantage: One main advantage to a ring network is that it can span larger distances than other types of networks, such as bus networks, because each node regenerates messages as they pass through it. Pscnotes.com Page 309 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 5. Tree Topology This is a "hybrid" topology that combines characteristics of linear bus and star topologies. In a tree network, groups of star-configured networks are connected to a linear bus backbone cable. Main Advantage: A Tree topology is a good choice for large computer networks as the tree topology "divides" the whole network into parts that are more easily manageable. Main Disadvantage: The entire network depends on a central hub and a failure of the central hub can cripple the whole network. NETWORK TYPES Pscnotes.com Page 310 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Pscnotes.com Page 311 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Local Area Network (LAN) It is also called LAN and designed for small physical areas such as an office, group of buildings or a factory. LANs are used widely as it is easy to design and to troubleshoot. Personal computers and workstations are connected to each other through LANs. We can use different types of topologies through LAN, these are Star, Ring, Bus, Tree etc. LAN can be a simple network like connecting two computers, to share files and network among each other while it can also be as complex as interconnecting an entire building. LAN networks are also widely used to share resources like printers, shared hard-drive etc. Pscnotes.com Page 312 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Applications of LAN One of the computer in a network can become a server serving all the remaining computers called clients. Software can be stored on the server and it can be used by the remaining clients. Connecting Locally all the workstations in a building to let them communicate with each other locally without any internet access. Sharing common resources like printers etc are some common applications of LAN. Metropolitan Area Network (MAN) It is basically a bigger version of LAN. It is also called MAN and uses the similar technology as LAN. It is designed to extend over the entire city. It can be means to connecting a number of LANs into a larger network or it can be a single cable. It is mainly hold and operated by single private company or a public company. Pscnotes.com Page 313 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Pscnotes.com Page 314 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Wide Area Network (WAN) It is also called WAN. WAN can be private or it can be public leased network. It is used for the network that covers large distance such as cover states of a country. It is not easy to design and maintain. Communication medium used by WAN are PSTN or Satellite links. WAN operates on low data rates. Pscnotes.com Page 315 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Wireless Network It is the fastest growing segment of computer. They are becoming very important in our daily life because wind connections are not possible in cars or aeroplane. We can access Internet at any place avoiding wire related troubles.. These can be used also when the telephone systems gets destroyed due to some calamity/disaster. WANs are really important now- a-days. Pscnotes.com Page 316 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Inter Network When we connect two or more networks then they are called internetwork or internet. We can join two or more individual networks to form an internetwork through devices like routers gateways or bridges. Pscnotes.com Page 317 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL Communication protocols are formal descriptions of digital message formats and rules. They are required to exchange messages in or between computing systems and are required in telecommunications. Communications protocols cover authentication, error detection and correction, and signaling. They can also describe the syntax, semantics, and synchronization of analog and digital communications. Communications protocols are implemented in hardware and software. There are thousands of communications protocols that are used everywhere in analog and digital communications. Computer networks cannot exist without them. Communications devices have to agree on many physical aspects of the data to be exchanged before successful transmission can take place. Rules defining transmissions are called protocols. There are many properties of a transmission that a protocol can define. Common ones include: packet size, transmission speed, error correction types, handshaking and synchronization techniques, address mapping, acknowledgement processes, flow control, packet sequence controls, routing, and address formatting Pscnotes.com Page 318 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Popular protocols include: File Transfer Protocol (FTP), TCP/IP, User Datagram Protocol (UDP), Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP), Post Office Protocol (POP3), Internet Message Access Protocol (IMAP), Simple Mail Transfer Protocol (SMTP). Application Layer Protocol - HTTP and IRC HTTP The HyperText Transfer Protocol (HTTP) is the most common protocol in use on the internet. The protocol‟s job is to transfer HyperText (such as HTML) from a server to computer. HTTP functions as a simple conversation between client and server. IRC Internet Relay Chat (IRC) is a system that lets someone to transfer messages in the form of text. It‟s essentially a chat protocol. The system uses a client-server model. Clients are chat programs installed on a user‟s computer that connect to a central server. The clients communicate the message to the central server which in turn relays that to other clients. The protocol was originally designed for group communication in a discussion forum, called channels. IRC also supports one-to-one communication via private messages. It is also capable of file and data transfer too. Pscnotes.com Page 319 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Transport Layer Protocol – TCP/IP TCP (The Transmission Control Protocol) is one of the most important protocols on the internet. It breaks large messages up into packets. During the late 1970's and into the 80's, the U.S. Department of Defense experienced numerous technical failures when attempting to connect multiple computers (nodes) and multiple networks with the intent of sharing data and information. In 1981, the government was successful following the implementation of the Transmission Control Protocol (TCP) and the Internet Protocol (IP) technologies. in bringing the Internet alive with these combined (TCP/IP) technologies, project engineers and researchers were able to meet the needs of most users by enabling online capabilities to perform file transfers, e-mail, file sharing and remote log on functions. IP : The Internet Protocol is responsible for moving data, in the form of electronic packets, along the internet network until the packets are received at the intended destination or IP address. Pscnotes.com Page 320 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 TCP: The Transmission Control Protocol is responsible for ensuring safe delivery of each data packet from the sending node to the receiving node within a network. In addition, because data packets can be misdirected or damaged during transmission, the TCP detects these errors as they occur during the transmission and automatically retransmits each questionable data packet. As the Internet's protocol suite, TCP/IP consists of five protocol layers. These protocol layers are related to the seven layers comprising the Open System Interconnection (OSI) network architecture. Reference Models in Communication Networks The most important reference models are : OSI reference model. TCP/IP reference model. OSI reference Model Pscnotes.com Page 321 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 There are many users who use computer network and are located all over the world. To ensure national and worldwide data communication ISO (ISO stands for International Organization of Standardization.) developed this model. This is called a model for open system interconnection (OSI) and is normally called as OSI model.OSI model architecture consists of seven layers. It defines seven layers or levels in a complete communication system. Pscnotes.com Page 322 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Pscnotes.com Page 323 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 TCP/IP reference model TCP/IP is transmission control protocol and internet protocol. Protocols are set of rules which govern every possible communication over the internet. These protocols describe the movement of data between the host computers or internet and offers simple naming and addressing schemes. Pscnotes.com Page 324 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 NETWORK SECURITY MECHANISM The process to implement the security properties is known as security mechanism. The various type of mechanism on the basis of properties is as follows: Attack Prevention Attack Avoidance Attack Detection Attack Prevention: can be defined as a series of security mechanism implemented to prevent or defend against various types of attack before they can actually reach and affect the target systems. An important mechanism is access control which is defined as the process of limiting the access to the resources of the Information System. Access can be implemented at different levels such as the operating system the network and the application layer. Pscnotes.com Page 325 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 A firewall is also an important access control system that is implemented at the network layer the concept behind firewall is to separate the trusted network from the entrusted network known as internet. The firewall prevents the attack from the outside world against the machines inside the internal network by preventing connections attempts from the unauthorized entities located outside. Attack Avoidance: The expansion of connectivity of computers makes the need of protecting the message and message from tampering reading important. This is the technique in which the information is modified in a way that makes is unusable for the attacker. This is performed under the assumption that the attacker may have access to the subject system/information. The sender preprocess the information before it is send through the unsecured system and the same is again post processed on the receiver end systems. This encryption and decryption is perfumed by cryptography mechanism, they are further divided in the following forms: Secret Key Cryptography Public Key Cryptography Hash Functions Pscnotes.com Page 326 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Attack Detection: In this mechanism it is assumed that the attacker is able to bypass the installed security measures to access the desired target/information. When such incidents happens attack detection takes the responsibility to report someone that something went wrong somewhere in the system. Attack detection is not an applicable mechanism instead of that it‟s a check/measure which will make sure that if anything happened badly in the system then someone should be notified. Software and application of PC software packages: Software definition, Type of software and its Knowledge of Word processing, Spreadsheets and Power point presentation software packages Software is a set of programs, which is designed to perform a well-defined function. A program is a sequence of instructions written to solve a particular problem. There are two types of software − System Software Application Software System Software Pscnotes.com Page 327 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 The system software is a collection of programs designed to operate, control, and extend the processing capabilities of the computer itself. System software is generally prepared by the computer manufacturers. These software products comprise of programs written in low-level languages, which interact with the hardware at a very basic level. System software serves as the interface between the hardware and the end users. Some examples of system software are Operating System, Compilers, Interpreter, Assemblers, etc. Application Software Application software products are designed to satisfy a particular need of a particular environment. All software applications prepared in the computer lab can come under the category of Application software. Application software may consist of a single program, such as Microsoft's notepad for writing and editing a simple text. It may also consist of a collection of programs, often called a software package, which work together to accomplish a task, such as a spreadsheet package. Examples of Application software are the following − Payroll Software Student Record Software Inventory Management Software Income Tax Software Railways Reservation Software Microsoft Office Suite Software Microsoft Word Microsoft Excel Microsoft PowerPoint Word Processing, Spread sheet and Power presentation WORD PROCESSING A word processor is a software program that is used to create a document, store it electronically, display it on a screen, modify it using commands and Pscnotes.com Page 328 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 characters, and print it on a printer. It also processes paragraph indentation, margin size, font type, font size, font color, and spacing within the document being created. Word processors have replaced typewriters since they allow the user to make a change anywhere in the document without having to retype the entire page. Word processors also come equipped with "spell-check" functions eliminating the need for multiple editors and provide an immediate tool for grammatical correction. Some common word processors include Microsoft Word, AbiWord, Word Perfect, and Open Office. Three basic functions lay the foundation for most of the customization that is needed to create many word documents. Character Formatting Character formatting changes the appearance of individual characters and relates to the size, font, color, and overall style of the letters or numbers being used. Character formatting also involves underlining, italicizing, and making bold those characters being used. This is great for making a word stand out or for underlining book titles. Paragraph Formatting Paragraph formatting adjusts the spacing, alignment, and indentation of the paragraphs being formed. Spacing refers to the amount of lines left blank in between the lines being processed. A good example of this is double- spacing which is commonly used in an educational setting where a student has to write a paper for a specific instructor. Commonly double-spacing is used so that the instructor can make corrections to the document without having to mark over the actual words on the paper. Alignment refers to the way the paragraph is positioned in regards to the left and right margins. A left alignment is most commonly used when creating a word document and this setting aligns the words being formed to be flush with the left margin. A center alignment is usually used for titling a paper. Page Formatting Page formatting refers to the width of the margins, the size of the paper being used, and the orientation of the page. The standard margin is 1.25 inches on both the left and right but these can be customized to suit need and preference. The paper size options reflect what can be used in the printer, and the orientation indicates whether the document will use the traditional or landscape positioning on that paper. Traditional orientation is Pscnotes.com Page 329 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 8.5 inches wide by 11 inches tall whereas landscape is the exact opposite at 11 inches wide by 8.5 inches tall. Word processing tools Some of the basic tools that are employed in word processing programs that help to make the application more user friendly are tables, graphics, and templates. These tools allow for minimal effort and excellent results when adding features like these to a word document. Tables Tables are used for organizing information and are composed of rows and columns in which data is placed. This is great for comparing and contrasting information as it's condensed and presented in a straight forward fashion. Tables can also be used for laying out entire documents, such as a resume, where information is sectioned off from one another. In this example, the entire report is formulated to a table instead of a small section as mentioned earlier. Graphics Graphics are pictures, drawings, clip art, or other images that can be inserted into a document from other programs or from stored data on a computer. This makes for easy illustrations where a picture, or pictures, would suffice better than words or tables to highlight a point. Graphics tools also allow the user to manipulate the images that have been imported by changing the color, contrast, brightness, and size of the image, among other things. The customization process of these images in a word processor provide for an easy and quick avenue of explanation concerning the topics at hand. Templates Another useful tool are Templates. These are preprogrammed arrangements of ideas and/or illustrations that are known to serve a purpose and are already organized for the user to interact with. Most often this means "filling in the blanks" and some common templates that should Pscnotes.com Page 330 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 be recognized are resumes, business cards, identification cards, fax cover sheets, memos, invoices, and newsletters SPREADSHEETS A spreadsheet is a group of values and other data organized into rows and columns similar to the ruled paper worksheets traditionally used by bookkeepers and accountants." The spreadsheet software is mandatory to create computerized spreadsheets. Microsoft Excel is a form of a spreadsheet. There are many terms one must have to know to create a spreadsheet. A worksheet is the single spreadsheet document. A workbook allows multiple worksheets to be saved together in a single spreadsheet file. Worksheets are divided into rows and columns. The intersection of a row is called a cell. One must enter content into the active cell, or current cell; it has a border around it to make it be easily identified. Data is entered directly into worksheet cells by clicking a cell to make it the active cell. Labels, constant values, formulas, and functions are the data that is entered into a cell. Before one enters a formula or function into a cell, one must begin with some type of mathematical symbol, usually the equal sign = Spreadsheets are used to organize and calculate data. There is a maximum number of rows and columns in a spreadsheet which varies depending on the version of software you have. It is essential to know how to use spreadsheets for school, work, sports, or anything that requires data! Tables, graphics, and templates are all available to a user with application software, such as Microsoft Word, Microsoft Excel, and PowerPoint. Tables are ways a user can organize data and information at their convenience. According to Microsoft Word, there are now many different available options for users who are looking for various kinds of tables. These different options include the following: the Graphic Grid, Insert Table, Draw Table, insert a new or existing Excel Spreadsheet table, and Quick Tables. The concept of using tables for data input is relatively simple. In order for a user to insert a table, the user must first open Microsoft Word. Once they have done this, they must click the "table" button to customize the table to achieve their needs. The overall format for a table consists of a large (or small) grid that can be altered by the amount of information the user has, ex. four columns five rows. Next, the user must insert the table into the word document by selecting "insert table" from the dropdown menu. Pscnotes.com Page 331 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Microsoft Excel contains pivot tables that are tables that include data from a spreadsheet with columns and rows that can be specifically selected. Graphics in Microsoft Word are pictures, or clip art that are able to be inserted into a Microsoft Word document, Excel Spreadsheet, PowerPoint slide, or any other Office application. the most common graphic used in Excel is graphs. You can create graphs based on data taken from your spreadsheet. Graphics are inserted into these Office Applications to enhance the information presented in a Word Document, Excel worksheet, or PowerPoint slide. A user can insert their own picture through their office documents; add clip art, shapes, SmartArt, screenshot, or Word Art. Templates are pre-constructed document layouts whose primary use is to assist a user in creating a specific type of document in a convenient amount of time. The different options of templates vary, but a few of the following are common ones used every day: agendas, brochures, calendars, flyers, fax covers, and many more. Templates are used to save a user time, and confusion in creating their document. Using of Spreadsheet Chart A chart can be created as its own object or embedded within the sheet itself. This is helpful when a user needs to analyze data or represent changing data. Some form of charts are: lines graphs, scatter plot charts, bar charts, Venn diagram charts, and the list goes on. Function A function is a pre-programmed mathematical formula to allow the user to make calculations based on the data input. The functions under spreadsheets are there to perform a simple calculation by using a certain value, called arguments. There are many different reasons to have functions on spreadsheets. One would be for arithmetic functions to process numerical data. The next would be statistical functions that use analysis tools and averaging tools. This would be useful for finding the average of the numbers in a certain row/column on a spreadsheet. The next function is date that processes and converts dates. This function could be used to put the sequential dates in order on the spreadsheet. Formulas Pscnotes.com Page 332 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 A formula identifies the calculation needed to place the result in the cell it is contained within. This means a cell has two display components; the formula itself and the resulting value. Typically, a formula consists of five expressions: value, references, arithmetic operations, relation operations, and functions. By using these expressions, formulas can help to make tables, solve math problems, calculate a mortgage, figure out accounting tasks, and many other business-related tasks that use to be done tediously on paper Cell Referencing Cell referencing refers to the ability to utilize a cell or range of cells in a spreadsheet and is commonly used to create formulas to calculate data. Formulas can retrieve data from one cell in the worksheet, different areas of the worksheet, or different cells throughout an entire workbook. Pivot Tables One the most powerful features available in the Microsoft Office spreadsheet program Excel, is pivot tables. Pivot tables allow you to manipulate large amounts of raw data. It makes it easy to analyze the data in different ways, with a simple click and drag. Vast quantities of data can be summarized in a variety of ways. Calculations can be performed by row or column. Data can be filtered or sorted automatically by any or all of the fields. Excel can even recommend a basic layout of a pivot table based on the type of data selected. POWERPOINT Powerpoint is a Microsoft Office software used to present information and work as a visual aide. Powerpoint make it easy to organize and present information in a visually appealing way such as charts, pictures, tables, video clips, and sounds. Various Designs and color themes come are built in the software and ready to use. The slides themselves come with several options of pre-loaded layouts, using features such as bullet points, pictures, captions, and titles - These are easy to drag and drop to make rearranging very easy. The idea of a digital visual is to help a presenter engage their audience and display their ideas in a more simple form. One feature that comes in handy is the ability to print the slides so either the presenter or audience can be informed ahead of time of what to expect. Powerpoint also Pscnotes.com Page 333 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 has a notes feature in which you can input notes you may need for your presentation. The notes feature also allows you to print out the notes page with the slide show on it which is known as notes view. You can also adjust the size of the slide on the notes view so that all of your notes fit on the page and looks presentable. If all of your notes do not fit on the notes page provided, it will spill over to the next page. If you know their is a lot of wording, you can make a duplicate slide and hide it in the presentation, so you will have more room for your notes! Teachers, employers, and computer users all over the world have now become accustomed to using PowerPoint as their “go-to” visual aide. The image on the right shows a presenter using a powerpoint as a visual aide. The PowerPoint presentation graphics program provides the user with several assortment tools and operations for creating and editing slides. With those tools, one is able to add new or delete old slides that are previewed in the slide thumbnail tab area, usually found on the left side of the screen. One is also able to switch to the slide outline tab, which contains only the title and the main text included in the slide. If desired, using the Insert tab, the user can perform additional operations like exporting images, along with adding formatted tables, shapes, symbols, charts, and much more to better express their message. Additionally, to customize the PowerPoint to make it even more dynamic and presentable, text can be animated, and a unique transition can be added to the slides. With animation, text can be set to appear in a specific way in the slide during a slide show. Tons of special effects are provided for the user, including animations to make the text to fly, dissolve, fly, float, or bounce in. Similarly, one is also able to apply special effects to specific slides to transition from one slide to another in a specific manner. Additionally, Microsoft PowerPoint allows recorded narration to be played back as the slideshow is being presented, along with speaker notes. Furthermore, most presentation graphics programs also allow the user to print those speaker notes for the targeted audience‟s convenience. Pscnotes.com Page 334 UPPSC Mains Paper III Updated 2019 Pscnotes.com Page 335